final environmental imapct assessment reportenvironmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/eia/... ·...

FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL

IMAPCT ASSESSMENT REPORT

For

Proposed integrated steel and Captive Power

Plant at 405/3, 406, 407 Village- Dhamadka,

Bhuj - Bhachau road, Ta- Anjar, Dist.: Kutch,

Gujarat.

M/s Jay Bharat Steel Corporation

Environmental Consultant:

Anacon Laboratories Pvt. Ltd.

RecognisedbyMoEF (GOI) Notifn. No. D.L.33004/99 Dt.24.10.2007 NABL T-1550 (Chemical), T-1826 (Biological), T-2344 (Mechanical) dt.04/10/2012 valid up to 03.10.2014

Accredited under the QCI-NABET Scheme for EIA Consultant BIS vide No.CL/CQAPD/OSL(7124116) dt.16.12.2011

Certified by ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001:2004, ISO 18001:2007 Head Office: 60, Bajiprabhu Nagar, Nagpur-440 033, MS

Lab. : FP-34, 35, Food Park, MIDC, Butibori, Nagpur – 441122 Ph.: (0712) 2242077, 9373287475 Fax: (0712) 2242077

Email: [email protected] , [email protected] [email protected]

Website: www.anaconlaboratories.com ,

OCTOBER 2013

M/ s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation.

The report has been prepared inline with the prescribed TOR issued vide letter No. F. No. J-11011/349/2012-IA II (I) dated 25 April 2013 by MoEF, EAC, New Delhi.

This report has been prepared by Anacon Laboratories Private Limited with all reasonable skill, care and diligence within the terms of the contract with the client, incorporating our General Terms and Conditions of Business and taking account of the resources devoted to it by agreement with the client.

For and on behalf of ANACON LABS Limited

Approved by : Dr. D. G. Garway

Signed :

Position : Head of organization

Date : 2013

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

FOR

Proposed Integrated steel and Captive Power Plant at 405/3,406,407 Village-Dhamadka, Bhuj - Bhachau road,

Taluka- Anjar Dist; Kutch, Gujarat.

Declaration by Experts contributing to the Environmental Impact Assessment for Draft EIA for the Proposed integrated steel and Captive Power unit at 405/3,406,407 Village‐Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau road, Ta‐ Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat.

I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA.

EIA Coordinator: Dr. D.G. Garway Name:

Signature & Date:

Period of involvement: 01/09/2012 to 31‐10‐2013 Contact information:

Functional Area Experts:

S. No.

Functional Areas

Name of the expert/s Involvement

(Period & Task**) Signature & Date

1 SHW* Dr. D. G. Garway EIA Co‐ordinator

Identification & Assessment of Impacts, Suggestion Mitigation Measures

2 WP & AQ Dr. C. Mary Sukanya Identification & Assessment of Impacts, Suggestion Mitigation Measures

3 AP* Dr. Mrs. S. D. Garway Identification & Assessment of Impacts, Suggestion Mitigation Measures

4 SE* Mr. Rajendra Korde Identification & Assessment of Impacts, Suggestion Mitigation Measures

5 LU* Mr. G.Krishnamoorthy Identification & Assessment of Impacts, Suggestion Mitigation Measures

6 GEO Mr. S.V. Kothe Identification & Assessment of Impacts, Suggestion Mitigation Measures

7 HG Mr.S.V.Kothe Identification & Assessment of Impacts, Suggestion Mitigation Measures

6 EB* Mr. Shrikant Vyawhare Identification & Assessment of Impacts, Suggestion Mitigation Measures

7 RH* Mr. A. A. Adwadkar Identification & Assessment of Impacts, Suggestion Mitigation Measures

*Please attach additional sheet if required Declaration by the Head of the Accredited Consultant Organization I, Dr. D. G. Garway, hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared for Environmental Impact Assessment for Proposed integrated steel and Captive Power unit at 405/3,406,407 Village‐Dhamdaka, Bhujbhachau road, Ta‐ Anjar Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. I also confirm that I shall be fully accountable for any misleading information mentioned in this statement.

Signature:

Name: Dr. D. G. Garway Designation: Managing Director Name of the EIA Consultant Organization: Anacon Laboratories Pvt. Ltd. NABET Certificate No. & Issue Date: 09th November 2012

S. No. Functional Area Code Complete name of the Functional Areas

1 SHW Solid Waste and Hazardous Waste Management 2 WP Water Pollution Prevention, Control & Prediction of Impacts 3 AQ Meteorology, Air Quality Modelling & Prediction 4 AP Air Pollution Prevention, Monitoring & Control 5 SE Socio‐Economics 6 LU Land Use 7 GEO Geology 8 HG Hydrology, Ground Water & Water Conservation 9 EB Ecology and Biodiversity 10 RH Risk Assessment & Hazard Management

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. ES‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1.1 ABOUT PROJECT

M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation is a proposed unit of entrepreneurs engaged in versatile

business activities like Solar power plant, mineral water plant in addition to integrated iron &

steel. The company has established a unit at Survey no. 405/3,406,407, village Dhamadka, Bhuj

‐ Bhachau Road, Ta: Anjar, Kutch, Gujarat. For the existing ongoing activities, the company has

received NOC from GPCB for manufacturing of steel ingots and billets as per NOC Order No:

AWH‐42263 dated 9.6.2011, valid up to 2.3.16.

Looking at the market trend and to meet the requirement of the client, the company intends to

expand integrated iron & steel plant and install new power plant. The total capital cost of this

proposed project would be around Rs. 90 Cr.

The key highlights of proposed project are tabulated below.

TABLE 1.1 HIGHLIGHT OF PROPOSED PROJECT

Sr. No Particulars Details 1 Name and location of project M/s. Jay Bharat Steel corporation

Village‐Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau road, Ta‐Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat

2 Details of Applicant M/s. Jay Bharat Steel corporation 3 I. Address: Postal

II. Email III. Phone/Fax

1. M/s. Jay Bharat Steel corporation 202, Floor Asopalav Arcade, Near G. G. Traders, Sector 9A, Plot No 4, Tagore Road, B/H SBI, Gandhidham‐370201 Email:[email protected] Mob: 9879594724

2. M/s. Jay Bharat Steel corporation Survey No: 405/3, , 406, 407, Village‐Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau road, Ta‐Anjar , Dist; Kutch, Gujarat.

Tele: 02837‐285911, Fax‐ 023837‐285910 4 Year of commissioning After getting EC. (i.e. 2014) 5 Unit Situated at Survey No: 405/3, , 406, 407,

Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau road, Ta‐Anjar Dist; Kutch, Gujarat.

6 Nature of Project Proposed project 7 Is land product or to be procured for new Land already procured



project or for expansion? 8 Screening Category (as per EIA notification dt

14 Sep 2006)and proposed terms of reference (ToR)

Category 3(a); A

9 Total land area For Existing Survey No. 407; area is 21690.98sq m. and for Proposed Survey No 405/3, 406 area is 50504.38 sq m. Total land area shall be 72195.36 sq. m.

10 Cost of project Rs. 90 Cr 11 Land for Green belt 23824.47 sq m 12 Capital and recurring cost earmarked for

environmental protection measures The budgeted capital cost for EMP shall be Rs. 5.25 Cr. Recurring Cost shall be Rs. :70 Lac

13 Water requirement, sources and pollution management

235 KL/ Day, Narmada river

14 Waste water generation 26.5 KL/Day 15 Power Requirement and source 40MW (Will be supplied by PGVCL) 16 DG set 1380 KVA 17 Latitude 23°18'49.2991"N 18 Longitude 70°11'31.0066"E 19 Elevation above MSL 56 m 20 Land use pattern Waste land category 21 Climatic Conditions

(As per IMD) Annual average Maximum Temperature : 21.3° C to 35.3° C Annual average Minimum Temperature : 8.9° C to 22.6° C Annual average Rainfall : 710 mm Maximum average humidity: 96% Minimum average humidity: 43%

22 Existing drainage pattern at site Almost flat terrain 23 Hills No Hills land in the Project area; 24 Forest Land No forest land in the Project area; 25 Surface water bodies Tappar dam (7.81 km) 26 Nearest village Budhar Mora, (2.2 Km) 27 Nearest Town Gandhidham (26 km, SSW) 28 Dist. Head quarters Bhuj 49.86 km 29 Nearest Railway Station Gandhidham Railway Station,26 Km, SSW

Bhachau Railway Station 15 Km, ESE

30 Nearest Highway SH‐ 42 (2.5 Km) 31 Nearest Airport Kandla Airport (26.16 km) 32 Ecologically sensitive zones within 10‐km

distance Nil within 15km

33 Historical/ Archaeological places Nil within 15km 34 National Parks/Wild Life Sanctuary Nil within 15km 35 Major industries Mono Steel India Ltd

Sanstar Biopolymers Ltd Navkaar Ispat Ltd



Hans Ispat Ltd TPI Euro Ceramic Ltd.

36 Seismic Zone Zone V, as per IS‐1893, Part 1

FIGURE 1.1 PROPOSED PROJECT LAYOUT PLAN



FIGURE 1.2 SATELLITE IMAGE VIEW OF PROPOSED PROJECT SITE

1.2 RESOURCE REQUIREMENT

Land:

Land is non‐agriculture and the site is located in waste land area‐ Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau

road, Taluka: Anjar, District; Kutch, Gujarat. Company has already procured 72195.36 m2 land.



21690.98 sq. meter land already developed and remaining 50504.38sq. meter land would be

utilised for proposed activities.

Water

Water requirement of the project in both unit (Existing & proposed) will be met through the

water supply system of Narmada water. The water supplied by Gujarat Water Infrastructure

Limited (GWIL) will be potable. The water is suitable for the domestic, industrial, plant and will

be used from right from the inception stage. The proposed water consumption will be 200

KL/day and Existing water consumption will be 35 KL/day. Waste water generation will be

proposed 19 KL/day and existing 7.5 KL/day.

Power:

Total power requirement of the industry is 40 MW, which will be met directly from Paschim

Gujarat Vij Co. Ltd (PGVCL). The company being located in designated waste land and near

existing plant of Jay Bharat Steel Corporation, the electrical connection is easily available. The

DG sets shall be operated only during power failure and emergency purpose. It is also proposed

to install 10 MW captive Power Plant.

Fuel:

The proposed project will have installation of two utilities requiring fuel for operation. These

utilities are DG set having 380 KVA & 1000 KVA capacity and boiler having 30 X 2 ton capacities.

The fuel required for the DG set is diesel; whereas Electrostatic Precipitator will be used for

boiler. The Electrostatic Precipitator will be utilized in form of bricked and the rate of

consumption of Electrostatic Precipitator. The consumption rate of diesel for operation DG set

will be 130 Lit. / Hr coal for power plant is 250 TPD and lignite for boiler is 200 TPD.

Manpower:

The company has planned to employ about 266 personnel stage wise. The company has also

cited requirement of 266, personnel comprises: Managerial: 10, Supervisory‐ 30, Skilled‐ 96,

and Unskilled‐ 130. Local manpower shall be employed as much as available.



Machineries & Equipment:

As the proposed unit is new establishment, company requires many equipment, machineries

and utilities starting from the equipment & machineries for production to the equipment for

office work. Such system will be integrated system of the proposed project technology.

Finance:

The total capital cost of the proposed project would be 90 Cr. The company has also made

provision of Rs. 525 Lac as capital cost and Rs. 70 Lac as recurring cost for Environment

Management/Monitoring.

1.3 PRODUCTS, RAW MATERIALS ANDPROCESS

As planned & proposed by proponent; M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation, the product and by

product are TMT bars, angles, channels, MS Steel Ingots, billets & also silicon manganese &

power. The product wise details of raw materials for proposed products are given below,

1.2 PROPOSED LIST OF PRODUCT

Sr. No Particular Plant Configuration

Product Details

Production

Existing 1 Induction furnace 1 x 5 Ton MS Steel Ingots /Billets 27576 TPA 2 CCM 6 x 11 strand Proposed 1 Induction furnace 7 x 15 Ton MS Steel Ingots /Billets 6,00,000 TPA

2 CCM 6 x 11 strand 3 Rolling Mill 2 x 30 Ton MS Joists 2,00,000 TPA

TMT Bars/Angles/Channels 2,00,000 TPA 4 Electric Arc furnace 1 x 5 Ton Silico Manganese 18,000 TPA 5 Power Plant 30+30 Ton AFBC Power 10 MWH By product 1 Slag 1,44,000 TPA 2 Coal Ash/fines 25,000 TPA

Details of raw materials

The details of Raw material to be consumed and other details are as follows:



TABLE 1.3 RAW MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR EXISITING AND PROPOSED PRODUCT

Sr. No.

Name of Product Name of Raw Material

Existing in TPA Proposed in TPA

1 MS Steel Ingots / Billets Steel scrap 28333.6 605000 Sponge iron 2000 55000 Ferro alloys Nil 8900

2 MS Joists MS Billets Nil 220000 3 TMT Bars/ Angles/Channels MS Billets Nil 220000

4 Silico Manganese Manganese ore Nil 27000 Lime stone Nil 1000 Sand Nil 500

5 Power Plant Coal Nil 66000 The physical and chemical properties of the raw materials to be used for manufacturing

different products are tabulated in Table 1.4.

TABLE 1.4 PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF THE RAW MATERIAL

Sr. No

Full name Of the raw materials

Main properties (refer MSDS, Sch‐9 of MSIHC Rules) B.P. °C

F.P. °C

LEL UEL %

TLV ppm or mg/m

3

LD50 mg/Kg LC50

mg/l

Specific Gravity (water =1)

Vapor density (air=1)

Odour threshold ppm or mg/m

3 1. Steel scrap N.A Non

flammable

N.A 1.5 mg/m

3 N.A N.A N.A N.A

2. Sponge iron N.A Non flammable

N.A 5.0 mg/m

3 N.A N.A N.A N.A

3. Sodium Ferro alloys

N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A

4. Manganese ore

N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 4700‐5900 kg/m

3

N.A N.A

5. Lime stone N.A N.A N.A 0.05 mg/m

3 N.A 2.55‐

2.85 N.A N.A

6. Sand N.A N.A N.A 0.05 mg/m

3 N.A 1.8‐2.5 N.A N.A

7. Coal N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 2.0‐3.0 N.A N.A

A storage detail of raw materials to be used for the manufacturing and the products has been

shown in Table 1.5.



TABLE 1.5 STORAGE, SOURCE AND TRANSPORTATION DETAILS OF RAW MATERIALS

Sr. No.

Name of the Raw Material

Source Transportation Storage In

Capacity of storage

1. Steel scrap Imported Road Yard 600 MT 2. Sponge iron Mono Steel Road Bunker 200 MT 3. Sodium Ferro alloys Indigenous Road Yard 750 MT 4. MS Billets Captive Road Yard 400 Ton 5. Manganese ore H. K. Traders Road Yard 1000 Ton 6. Lime stone Local suppliers Road Yard 200 Ton 7. Sand H. K. Traders Road Yard 200 Ton 8. Coal Imported Road Yard 500 Ton

Manufacturing process description

The manufacturing process flow diagram and the description for each product/process is

described below

1 Manufacturing process description for Induction Furnace

Induction furnace technology introduced in 70’s was upgraded in late 80’s by introducing

technology involving medium frequency with constant power track technology that is superior to

the electric arc furnace route due to certain advantages features viz.

A. Homologous melting with minimal scouring of the lining to ensure faster and efficient

production of high equality casting.

B. Optimum performance throughout the melting cycle, through automatic control of

generator power.

C. Metallurgic contamination of the charge being negligible.

D. Oxidization is minimized and a loss of expensive alloying elements in the melt is

reduced.

E. Heat loss through the refractory is minimized ensuring full utilization of the furnace

capacity.

F. Full and constant power is maintained right from the start of melting. Very short time is

required to reach working temperature that results in valuable energy saving.



G. Penetration through low cost raw materials viz., sponge iron, skull iron, still skull,

bundled scrap from bailing process. Ladle returns, punching, returns and risers etc, is

maintained.

H. Induction heating means cooler running equipment minimal fumes and low noise level.

Induction Furnace, in simple terms, is like a transformer with induction coil acting as the

secondary. Therefore, the electrical coupling between the two to be optimally designed

it realized a high ratio of powder induced in the charge to the power induced in the

charger to the power available across the induction coil. In order to power factor

capacitor banks are incorporated in the circuit. The furnace crucible, lined with

refractory lining, is surrounded by water cooled Copper Coil, which carries the power,

acting as primary. The crucible is mounted on steel on steel frames which could be titled

by hydraulic cylinders for employing the melt when it is ready for pouring.

On the electrical side, The incoming 440 volts cycle goes through the solids generator

where it is converted to 1200 v 1600 to 1000 cycles There are automatic devices in the

control panel to get the necessary capacitor bank in the circuit which helps the furnace

to draw the power at the highest efficiency.

Sponge iron & Scrape in pre‐determined ratio and of consistent quantity depending

upon the nature of steel to be produce are charged into the induction furnace. This is

provided the initial condition of high‐flux path through the charge for facilitating

generation of heat and commencement of melting. The sponge iron and scrap is

collected in skips in the working platform and is charge into the furnace through the top

by tipping skips. The larger pieces of scrap are entered first and the smaller pieces are

packed about them as possible. Even after this, further charge may have to be added as

the melting progresses.

To start the furnace the mains and cooling water are switched on. The furnace is

charged up to half and the power is switched on. The power is kept at 100 KW for 20

minutes to drive away the moister, if any, from the lining. Then the power is increased



gradually. In some of the induction furnaces the power increase is automatic and the

operator is free to concentrated on charge in and slagging of within half an hour the

charge will melt. More sponge iron and scrap is added pushing it down with a bar so

that it does not form a bride. Further sponge iron and scrap are added till the furnace is

full. i.e. 150 mm below the top level that is normally the furnace capacity. The power is

kept at 90% Slag is taken off and a bath sample is taken for carbon analysis.

The power reduced while holding the melt waiting for the chemical analysis. As soon as

the carbon results is received the necessary petro‐coke and other allows are added and

the power is increased to bring the melt to tapping temperature. After the slag is taken

off the power is switched off so as to tilt the furnace to pour the molten metal into the

ladles.

The furnace could be emptied to the extent necessary and further sponge iron and scrap

can be added to start a fresh melting cycle.

Water is circulated through the copper coils of the induction furnace to keep them cool.

The water from the furnace coils through the heat exchangers and goes through the

coils again and the second loop takes the water from the heat exchangers to the cooling

tower and brings it back to the heat exchangers. The water pipe has to be soft and

dematerialized. Otherwise scales would start building up inside the pipes and choke the

flow of water resulting in the overheating of the furnace. It is a common practice to

have a de‐mineralizing plant. An overhead tank of suitable capacity should also be built

near the furnace so that in case of electrical failure the water from the overhead tank

can flow through the furnace coil to keep it cool.



Process Flow Chart Of Induction Furnace

2. Manufacturing process description for Rolling Mill

The process of re‐rolling involves several steps:

1. Selection of raw materials

2. Shearing and preparing

3. Heating in coal‐fired furnace

4. Rolling

5. Quality control

6. Dispatch

The raw material for the proposed unit is ingot, billets, bloom, slab etc. Raw material of requisite

composition, after receipt will be inspected and checked. Raw material shall be cut to proper size

for heating in the furnace. The material to be passed for re‐rolling will be charged into re‐heating

furnace. The raw materials will be heated up to its re‐crystallization temp. in furnace and is after

heating the same will be taken out and is then fed to rolling stands. Basically, the heating

operation is intended to rise as uniformly as possible, the temp. of the ingots/billets/blast etc, to

the level appropriate for hot rolling. Optimum temp. for rolling semi‐finished products depends

upon their compositions. Preferred rolling temp. for high carbon steels reached in oxidizing

atmosphere are usually in the rate of 1100Deg.Cent. The adequately heated work prices are

introduced into re‐rolling mills in which a number of carbon steels are chilled steel rolls works

successively. This cross section of the material decrease to a fixed value after every pass.

Sponge Iron

Scrape

16000C furnace steel melt

Elec. Power

Concast Moulds

Final Product Ingots or Billets



Adjusting the roll passes designs can be obtained. The products of desired cross section. The

desired shaped produce is obtained from last or finishing rolls. Thus the ingots/billets after testing

are processed through a shearing machine so as to cut them into reheating furnace, where it is

heated at temp. 1100 to 1200 Deg. Cent. Reduction by compression in roller and mills stands. This

operation is normally carried out in a roughing mill stand and finishing mill stand in total seven

stands it passes. The hot rolled products are then cooled on a cooling bed i.e. platform open to

atmosphere.

The edges of the rolled products are trimmed and normal grinding operations are carried out. The

output is now finished goods. Quality control measures include dimensional check‐up in shares

and sizes, tensile testing, chemical analysis to confirm to the desired specifications, etc. The

processing time in the furnace takes about 5 to 6 hrs. No by‐products are generated except the

wastage due to end cuttings.

Manufacturing process with flow diagram of MS Steel Ingots, MS Joists, TMT Bars

Process Flow Diagram of MS Steel Ingots, MS Joists, TMT Bars

Sponge Iron Steel SCRAP Silico Manganese

Induction Furnace

CCM

MS Billets

Rolling Mill

TMT Bars /Angles/Channels MS joints



3. Process description for Power Plant

The design, manufacture, inspection, testing and installation of all equipment and systems of

the proposed CPP shall conform to the Indian and international standards and best engineering

practices.

Ü Steam Turbine Generators (STG) are the main assembly in the Power Plant.

Ü The steam generator(s) shall be Atmospheric Fluidized Bed Combustion (AFBC) semi‐

outdoor type.

Ü The boiler shall receive the water from specialized Water Treatment System; which shall

convert raw water to soft water suitable for the boiler application.

Ü The steam generated at Boiler will be passed through the Turbine attached to it.

Ü In turbine Generator, the steam will be used to rotate the coil in magnetic field to

produce electricity.

Ü This electrical energy will be stored at step‐up transformer; from where, it is transmitted

at high voltage to step‐down transformer for distribution.

Ü Part of the steam shall be used to regenerate the feed water temperature and thereby

improve the thermodynamic cycle efficiency.

Ü The steam after doing work in STG shall pass through a condenser, which shall be cooled

by an external circulation of water. This water shall be cooled in cooling tower, which

shall be open to the atmosphere. The condensate so formed shall be pumped back vide

pumps to the deaerator and then to the boiler.

Ü The coal/lignite combustion will emit exhaust gasses, which shall be passed through an

electrostatic precipitator, which will reduce the emission levels before passing out

through the chimney.

Ü The ash generated from the boiler shall be sent through a high‐pressure pneumatic

system to transfer ash to a silo.

There will be other auxiliary systems which shall be used to like Compressed air system,

air‐conditioning system, etc.



4. Process description for By‐Products

A. Silico Manganses

• Silico manganese is produced by carbothermic reduction of oxidic raw materials in electric

submerged arc furnaces. The same type of furnaces is used for FeMn and SiMn alloys.

Operation of the SiMn process is often more difficult than the FeMn process because higher

process temperature is needed. The size of the SiMn furnaces is usually in the range 15‐40

MVA.

• Standard silico manganese with 18‐20 % Si and about 70% Mn is produced from a blend of

HCFeMn slag with about 35 to 45% MnO, manganese ores, quartzite, (Fe) Si‐remelts or off

grade qualities, and coke, sometimes minor amount of MgO‐containing minerals are added

,e.g.dolomite [Caco3 .Mgco3] Or olivine {(Mgo)2.Sio2}.The discard slag from the SiMn process

normally contains 5 to 10 % Mno. low carbon silico manganese with around 30% Si is

produced by upgrading standard alloy by addition of silicon wastes from the ferrosilicon

industry.

• Manganese ores normally contain unwanted elements that cannot be removed in the

mining and processing stages of special importance is phosphorus due to the strict demands

Process flow Diagram of power plant

Turbine

Generator

Power

Steam



in respect of this element both in the FeMn and SiMn alloys. Iron, phosphorus and arsenic

are reduced more easily than manganese and will consequently go first into the metal. Their

content in the final alloy must therefore be controlled by selection of ores. The HCFeMn

slag is a very pure source of manganese because the easily reduced impurities in the ores

have been taken up by the HCFeMn metal in the preceding process step. The content of

impurities, like phosphorus, in SiMn alloys is therefore controlled, not only by the selection

of manganese ores, but also by the relative amounts of manganese ores and HCFeMn slag

in the raw material mix.

• A process temperature of 1600 to 1650 c is necessary to obtain metal with sufficiently high

content of Si and discard slag with low Mno.FeMn slag has a relatively low melting

temperature (about 1250 c) compared with Mn‐ores. Accordingly a high share of FeMn slag

will tend to give lower process temperatures {1}.When the Mn‐ore starts melting at around

13500 C {2],it will contain a mixture of a solid and liquid phase, where the solid phase is

Mno. Further heating and reduction to 1550 c or more is necessary before the melting ore

will mix with the slag and flow freely. with a high share of Mn‐ore in the mix, the surface

temperature and process temperature in the coke bed zone will be higher.

• The specific power consumption for production of standard SiMn a mixture of Mn‐ore,

HCFeMn slag and Si‐rich metallic remetls, can typically be 3500‐4500 kWh/tonne metal,

dependent first of all on the amount of metallics added to the feed. The power

consumption will increase the Si‐content of the metal produced and also with the amount

of slag per tonne of SiMn. Each additional 100 kg slag produced will consume

additionalabout 50 kWh electric energy. About 100 kWh tonne of metal and some coke will

be saved if the ore fraction in the charge is reduced to MnO by CO gas ascending from the

smelt reduction zone.



A. Manufacturing process flow diagram of Silico Manganese

B. Manufacturing process with flow diagram Slag grinding

Process Flow Diagram of Silico Manganese

Manganese Ore Lime Stone Sand

Arc Furnace

Tapping

Barking

Silico Manganese

Process Flow Diagram for Slag Grinding

Slag

1st Crusher

2nd Crusher

Magnetic Separator

Metal Slag




1.4.1 Land Requirement

The area allocated at site for various manufacturing and other plant facilities are provided in

Table 1.6

TABLE 1.6 LAND DISTRIBUTIONS AT SITE (Approx.)

Sr. No.

Details Existing Survey No 407 in Square mtr

Proposed Survey No 405/3, 406 in Square mtr

Total Area in Square mtr

1 Cycle / scooter Parking 161.873 404.6825 566.5555 2 Greenbelt Area 7284.29 16540.18 23824.47 3 Car parking 0 1416.389 1416.389 4 Administrative Building 392.542 0 392.542 5 DG Set / Compressor House 388.495 0 388.4952 6 Over head Water Tank 287.325 0 287.3246 7 Service, Workshop and

Refractories 8001.38 15955.82 23957.2 8 Open Area 5175.08 16187.3 21362.38 9 Total Land Area 21690.98 50504.38 72195.36

1.4.2 Water Requirement

Water requirement for the project will be met from the Narmada water supply. The details of

water requirement for various processes/purposes are given in Table 1.7.

TABLE 1.7 TOTAL WATER REQUIREMENTS FOR THE EXISTING &PROPOSED PROJECT

Sr. No.

Category Existing Water Consumption, KL/day

Proposed Water Consumption, KL/day

Total Water Consumption, KL/day

1 Domestic 10.0 10.0 20.0

2 Industrial a. Cooling 25.0 160.0 185.0

b. Boiler Nil 10.0 10.0

c. Others Nil 7.0 7.0

d. D.M.Plant Nil 13.0 13.0

TOTAL (Industrial + Domestic) 35.0 200.0 235.0 The water will be fulfilled by Narmada water.



TABLE 1.8 WASTEWATER GENERATION

Sr. No.

Category Existing wastewater generation, KL/day

Proposed wastewater generation, KL/day

Total wastewater generation, KL/day

1 Domestic 7.5 4.0 11.5

2 Industrial a. Cooling Nil Nil Nil


c. Others Nil Nil Nil


TOTAL(Industrial + Domestic) 7.5 19.0 26.5 Total Industrial Nil 15.0 15.0

1.4.3 Wastewater management

The wastewater will be mainly generated from the blow‐down/regeneration of boiler and

D.M.Plant respectively. The wastewater generated will be treated in ETP and treated effluent

will be used for gardening and dust suppression.

Sewage (domestic wastewater)

Domestic wastewater: 11.5 KLD will be generated from domestic activities. Domestic waste

water will be disposed of through septic tank / soak pit system.

FIGURE 1.3 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM FOR THE PROPOSED TOTAL

Total water 235 m3/day

Domestic 20 m3/day Industrial 215

Soak pit 11.5 m3/day Cooling 185m3/day

Boiler 10 m3/day

Others7 m3/day

D.M.plan

t

Nil 2m3/d Nil 13

ETP 15 m3/day Treated effluent used for Gardening & Dust suppression



1.4.4 Details of Effluent Treatment Plant

Waste Water from boiler blow down and the D.M. plant will be treated in the ETP. It will be

collected and neutralized in collection cum neutralization tank. Mostly industrial effluent shall

be neutral in nature. However, industry has proposed two dosing tanks for acid and alkaline

solutions. Then, neutralized effluent will go to the primary settling tank, for the settlement of

heavier particles in the effluent. Supernatant will go to intermediate tank and sludge from

bottom of primary settling tank will be collected in sludge drying bed. Then,the effluent will

flow to intermediate tank. Effluent from intermediate tank will pass to the sand filter, carbon

filter and lime stone filter respectively. Finally, treated waste water will be collected in Treated

waste water collection tank. Treated water; meeting the GPCB norms,will be used for the

gardening and sprinkled for dust suppression. ETP sludge is hazardous waste, which is handled

as per the hazardous (M&H) rules 2008.

TABLE 1.9 SIZING OF THE ETP UNITS

1 Collection cum Neutralization Tank 1 10.5 X 7.8 X 10.5 2 Primary Settling Tank 1 13.5 X 4.5 X 3.6 3 Sludge Drying Bed 1 13.5 X 9 X 7 4 Intermediate Holding tank 1 13.5 X 9 X 7 5 Pressure Sand Filter 1 400 mm dia 6 Activated Carbon Filter 1 400 mm dia 7 Lime stone Filter 1 ‐‐‐ 8 Treated waste water collection tank 1 9.6 X 10.5 X 6

Draft EIA ReSurvey No 4EXECUTIVE

ANACON

NAGPUR,

1.5 A

FLUE GAS

The deta

given in T

Sr. No

1

2

Sr. No.

Sta

atta

eport for M/s. Jay405/3,406,407 ViE SUMMARY

N LABORATOR, MAHARASH

ATMOSPHER

S CHARACTE

ils of the sta

Table 1.10 a

Stack attac

Induction F

D. G. Set: 3

ck ached to

y Bharat Steel Cillage Dhamadka

RIES PVT. LTDHTRA

F

RIC EMISSION

ERISTICS

ack and char

and 1.11

TABLE 1

ched to H

s

Furnace 3

380 KVA 1

TABLE 1.

Heig

stack

orporation propoa, Bhuj Bhachau

D.

FIGURE 1.4 E

NS

racteristics o

1.10 FLUE GA

Height & Dia.stack In mete

30

10

11 FLUE GAS

ght & Dia. of tkIn meter

osed to install inteRoad, Ta- Anjar,

ETP FLOW D

of the variou

AS STACK DE

. of the er

AP

Sy

Pu

No

S STACK DET

the APC S

egrated steel andr, Dist; Kutch, Guj

IAGRAMS

s flue gases

ETAILS (Exist

PC ystem

ulse jet bagFil

ot Applicable

TAILS (Propo

ystem

d power Plant atujarat.

generated a

ting)

Expe

Pollu

ter PM SO2 NOx

osed)

Expected Pollutant

t

ES‐20

at the site ar

ected utant

GPC

Lim

As pGPC

Nor

GPCB Limit

re

CB mit

per CB rms



1 Boiler‐1 (30Ton) 45 ESP PM SO2 NOx

As per GPCB Norms 2 Boiler‐2 (30Ton) 45 ESP

3 D.G.Set:1000 KVA 12 Not Applicable

1.6 PROCESS GAS CHARACTERISTICS

The details of the stack and characteristics of the various process gases generated at the site

are given in Table 1.12

TABLE 1.12 PROCESS GAS STACK DETAILS (Proposed)

Sr. No Stack attachedto Height & Dia. of the stack In meter

APC System

Expected Pollutant

GPCB Limit

1 Rolling Mills 25 Bag Filter PM As per GPCB Norms 2 Induction Furnace 15 Bag Filter

3 Arc Furnace 25 Bag Filter

4 Power Plant 45 ESP 5 Coal crusher 15 Bag Filter

1.7 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

Details of Solid waste generation:

Quantity of Hazardous and Solid wastes generation & disposal by various methods has been

shown in Table. 1.13. The Solid / hazardous waste will be stored at separated Hazardous Waste

Storage Area for disposal.

TABLE 1.13 HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION

Sr. No

Description Category Quantity Mode of Disposal

1 ETP Waste 34.3 Existing: NILL Proposed: 1.5 MT/Year

Collection, storage and Disposal at TSDF Site

2 Used Oil/ Spent oil

5.1 Existing: NILL Proposed: 5.4 MT/Year

Collection, storage and Use within premises as a lubricant/ sell to registered recycler

3 Discarded drum/container

33.1 Existing: NILL Proposed: 720 nos./Year

Collection, storage and decontamination or Reuse within premises/ sell to approved scrap vendor



1.8 BASELINE STUDY

The baseline environmental quality has been assessed in winter. The period of study

determined was December 2012 to February 2013.

The details of selected sampling and monitoring locations are presented below.

TABLE 1.14SAMPLING & MONITORING LOCATIONS (STUDY AREA‐10KM)

Sr. No.

Name of Location Approx. Aerial Distance & Direction from Site

Details of sampling & Monitoring

1 Project Site (Lat. 23.3137 N, Long. 70.1919 E)

0.0 km Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Soil and Noise

2 Morger (Lat. 23.3401 N, Long. 70.2065 E)

3.20km NNE Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Soil and Noise

3 Krishn Nagar (Lat. 23.3419 N, Long. 70.2455 E)


4 Lunva (Lat. 23.2737 N, Long. 70.2467 E)

6.35km SE Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Soil and Noise

5 Pashuda (Lat. 23.2282 N, Long. 70.1999 E)

9.43km SSW Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Surface water, Soil and Noise

6 Tapar Dam (Lat. 23.25 N, Long. 70.1343 E)

9.30km SW Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Surface water, Soil and Noise

7 Dudhai (Lat. 23.3178 N, Long. 70.1259 E)

6.85km WNW Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Soil and Noise

8 Amrapar (Lat. 23.3651 N, Long. 70.1508 E)

7.50km NW Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Surface water, Soil and Noise

9 Pakadsar (Lat. 23.3317 N, Long. 70.2418 E)

5.5km NNE Sampling: Surface water

10 Chopadva (Lat. 23.2797 N, Long. 70.2796 E)

9.55km ESE Sampling: Surface water

11 Kotda Lake (Lat. 23.2905 N, Long. 70.0991 E)

9.50km W Sampling: Surface water

12 Aamardi (Lat. 23.3301 N, Long. 70.2214 E)

3.43km NEE Sampling: Surface water

METEOROLOGY

• Temperature



Historical trend shows March as the hottest month and February as the coldest month in the

annual calendar. During the period of 1961 to May 1990, maximum temperature is recorded to

be 40.1°C (May) and the minimum temperature is recorded to be 12.1°C (January). The average

daily temperature of the study period is recorded to be 20.5°C.

• Relative Humidity

Historical data shows the average relative humidity of 22% in mornings and 80% in the

evenings. During the period from 1961 to May 1990, daily relative humidity ranged from 4%‐

99%. The average humidity of the study period was recorded as 51.3%.

• Rainfall

The annual rainfall in the district is received during the south‐west monsoon season from June

to September. August is usually the month of highest rainfall. The average annual rainfall of the

region based on historical data of Bhuj, is noticed to be around 319.8mm. There was no rain in

the study period.

WIND PATTERN

The historical data shows wind blowing pattern from North‐ East in the winter and from West

and South‐West during summer and monsoon. Site specific micrometeorological data were

collected during the month of Dec 2012 to Feb 2013. It was observed that wind direction is

predominantly from NW direction for the study period. The dominant wind vector was

observed to be 185 Degree with 66.13% frequencies.

AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring was carried out at 8 locations during December 2012 to

February 2013. 98th percentile value of PM2.5 concentrations were found to be in the range of

27.75 – 34.06 μg/m3; Maximum value of PM2.5 34.06 µg/m3 was observed at plant area and

minimum value of PM2.5 of 27.75 µg/m3 was observed at Near Tappar dam.



98th percentile value of RSPM (PM10) concentration were found to be in range of 53.56 – 61.37

μg/m3; Maximum value of RSPM 61.37 µg/m3 was observed at plant area and minimum value of

RSPM of 53.56 µg/m3 was observed at Near Tappar dam.

98th percentile value of Sulphur dioxide in the study area from the monitored data were in the

range of 14.79‐18.63 µg/m3; Maximum value of sulphur dioxide 18.63 µg/m3 was observed at

Amrapar and minimum value of sulphur dioxide 14.79 µg/m3 was observed at Near Tappar

dam.

98th Percentile values of NOX concentration in the study area was found to be in the range of

20.29 ‐ 26.74 μg/m3. Maximum value of Nitrogen of 26.74 µg/m3 was observed at plant area

and minimum value of sulphur dioxide of 20.29 µg/m3 was observed at Dudhai.

Poly Aromatic Hydrocarbon is not present in the ambient air quality monitoring station

locations.

NOISE LEVELS

The Noise levels have been found in the range of 51.2 – 66.4 dB(A) during day time and of 40.2

– 55.5 dB(A) during Night time in existing plant and the Noise levels has been found in the

range of 50.3– 58.2 dB(A) during day time and of 40.5 – 49.6 dB(A) during Night time at

monitoring location.

Ground Water Quality

Ground water quality is well within the permissible limit as per IS: 10500 in different seasons of

the study period. pH was found in the Range 6.71 ‐ 7.70 Were Minimum Value is found in

Krishna Nagar and Maximum Value Found in Dudhai Village, Electrical Conductivity (EC) Value

Found In the Range 652.2‐ 5060 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Morgar Village and

Maximum Value Found in krishna nagar Village, TDS value found in the Range 378‐3441 mg/l

Were Minimum Value is found in morgar Village and Maximum Value Found in Krishna nagar

Village. Iron Value Found in the Range 0.16 ‐ 0.38 mg/l Were Minimum Value is found in Morgar

Village and Maximum Value Found in Lunva Village, Nitrate Value Found in the Range 3.1‐4.4

μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Krishna Village and Amrapar village and Maximum

Value Found in Morgar Village. Fluoride Value Found in the Range <0.1 – 0.23 μs/cm Were

Minimum Value is found in Tapper & Dhudhai Village and Maximum Value Found in Krishna



Village. Sulphate Value Found in the Range 17.3‐116.4 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in

Dhudhai village and Maximum Value Found in Krishna Village. Alkalinity Value Found in the

Range 103.1 ‐ 763.4 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Tapper village and Maximum Value

Found in Krishna Nagar Village. Calcium Value Found in the Range 78.8 ‐ 740 μs/cm Were

Minimum Value is found in Tapper village and Maximum Value Found in Krishna Nagar Village.

Magnesium Value Found in the Range 24.4‐66 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Amarpar

village and Maximum Value Found in Krishna nagar.

Surface Water Quality

In the Lake Water Quality, pH was Found in the Range of 6.92 – 7.98; Minimum Value 6.92 is

found in Amarapar Lake and Maximum 7.98 Value Found in Pashuda Lake, EC Found in the

Range of 979.2 – 9410 μs/cm; Minimum Value 979.2 μs/cm is found in Pakadsar Lake and

Maximum Value 9410 μs/cm Found in Pashuda Lake. TDS found in the Range 607‐ 6116 mg/l

Were Minimum Value 607 mg/l is found in Pakadsar Lake and Maximum Value 6116 mg/l found

in Pashuda Lake. Iron Value Found in the Range 0.12 ‐ 0.25 μs/cm; Minimum Value is found in

Pakadsar lake and Maximum Value Found in Kotda Lake, Nitrate Value Found in the Range 7.8‐

22.0 μs/cm; Minimum Value is found in Amarpar lake and Maximum Value Found in Kotda Lake,

Flouride Value Found in the Range <0.1 – 0.18 μs/cm; Minimum Value is found in Kotda lake,

Amarpar & Aamaardi Lake and Maximum Value Found in Pashuda Lake. Sulphate Value Found

in the Range 36.2‐96.3 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Pakadsar Lake and Maximum

Value Found in Aamardi village. Alkalinity Value Found in the Range 241.2‐676 μs/cm Were

Minimum Value is found in Pakadsar Lake and Maximum Value Found in Pashuda Lake. Calcium

Value Found in the Range 279.2‐348 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Kotda Lake and

Maximum Value Found in Amarpar Lake. Magnessium Value Found in the Range 2.8‐156.5

μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Aamardi Lake and Maximum Value Found in Chopadva

Lake.

Soil Quality

Soil is slightly alkaline in nature, as pH is in the Range 7.8‐ 7.93. Soil texture is sandy. EC found

in the Range of 197.12 ‐ 213.24 μs/cm; Minimum Value 197.12 μs/cm is found in Pashuda and



Maximum Value 213.24 μs/cm found in Krishna nagar, Water Holding Capacity (WHC) found in

the Range 27.2 – 32.23 g/100g Were Minimum Value 27.2 g/100g is found in Amarapar village

and Maximum Value 32.23 g/100g Found in Krishna nagar Village

LAND USE PATTERN

A total of six main classes and eleven sub‐class of land use/land cover classes have been

demarcated in the study area. The area as a whole represents a plain, drained by a number of

south east flowing rivers which debouche into the Tappar River that flows from west to

northern margin middle of the study area. Large crop land covered for 59.83 % of the total area

and water body area 2.36%, mudflat 1.6% and salt pan 0.2 %of the total area and 22.85% land

with & without scrub has developed mainly in the area adjacent to the study area. The exposed

part of side bars and river and dried up river beds constitute this category of land cover.

The agricultural land constitutes the dominant category of land use covering as much as 59.59

% and Current fallow land 5.59% of the total area. Active creek of the all the canals it covers

about 2.36 % of the total study area. The consistently shifting nature of the North West part to

south west part bank migration has resulted in large uncultivated & rural settlement along the

active plain area towards the site location. The project site is located within the current fallow

land area significant distribution. The land use for settlement is mostly confined to the ‘rural &

urban settlement’ (built up‐rural) 1.85%, Industrial area 1.07% of the total area and scattered

along the road networks.

1.9 IMPACTS & MITIGATION

The proposed project will have potential of pollution mainly due to the emission from utilities,

gaseous emission from process, wastewater generation & disposal and hazardous waste

generation & disposal. These potential impacts in form of pollution are described below under

respective heading with necessary details.

Emission & Air Pollution Control

Emission from proposed project is likely to arise due to the emission from utilities. However,

the pollution potential is not envisaged to be major as fuel proposed in boiler. Further, in DG



set diesel will be used for operation only during failure of power supply from the Paschim

Gujarat Vij Co. Ltd. Thus, the overall air pollution potential will remain very low. However, some

pollution control equipment will be installed to prevent air pollution due to the emissions.

Process emissions from process vent is also likely to occur, which may have considerable

potential of pollution. Based on modeling, it has been noticed that the pollutant level in the

ambient air quality will increase very little to cause almost negligible change. The details of the

emission sources and planned mitigations considered for modeling are described below in brief.

• First source of pollution will be flue gas through two D. G. Sets (380+1000 KVA), which will

be installed by the company as stand‐by provision for power generation. The DG sets will be

used in case of power failure only. The fuel used will be Diesel 130 Liters/hr. DG set stack

will be provided with 12 meter height from ground level. Chimney heights have been

chosen to ensure adequate dispersion of the generated pollutants, through in small

quantity, effectively and to ensure that the ground level concentrations of pollutant in the

surrounding environment remain well within the permissible limits.

• Second source of pollution will be flue gas through two Boilers (Capacity of 30 Ton each) in

which ESP system will be followed.

• The emission will be dispersed with the chimney having height, Induction furnace (30 m),

DG. Set‐1 380 KVA (10 m), Boiler‐1 & 2 having capacity of 30 Ton (45 m), DG set ‐2 ,1000

KVA (12 m)

The source & strength of emissions from proposed project is summarized below,

Sr. No.

Stack attached to

Height of stack, m

Diameter of stack, m Fuel

Fuel Consumption APC

System Expected Pollutant

Concentra‐tion

EXISTING FLUE GAS EMISSION

1 Induction Furnace

30 0.20 Electricity

400 KVA

Pulse jet bag filter PM

SO2 NOx

As per GPCB Norms 2

D.G.Set‐1 (380KVA)

10 0.15 HSD 30 Lit/hr Not Applicable



PROPOSED FLUE GAS EMISSION

3 Boiler‐1 (30 Ton)

45 0.30 Coal/ Lignite 200 MT/day

or 175 MT/day

ESP

PM SO2 NOx

As per GPCB Norms


45 0.30 Coal/ Lignite

ESP

5 D.G.SET: 1000 KVA

12 0.15 HSD 100 Lit/hr NOT APPLICABLE

Wastewater generation & Management

The wastewater generation is not expected from the construction work but the sewage

generation from domestic activities of construction workers would be the only issue of

management. Further, proper sanitation facilities shall be provided to manage the sewage

generated by domestic activities during the construction phase. A proper sewage disposal

through the soak‐pit & septic tanks is also suggested. The details of waste water generation are

described below.

Domestic: There will be 11.5 KL/day (Existing 7.5 KL/day + Proposed 4 KL/day) of domestic

wastewater generation, which will be disposed through soak pit septic tank.

Industrial: The total waste water generation for the proposed project is Boiler 2 KL/day and

D.M plant 13 KL/Day for proposed plant. For treatment of effluent from the proposed unit, well

designed Effluent Treatment plant will be installed, which will be comprising of collection tank,

neutralization tank, primary settling tank, sludge drying beds, intermediate holding tank,

pressure sand filter. The treated effluent meeting stipulated standards of treated effluent

quality will be disposed‐off through reuse or used for plantation within the company premises.

Hazardous & Solid Waste generation & Management

The production will be started in one phase existing & proposed and so the waste is likely to be

generated in one stage depending on the products. For ETP waste, mode of disposal is TSDF, for

Used oil/spend oil mode of disposal use within premises as a lubricant/sell to registered

recycler, discarded drum/container mode of disposal determination or reuse within

premises/sell to approved scrap vendor.



Noise/Vibration Generation & Management

The proposed unit will be having some minor source of noise generation. The vibration is also

having minor foreseen to be a major issue. The main sources of noise from the proposed unit

are identified to be Boiler, DG. Sets, Rolling Mills, Induction furnace, Arc Furnace, Power plant

and coal crusher. Company has considered following noise prevention/ control measures.

• Setback can be provided in the form of open space, frontage roads, recreational areas,

garages, etc., between the noise source and the receiver. The objective will achieve

attenuation of noise with distance.

• This includes walls, beams or other structure indeed will provide excess attenuation by

blocking noise from the source. For traffic noise, the practical limits are 15‐20 dB noise

reduction, although insertion loss up to 24 dB is possible at high frequencies.

• Placement of relatively sensitive rooms or fixtures away from the noise source wills a

cost‐effective technique.

• The most obvious example of this technique is the reduction of window area on noise

impacted facades. Practices such as the use of double or staggered‐stud walls,

acoustical glazing (with low air‐infiltration window frames), resilient channels, etc., are

effective in reduction interior noise levels. Whether stripping and caulking of wall

penetrations is essential.

• Regular monitoring of noise level in all areas & buildings of proposed unit of track the

change in noise level and to ensure the change is below 10 dB (A).

Greenbelt Development

Greenbelt form a surface capable of absorbing air pollutants and forming sinks for pollutants.

Plants grown in such a way as to function as pollutants sinks are collectively referred to as

greenbelts. Apart from functioning as a pollutant sink, green belts provide following benefits;

• Green belt helps in noise abatement for the surrounding area. Thus, it is recommended

as noise barriers.

• Green belt helps in achieving bio diversity by providing possible habitats for birds and

animal, thus recreating hospitable nature in an otherwise drab urban industrial scene.

• Green belts increase the aesthetic value of the site.



It may be noted that Jay Bharat Steel Corporation is located in waste land, Dhamadka. The unit

shall develop a green belt in the area available in and around the factory premises. A total of

33% of plot shall be developed as green belt, which shall be about 23824.47 m2 of plot area.

Rainwater Harvesting

Company will implement rainwater harvesting program through roof top harvesting scheme.

The harvested rainwater will be utilized to meet the requirement of proposed project. Details

study will be done by professional in the field and with help of such professional Roof top

Harvesting will be adopted.

Environment Health & Safety Management Cell

Company will form an environmental management cell with required manpower &

designations to operate the environmental management plan as timely required to protect &

conserve the environment as well as to prevent/control pollution from the proposed unit. The

cell will also be responsible for safety & related task and so will act as EHS cell. EHS cell will also

have full time qualified safety officer, factory medical officer employed based on statutory

requirements of qualification criteria for hazardous process and monitoring of the occupational

injury to workers as well as impact on the workers.

SAFETY MEASURES

Critical safety measures are the important most aspect of selection of process technology to

ensure safety in production unit. For the safety in production, some important critical safety

measures will be provided within the process technology/equipment itself. Company will

ensure such provision in the technology/equipment/machineries at time of purchase.

Safety Measures for Storage & Handling

For the safe storage, company will be provided the following safety measures.

1. Display boards will be provided on all raw material storage area which includes the

name of the product, stored material of construction, calibration of tanks and date of

painting.

2. Hazardous display board and national fire prevention association code will be display on

all storage tanks.



3. On‐site detector for fire based on heat &/or smoke detection with alarm system.

4. Fire hydrant will be provided as required.

5. Water showering system (Automated Sprinkling system) will provide to the storage raw

materials to avoid the vaporization due to increase in atmosphere temperature. In some

area, sprinkler will not be provided as water can increase the chances of spread‐out of

fire.

Safety Measures for Preventive maintenance

The safety measures in form of the general Do’s and Don’ts for safety in process & other plant

are as below:

• Do not work on equipment without permission from plant head and maintenance head.

• Make sure equipment is empty and fluxed with nitrogen and air.

• Keep proper and adequate fire extinguisher near work area

• Use proper PPE.

• Check all motors are disconnected and fuse pulled out before maintenance.

• Work in any equipment must be conducted in presence of supervisor

• Make sure all process lines are disconnected.

• Additional safety measures in form of the checklist covering Do’s & Don’ts of preventive

maintenance, strengthening of HSE, manufacturing utility staff for safety related

measures will be updated timely and will be made available to all concern department &

personnel.

Occupation health & safety

The management will prepare the health & safety policy and shall display at certain places &

circulate it to the workers. The main effects of various process gases are anticipated in the

proposed project. More details of the process gases specific hazards are shown in chapter‐2. No

other source of adverse effects on occupational health & safety is likely to occur. The

management will prepare the safety manual, safety booklet etc. to enhance safety culture in

the company. The medical checkup program will be implemented as pre‐employment and post‐

employment check‐up programs. Medical check‐up of all the employees shall be carried out



periodically by qualified medical officer and health records shall be maintained in prescribed

format.

In general following are the key safety measure which will be implemented well with the

inception of the project.

• The company will provide with all necessary equipment like portable detector, online

detector and other laboratory equipment as mentioned above for regular monitoring of

workplace air and other conditions (Temperature, Humidity and Light Intensity etc.)

• The company will establish the safety policy

• All necessary PPES will be made compulsory to all workers

• Fire extinguishers will be installed wherever necessary

• Fire hydrant system with loop will install with water capacity of 235 KL/day.

• Work place monitoring will be done on regular basis.

• All storage tanks will protected with dyke wall.

• Container decontamination area will separately provided

• The company will carry out detailed medical check of employee twice in year

• The company will provide occupational health center (OHC) and appoint part time

qualified medical officer as per factories act guidelines.

• The company will carry out pre medical checkup at the time of employment and

maintain form 33 as per factories act guidelines.

Emergency Management

The management has already started the task of onsite emergency management plan and the

task is under process of development. It shall be in place and shall focus on all the emergencies

that are likely to arise in the factory. For such purpose, the company has already prepared the

Risk assessment report. The same is presented along with the present EIA report. The company

will implement all suggestion made therein the risk assessment report to ensure safety at all

level & stage of the proposed project. The following are the generic actions planned by the

proponent.

Inspection & Maintenance:



The frequency for various activities in the plant, process & storage shall be maintained with

attentively by the management as per following.

• Daily: Critical equipment, control, indicators, levels, switches, settings, drain valves,

leakages, storage tanks.

• Weekly: Inspection & maintenance of rotary equipments

• Monthly: All interlocks

• Quarterly: All indicators alarms, trip and control

• Half Yearly: Ultrasonic thickness gauge, earthing check.

• Annually: All valves, safety valves painting of vessels, pipelines.

Accident Records:

Accident investigation format will be made available, record of investigated accident shall be

maintained in this format.

Safety training program:

Safety training program shall be organized for all level of workers, supervisors, including

contract workers.

Safety Department:

A safety Department shall be headed by Manager (Safety) and one safety officer assisting him.

Safety features and Emergency capabilities:

• Compliance of statutory rules and regulation such as factory act and their rules as

applicable like manufacture, storage and H.W. Rules 1989 as amended environment

protection act.

• The plant shall carry a high tension connection from PGVCL. The plant shall also be kept

powered by D.G set in the event of schedule power cut by PGVCL.



• Training regarding safety awareness, hazardous material handling. Storage and use

contract workers shall be trained in SOPs.

• Rolling mills, Induction furnace, Arc furnace, Power plant, Coal crusher shall be installed

to prevent release of toxic gases to the atmosphere.

• The safety department shall look after the process personally.

• Normal as well as emergency communication facilities including sirens, phone,

intercom, internet etc shall be provided.

• Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided throughout the plant and these shall be

maintained and also tested periodically.

• The company shall maintain records of annual pre medical and periodic medical

examinations.

1.10 CONCLUSION

It has been observed from the EIA study that the proposed project, being a unit in waste land

area of Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau road, Ta‐ Anjar Dist; Kutch, Gujarat, will not be posing any

serious threat to the land environment. Even the impacts on water environment will be very

little and will be acceptable with provision of efficient waste water management with ETP.

Further, it has been noticed that main impacts of proposed project would be due to emissions.

The stationary emission will not be posing any serious issue of air pollution with necessary

mitigation measures like rolling mills, arc furnace, and coal crusher with stacks of adequate

height and internal diameter at top. Considering this various mitigation measures and EMP has

been planned and also an RA study has been conducted to determine the requirement of

necessary measures to prevent such impacts. After adequate implementation of all actions

suggested in EMP and RA, the project would be feasible environmentally as well as financially to

satisfy the goal of Sustainable Development. Overall impacts of the proposed project would be

slightly beneficial with consideration benefits to the economy of state, country and local area.

મ. બમ. એ. નો

વહીવટી ટનક-સાર

મ. જય ભારત 〞ટીલ કોપ稲રશન સવ નન. ૪૦૫/૩, ૪૦૬, ૪૦૭

ગામ: ધમડકા, તા: ાર, ી: કછ

રીપોટ બનાવનાર: એનાકોન લબોરટરી ા. લી.

નાગપર

જય ભારત 〞ટીલ કોપ稲રશન 1

વહીવટી ટનક-સાર

૧. સામાય:

મ. જય ભારત 〞ટીલ કોપ稲રશન એ સવ નન. ૪૦૫/૩, ૪૦૬ અન ૪૦૭ ગામ: ધમડકા, わજ-ભચાય રોડ, તા: ાર, ી:

કછ પર હયાત એકમ છ. હાલની યપાદન ષમતા માટ કનપની એ ぬજરાત よષણ િનયન ણ બોડ ની મનજરી લીધલ છ.

પોલાદ (〞ટીલ) બનાવવામાન માહર યEોગ સાહિસકો りન બ એકમ ટી.એમ.ટી. બાર, એગલ, ચનલ નાન યપાદન સહીત

૧૦ મગા વોટ પાવર લાટ શર કરવા માનગ છ. બ એકમ શર કરનાર વતકો ぬજરાતમાન અય 〞થળો એ પોલાદ,

પીવાના પાણી સહીત સૌર યા પદા કરવાના યપાદન એકમ ધરાવ છ.

૨. મ.બમ.એ નો હや:

ભારત સરકારનાન વન અન પયાવરણ મન ાલયનાન ાહરનામા એસ.વ. ૧૫૩૩ (મ); તા: ૧૪/૦૯/૨૦૦૬ તગત શડがલ

માન 〞તાિવત િયા અり માનક ૩(a) માન બવરી લવામાન બવી છ. બ んજબ સનકિલત (ભટીટડ) પોલાદ બનાવતા એકમ શર કરતાન પહલા પયાવરણ મનજરી લવી બવ｠યક છ. う માટ પયાવરણ મનજરી ની ીયા નાન ભાગ gપ ભારત

સરકાર, વન અન પયાવરણ મન ાલય, નવી િદペહીની માગ દિશકા んજબ વન અન પયાવરણ મન ાલય, નવી િદペહી ખાત અરી કરલ અન ટસ વફ રફરસ (ટી.વ. બર.) મળવી, ત માણ મ.બમ.એ રીપોટ બનાવી ન લોક-

સનાવણી ની તાજ-વીજ હાથ ધરલ છ.

મ.બમ.એમાન 〞તાિવત િયા/શEોિગક એકમ ન કારણ બસપાસનાન પયાવરણ પર થનાર સનભિવત અસરોりન んペયાનકન કરવામાન બવ છ. મ.બમ.એમાન બવરી લવાતા િવિવધ પાસાવમાન, કનપનીની યપાદન િયા, પાણીનો વપરાશ અન ગનદા પાણીની િનકાલ ポયવ〞થા, જમીનની વપરાશ પધિત, હવાりન よષણ, ઘ育ઘાટ, えિવક પયાવરણ

પર થનાર અસરો િવગર ん ય છ. યપરાનત, પયાવરણ ポયવ〞થાપન યોજના, જોખમ બકારણી અન બપતી િનવારણ

યોજનાりન પણ બલખન કરવામાન બવ છ.

૩. કペપની િવગતો 〞તાિવત એકમ માટ બ યEોગ સાહિસક જથ તમની હયાત ફટરીની નીક ાર તાલકાનાન ધમડકા ગામ સવ નન. ૪૦૫/૩, ૪૦૬, ૪૦૭ ની なલ ૧૭.૮૪ એકર જમીન લીધલ છ, うમાન બ એકમ યわન કરવામાન બવશ. わજ-ભચાય રાજકીય

ધોરી માગ નીક બ જયા હોવાથી કાચા માલ અન પદાશની હર ફર (પિરવહન) માન અりなળતા રહશ. બસપાસનાન િવ〞તારમાન વસતી ગીચતા વછી છ અન ૧૦- કીમી િયા માન કોમ અભયારય ક ઐતહાિસક 〞મારક બવલ નથી.

• કペપનાન 〞થળનાન અષાનશ અન રખાનશ અり મ ૨3૦૧૮’૪૯”ય અન ૭૦૦૧૧’૩૧” પ છ

• દિરયામ સપાટી થી ચામ લગભગ ૫૭ મી છ.

• ફટરી પિરસર りન ષ ફળ લગભગ ૭૨૧૯૫ ચો. મી. છ.

• બ 〞થાનりન તર નીકના ん ય શહર ભચાયથી ૧૩ કીમી અન ગાનધીધામ થી ૨૬ િકમી છ.

૪. યપાદનન લગતી િવગતો


¬ પદાશ (તયાર માલ)

〞તાિવત એકમમાન નીચ んજબ ની પદાશો બનાવવામાન બવશ

અりん ય પદાશ યપાદન ષમતા

1. એમ. એસ, મગોટસ/બીલ સ વાિષક ૬,૦૦,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

2. એમ. એસ, જોમ〞ટસ વાિષક ૨,૦૦,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

3. ટી.એમ.ટી. બાર, એગલ, ચનલ વાિષક ૨,૦૦,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

4. પાવર લાટ ૧૦ મગા વોટ

5. સીલીકો મગનીઝ વાિષક ૧૮,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

બડ-પદાશ

6. 〞લગ વાિષક ૧,૪૪,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

7. ઝીણી કોલસી/わકી વાિષક ૨૫,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

¬ કાચો માલ

〞તાિવત એકમમાન નીચ んજબ ની પદાશો બનાવવામાન બવશ અり કાચા માલり નામ વાિષક વપરાશ

1. પોલાદનો 〞પ (ભનગાર) વાિષક ૬,૦૫,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

2. 〞પોજ બયન વાિષક ૫૫,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

3. ફરો એલોયઝ (િમ６ ધાや) વાિષક ૮,૯૦૦ મ.ટન

4. કાચન મગનીઝ વાિષક ૨૭,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

5. ચના પથર વાિષક ૧,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

6. રતી વાિષક ૫૦૦ મ.ટન

7. કોલસો વાિષક ૬૬,૦૦૦ મ.ટન

¬ પાણીની જgિરયાત અન ગનદા પાણીની િનકાલ ポયવ〞થા: પાણીની દિનક જgિરયાત અદાう ૨૩૫ ઘન મીટર રહશ, うન માટ નમદાનાન પાણીની મનજરી િવચારણા હઠળ

છ. બ પાણી નીચ んજબના િવિવધ યપયોગો માન વપરાશ

અり પાણી યાન વપરાશ દિનક વપરાશ

1. ઘરગゆ ૨૦ ઘન મીટર

2. なલગ (ઠનડ કરવા) ૧૮૫ ઘન મીટર

3. બોમલર ૧૦ ઘન મીટર

4. અય ૭ ઘન મીટર

5. ડી. એમ. લાટ ૧૩ ઘન મીટર

なલ ૨૩૫ ઘન મીટર


િવિવધ િયામાનથી う ગનよ પાણી નીકળશ તનો ポયવિ〞થત િનકાલ કરવામાન બવશ. ઘર-ગゆ

ગનદાપાણી(સએઝ) માટ ખાળ-なવો અન શEોિગક ગનદાપાણી (એペゐઅટ) માટ મ.ટી.પી. લગાવવામાન બવશ. શEોિગક વપરાશ ના ગનદા પાણી ન મ.ટી.પી.માન સાફ કાય બાદ છનટકાવ અન ごષારોપણ માટ

યપયોગમાન લભ “ઝીરો ડી〞ચાお” りન પાલન કરવામાન બવશ અり Qોત દિનક યપાદન

1. ઘરગゆ ૧૧.૫ ઘન મીટર

2. બોમલર ૨.૦ ઘન મીટર

3. ડી. એમ. લાટ ૧૩ ઘન મીટર

なલ ૨૬.૫ ઘન મીટર

¬ હવા よષણનાન Qોત અન િનયન ણ ポયવ〞થા

અり Qોતની િવગત ચીમનીની ચામ

હવા よષણ િનયન ણ માટりન સાધન

1. ભડકશન ફરનસ 30 બગ િફペટર

2. બોમલર-૧ ૪૫ મ.એસ.પી

3. બોમલર-૨ ૪૫ મ.એસ.પી

4. જનરટર-૩૮૦ ક.વી.એ ૧૦ ----

5. જનરટર-૧૦૦૦ ક.વી.એ ૧૨ ----

6. રોિલગ િમલ ૨૫ બગ િફペટર

7. ભડકશન ફરનસ ૧૫ બગ િફペટર

8. બરક ફરનસ ૨૫ બગ િફペટર

9. પાવર લાટ ૪૫ મ.એસ.પી

10. કોલ શર ૧૫ બગ િફペટર

¬ જોખમી ઘન કચરાની િનકાલ ポયવ〞થા

〞તાિવત એકમ માનથી િવવીધ કાર નાન う જોખમી/ઘન કચરા યપJ થશ તની િવગતો નીચ んજબ છ.

૧. મ.ટી.પી.માન પાણીના ざિ@કરણ દરયાન વાિષક ૧.૫ મ. ટન 〞લજ યપJ થશ ૨. જનરટર, પાવર લાટ અન અય મશીનરીમાનથી વાિષક ૫.૪ મ.ટન うટલન ゐઝડ વમલ યપJ થશ ૩. િવિવધ કારના રસાયણો અન કાચા માલનાન સન હન કારણ વાિષક ૭૨૦ うટલા કટમનર યપJ થશ.

૫. હાલની પયાવરણ સિમષા

ફટરી પિરસરની બસપાસનાન પયાવરણની સમીષા કરવા માટ માય ટી.વ.બર. んજબ કペપના 〞થળથી ૧૦ િક.મી. િયાનો િવ〞તાર અયાસ િવ〞તાર તરીક પસનદ કરવાનમા ન બポયો હતો うમાન ૧૮ ગામો નો સમાવશ થાય છ. અયાસ

િવ〞તારમાન હવામાન, હવા, પાણી, માટી, ઘ育ઘાટ અન えિવક પયાવરણ યપરાનત સામાિજક-બથક બાબતો ન લાગતો સવ પણ કરવામાન બポયો હતો.


હવામાન

અયાસ(સવ)નાન સમય દરયાન પવન ん યવ વાયポય (ય;ર-પિMમ) થી અિન (દષીણ-પવ) તરફી fનકાતા અりભવાયલ. ઐિતહાિસક િવગતો અりસાર, બ િવ〞તારમાન છペલા ઘણા વષ稲 માન િશયાળામાન પવન ભશાન તરફથી અન યનાળા તમજ ચોમાસામાન પિMમ અથવા નઋય તરફથી fનકાતા અりભવાય છ. ઐિતહાિસક િવગતો અりસાર, મ સૌથી ગરમ જયાર ાゐબરી સૌથી ઠનડો મિહનો હોય છ. અયાસ નાન સમય દરયાન મહતમ તાપમાન ૪૦.૧ ૦સ. અન ゐનતમ તાપમાન ૧૨.૧ ૦સ. અりભવાયલ. હવામાન ભજりન માણ ૨૨ % થી ૮૦ % ની વચ જોવા મળલ. સામાયતઃ બ િવ〞તાર માન જન થી સટબર દરયાન વરસાદ પડતો હોય છ. કછ ીペલાનો વાિષક સરરાશ વરસાદ ૩૧૯.૮

મી.મી. છ. અયાસ(સવ)નાન સમય દરયાન વરસાદ પડલ નથી.

હવાりન પયાવરણ:

અયાસ(સવ)નાન સમય દરયાન, にペલી હવાની ぬણવ;ા ાણવા ૧૦-િકમી િયા માન બવલ ગામોમાનથી અんક જયા એ નんનાવ એક કરલ અન તりન પથકરણ કરતા જણાયલ ક અિત સ┲મ રજકણો {PM2.5} ની માા ૨૭.૭૫ µg/ m 3

થી ૩૪.૦૬ µg/ m 3 ની વચ છ. Oાસમાન જમ શક તવા રજકણો {PM10} ની માા ૫૩.૫૬ µg/ m 3 થી ૬૧.૩૭ µg/ m 3

ની વચ છ. સペફર ડાયોસામડ ની માા ૧૪.૭૯ µg/ m 3 થી ૧૮.૬૩µg/ m 3 ની વચ છ, જયાર નામોજન

ડાયોસામડ ની માા ૨૦.૨૯ µg/ m 3 થી ૨૬.૭૪ µg/ m 3 ની વચ છ.

અવાજりન પયાવરણ:

અયાસ(સવ) િવ〞તારમાન Zટક શEોિગક એકમો િસવાય ઘ育ઘાટ નો ん ય Qોત રા〝ીય ધોરીમાગ યપરりન પિરવહન

છ. અયાસનાન સમયગાળા દરયાન િદવસ ઘ育ઘાટ ૫૦.૩ dB (A) થી ૫૮.૨ dB (A) ની વચ હતો; જયાર રા ઘ育ઘાટ

૪૦.૫ dB (A) થી ૪૯.૬ dB (A) ની વચ હતો.

જળ પયાવરણ:

８વ દરયાન અલગ-અલગ 〞થળોથી લીધલ નんનાりન પથકરણ કરતા જણાયલ ક わગભજળની pH ૬.૭૧ થી ૭.૭૦

ની વચ હતી. ાポય ષારりન માણ ૩૭૮ થી ૩૪૪૧ ની વચ હや ન. તળાવ/ડમનાન સપાટીજળના નんના લતા જણાયલ ક તળાવનાનપાણીની pH ૬.૯૨ થી ૭.૯૮ ની વચ હતી. ાポય ષારりન માણ ૬૦૭ થી ૬૧૧૬ ની વચ હや ન. અયાસ(સવ) િવ〞તારમાન ટપર નદી યપર ટપર ડમ બાનધવામાન બવલ છ, うમાનથી બસપાસ નાન ગામોન પાણી પરન પાડવામાન બવ છ. યEોગો માટ પાણીનો ん ય Qોત નમદા કનાલ છ; うમાનથી ぬજરાત વોટર મા〞ચર લીમીટડ

થકી બ શEોિગક એકમ ન પણ પાણી મળશ.

જમીન/માટી પયાવરણ:

અયાસ(સવ) િવ〞તારમાનથી િવિવધ 〞થળો પર થી માટીનાન નんના લભ પથકરણ કરવામાન બવલ હや ન. うના んજબ

ાણવા મળલ ક pH ૭.૮ થી ૭.૯૩ ની વચ છ. માટી માન pH થોડીક બઝીક છ.

જમીન વપરાશ પધિત:

અયાસ(સવ) િવ〞તારમાન જમીનનાન વપરાશ સનબનિધત ૬-કાર ની વિવયતા જોવા મળલ. અયાસ િવ〞તાર ん યવ

સપાટ કારનો કહી શકાય. અિન િદશા તરફી ઢાળ ધરાવતા નદી/નાળા ટપર નદીમાન મળ છ. લગભગ ૫૯.૮૩ %


જમીનમાન ખતી/યભા પાક જોવા મળલ. なલ િવ〞તારમાનથી ૧.૦૭ % જમીનમાન શEોિગક ごિત જણાયલ, જયાર ૨.૩૬ %

િવ〞તાર પાણીથી ઢનકાયલ (નદી/નાળા) જોવા મળલ.

સામાિજક/બથક પયાવરણ:

૧૦-િકમી િયમાન બવતા ગામોની なલ-વસતી ૨૪૩૨૩ છ. બ િવ〞તારમાન સરરાશ વ〞તી ગીચતા ૦.૭૭૫ િત હકટર

છ. િત ૧૦૦૦ પરષો એ Qીવની સન યા દવીસર ગામમાન ૭૧૧ થી માનડીન બમરડી ગામમાન ૧૧૭૦ છ; સરરાશ ૧૦૪૮

છ. સાષારતાりન માણ રયાડા ગામમાન ૧૩.૪ થી માનડી ન ખગારપર ગામમાન ૭૯.૫ ની વચ જોવા મળલ.

બ 〞થળ રા〝ીય ધોરી-માગ થી ૧૨.૫ િકમી よર છ. જયાર નીકથી わજ-ભચાય રોડ અય હાભવ સાથ જોડાયલ છ.

નીકりન ん ય શહર ગાનધીધામ દશના અય ભાગો સાથ રલ, ર〞તા, હવામ અન દિરયામ માગ જોડાયલ છ.

અયાસ(સવ) િવ〞તારનાન બધાજ ગામો હાભવ સાથ પાકા ર〞તા થી જોડાયલ છ. બધા જ ગામોમાન ીવન જgરીયાતન

લગતી બધી જ સિવધાવ うમ ક ાથિમક શાળા, પીવાりન પાણી, ાથિમક બરોય ક યપલધ છ. બધા જ ગામોમાન સનચારની અEતન સિવધાવ うવી ક મોબામલ ફોન, મટરનટ િવ. યપલધ છ.

૬. પયાવરણ પર સનભિવત અસરોりન んペયાનકન:

હવા પર થનાર અસરોりન んペયાનકન

〞તાિવત શEોિગક એકમનાન સનચાલન દરયાન ભડકશન ફનસ, બોમલર, જનરટર, રોિલગ િમલ, શર િવ

Qોતોમાનથી હવાりન よષણ થવાની શયતા રહલી છ. બ よષણ રોકવા અથવા બન તટલન વYન કરવા બગ િફペટર

અન મ.એસ.પી. うવા સનસાધનો લગાવવામાન બવશ.

વ%ાિનક ઢબ અયાらિનક સોટવરની મદદથી કરવામાન બવલ ગણતરીવ પરથી એごન અりમાન નીકળ છ ક

યપરોત સાધનો લગાポયા પછી にペલી હવામાન જમીન 〞તર બવનારી અりમાિનત તરતા રજકણોની માા ૧.૧

µg/ m 3(મામોામ િત ઘન મીટર) うટલન વધવાની શયતા છ, う ૧૦૦૦ મી. よર અりભવાશ. િતなળ સનજોગોમાન અગર હવા よષણ િનયન ણ નાન સાધનો કામ નાન પણ કર તવા સનજોગો માન にペલી હવામાન જમીન 〞તર બવનારી અりમાિનત તરતા રજકણોની માા ૩૮ µg/ m 3(મામોામ િત ઘન મીટર) うટલન વધવાની શયતા છ, う ૧૦૦૦

મી. よર અりભવાશ.

બજ રીત, にペલી હવામાન જમીન 〞તર બવનારી અりમાિનત સペફર ડાયોસામડ ની માા ૬ µg/ m 3(મામોામ િત

ઘન મીટર) うટલન વધવાની શયતા છ, う ૧૦૦૦ મી. よર અりભવાશ અન નામોજન ડાયોસામડ ની માા ૦.૨૪

µg/ m 3(મામોામ િત ઘન મીટર) うટલન વધવાની શયતા છ, う ૧૦૦૦ મી. よર અりભવાશ

વらમાન, ફટરી પિરસરની નીકમાન કોમ વસાહત નહી હોવાન કારણ હવા よષણનીઅસરો よર સધી નિહ વતાય.

અવાજ/ઘ育ઘાટ પર થનાર અસરોりન んペયાનકન

ફટરી પિરસરમાન ઘ育ઘાટ યપJ કરતા Qોતોમાન પાવર લાટ, જનરટર, શર, િમલ િવ છ. ઘ育ઘાટન 〞તોટ પરિનયનિત

કરવા માટ શય હોય યાન ઢાનકવામાન બવશ. સમયાનતર વમલગ, લ ીકશન યપરાનત સાર-સનભાળ


કરવામાન બવશ. તよપરાનત પિરસર માન વાવવામાન બવતા ごષો/છોડવાવન કારણ પણ にペલી હવામાન અવાજ

ઘટાડવામાન મદદ મળશ.

જળ પર થનાર અસરોりન んペયાનકન

પિરસરમાનથી યપJ થતા ગનદા પાણીりન ポય〞થાપન નીચ んજબ કરવામાન બવશ. ઘરગゆન પાણી ખાળ-なવા મારફત િનકાલ કરવામાન બવશ. શEોિગક વપરાશりન ગનよ પાણી મ.ટી.પી. માન ざિ@કરણ કયા બાદ સન હાલયોમાન છાનટવામા અથવા માલન ઠનડો કરવામાન વાપરવામાન બવશ.

વરસાદી પાણીન સન હ કરી રાખવા માટ わગભ જળ-સનચય કરવામાન બવશ. જળ-સનચય માટ બ ષનાન માહર

િન〝ણાત પાસ અયાસ કરાポયા んજબ りન બયોજન કરી બખા પિરસરમાન જgરી 〞થાનો પર રીચાお વલ બનાવવામાન બવશ.

જમીન પર થનાર અસરોりન んペયાનકન

〞તાિવત જમીન કનપની નાન સનચાલકો પાસ પહલથી છ અન હયાત એકમ હોવાન કારણ િબન-ખતી કરાવલ છ.

〞તાિવત એકમ માનથી યCવતા બધાજ કારના જોખમી/ઘન કચરાન ポયાજબી ポય〞થાપન કરવાથી જમીન પર થનાર

નકારામક અસરો વછી કરી શકાશ.

〞વા〞ય પર થનાર અસરોりન んペયાનકન

કારીગરોનાન 〞વા〞ય પર થનાર સનભિવત નકારામક અસરો િનવારવા નીચ んજબના પગલા લવાશ

• બધાજ કારીગરો ન હペમટ, લોポઝ, ગમ-ろટ, ગોગペસ うવા સરષા સનસાધનો બપવામાન બવશ. • વら અવાજ વાળા િવ〞તારોમાન કામ કરતા કારીગરો ન યર-મફ બપવામાન બવશ • ાથિમક સારવાર માટ ાથિમક સારવાર )એડ ફ〞ટ (કીટ તયાર રાખવામાન બવશ .

• પિરસરમાન વછામાન વY એક વાહન ૨૪-કલાક મોજદ રહશ, うનો બપાતકાલીન પિરિ〞થિતમાન યપયોગ

થમ શક

• સપરવામઝર ન સરષા બાબતોりન િશષણ બપવામાન બવશ. • અんક કમચારી/કારીગરોન ાથમીક સારવાર બપવાり િશષણ બપવામાન બવશ.

• મહવના ફોન નનબરો ん ય દરવાા પાસ દિશત કરવામાન બવશ. • સમયાનતર બધાજ કારીગરોની 〞વા〞ય ચકાસણી કરવામાન બવશ.

えિવક પયાવરણ પર થનાર અસરોりન んペયાનકન

• 〞તાિવત એકમ િબન-ખતીની જમીન પર હોવાથી કોમ પણ વન〞પિતનો િનકાલ થશ નિહ. તનાથી યલટ, ફટરી પિરસરમાન ૨૮૦૦૦ ચો,મી.કરતા વら િવ〞તારમાન ごષારોપણ કરવામાન બવશ.

• અયાસ િવ〞તારમાન કોમ અયારણ ક સરિષત જ નગલ હયાત નથી. • હવા, પાણી, ઘ育ઘાટ અન જોખમી ઘન કચરાના પયાવરણ ポય〞થાપન ન લગતા બધાજ બりસનગીક પગલા

લવાન કારણ બસપાસના પયાવરણ પર નકારામક અસરો ゐનતમ થશ.

સામાિજક-અથક પયાવરણ પર થનાર અસરોりન んペયાનકન


બ એકમ પહલ થી જમીન લભ લીધલ હોવાથી, જમીન સપાદન સનબનિધત Nો યભા નિહ થાય. બ એકમ ન કારણ

લગભગ૨૫૦ જણ ન રોજગારી મળશ. યષ રોજગારી યપરાનત પરોષ રોજગારીના ન િવકペપો પણ 〞થાિનક ા માટ

にペલા んકાશ.

૭. પયાવરણ ポયવ〞થાપન યોજના

જળ પયાવરણ

જળ પયાવરણ પર સનભિવત નકારામક અસરો િનવારવા માટ નીચ んજબનાન પગલા લવાશ.

ગનદા પાણીની નીકાલ ポયવ〞થા: શEોિગક વપરાશ માનથી પદા થやન ગનよ પાણી એペゐઅટ ીટમ ટ લાટ માન ざ ધીકરણ કયા બાદ સન હાલયોમાન છાનટવામા અન અય યપયોગો うવાક િવિવધ પદાથ稲 ઠનડા કરવામાન વપરાશ.

ઘરગゆન પાણી ખાળ-なવા મારફત િનકાલ કરવામાન બવશ.

વરસાદી પાણી(〞ોમ વોટર)ની ポયવ〞થા:

વરસાદી પાણીન સન હ કરી રાખવા માટ わગભ જળ-સનચય કરવામાન બવશ. જળ-સનચય માટ બ ષનાન માહર

િન〝ણાત પાસ અયાસ કરાポયા んજબ りન બયોજન કરી બખા પિરસરમાન જgરી 〞થાનો પર રીચાお વલ બનાવવામાન બવશ.

વરસાદી પાણી (〞ોમ વોટર) ポયવ〞થાપનનાન બલખન માટ બ બાબતોりન યાન રાખવામાન બવશ. પિરસરનો ઢાળ,

うથી પાણીનાન વાહનો દાજ んકી શકાય; ર〞તા, મકાન, શડ અન સન હાલયોમાનથી સનભિવત ધોવાણનો દાજ,

ચોમાસા દરયાન વરસાદી પાણીન કારણ માટીりન સનભિવત ધોવાણ િવ

હવાりન પયાવરણ

〞તાિવત શEોિગક એકમનાન સનચાલન દરયાન ભડકશન ફનસ, બોમલર, જનરટર, રોિલગ િમલ, શર િવ

Qોતોમાનથી યપJ થやન હવાりન よષણ રોકવા અથવા બન તટલન વYન કરવા બગ િફペટર અન મ.એસ.પી. うવા સનસાધનો લગાવવામાન બવશ. તよપરાનત, ઘટાદારごષારોપણ うવી ごિ;વના કારણ હવા よષણりન સયોય

ポયવ〞થાપણ કરવામાન બવશ. હવા よષણ િનયન ણનાન કોમ પણ સાધન ખોટકાય તવી પરીિ〞થિતમાન ફટરી નો સનબનિધત િવભાગ થોડા સમય માટ બનધ કરવામાન બવશ.

જોખમી ઘન કચરાりન ポયવ〞થાપન

〞તાિવત એકમ માનથી િવવીધ કાર નાન う જોખમી/ઘન કચરા યપJ થશ તન અગાય બતાポયા んજબ સયોય gપ ポય〞થાપન કરવાન કારણ ફટરી પિરસર ક બસપાસમાન જમીન ક માટી よષણ ની શયતા નહીવત છ.

સામાિજક-અથક ポયવ〞થાપન

〞તાિવત શEોિગક એકમ નાન કારણ 〞થાિનક લોકોમાન સીધી અન બડકતરી રોજગારીની તકો વધવાન કારણ

સામાિજક-બથક પયાવરણ પર હકારામક અસર જોવા મળશ. તよપરાનત, બ યધોગ જથ, સમાજ-િવકાસન લગતા િવિવધ પગલા લશ. う પકી બસપાસનાન ગામોમાન ધાિમક 〞થળોનો ીણ稲@ાર, બસપાસનાન ગામોની શાળાવમાન જgરી


યપકરણ うવાક કોપટર, વોટર なલર િવ. ની ફાળવણી, રમત-ગમતન લગતા કાય મોりન બયોજન (અથવા 〞થાિનક

રીત બયોીત કાય મોમાન અりદાન/યોગદાન), ગામોમાન ごષારોપણ, મડીકલ-કપ, સન યા-શાળા િવ માટ યોગદાન

બપવામાન બવશ. બ યપરાનત બસપાસનાન ગામોમાન સમયાનતર બયોીત/〞તાિવત કાય મોમાન યથાશિત ભાગ ભજવવામાન બવશ.

ごષારોપણ

ફકટરી-પિરસરમાન ૨૮૦૦૦ ચો.મી િવ〞તારમાન બાગાયત કરી ごષો/છોડવા વાવી અથવા ઘાસ યગાડી હિરયાળો બનાવવામાન બવશ સનદર わિમ-｠યોનો િવકાસ કરી પિરસર સશોિભત કરવામાન બવશ’.

પયાવરણ દખ-રખ યોજના ફકટરીમાનથી યCવતા/વકાતા よશકોની ચકાસણી કરવા માટ અન પયાવરણ ポયવ〞થાપન યોજનાનાન અસરકારક

અમલીકરણ માટ યપરી- અિધકારીવના ના હઠળ પયાવરણ ポયવ〞થાપન િવભાગ યભો કરવામાન બવશ.

પયાવરણની દખ-રખ માટ કનપની તરફથી શgબતમાન ` ૫.૨૫ કરોડઅન યારબાદ દર વષ ` ૭૦ લાખ ફાળવવામાન બવલ છ.

ફટરી ચલાવવાન કારણ બસપાસનાન પયાવરણ પર નકારામક અસરો ન થાય ત સિનિMત કરવા માટ વતમાન

ધારા-ધોરણો んજબ સમયાનતર નીચ んજબ નાન પિરષણ કરાવવામાન બવશ • ચીમનીમાનથી નીકળતા らમાડાની ぬણવ;ા • મ.ટી.પી. માનથી ざ ધીકરણ કરલ પાણીની ぬણવ;ા • જોખમી / ઘન કચરાની ぬણવ;ા • ઘ育ઘાટ ની તી５તા • にペલી હવાની ぬણવ;ા

અન બ પિરષણનાન અહવાલ સરકારી કચરીવમાન િનયમીત પણ મોકલવામાન બવશ.

બમ, યપરોત ચચાવના અりસનધાન અન વષ ૨૦૧૨-૧૩ નાન િશયાળા દરયાન કરાયલ પયાવરણ ભાવ સિમષાનાન અહવાલ પરથી તારવી શકાય ક મ. જય ભારત 〞ટીલ કોપ稲રશનનાન 〞તાિવત એકમ /કામગીરીન કારણ બસપાસ નાન પયાવરણ પત કોમ મોટી નકારામક અસર નિહ પડ, અન う અસરો પડશ ત સરકારી ધારા-ધોરણોની િનયત માા કરતા નીચા રહશ

Abbreviations

AAQSRN : Ambient Air Quality Standards In Respect of Noise AC : Alternating Current ACW : Auxiliary Cooling Water API : American Petroleum Institute APCD : Air Pollution Control Device BDL : Below Detectable Limit BFP : Boiler Feed Pump BIS : Bureau of Indian Standards BLEVE : Boiled Liquid Expanding Vapour Explosions BOD : Biological Oxygen Demand C&I : Control and Instrumentation CPP Captive Power Plant CEA : Central Electricity Authority CEC : Cation Exchange Capacity CGWB : Central Ground Water Board CIWMB : California Integrated Waste Management Board CO : Carbon Monoxide COD : Chemical Oxygen Demand CPCB : Central Pollution Control Board CPP : Captive Power Plant CTE : Consent To Establish CTO : Consent To Operate Cum/ CUM : Cubic meter CW : Cooling Water D.M. Plant : De-Mineraliser Plant

dB : Decibel DC : Direct Current

DCS : Distributed Control System DG : Diesel Generator DMP : Disaster Management Plan DMW/ D.M. Water : De-Mineralized Water EC : Environmental Clearance ECC : Emergency Control Centre EHV : Extra High Voltage EIA : Environment Impact Assessment EMP : Environment Management Plan EMS : Environment Management System EPA : Environment Protection Agency

EPH : Environmental Public Hearing

EPR : Environment Protection Rules FE & TI : Fire Explosion & Toxicity Index GLC : Ground Level Concentration

HFL : Highest Flood Level HP : High Pressure

HRSG : Heat Recovery Steam Generator HSD : High Speed Diesel IDC : Interest During Construction. IMD : Indian Meteorological Department IP : Intermediate Pressure IS : Indian Standard ISC3 : Industrial Source Complex Version 3 KLD : Kilo Litre/day kV : Kilo Volts kVA : Kilo Volt Amperes kW : Kilo Watt kWh : Kilo Watt Hour LP : Low Pressure MCM : Million Cubic Meter MLD : Million Litres/Day

MoEF : Ministry Of Environment & Forests MOU : Memorandum Of Understanding MS : Mild Steel

MSL : Mean Sea Level MVA : Mega Volt Amperes MW : MEGAWATT MW : Megawatt NAAQS : National Ambient Air Quality Standards NG : Natural Gas NH : National Highway NOx : Oxides Of Nitrogen O&M : Operation And Maintenance OSHA : Occupation Safety & Health Administration

P.A. SYSTEM : Public Address System PCB : Pollution Control Board RCC : Reinforced Cement Concrete REIA : Rapid Environment Impact Assessment RL : Reduced Level RSPM : Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter RTD : Resistance Temperature Detector S/S : Sub – Station SAR : Sodium Absorption Ratio

SCR : Short Circuit Ratio

SO2 : Oxides Of Sulphur SPM : Suspended Particulate Matter STG : Steam Turbine Generator STP : Sewage Treatment Plant

TAC : Tariff Advisory Committee TPM : Total Particulate Matter TSS : Total Suspended Solid UHC : Unburnt Hydro Carbon ULB : Urban Local Bodies UN : United Nations VOC : Volatile Organic Compound

TABLE OF CONTENTS SR. NO. TITLE PAGE NO. 1.0 INTRODUCTION C1‐1 1.1 Project Brief C1‐2 1.2 Objective of the study C1‐2 1.3 Methodology adopted for EIA C1‐3 1.4 Nature, size & location of the Project C1‐3 1.5 Significance of the project C1‐5 1.6 Compliance of Terms of Reference C1‐12 2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION C2‐1 2.1 Introduction C2‐1 2.2 Need of the Project C2‐1 2.3 Type of the project C2‐1 2.4 Project cost and Schedule C2‐2 2.5 Site location C2‐2 2.6 Site selection for Proposed project C2‐8 2.7 Proposed Infrastructure C2‐8 2.8 Plant Layout and Civil Engineering Aspects C2‐8 2.9 Magnitude of Operation C2‐8 2.10 Proposed Schedule for Approval and Implementation C2‐9 2.11 Details of Product to be Manufactured C2‐10 2.12 Details of Raw Materials C2‐10 2.13 Manufacturing Process description C2‐12 2.14 Stack Details C2‐20 2.15 Resource Requirement C2‐21 2.16 Atmospheric Emissions C2‐27 2.17 Solid Waste Management C2‐27 2.18 Prevailing Environmental Quality Standards C2‐28 2.19 Norms For Hazardous Waste Disposal C2‐30 3.0 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT C3‐1 3.1 General C3‐1 3.2 Approach & methodology of Baseline Study C3‐2 3.3 Description of Baseline Environment C3‐8 3.4 Topography & Drainage C3‐9 3.5 Land use Pattern Of the study area C3‐25 3.6 Air Environment C3‐28 3.7 Noise Environment C3‐32 3.8 Water Environment C3‐34 3.9 Soil Environment C3‐42 3.10 Survey Results C3‐47 3.11 Methods Employed for Plankton documentation C3‐62 3.12 Socio Economic Environment C3‐65

4.0 PREDICTION AND ASSESMENT OF IMPACTS C4‐1 4.1 Stages of impact identification & Prediction C4‐3 4.2 Identification of impacts C4‐4 4.3 Description Anticipated impacts C4‐9 4.4 Biological Environment C4‐33 4.5 Socio – Economic Environment C4‐39 4.6 Mitigation Measures C4‐41 4.7 Air Pollution Control Measures C4‐44 4.8 Evaluation of Impacts C4‐49 4.9 Environmental Management reviews C4‐52 5.0 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES C5‐1 5.1 General C5‐1 5.2 Existing infrastructure C5‐1 5.3 Consideration for selection site C5‐2 5.4 Land site details of availability of Facilities C5‐2 6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME C6‐1 6.1 General C6‐1 6.2 Environmental monitoring program C6‐2 6.3 Monitoring methodologies C6‐4 6.4 Reporting & Documentation C6‐4 6.5 Budget & procurement schedule C6‐4 7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES – RISK ASSESSMENT C7‐1 7.1 Objectives of the study C7‐1 7.2 Hazard Identification and prevention measures C7‐3 7.3 Occupational Health C7‐6 7.4 Safety Plan C7‐7 7.5 Administrative Controls C7‐15 7.6 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) C7‐16 7.7 Operation and Maintenance of Furnace C7‐16 7.8 Risk management & Insurance planning C7‐17 8.0 DISATER MANAGEMENTA PLAN C8‐1 8.1 Objectives C8‐1 8.2 Emergency Management Plan C8‐11 9.0 Environmental Management Plan C9‐1 9.1 Objectives of Environmental Management Plan C9‐1 9.2 Environmental Management Plan C9‐2 9.3 Control of Air Environment (Air Pollution) C9‐3 9.4 Water Pollution Control C9‐6 9.5 Management Of Solid hazardous Wastes C9‐6 9.6 Noise Control & management C9‐8 9.7 Fly Ash utilization C9‐9 9.8 Operational Health and Safety Plan C9‐11 9.9 Design of greenbelt C9‐12 9.10 Implementation of Environmental Management plan C9‐14 9.11 Budgetary provision for Environmental Protection C9‐16 9.12 CSR Activities C9‐17

10.0 PROJECT BENEFITS C10‐1 11.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS C11‐1 11.1 Introduction C11‐1 11.2 Credentials of testing lab C11‐1 11.3 Services offered C11‐2 11.4 Facilities C11‐4 11.5 Quality System C11‐5 11.6 Achievements C11‐5

LIST OF FIGURES FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE NO. 1.1 Location map C1‐4 1.2 Satellite Image view C1‐5 2.1 Cartographic map of proposed project site C2‐4 2.2 Site GPS coordinates of Proposed Project Site C2‐4 2.3 Site Layout Plan C2‐5 2.4 Photograph of Existing and Proposed Plant Area C2‐6 2.5 Water Balance Diagram for the Existing C2‐23 2.6 Water Balance Diagram for the Proposed project C2‐23 2.7 Water Balance Diagram for the Proposed total C2‐24 2.8 ETP flow Diagrams C2‐26 3.1 Base map of Study area Showing Sampling & monitoring Location (10Km) C3‐5 3.2 The study area C3‐9 3.3 Topography map C3‐10 3.4 Plant Layout Superimposed 3D view on Google Image C3‐11 3.5 Drainage Map C3‐12 3.6 Drinking water Supply Scheme chart of Wasmo C3‐14 3.7 Geo Hydrological map (District Kutch) C3‐16 3.8 Seismo – Tectonic Map C3‐17 3.9 Windrose‐ Winter Season (December 2012) C3‐21 3.10 Windrose – Winter Season (January 2013) C3‐22 3.11 Windrose – winter Season (February 2013) C3‐22 3.12 Wind Frequency distribution Chart C3‐24 3.13 Overall windrose winter Season (Dec 2012 to Jan 2013) C3‐24 3.14 Land use distribution C3‐26 3.14 A Satellite Image View C3‐27 3.15 Land Use / Land Cover Map C3‐27 3.16 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations C3‐29 3.17 Noise Monitoring Station C3‐ 34 3.18 Ground water Monitoring Station C3‐35 3.19 Surface water Monitoring Station C3‐39 3.20 Soil Monitoring Station C3‐42 4.1 Activist Cause Impact C4‐7 4.2 Mitigation Of Probable Impacts C4‐8 4.3 Hourly windrose Diagram for Dec 2012‐Feb 2013 C4‐15 4.4 Isopleth for SPM with APC C4‐16 4.5 Isopleth for SPM without APC C4‐17 4.6 Isopleth For NOx C4‐17 4.7 Isopleth For SOx C4‐18 4.8 Noise Dispersion Contours C4‐27 4.9 Connection road between Project site and NH‐8A C4‐31 4.10 Route Map of NH‐ 8A C4‐32 4.11 Bag Filter System C4‐47

4.12 Flow Scheme and HW generation points of Integrated Iron and steel Production

C4‐47

9.1 Plan For Surface runoff Rain water Harvesting C9‐11 9.2 Organization chart C9‐15

LIST OF TABLES TABLE NO. TITLE PAGE NO. 1.1 Environmental attributes and Frequency of Monitoring C1‐11 1.2 TOR compliance C1‐12 2.1 Project cost C2‐2 2.2 Environmental Selling Around the Project Site C2‐2 2.3 Details of the Proposed Project C2‐9 2.4 Project Implementation Schedule C2‐9 2.5 List of Product C2‐10 2.6 Raw material Required for Existing and Proposed Product C2‐10 2.7 Physical and chemical properties of the raw material C2‐11 2.8 Storage source and transportation Details of raw material C2‐11 2.9 Flue Gas Stack C2‐20 2.10 Land Distributions at site C2‐21 2.11 Land Distribution at site C2‐21 2.12 Total water Requirement for the Existing & proposed project C2‐22 2.13 Wastewater Generation C2‐22 2.14 Fuel Details C2‐25 2.15 Fuel storage Details C2‐25 2.16 Manpower Requirements C2‐25 2.17 Sizing of the ETP units C2‐26 2.18 Flue gas Stack Details (Existing) C2‐27 2.19 Flue gas stack Details (Proposed) C2‐27 2.20 Process gas Stack Details (Proposed) C2‐27 2.21 Hazardous waste Generation C2‐28 2.22 (A) Treated effluent Quality C2‐28 2.22 (B) Flue gas emission standards for existing Plant C2‐29 2.22 (C) Ambient Air Quality standards C2‐29 2.22 (D) Ambient Air Quality Standards in Respect of noise C2‐29 3.1 Salient Feature of Project Area (10 Km Radius) C3‐3 3.2 Sampling & monitoring Location (Study Area‐ 10 Km) C3‐4 3.3 Frequency of Environmental Monitoring C3‐7 3.4 Method of Environmental Sampling & Analysis C3‐7 3.5 Important Features and Ecological Sensitive Location in the study Area C3‐16 3.6 Climatology of Kandla (1961 to 1990) C3‐19 3.7 Site specific Climatic Conditions C3‐20 3.8 Wind Frequency Distribution Data C3‐23 3.9 Summary of site specific windrose during study Area (Dec 2012 to Feb‐2013 C3‐25 3.10 Land use Land Cover C3‐26 3.11 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations C3‐29 3.12 Summary of PM2.5 & RSPM (PM10) concentration (µG/M3

) C3‐30 3.13 Summary of SO2 concentration (µg/m3

) C3‐31 3.14 Summary of NOx concentration (µg/m3

) C3‐31 3.15 National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) C3‐32

3.16 Noise level In Existing Plant Area C3‐33 3.17 Noise Level in the study Area C3‐33 3.18 National ambient noise Quality standard C3‐33 3.19 Ground water Quality monitoring Stations C3‐35 3.20 Ground water Quality Analysis Data C3‐37 3.21 Surface Water Quality monitoring stations C3‐39 3.22 Surface water Quality Analysis Data C3‐40 3.23 Soil Quality Monitoring Stations C3‐43 3.24 Soil Quality Analysis Data C3‐43 3.25 Forest Observed in study Area C3‐45 3.26 Details of Flora Observed in Study Area C3‐48 3.27 Details of Agricultural Crops observed In study Area C3‐51 3.28 Details of fauna observed / reported in the study area C3‐54 3.29 Details of Avifauna (waterfowl) observed reported at various village ponds in

the study area C3‐55

3.30 Details of avifauna observed reported at the surveyed site terrestrial birds C3‐56 3.31 Details of Invertebrates Observed in the Study Area C3‐57 3.32 Details of Butterflies of the study Area C3‐57 3.33 Marine Fish Production (Year 2009‐12) C3‐60 3.34 Agriculture Crop Production C3‐60 3.35 Agriculture Crop Production C3‐61 3.36 Agriculture Crop Production C3‐61 3.37 Plankton Density at Each of the Locations Expressed As Nos. /L C3‐64 3.38 Plankton Diversity at Tapar Dam C3‐64 3.39 Species Richness of Plankton at the Selected sampling site C3‐64 3.40 Land use Pattern in the 10Km study Area – Census 2001 C3‐74 4.1 Flue gas Stack C4‐14 4.2 Short term modeling results C4‐15 4.3 Resultant Concentrations Due to Incremental GLCs of cumulative Project C4‐16 4.4 Noise Level from the proposed plant C4‐24 4.5 Predicted Noise Level at the ISP plant Boundaries C4‐24 4.6 Additional traffic due to plant Activity C4‐29 4.7 Emission Factors C4‐29 4.8 Meteorological Data considered for Modeling C4‐30 4.9 Peak Hourly prediction results C4‐30 4.10 Recommendations on Traffic Capacity‐ IRC C4‐32 4.11 Hazardous waste generation C4‐33 4.12 Plantation schedule C4‐37 4.13 List of Recommended species for Plantation C4‐38 4.14 Local Plants species recommended for Greenbelt C4‐38 4.15 Matrix Evaluation for Proposed Project with mitigation measures C4‐51 6.1 Environmental Monitoring Plans during construction Phase C6‐2 6.2 Environmental Monitoring Plan during operation Phase C6‐3 6.3 Budgetary provision for Environmental protection C6‐5 7.1 Occupational and Safety hazardous and Preventive measures C7‐4 7.2 Process Hazardous and Preventive Measures C7‐5

7.3 Storage Hazards and preventive Measures C7‐5 8.1 Action plan for Occupational, Health and safety C8‐11 9.1 Plantation Schedule C9‐13 9.2 Lists of Recommended Species for Plantation C9‐13 9.3 Local Plants Species Recommended for Greenbelt C9‐14 9.4 Details of Duties at Each stage of the EHS cell C9‐16 9.5 Budgetary Provisions for environmental Protection C9‐16 9.6 Budgetary Provisions for Social Upliftment / Year C9‐20

LIST OF ANNEXURE

Annexure I : Standard TOR

Annexure II : Site Specific Green Belt Photograph

Annexure III : Base Line Sampling Photographs

Annexure IV : Ambient Air Quality Results

Annexure V : Water Allocation Application Letter

Annexure VI : NOC copy of Existing Products

Annexure VII : Environmental Standards

Annexure VIII : Existing Plant Photographs, Plant layout and GPS coordinate of Site Specific

Annexure IX : Socio Economic Details

Annexure X : CREP‐Compliance

Annexure XI : Coal Linkage Document

Annexure XII : NOC compliance

Annexure XIII : HG‐ Report

Annexure XIV : Land Document

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at

Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat.

CHAPTER 1 : INTRODUCTION

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. C1‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Iron is perhaps the most important metal to the mankind and its principal alloy, steel, is

widely used for domestic, agricultural, industrial and defence purposes. Per capita steel

consumption is a major indicator of economic status of any country. The growth of the steel

industry significantly contributes to the economic growth, as it generates employment both

directly and also due to development of downstream industries.

Industrial process is invariably involving the conversion of raw materials and resources into

semi‐ finished and/or finished products. During this process, residues in the form of wastes

will be formed. If the residues are not recycled/ re‐utilized they become waste and have to

be discharged into environment as pollutants. The degree to which the pollutants affect the

physical environment depends upon their quantitative and qualitative characteristics as well

as the receiving media. However, any industrial development process is accompanied by

some environmental problems. Once an industry is commissioned, it becomes difficult and

expensive to retrofit pollution control equipment. As such, incorporation of the same at

conceptual stage itself is the best alternative.

Setting up of an industry has both positive and negative impacts on the environment. The

negative impacts include environmental degradation and adverse socio economic changes.

It is responsibility of scientist and environmentalist to document the likely impacts so that

they can be identified and attempts can be made to minimize the effects due to negative

impacts and maximize benefits due to the positive impacts. In this regard, Environmental

Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental Management Plan (EMP) has been considered

as one of the most important documents for utilization by all concerned to understand the

environmental implications due to proposed development activity and take decision in the

best interest of the environment.

M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporationis promoted by Gujarati Entrepreneur family. The

promoters have versatile business profile in their field. The starting of the business has been

in Bhavanagar, Gujarat; where they have steel plant. They have one packaged drinking

water plant at Daman. The group have one solar power plant of 10 MW capacity plant in

Una, Gujarat; that showing their commitment to green and renewable energy concept.





The company has established the Jay Bharat Steel Corporation in Kutch, Gujarat; which is

under consideration. The company intends to expand the production capacity as per

demand of the market and considering future business scenario. They also intend to install

the heat recovery based power plant within same premises.

The unit is in process of manufacturing TMT bars, angles, channels, MS Steel Ingots, billets &

also silicon manganese & power. The name stands tall in the market because of its quality

products made out of best quality machines under supervision of technically qualified

people and management supporting them.

The Management has complete focus on Quality, Promptness, Safe delivery & Best Service

through 3M’s ‐ Man, Machine and Material management.

1.1 PROJECT BRIEF

The proposed site is located at Survey No: 405/3,406,407, Village Dhamadka, Bhuj ‐ Bhachau

road, Tal: Anjar, Dist: Kutch, Gujarat. The plant is located between latitude 23°18'54.6909"N

and Longitude 70°11'29.2821"Eat Kutch district of Gujarat.

1.2 OBJECTIVE OF THE STUDY

EIA study has been carried out with the following objectives:

Ü Collection of baseline attributes in study area

Ü Identification, prediction, evaluation and mitigation of bio physical, social and other

relevant effects of development on the environment during the construction stage,

after commissioning and during operational phase of the proposed project using

mathematical/ simulation models as per applicable Indian regulations.

Ü Preparation of Risk Assessment and Emergency preparedness/ Disaster Management

Plan for the project.

Ü Preparation of the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to be adopted for

mitigation of the anticipated adverse impacts of the project during construction and

operation phase.





Ü Delineation of the project environmental quality monitoring program as per the

requirements of the regulatory authorities.

1.3 METHODOLOGY ADOPTED FOR EIA

The scope of the study included detailed characteristics of the environment in the study

area associated with the development of the proposed project for various environment

components. For the purpose of environmental assessment, area within a 10 km radius of

the project (Impact zone) has been studied and the following methodology adopted.

Ü Identification and assessing the proposed status within the impact zone with respect to

air, water, noise, land, biological and socioeconomic components of the environment.

Ü Study of various activities of the proposed project to identify the area’s leading to

impact/change in environmental quality.

Ü Identification of potential impacts on various environmental components due to the

activities envisaged during construction and operation phases of the proposed project.

Ü Prediction of significant impacts on the major environmental components using

qualitative / quantitative techniques.

Ü Delineation of environmental management plan (EMP) outlining prevention and curative

strategies for minimizing adverse impacts during construction and operation phases of

the proposed project.

Ü Formulation of Environment quality monitoring programme for construction and

operation phase to be pursued by the project proponent.

1.4 NATURE, SIZE & LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

1.4.1 Project cost

Estimated cost of the steel project is approximately Rs. 90 Crores. Existing plant cost is Rs.

10 Crores and proposed plant cost is Rs. 80 Crores.

1.4.2 Location of the project site:

The proposed project is located on the land falling under village Dhamadka, Taluka: Anjar,

District: Kutch; Gujarat. The geographical coordinates of the site are 23°18'54.6909"N,

70°11'29.2821"E with an altitude of 56 m above MSL.





1.4.3 Site accessibility

Ü Roads & Highway

Dhamadka village is well connected by road to Ahmedabad. Nearest Highway is SH‐42 at

an aerial distance of 2.5 Km North direction and NH 8A (12.5km).

Ü Railways

Gandhidham is the nearest major railway station at a distance of about 26km (South

South west) and Bhachau railway station about 15km (East South East). The plant is

connected by road to broad gauge railway line through private siding.

Ü Airport

Kandla Airport is at a distance (by road) of about 26 km southwest from the site.

Ü Sea Port

Kandla port is the nearest sea port approx‐50km

FIGURE1.1 LOCATION MAP





FIGURE1.2 SATELLITE IMAGE VIEW (SOURCE: IRS P6 SATELLITE IMAGE)

1.5 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE PROJECT

1.5.1 Indian steel industry

Currently, with the global steel industry on an upswing, Indian steel making units (private and

public sector companies) are also upbeat about their improved Volume turnover, Capacity

utilization, Sales and Profit margins. A number of MoUs have been signed by major steel

producers, both domestic and international, with the mineral rich states signifying possibilities of

marked increase in both Greenfield and Brownfield production capacities. Public sector majors

like SAIL and Rashtriya Ispat Nigam have turned around and wiped off huge accumulated losses

to become commercially viable. This turnaround, to some extent, has resulted from favourable

global market conditions (huge surge in steel production and consumption in China) and a

booming domestic economy.

Pertinently, resurgence of the Indian steel industry has moved parallel to the resultant buoyancy

in sectors like construction, infrastructure, real estate and transport, which account for most of

the total steel usage in the country. Further, an important potential area for steel usage resulting

from economic growth and rising income levels is the household sector, especially rural

households.





The Indian steel industry is currently also embarked on expansion mode. Prospects of domestic

demand appear to be excellent driven by the high investment rate, accelerated growth in the

manufacturing industry and expansion in physical infrastructure creation. Crude steel production

has been growing 10.5% annually from 2001‐02 to 2005‐06. This growth has come on the back of

both capacity expansion (from 34.2MMT in 2001‐02 to 45.7MMT in 2005‐06) and improved

capacity utilisation (increased from 82% in 2001‐02 to 91% in 2005‐06). The average increase in

production during the Xth Plan was 3.5mmt per annum vis‐a‐vis 1.6mmt per annum during the IX

Plan (1997‐2002). The growth in consumption was even more impressive more than doubling to

9.3% in the X Plan from a mere 4.4% in the IX Plan.

Post deregulation, there has been a noticeable shift towards the private sector both in crude and

finished steel. Private sector now accounts for 59% of total crude steel output compared to 37%

in 1992‐93, and 71% of total finished steel output compared to 67% in 1992‐93.

As per the present indications, the target for steel production by the year 2020 is placed at about

100 Million Tonnes by the Steel Ministry, Govt. of India (GOI). The GOI policy paper has

considered a CAGR of 7.3 % during the period 2004‐05 to 2019‐20. The post liberalization

experience bears out that this level of growth can be readily sustained.

1.5.2 Applicable environmental regulatory framework

The proposed Project will abide and function under the purview of the following Rules, Acts

& Regulations which are formulated by the Government of India to protect the environment

and development in a sustainable way.

• The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, amended 1988.

• The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Rules, 1975.

• The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977

• The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 amended 1987

• The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, amended 1991

• The Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 and its amendments in 1999, 2001, 2002,

2003 2004,and 2008

• The Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules,

2008.





• The MSIHC (Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals) Rules, 1989

amended 2000.

• The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 and its Amendments.

• The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991.

• The Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001 and Amendment in 2010.

• The Energy Conservation Act, 2001.

• The Indian Wildlife Protection Act, 1972.

• The Forest Conservation Act, 1980.

• The Forest Conservation Rules, 1981.

• The National Environment Appellate Authority Act, 1997.

• The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 amended 1992.

• The Public Liability Insurance Rules, 1991 amended 1993.

• Factories Act, 1948.

• Chemical Accidents (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996

• The Explosives Act, 1884

• Explosives Rules, 2008

• The Static and Mobile Pressure Vessels (unfired) Rules, 1981

• The Insecticide Act, 1968 Act, 1988

• The Central Motor Vehicle Rules, 1989

• Environment Impact Assessment Notification dated 14th September, 2006 and

subsequent Amendments.

1.5.3 Applicable environmental standards

• NAAQS by CPCB, 18th November 2009

• Water Quality Criteria as per CPCB norm

• Emission Standards for Diesel Engines (Engine Rating more than 0.8 MW(800 KW) for

Power Plant (Notified By The Environment (Protection) Third Amendment Rules

2002, Vide G.S.R. 489 (E), Dated 9th July, 2002 At Serial No. 96, Under The

Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.)





• Noise Limit for Generator Sets run with Diesel notified by Environment (Protection)

second Amendment Rules vide GSR 371(E), dated 17th May 2002 at serial no.94 and

its amendments vide GSR No 520(E) dated 1stJuly 2003; GSR 448(E), dated 12thJuly

2004; GSR 315(E) dated 16th May 2005; GSR 464(E) dated 7thAugust 2006; GSR

566(E) dated 29th August 2007 and GSR 752(E) dated 24thOctober 2008; G.S.R. 215

(E), dated 15th March, 2011 under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

• Emission standard for NOx emission as per CPCB norms [EPA Notification, GSR 7,

dated. Dec. 22, 1998].

• Drinking water: IS:10500

• Liquid waste water discharge limit as per CPCB norm (EPA Notification, GSR 7, dated.

Dec.22, 1998)

1.5.4 Scope of the study

The scope of study is to envisage the environmental changes expected due to

proposed steel plant. To assess the environmental attributes of study area, core area

of 10 km radius around the proposed project site is considered. The broad scope of

the study includes:

i. Literature review to collect data relevant to the study area;

ii. Primary data collection coupled with secondary data collection so as to establish the

baseline environmental status of the study area;

iii. Identify various existing pollution loads due to industrial and domestic activities in

the study area;

iv. Predict incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the proposed

industry;

v. Evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study

area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted environmental impact;

vi. Assessment methodologies/ models;

vii. Identification of mitigation measures and preparation of an Environmental

Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures for improving environmental

quality and scope for future expansions for environmentally sustainable

development;





viii. Identify critical environmental attributes required to monitor regularly; and

ix. Identification and analysis of risk and prepare disaster management plan to deal with

emergency situation.

The detailed EIA work shall be carried out in accordance with the Terms of Reference

(TOR) provided by EAC vide letter (File No. J‐11011/349/2012‐IA II (I)) dated

25thApril, 2013 (Refer Annexure‐I).

1.5.5 Structure of the EIA report

This EIA report presents the proposed baseline scenario and the assessment and evaluation

of the environmental impacts that may arise during the construction and operation of the

proposed project. This report also highlights the Environmental Monitoring program during

the construction and operation of the project. The content of the report is as follows:

Ü Executive summary

Ü Chapter 1: Introduction

This chapter provides background information on the need for the project, need of

EIA study and a brief description of the project. It also covers the identification of the

project, brief description of nature, size, location of the project and its importance of

the country and the region.

Ü Chapter 2: Project Description

This chapter deals with details such as type of project, need for the project, location,

size & magnitude of operation including associated activities required by and for the

project, proposed schedule for approval and implementation, including technical

details of raw material, quality and quantity etc.

Ü Chapter 3: Description of the Environment

This chapter presents the existing environmental status of the study area around the

proposed Project including topography, drainage pattern, water environment,

geological, climate, transport system, land use, flora & fauna, socio‐economic

aspects, basic amenities etc. Environmental assessment of the proposed Project site

with regard to its capability to support the proposed Project is also discussed in this

chapter.





Ü Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

This chapter describes the overall impacts of the proposed Project and underscores

the areas of concern, which need mitigation measures during Pre‐construction,

construction and operation phases. It predicts the overall impact of the proposed

Project on different components of the environment viz. Air, Water, Land, Noise,

Biological, and Socio‐Economic.

Ü Chapter 5: Analysis of Alternatives

The points considered to select the project site with various attributes is worked out

in detail and emphasis for choosing the selected alternative is listed.

Ü Chapter6: Environmental Monitoring Programme

This Chapter describes technical aspects of monitoring the effectiveness of

mitigation measures (incl. measurement methodologies, frequency, location, data

analysis, reporting schedules, emergency procedures and detailed budget).

Ü Chapter 7: Risk Assessment RAS

(“Risk Assessment Study”) is done to determine the potential risks having damage

potential to life and property and provide a scientific basis for decision makers to be

satisfied about the safety levels of the facilities to be set up.

Ü Chapter 8: Disaster Management Plan

The Disaster Management Plan (DMP) is related to the identification of various

hazards addressed qualitatively and provides a broad identification of risks involved

in the Project operation along with action plans for each identified hazard.

Ü Chapter 9: Environmental Management Plan (“EMP”)

This chapter delineates the overall impacts of the proposed activities during pre‐

construction, construction and operation phases and underscores the areas of

concern, which need mitigation measures and provide measures to reduce the

adverse impacts of the project. The chapter also describes the organizational

structure with defined roles and responsibilities for effective implementation of EMP

during construction and operation phases of the project.





Ü Chapter 10: Project Benefits

Ü This chapter describes the benefits of the Project with respect to improvements in the

physical infrastructure, capacity creation, social infrastructure, Employment potential –

skilled; semi‐skilled and unskilled and other tangible benefits.

Ü Chapter 11: Disclosure of Consultants Engaged

The names of the consultants engaged with their brief resume and nature of

consultancy rendered

1.5.6 Environmental monitoring and auditing

Environmental Monitoring for implementation during project construction and operation

phases has also been delineated in this report. The objective of the EMP is to assess the

adequacy of various environmental safeguards and to compare the predicted and actual

scenario during construction and operation phases. This enables suggestion of remedial

measures not foreseen during the planning stage but arising during these phases.

TABLE 1.1 ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING

Sr. No. Attributes Parameters Frequency 1 Ambient Air

Quality PM10, PM2.5, SOX, NOX, CO, PAH 24 hourly samples, twice a week for

three months at 8 locations. 2 Meteorology Wind speed, Wind direction,

Temperature, Relative humidity and Rainfall Non‐instrumental observations Cloud cover, visibility and dust storms etc.

Continuous hourly recording (one season) near project site. Secondary data from the nearest IMD station.

3 Water quality Physical, Chemical and Bacteriological parameters for 8 ground water and 7 surface water samples.

Grab samples to be collected once during study period.

4 Soil Quality Soil samples will be collected at 8locations.

Grab samples will be collected once during study period.

5 Ecology Existing terrestrial flora and fauna in 10‐Km radius.

Through field studies once during study period. Secondary data will also be collected.

6 Noise levels Noise levels in dB (A) at 8 locations will be monitored.

Noise levels in and around the project area will be monitored every hour for 24 hours at each location once during study period.

7 Land use Current land use scenario Based on recent Satellite imageries‐May &Jun ‐ 2013





Sr. No. Attributes Parameters Frequency SOI toposheet‐1:50000 Scale. Software: ArcGIS Tools

8 Geology Geological details

Data will be collected from secondary sources.

9 Hydrogeology

Drainage area and pattern, nature of streams, aquifer characteristics, recharge and discharge areas, etc.

Based on primary and secondary sources, once during study period.

10 Socio‐Economic aspects

Socio‐economic aspects like demography, population dynamics, infrastructure resources, health status, economic resources, etc.

From primary and secondary sources (like census abstracts of census of India 2001) once during the study period.

1.6 COMPLIANCE OF TERMS OF REFERENCE

The project proponent has submitted an application as per letter no JBSC/EC/MoEF/002in

Form‐I, Prefeasibility Report and draft Terms Of Reference (TOR) to Ministry of Environment

and Forests (MoEF), New Delhi for the preparation of an Environmental Impact Assessment

(EIA) Report and Environmental Management Plan (EMP) in respect of the proposed Unit for

TMT bars, angels, channels, MS steel ingots, joints and Silico Manganese Manufacturing.

Subsequently, the proposal was duly considered by the MoEF in its meeting as per 6th

Reconstituted Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry) on 7th March, 2013 as per J‐

11011/349/2012‐IA II (I) dated 14th February, 2013and based on the discussion and details

submitted, the committee has issue TORs wide letter no: J‐11011/349/2012‐IA II (I) dated

25th April, 2013following TOR has been considered for preparation of EIA.

TABLE1.2 TOR COMPLIANCE

Sr.No. TOR COMPLIANCE

1. Executive summary of the project Executive summary enclosed at start of the report.

2. Photographs of the existing and proposed plant area Please refer section 2.5.1,Fig 2.4, page C2‐6‐7.

3. Copies of iron ore and coal linkage documents. Please refer Annexure XI for coal linkage. Not applicable for iron ore.

4. Compliance to the conditions stipulated in Environmental clearance/ NOC granted by the SPCB.

Please refer Annexure VI & XII

5. A certified copy of the report of the status of compliance of the conditions stipulated in the environmental clearance and

Please refer Annexure XII





Sr.No. TOR COMPLIANCE Consent to Operate for the on‐going/ existing operation of the project by the Regional Office of the Ministry of Environment and Forests and SPCB.

6. Recent monitoring report from SPCB, which shall include data on AAQ, water quality, solid waste etc. shall be submitted.

Not Applicable

7. Has the unit received any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Section of Air and Water Acts? If so, compliance to the notice(s).

Not Applicable.

8. A line diagram/ flow sheet for the process and EMP. Please refer section 2.13, page C2‐14‐20 & section 6, page‐C6‐1‐5,

9. The earlier questionnaire for industry sector should be submitted while submitting EIA/EMP.

Compressive EMP described in Section 9, page C 9 ‐1‐20.

10. A SITE LOCATION MAP ON Indian map of 1:10, 00,000 scale followed by 1:50,000/1:25,000scale on an A3/A2 sheet with at least next 10 Kms of terrains i.e., circle of 10 Kms and further 10 Kms on A3/A2 sheets with proper 3 D view i.e., DEM (Digital Elevation Model) for the area in 10 Km radius from the proposal site.

Please refer section 1.4, Figure 1.1 & 1.2, page C1‐4‐5 & Figure 3.3 &3.4, page C3 10‐11.

11. Present land use should be prepared based on satellite imagery. High‐resolution satellite image data having 1m‐5m spatial resolution like quickbird, lkonos, IRS P‐6 pan sharpened etc. for the 10 Km radius area from proposed site. The same should be used for land used/land‐cover mapping of the area.

Please refer section 3.5.1, Figure 3.14, 3.14A &3.15, page C3‐26‐27.

12. Break up of small, medium and large farmers from whom the land is being acquired. If small farmers are involved, a detailed R&R plan.

Unit is located in private land. So, No R&R plan is needed.

13. Location of national parks/wildlife sanctuary / reserve forests within 10 Km. radius should specifically be mentioned. A map showing land use/ land cover, reserved forests, wildlife sanctuaries, national parks, tiger reserve etc. in 10 Km of the project site.

There is no national parks/wildlife sanctuary / reserve forests within 10 Km

14. Project site layout plan to scale using AutoCAD showing raw materials, fly ash and other storage plans bore well or water storage, aquifers(within 1 km.) dumping, waste disposal, green areas, water bodies, rivers/drainage passing through the project site should be included

Please refer section 2.5, Figure 2.3, page C2‐5.

15. Details and classification of total land (identified and acquired) should be included.

Please refer section 2.15, Table 2.11, page C2‐21.

16. Proposal should be submitted to the Ministry for environment clearance only after acquiring total land. Necessary documents indicating acquisition of land should be included.

Please refer Annexure XIV

17. Rehabilitation & Resettlement (R&R) should be as per policy of the State Govt. and a detailed action plan should be included.

Not Applicable.

18. Permission and approval for the use of forest land and recommendation of the State Forest Departments regarding impact of proposed expansion on the surrounding reserve forests, if applicable, should be included.

Not Applicable.

19. A list of industries containing name and type in 10 Km radius Please refer section 2, Table





Sr.No. TOR COMPLIANCE shall be incorporated 2.2, page C2‐3.

20. Residential colony should be located in upwind direction. Yes, residential colony is located in upwind direction.

21. List of raw materials required and source along with mode of transportation should be included. All the trucks for raw material and finished product transportation must be “Environmentally Compliant”.

Please refer section 2.12, Table 2.8, page C2‐11.

22. Studies for fly ash, muck disposal, slurry sludge material and solid waste generated should also be included, if the raw materials used has trace elements and management plan.

Please refer section 9.5 page C9‐6‐7.

23. Manufacturing process details for the process units should be included.

Please refer section 2.13, page C2‐12‐20.

24. Possibility of installation of WHRB will be explored and details included.

Unit is installed AFBC boiler. So, WHRB is not applicable.

25. Mass balance for the raw materials and products should be included.

Please refer section 2. Page C2‐14‐19.

26. Energy balance data for all the components including proposed power plant should be incorporated.

Please refer section 2. Page C2‐16‐17.

27. Site‐specific micro‐meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall should be collected.

Please refer section 3.4.16, Table 3.7, page C3‐20 & Table 3.8, page C3‐23.

28. Sources of secondary emissions, its control and monitoring as per the CPCB guidelines should be included. A full chapter on fugitive emission and control technologies should be provided.

Please refer section 9.3, page C9‐3 ‐6.

29. An action plan to control and monitor secondary fugitive emissions from all the sources as per the latest permissible limits issued by the Ministry vide G.S.R. 414(E) dated 30th May, 2008.

Please refer section 6.2, Table 6.1 &6.2 , page C6‐2‐3.

30. Vehicular pollution control and its management plan should be submitted

Please refer section 4.3.3.12, Table 4.10, page C4‐31‐32.

31. A write up on use of high calorific hazardous waste from all the sources in kiln and commitment regarding use of hazardous waste should be included.

Please refer section 9.5, page C9‐6‐7.

32. Ambient air quality at 8 locations within the study area of 10 Km, aerial coverage from project site with one AAQMS in downwind direction should be carried out.

Please refer section 3.2.1.2, Figure 3.2, page C3‐4.

33. The suspended particulate matter present in the ambient air must be analyzed for the presence of poly‐aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH), i.e., Benzene soluble fraction. Chemical characterization of RSPM and incorporating of RSPM data.

Analysis report indicates that the PAH is not present in the study area. Refer section 3.6.5,page C3‐31

34. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stack emission based on site‐specific meteorological features.

Please refer section 4.3.1.4, Table 4.2 and 4.3. Figure 4.3 to 4.7, page C4‐13‐18.

35. Air quality modelling for all the plants proposed including mine for specific pollutants needs to be done. APCS for the control of emissions within 50 mg/Nm

3 should be included. Cumulative impacts of steel plant and Captive Power Plant on the ambient air quality shall be assessed

Please refer section 4.3.1.7, Table 4.2 and 4.3. Figure 4.4 to 4.7, page C4‐15‐18.





Sr.No. TOR COMPLIANCE 36. Action plan to follow National Ambient Air Quality Emission

Standards issued by the Ministry vide G.S.R. No. 826(E) dated 16

th November, 2009 should be included.

Please refer section 6.2, Table 6.1 &6.2, page C6‐2‐3.

37. Ambient air quality monitoring along with cumulative impact should be included for the day (24 hrs) for maximum GLC along with following: Emission (g/second) with and without the air pollution control measures. Meteorological inputs (wind speed, m/s),wind direction, ambient air temperature, cloud cover, relative humidity & mixing height using SODAR on hourly basis. Model input options for terrain, plume rise, deposition etc. Print‐out of model input and output on hourly and daily average basis. A graph of daily averaged concentration (MGLC scenario) with downwind distance at every 500 m interval covering the exact location of GLC. Details of air pollution control methods used with percentage efficiency that are used for emission rate estimation with respect to each pollutant. Applicable air quality standards as per LULC covered in the study area and % contribution of the proposed plant to be applicable Air quality standard. In case of expansion project, the contribution should be inclusive of both existing and expanded capacity. No. I‐VII are to be repeated for fugitive emissions and any other source type relevant and used for industry. Graphs of monthly average daily concentration with down‐wind distance. Specify when and where the ambient air quality standards are exceeded either due to the proposed plant alone or when the plant contribution is added to the background air quality. Fugitive dust protection or dust reduction technology for workers within 30m of the plant active areas.

Please refer section 4.3.1.4, Table 4.1 ,4.2 and 4.3. Figure 4.3 to 4.7, page C4‐13‐18.

38. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the surrounding environment should be assessed and provided.

Please refer section 4.3.3.6 to 4.3.3.11, page C4‐27‐30.

39. One season data for gaseous emissions other than monsoon season is necessary.

Existing plant is not in operation. So it is not Applicable.

40. Presence of aquifer(s) within 1 km of the project boundaries management plan for recharging the aquifer should be included.

Please refer Annexure XIII for detailed Rainwater harvesting plan

41. Source of surface/ground water level, site (GPS), cation, anion (Ion chromatograph), metal trace element (as above) chemical analysis for water to be used along with a Piper and Piper Duro‐V diagram. If surface water is used from river, rainfall, discharge rate, quantity, drainage and distance from project site should also be included.

Source of water , refer Annexure‐ V, Please refer section 9.7.1, page C‐9‐10‐11. for detailed Rainwater harvesting plan in Annexure‐XIII





Sr.No. TOR COMPLIANCE 42. Ground water analysis with bore well data, litho‐logs, drawdown

and recovery tests to quantify the area and volume of aquifer and its management.

Please refer Section 3.8.3, Table 3.20, Page C3‐37‐38. And Annexure‐XIII.

43. Ground water modelling showing the pathways of the pollutants should be included.

Please refer section 9.7.1, page C‐9‐10‐11. for detailed Rainwater harvesting plan in Annexure‐XIII

44. Column leachate study for all types of stockpiles or waste disposal sites, at 20oC‐50oC should be conducted and included.


45. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site should be submitted to harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from other sources. Rain water harvesting and ground water recharge structures may also be constructed outside the plant premises in consultation with local Gram Panchayat and Village Heads to augment the ground water level. Incorporation of water harvesting plan for the project is necessary, if source of water is bore well.


46. Permission for the drawl of water from the concerned authority and water balance data including quantity of effluent generated recycles and reused and discharged is to be provided. Methods adopted/to be adopted for the water conservation should be included.

Permission from GWIL (Narmada canal water supply authority is under process)Please refer Annexure V.

47. A note on the impact of drawl of water on the nearby River during lean season.

There is no water withdrawal. Surface water to be utilised.

48. Surface water quality of nearby River (60 m upstream and downstream) and other surface drains at eight locations must be ascertained.

Please refer section3.8.4 & 3.8.5. Table 3.22, page C3—39‐41.

49. If the site is within 10km radius of any major river, Flood Hazard Zonation Mapping is required at 1:5000 to 1:10,000 scales indicating the peak and lean river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency.

Not Applicable as only one seasonal river flows within 10‐km area.

50. A note on treatment of wastewater from different plants, recycle and reuse for different purposes should be included.

Please refer section 2.15.7 , page C2‐25‐26.

51. Provision of traps and treatment plants are to be made, if water is getting mixed with oil, grease and cleaning agents.

Oil would be skimmed out from the wastewater if required

52. If the water is mixed with solid particulates, Proposal for sediment pond before further transport should be included. The sediment pond capacity should be 100 times the transport capacity.

Suspended solid would be removed from settling tank after chemical treatment at ETP

53. Ground water monitoring minimum at 8 locations and near solid waste dump zone, Geological features and Geo‐hydrological status of the study area are essential as also. Ecological status

Please refer table 3.19 C3‐35, Also please refer section 3.9.1, Page C3‐43‐64.





Sr.No. TOR COMPLIANCE (Terrestrial and Aquatic) is vital.

54. Action plan for solid/hazardous waste generation, storage, utilization and disposal. A note on the treatment, storage and disposal of all type of solid waste should be included. End use of solid waste viz. fly ash etc. and its composition should be covered.

Please refer section 2.17. Table 2.21 , page C2‐28 and section 9.5, page C9‐6 ‐ 7.

55. All stock piles will have to be on top of a stable liner to avoid leaching of materials to ground water.

Stockpiles must be provided on top of stable liner.

56. Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33% area should be included. The green belt should be around the project boundary and around the project boundary and a scheme for greening of the travelling roads should also be incorporated. All rooftops/terraces should have some green cover.

Please refer section 9.9 and Table 9.1,9.2,9.3, page C9‐12‐14.

57. A scheme for rainwater harvesting has to be put in place. Incorporation of water harvesting plan for the project is necessary, if source of water is bore well. Efforts should be made to make use of rain water harvested. If needed, capacity of the reservoir should be enhanced to meet the maximum water requirement. Only balance water requirement should be met from other sources.

Please refer 9.7.1, page C9‐10‐11 for detailed Rainwater harvesting plan. Also refer Annexure XIII

58. Detailed description of the flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) should be given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species.

Please refer section 3.9.1, page C3‐43‐64.

59. Action plan for the green belt should be included. The green belt development plan in 33% area should be scheme for greening of the travelling roads should also be incorporated. All rooftops/terraces should have some green cover.

Please refer section 9.9 and Table 9.1,9.2,9.3, page C9‐12‐14.

60. Detailed description of the flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) should be given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species

Please refer section 3.9.1 to , page C3‐43‐64.

61. Disaster Management Plan including risk assessment & damage control needs to be addressed and included. Landslide hazard map and mitigation plan, Earthquake history and management plan should be submitted.

Please refer section 8.0. , page C8‐1‐14

62. Occupational health: Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the exposure levels of above mentioned hazards and whether they are within Permissible Exposure level (PEL). If these are not within PEL, What measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that health of the workers can be preserved. Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers’ health is being evaluated by pre designed format, chest X rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre‐placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details regarding last month analysed data of above mentioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of exposure and department wise. Annual report of health status of workers with special reference

Please refer section 7.0. , page C7‐1‐17.





Sr.No. TOR COMPLIANCE to Occupational Health and Safety. Action plan for the implementation of OHS standards as per OSHAS/USEPA. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contracts and sub‐contract workers.

63. Plan for the implementation of the recommendations made for the steel plant in the CREP guidelines must be prepared.

Please refer Annexure X.

64. Corporate Environment PolicyDoes the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA reports. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating process/procedures to bring into focus any infringement/ deviation/ violation of the environmental or forest norms/ conditions? If so, it may be detailed in EIA. What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given. Does the company have system of reporting of noncompliance/violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and / or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism should be detailed in EIA report.

Corporate Environment Policy is under preparation as this is the new unit Please refer section 9.12, Page C9‐17 and Table 9.6, page 9‐20 for CSR.

65. At least 5% of the total cost of the project should be earmarked towards the Enterprise Social Commitment based on Public Hearing issued and item –wise details along with time bound action plan should be prepared and incorporated

Please refer section 9.12.6. Table 9.6, page c9‐19‐20.

66. A note on identification and implementation of Carbon Credit project should be included

Please refer section 4.7.6 , page C4‐47‐48.

67. Total capital cost and recurring cost /annum for environmental pollution control measures

Please refer section 6.5. Table 6.3, page C6‐4‐5.

68. Public hearing issues raised and commitments made by the project proponent on the same should be included separately in EIA/EMP Report in the form of tabular chart with financial budget for complying with the commitments made.

Not covered here, as this is draft EIA report. The issues and commitments to be included in final EIA Report.

69. Any litigation pending against the project and/ or any direction / order passed by any Court of law against the project, if so, details thereof.

Not Applicable.


Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat..

CHAPTER 2 :PROJECT DESCRIPTION


2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposes for an expansion in the integrated steel and

power plant at Survey no. 405/3, 406, 407, Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Anjar,

Kutch, Gujarat. The company has valid NOC for existing plant. The unit had received NOC

from GPCB for manufacturing of steel ingots and billets and as per NOC Order No: AWH‐

42263 dated 9.6.2011, valid up to 2.3.16.

This chapter deals with the technical details of the proposed integrated steel and captive

power plant, process and the capacity of the production units form the steel plant around

which the basic concept of a plant is developed. While the selection of a technology takes

into account factors like type of product, availability of local raw material, process status,

specific energy consumption, level of energy requirement, environment and pollution

status.

2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECT

As an emerging steel company in India, Jay Bharat Steel Corporation have always been

focused on constantly reinforcing the domestic business, the group is moving ahead with

steel like resolve to further enhance reputation as an important business enterprise of this

country. The year under progress too has been an exciting and thriving one in which Jay

Bharat Steel Corporation have put into practice some important plans that would further

strengthen the company’s operations. We are constantly on the move, bringing in

technological advancements and key changes which would insure that we keep on achieving

this creditable growth pattern year after year.

Jay Bharat TMT is a wonder product and a true TMT (Thermo Mechanically Treated) in a

thermal treatment process, in which rebar properties are attained by regulating the micro‐

structure. Modern, totally automatic, PLC based machines maintain temperature during

rolling process 1000o to 1100oC.

2.3 TYPE OF THE PROJECT

The proposed Project is to install integrated steel and captive power unit.





2.4 PROJECT COST AND SCHEDULE

The total cost of the project is estimated at Rs. 90Crore. Further, addition to the cost as

informed by the company is also considering suitable contingency provision over this cost.

The cost details of the project are given in the Table 2.1.

TABLE.2.1 PROJECT COST

Sr. No. Purpose Existing Cost Proposed Addition

Proposed Total

1 Land 2 5 7 2 Building 3 7 10 3 Plant & Machinery 4.22 63.53 67.75 4 Environmental Protection(Including ETP, APCD etc)4.a ETP 0 0.25 0.25 4.b Air pollution control 0.10 2.65 2.75 4.c Rain Water harvesting 0.20 0.30 0.50 5 Environment monitoring

and management 0.09 0.31 0.40

6 Solid and hazardous waste management

0.24 0.36 0.60

7 Occupation health 0.00 0.25 0.25 8 Green belt & Landscaping 0.15 0.35 0.50

Total 10 80 90

According to EIA notification 2006 and the amendment 2009, all metallurgical industries

(Ferrous &nonferrous) units, are covered under category A as per para 3(a).

2.5 SITE LOCATION

The proposed project of M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation is in Village‐Dhamadka, Bhuj

Bhachau road, Ta‐Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. Project site has very good infrastructure

facilities like power, water, and availability of skilled workers, well connected roadway and

transport infrastructure. The environmental setting of the site is presented in Table 2.2.

TABLE 2.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING AROUND THE PROJECT SITE

Sr. No

Particulars Details

1 Project location Village‐Dhamadka, Bhuj ‐ Bhachau road, Ta‐Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat

2 Total site area Existing land area is 21690.98 m2; and Proposed area is

50504.38 m2. Accumulated total area is 72195.36 m2

3 Latitude 23°18'53.54"N





Sr. No

Particulars Details

4 Longitude 70°11'29.34"E

5 Elevation above MSL 56 m

6 Present Land use Waste land 7 Climatic Conditions

(As per IMD) Annual average Maximum Temperature : 21.3° C to 35.3° C Annual average Minimum Temperature : 8.9° C to 22.6° C Annual average Rainfall : 710 mm Maximum average humidity: 96% Minimum average humidity: 43%

8 Existing drainage pattern at site

Nearly flat terrain at site. Drainage pattern of study area depicted in figure 3.5

9 Hills No Hills land in the Project area;10 Forest Land No forest land in the Project area; 11 Surface water bodies Tappar dam (7.81 km) 12 Nearest village

(habitation) Budhar Mora, (2.2 Km)

13 Nearest Town Gandhidham (26 km, SSW)

14 Dist. Head quarters Bhuj 49.86 km

15 Nearest Railway Station Gandhidham Railway Station,26 Km, SSW Bhachau Railway Station 15 Km, ESE

16 Nearest Highway SH‐ 42 (2.5 Km), NH 8A (12.5 km)

17 Nearest Airport Kandla Airport (26.16 km)

18 Ecologically sensitive zones within 10‐km distance

No notified eco sensitive areas are present within 10 km radius from the project site

19 Historical/ Archaeological places

No Historical/ archaeological places within 10 km radius from the project site.

20 National Parks/Wild Life Sanctuary

No national parks/wild life sanctuary is present within 10 km radius from the project site.

21 Major industries Mono Steel India Ltd Sanstar Biopolymers Ltd Navkaar Ispat Ltd Hans Ispat ltd Euro Ceramic Ltd TPI Ltd and many more.

22 Seismic Zone Zone V, as per IS‐1893, Part 1





FIGURE 2.1 CARTOGRAPHIC MAP OF PROPOSED PROJECT SITE

FIGURE 2.2 SITE GPS CORDINATES OF PROPOSED PROJECT SITE





FIGURE 2.3 SITE LAYOUT PLAN





2.5.1 PHOTOGRAPH OF EXISTING AND PROPOSED PLANT AREA

Existing Site





Proposed Site

Fig. 2.4 PHOTOGRAPH OF EXISTING AND PROPOSED PLANT AREA





2.6 SITE SELECTION FOR PROPOSED PROJECT

The site is selected for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install steel and power

Plant at Survey No 405/3, 406, 407, Village‐Dhamadka, Bhuj‐Bhachau road, Ta‐ Anjar, Dist;

Kutch, Gujarat involved the following criteria for evaluation:

• It is a Greenfield project with manufacture of steel and power unit

• Availability of land

• Availability of raw materials and all other facilities.

• Vicinity of ports for ease of import/export.

2.7 PROPOSED INFRASTRUCTURE

The onsite infrastructure to be developed as part of the Project is listed as below. The

proposed Project involves the construction of main plant building, control room, water

treatment plant, effluent treatment plant, administrative building, access & internal roads,

boundary wall, water pipelines, security gate.

2.8 PLANT LAYOUT AND CIVIL ENGINEERING ASPECTS

The plant layout has been developed considering the wind direction, environmental

constraints, and power evacuation corridor. The plot for the Project has been developed

taking into consideration various aspects like available land & its shape, ground features &

terrain, corridor for outgoing transmission lines, road approaches, prevailing wind direction

and the water availability. The switchyard orientation has been planned taking into

consideration the requirement of power evacuation. The Air Cooled Condenser has been

located considering safe distances from the switchyard and the main plant near water

intake side.

2.9 MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION

M/s. JayBharat steel corporation to set up Steel and Captive power plant. The details of the

proposed project are presented in Table.2.3.





TABLE 2.3 DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED PROJECT

SR. NO PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 1 Land Requirement 17.84 Acre= 72195.36 m2 2 Present Land use Westland category (Land without scrub) 3 Water Requirement 235KLD for Domestic and Industrial purpose. 4 Source of Power Paschim Gujarat Vij Company Ltd 5 Employment 250 approx. 6 Project coast 90Crore (Existing : 10 Crore, Proposed : 80 Crore)

2.9.1 Project cost

The total cost of the project is estimated at Rs. 90 Crore.

2.10 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION

The project from concept stage to commissioning would take about 18 months from the

zero date. Since the project is being setup by experienced persons, the planning and

implementation of the project is not much difficult job. Services of experienced consultants

are being utilized for detailed planning, preparation of techno‐economic feasibility report

and other associated activities like discussions with financial institutions, phasing of capital

expenditure etc. However, the implementation primarily will depend upon the statutory

environmental clearance.

The schedule for implementing the proposed project, as provided by the company, is given

in Table 2.4

TABLE 2.4 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

SR. NO. PARTICULARS APPROXIMATE PERIOD 1. Company Formation 3 months

2. Procurement Of Lease Hold / Freehold Land and Clearances

Land already occupied by promoters

Civil Work 3. I) Land Development 1 Month 4. Ii) Foundation For Building 2 Month 5. Iii) Foundation For Machinery 1 Month

6. Iv) Construction Of Building 6 Months Plant & Machinery 7. I) Order For Bought Out Items 2 Months 8. Ii) In House Fabricating 6 Months 9. Iii) Receipt Of Bought Out Items 8‐12 Months 10. Iv) Assembling/Fitting 3 Months 11. Trial Run 1 Month 12. Commercial Production 3 Months





2.11 DETAILS OF PRODUCT TO BE MANUFACTURED

The capacity along with the product manufacturing pattern is as shown in Table 2.5.

TABLE 2.5 LIST OF PRODUCT

SR. NO.

PARTICULAR PLANT CONFIGURATION

PRODUCT DETAILS PRODUCTION

Existing 1 Induction furnace 1 x 5 Ton MS Steel Ingots

/Billets 27576 TPA

2 CCM 6 x 11 strand Proposed

1 Induction furnace 7 x 15 Ton MS Steel Ingots /Billets

6,00,000 TPA 2 CCM 6 x 11 strand 3 Rolling Mill 2 x 30 Ton MS Joists 2,00,000 TPA

TMT Bars/Angles/Channels

2,00,000 TPA

4 Electric Arc furnace 1 x 5 Ton Silico Manganese 18,000 TPA 5 Power Plant 30+30 Ton AFBC Power 10 MWH

By‐product 1 Slag 1,44,000 TPA 2 Coal Ash/fines 25,000 TPA

2.12 DETAILS OF RAW MATERIALS

The details of Raw material to be consumed and other details are as follows:

TABLE 2.6 RAW MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR EXISITING AND PROPOSED PRODUCT

SR. NO.

NAME OF PRODUCT NAME OF RAW MATERIAL

EXISTING IN TPA

PROPOSED IN TPA

1 MS Steel Ingots / Billets Steel scrap 28333.6 605000 Sponge iron 2000 55000 Ferro alloys Nil 8900

2 MS Joists MS Billets Nil 220000

3 TMT Bars/ Angles/Channels MS Billets Nil 220000

4 Silico Manganese Manganese ore Nil 27000 Lime stone Nil 1000 Sand Nil 500

5 Power Plant Coal Nil 66000

The physical and chemical properties of the raw materials to be used for manufacturing

different products are tabulated in Table 2.7.





TABLE 2.7PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF THE RAW MATERIAL

Sr. No

Full name Of the raw materials

Main properties (refer MSDS, Sch‐9 of MSIHC Rules) B.P. °C

F.P. °C

LEL UEL

%

TLV ppm or mg/m

3

LD50 mg/Kg LC50

mg/l

Specific Gravity (water =1)

Vapor density (air=1)

Odour threshold ppm or mg/m

3 1. Steel scrap N.A Non

flammable

N.A 1.5 mg/m

3 N.A N.A N.A N.A

2. Sponge iron

N.A Non flammable

N.A 5.0 mg/m

3 N.A N.A N.A N.A

3. Sodium Ferro alloys

N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A

4. Manganese ore

N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 4700‐5900 kg/m

3

N.A N.A

5. Lime stone N.A N.A N.A 0.05 mg/m

3 N.A 2.55‐

2.85 N.A N.A

6. Sand N.A N.A N.A 0.05 mg/m

3 N.A 1.8‐2.5 N.A N.A

7. Coal N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 2.0‐3.0 N.A N.A

A storage detail of raw materials to be used for the manufacturing and the products has

been shown in Table 2.8.

TABLE 2.8.STORAGE, SOURCE AND TRANSPORTATION DETAILS OF RAW MATERIALS

Sr. No.

Name of the Raw Material

Source Transportation Storage

In Capacity of storage

1. Steel scrap Imported Road Yard 600 MT 2. Sponge iron Mono Steel Road Bunker 200 MT 3. SodiumFerro alloys Indigenous Road Yard 750 MT 4. MS Billets Captive Road Yard 400 Ton 5. Manganese ore H. K. Traders Road Yard 1000 Ton

6. Lime stone Local

suppliers Road Yard 200 Ton

7. Sand H. K. Traders Road Yard 200 Ton 8. Coal Imported Road Yard 500 Ton





2.13 Manufacturing process description

The manufacturing process flow diagram and the description for each product/process is

described below

2.13.1 Manufacturing process description for Induction Furnace

Induction furnace technology introduced in 70’s was upgraded in late 80’s by introducing

technology involving medium frequency with constant power track technology that is superior

to the electric arc furnace route due to certain advantages features viz.

A. Homologous melting with minimal scouring of the lining to ensure faster and

efficient production of high equality casting.

B. Optimum performance throughout the melting cycle, through automatic control of

generator power.

C. Metallurgic contamination of the charge being negligible.

D. Oxidization is minimized and a loss of expensive alloying elements in the melt is

reduced.

E. Heat loss through the refractory is minimized ensuring full utilization of the furnace

capacity.

F. Full and constant power is maintained right from the start of melting. Very short

time is required to reach working temperature that results in valuable energy saving.

G. Penetration through low cost raw materials viz., sponge iron, skull iron, still skull,

bundled scrap from bailing process. Ladle returns, punching, returns and risers etc, is

maintained.

H. Induction heating means cooler running equipment minimal fumes and low noise

level.

Induction Furnace, in simple terms, is like a transformer with induction coil acting as the

secondary. Therefore, the electrical coupling between the two to be optimally designed it

realized a high ratio of powder induced in the charge to the power induced in the charger to

the power available across the induction coil. In order to power factor capacitor banks are

incorporated in the circuit. The furnace crucible, lined with refractory lining, is surrounded

by water cooled Copper Coil, which carries the power, acting as primary. The crucible is





mounted on steel on steel frames which could be titled by hydraulic cylinders for employing

the melt when it is ready for pouring.

On the electrical side, The incoming 440 volts cycle goes through the solids generator where

it is converted to 1200 v 1600 to 1000 cycles There are automatic devices in the control

panel to get the necessary capacitor bank in the circuit which helps the furnace to draw the

power at the highest efficiency.

Sponge iron & Scrape in pre‐determined ratio and of consistent quantity depending upon

the nature of steel to be produce are charged into the induction furnace. This is provided

the initial condition of high‐flux path through the charge for facilitating generation of heat

and commencement of melting. The sponge iron and scrap is collected in skips in the

working platform and is charge into the furnace through the top by tipping skips. The larger

pieces of scrap are entered first and the smaller pieces are packed about them as possible.

Even after this, further charge may have to be added as the melting progresses.

To start the furnace the mains and cooling water are switched on. The furnace is charged up

to half and the power is switched on. The power is kept at 100 KW for 20 minutes to drive

away the moister, if any, from the lining. Then the power is increased gradually. In some of

the induction furnaces the power increase is automatic and the operator is free to

concentrated on charge in and slagging of within half an hour the charge will melt. More

sponge iron and scrap is added pushing it down with a bar so that it does not form a bride.

Further sponge iron and scrap are added till the furnace is full. i.e. 150 mm below the top

level that is normally the furnace capacity. The power is kept at 90% Slag is taken off and a

bath sample is taken for carbon analysis.

The power reduced while holding the melt waiting for the chemical analysis. As soon as the

carbon results is received the necessary petro‐coke and other allows are added and the

power is increased to bring the melt to tapping temperature. After the siag is taken off the

power is switched off so as to tilt the furnace to pour the molten metal into the ladles.

The furnace could be emptied to the extent necessary and further sponge iron and scrap

can be added to start a fresh melting cycle.





Water is circulated through the copper coils of the induction furnace to keep them cool. The

water from the furnace coils through the heat exchangers and goes through the coils again

and the second loop takes the water from the heat exchangers to the cooling tower and

brings it back to the heat exchangers. The water pipe has to be soft and dematerialized.

Otherwise scales would start building up inside the pipes and choke the flow of water

resulting in the overheating of the furnace. It is a common practice to have a de‐

mineralizing plant. An overhead tank of suitable capacity should also be built near the

furnace so that in case of electrical failure the water from the overhead tank can flow

through the furnace coil to keep it cool.

Process Flow Chart Of Induction Furnace

2.13.1.1 Mass balance for induction furnace

Input material Quantity Output material Quantity MS scrap 605000 TPA MS Billets/Ingots 600000 TPA Sponge iron 55000 TPA slag 55000 TPA Ferro alloys 8900 TPA Losses 5000 TPA Flue Dust 8900 TPA Total 668900 TPA Total 668900 TPA

2.13.2 Manufacturing process description for Rolling Mill

The process of re‐rolling involves several steps:

1. Selection of raw materials

2. Shearing and preparing

3. Heating in coal‐fired furnace

Sponge Iron

Scrape

16000C

furnace steel melt

Elec. Power

Concast Moulds

Final Product Ingots or Billets





4. Rolling

5. Quality control

6. Dispatch

The raw material for the proposed unit is ingot, billets, bloom, slab etc. Raw material of

requisite composition, after receipt will be inspected and checked. Raw material shall be cut

to proper size for heating in the furnace. The material to be passed for re‐rolling will be

charged into re‐heating furnace. The raw materials will be heated up to its re‐crystallization

temp. in furnace and is after heating the same will be taken out and is then fed to rolling

stands. Basically, the heating operation is intended to rise as uniformly as possible, the temp.

of the ingots/billets/blast etc, to the level appropriate for hot rolling. Optimum temp.for

rolling semi‐finished products depends upon their compositions. Preferred rolling temp.for

high carbon steels reached in oxidizing atmosphere are usually in the rate of 1100 Deg. Cent.

The adequately heated work prices are introduced into re‐rolling mills in which a number of

carbon steels are chilled steel rolls works successively. This cross section of the material

decrease to a fixed value after every pass. Adjusting the roll passes designs can be obtained

the products of desired cross section. The desired shaped produce is obtained from last or

finishing rolls. Thus the ingots/billets after testing are processed through a shearing machine

so as to cut them into reheating furnace, where it is heated at temp. 1100 to 1200 Deg. Cent.

Reduction by compression in roller and mills stands. This operation is normally carried out in a

roughing mill stand and finishing mill stand in total seven stands it passes. The hot rolled

products are then cooled on a cooling bed i.e. platform open to atmosphere.

The edges of the rolled products are trimmed and normal grinding operations are carried out.

The output is now finished goods. Quality control measures include dimensional check‐up in

shares and sizes, tensile testing, chemical analysis to confirm to the desired specifications, etc.

The processing time in the furnace takes about 5 to 6 hrs. No by‐products are generated

except the wastage due to end cuttings.





2.13.2.1Mass balance for rolling mill

Input material Quantity Output material Quantity MS Billets 440000 TPA MS joists 200000 TPA TMT Bars/ Angles/Channels 200000 TPA Losses 16000 TPA Flue Dust 4000 TPA Total 440000 TPA Total 440000 TPA

2.13.3 Process description for power plant

The design, manufacture, inspection, testing and installation of all equipment and systems

of the proposed CPP shall conform to the Indian and international standards and best

engineering practices

Ü Steam Turbine Generators (STG) are the main assembly in the Power Plant.

Ü The steam generator(s) shall be Atmospheric Fluidized Bed Combustion (AFBC) semi‐

outdoor type.

Ü The boiler shall receive the water from specialised Water Treatment System; which shall

convert raw water to soft water suitable for the boiler application.

PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM OF MS STEEL INGOTS, MS JOISTS, TMT BARS

Sponge Iron Steel SCRAP Silico Manganese

Induction Furnace

CCM

MS Billets

Rolling Mill

TMT Bars /Angles/Channels MS joints





Ü The steam generated at Boiler will be passed through the Turbine attached to it.

Ü In turbine Generator, the steam will be used to rotate the coil in magnetic field to

produce electricity.

Ü This electrical energy will be stored at step‐up transformer; from where, it is transmitted

at high voltage to step‐down transformer for distribution.

Ü Part of the steam shall be used to regenerate the feed water temperature and thereby

improve the thermodynamic cycle efficiency.

Ü The steam after doing work in STG shall pass through a condenser, which shall be cooled

by an external circulation of water. This water shall be cooled in cooling tower, which

shall be open to the atmosphere. The condensate so formed shall be pumped back vide

pumps to the deaerator and then to the boiler.

Ü The coal/lignite combustion will emit exhaust gasses, which shall be passed through an

electrostatic precipitator, which will reduce the emission levels before passing out

through the chimney.

Ü The ash generated from the boiler shall be sent through a high‐pressure pneumatic

system to transfer ash to a silo.

Ü There will be other auxiliary systems which shall be used to like Compressed air system,

air‐conditioning system, etc.

Process flow Diagram of power plant

Turbine

Generator

Power

Steam





2.13.4 Process description for by‐products

A. Silico Manganse

• Silico manganese is produced by carbo‐thermic reduction of oxidic raw materials in

electric submerged arc furnaces. The same type of furnaces is used for FeMn and

SiMn alloys. Operation of the SiMn process is often more difficult than the FeMn

process because higher process temperature is needed. The size of the SiMn

furnaces is usually in the range 15‐40 MVA.

• Standard silico manganese with 18‐20 % Si and about 70% Mn is produced from a

blend of HCFeMn slag with about 35 to 45% MnO, manganese ores, quartzite, (Fe) Si‐

remelts or off grade qualities, and coke, sometimes minor amount of MgO‐

containing minerals are added, e.g. dolomite [Caco3 .Mgco3] Or olivine

{(Mgo)2.Sio2}.The discard slag from the SiMn process normally contains 5 to 10 %

Mno. low carbon silico manganese with around 30% Si is produced by upgrading

standard alloy by addition of silicon wastes from the ferrosilicon industry.

• Manganese ores normally contain unwanted elements that cannot be removed in

the mining and processing stages of special importance is phosphorus due to the

strict demands in respect of this element both in the FeMn and SiMn alloys. Iron,

phosphorus and arsenic are reduced more easily than manganese and will

consequently go first into the metal. Their content in the final alloy must therefore

be controlled by selection of ores. The HCFeMn slag is a very pure source of

manganese because the easily reduced impurities in the ores have been taken up by

the HCFeMn metal in the preceding process step. The content of impurities, like

phosphorus, in SiMn alloys is therefore controlled, not only by the selection of

manganese ores, but also by the relative amounts of manganese ores and HCFeMn

slag in the raw material mix.

• A process temperature of 1600 to 1650 c is necessary to obtain metal with

sufficiently high content of Si and discard slag with low Mno. FeMn slag has a

relatively low melting temperature (about 1250 c) compared with Mn‐ores.

Accordingly a high share of FeMn slag will tend to give lower process temperatures

{1}. When the Mn‐ore starts melting at around 13500 C {2], it will contain a mixture





of a solid and liquid phase, where the solid phase is Mno. Further heating and

reduction to 1550 c or more is necessary before the melting ore will mix with the

slag and flow freely with a high share of Mn‐ore in the mix, the surface temperature

and process temperature in the coke bed zone will be higher.

• The specific power consumption for production of standard SiMn a mixture of Mn‐

ore, HCFeMn slag and Si‐rich metallic metals, can typically be 3500‐4500 kWh/tonne

metal, dependent first of all on the amount of metallic added to the feed. The power

consumption will increase the Si‐content of the metal produced and also with the

amount of slag per tonne of SiMn. Each additional 100 kg slag produced will

consume additional about 50 kWh electric energy. About 100 kWh tonne of metal

and some coke will be saved if the ore fraction in the charge is reduced to MnO by

CO gas ascending from the smelt reduction zone.

Input material Quantity Output material Quantity Manganese Ore 27000 TPA Silico Manganese 18000 TPA Lime stone 1000 TPA Losses 9500 TPA Sand 500 TPA Flue Dust 1000 TPA Total 28500 TPA Total 28500 TPA

PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM OF SILICO MANGANESE

Manganese Ore Lime Stone Sand

Arc Furnace

Tapping

Barking

Silico Manganese





B. Manufacturing process with flow diagram Slag grinding

2.14 STACK DETAILS

The site specific and monitored details considered for input data for the software “ISCST3”

by Lakes Environmental for prediction of impact on air environment are given in the below

Table 2.9

TABLE 2.9 FLUE GAS STACK

Sr. No.

Stack attached to

Height of stack, m

Diameter

of stack, m Fuel

Fuel Consump‐tion

APC System

Expected Pollutant

Concentra‐tion

EXISTING FLUE GAS EMISSION

1 Induction Furnace

30 0.20 Electricity

400 KVA

Pulse jet bag filter PM

SO2 NOx

As per GPCB Norms 2

D.G.Set‐1 (380KVA)

10 0.15 HSD 30 Lit/hr Not Applicable

PROPOSED FLUE GAS EMISSION


45 0.30 Coal/ Lignite 200

MT/day

ESP PM SO2 NOx

As per GPCB Norms 4

Boiler‐2 (30 Ton)

45 0.30 Coal/ Lignite

ESP

5 D.G.SET: 1000 KVA

12 0.15 HSD 100 Lit/hr NOT APPLICABLE

Process Flow Diagram for Slag Grinding

Slag

1stCrusher

2ndCrusher

Magnetic Separator

Metal Slag






2.15.1 Land Requirement

The area allocated at site for various manufacturing and other plant facilities are provided in

Table 2.10.


Sr. No.

Details Existing Survey No 407 in Acres

Proposed Survey No 405/3, 406 in Acres

Total Area in Acres

1 Cycle / scooter Parking 0.04 0.1 0.14 2 Greenbelt Area 1.8 4.0872 5.8872 3 Car parking 0.0 0.35 0.35 4 Administrative Building 0.097 0 0.097 5 DG Set / Compressor House 0.096 0 0.096 6 Over head Water Tank 0.071 0 0.071 7 Service, Workshop and

Refractories 1.9772 3.9428 5.92 8 Open Area 1.2788 4 5.2788 9 Total Land Area 5.36 12.48 17.84


Sr. No.

Details Existing Survey No 407 in Square mtr

Proposed Survey No 405/3, 406 in Square mtr

Total Area in Square mtr

1 Cycle / scooter Parking 161.873 404.6825 566.5555 2 Greenbelt Area 7284.29 16540.18 23824.47 3 Car parking 0 1416.389 1416.389 4 Administrative Building 392.542 0 392.542 5 DG Set / Compressor House 388.495 0 388.4952 6 Overhead Water Tank 287.325 0 287.3246 7 Service, Workshop and

Refractories 8001.38 15955.82 23957.2 8 Open Area 5175.08 16187.3 21362.38 9 Total Land Area 21690.98 50504.38 72195.36

.

2.15.2 Water requirement

Water requirement for the project will be met from the Narmada water supply. The details

of water requirement for various processes/purposes are given in Table2.12Refer Figure 2.4

to 2.6for Water Balance diagram.





TABLE 2.12 TOTAL WATER REQUIREMENTS FOR THE EXISTING &PROPOSED PROJECT

Sr. No. Category Existing Water Consumption, KL/day

Proposed Water Consumption, KL/day

Total Water Consumption, KL/day

1 Domestic 10.0 10.0 20.0

2 Industrial a. Cooling 25.0 160.0 185.0


c. Others Nil 7.0 7.0


TOTAL (Industrial + Domestic) 35.0 200.0 235.0

The water will be fulfilled by Narmada water.

TABLE 2.13 WASTEWATER GENERATION

Sr. No.

Category Existing wastewater generation, KL/day

Proposed wastewater generation, KL/day

Total wastewater generation, KL/day

1 Domestic 7.5 4.0 11.5

2 Industrial a. Cooling Nil Nil Nil


c. Others Nil Nil Nil

d. D. M. Plant Nil 13.0 13.0

TOTAL (Industrial + Domestic)

7.5 19.0 26.5

Total Industrial Nil 15.0 15.0

2.15.3 Wastewater management

The wastewater will be mainly generated from the boiler and D. M. Plant. The wastewater

generated will be treated in ETP and treated effluent is used for gardening and dust

suppression.

Sewage (domestic wastewater)

Domestic wastewater: 11.5 KLD will be generated from domestic activities. Domestic waste

water will be disposed off through septic tank / soak pit system.





FIGURE 2.5 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM FOR THE EXISITING

FIGURE 2.6 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM FOR THE PROPOSED PROJECT

Total Water 35 KL/DAY

Domestic 10KL/DAY Industrial 25KL/DAY

Soak Pit 7.5 KL/DAY Cooling 25KL/DAY

Nil

Total Water 200 M3/DAY

Industrial 190 M3/DAY Domestic 10M3

/DAY

Soak pit 4M3/DAY

Cooling 160m3/day

Boiler 10 m3/day

Other 7m3/day

D.M. plant 13 m3

/day

Nil 2m3/day Nil 13m3/day

ETP 15m3/day

Treated effluent used for Gardening & Dust suppression





FIGURE 2.7 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM FOR THE PROPOSED TOTAL

2.15.4 Power requirement

Ü Electricity

Main Source : PGVCL

Existing : 20MW

Proposed : 20MW

D. G. Set ‐1(Existing) : 380 KVA

D.G.Set‐2(Proposed) : 1000 KVA

2.15.5 Fuel requirement

Ü Details of fuels used for the project are given inTable 2.14

Total Water 235 M3/DAY

Industrial 215 M3/DAY Domestic 20 M3

/DAY

Soak pit 11.5 M3/DAY

Cooling 185 m3/day

Boiler 10 m3/day

Other 7m3/day

D.M. plant13 m3

/day

Nil 2m3/day Nil 13m3/day

ETP 15m3/day

Treated effluent used for Gardening & Dust suppression





TABLE 2.14 FUEL DETAILS

Air pollution source Fuel Consumption Boiler‐1 and 2 (for Power Plant) Lignite

or coal 200 MT/day or 250 MT/day

D. G. Set‐380 KVA &1000 KVA HSD 130Liters / Hour

The storage details of the fuel used for the project are given in Table 2.15

TABLE 2.15FUEL STORAGE DETAILS

Fuel Method of storage Maximum quantity stored at site

Operating Condition Press. Temp. 0C

Coal & Lignite Storage yard ‐‐ Atmospheric Atmospheric temp

HSD Drums 500 lit Atmospheric Atmospheric temp

2.15.6 Manpower requirement

Industrialization uplifts the socio‐economic standard of local people surrounding the plant

site due to proposed capacity increase. During the construction phase work will be

generated for skilled, semiskilled and unskilled labors. Technical persons will be recruited

during the operation phase. It is estimated to employ direct /indirect employment of 50‐100

people of various skills.

TABLE2.16 MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS

Sr. No.

Particular Power Plant

Silico Manganese

MS Joists MS Steel Ingots / Billets

TMT Bars/ Angles/ Channels

A Managerial 2 2 2 2 2 B Supervisory 6 6 6 6 6 C Skilled 40 14 14 14 14 D Unskilled 10 30 30 30 30

TOTAL 58 52 52 52 52

2.15.7 Details of effluent treatment plant

Waste Water from boiler blow down and the D.M. plant comes to the ETP for the

treatment. It is collected and neutralize in collection cum neutralization tank if it is required.

Mainly industrial effluent is neutral in nature. However industry has provided two dosing

Draft EIA Re

Survey No 4

CHAPTER 2

tank for

tank, for

intermed

drying be

passing t

waste wa

the gard

hazardou

Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

eport for M/s. Ja

405/3,406,407 Vi

2 :PROJECT DE

acid and alk

r the settle

diate tank a

ed.Then eff

to the sand

ater is colle

ening and s

us (M&H) ru

Detai

Collec

Prima

Sludg

Interm

Press

Activa

Lime Treat

y Bharat Steel C

illage Dhamadka

ESCRIPTION

kaline soluti

ement of h

nd sludge f

luent is goe

filter, carbo

ected in Trea

sprinkled ET

les 2008.

TABL

FIG

ls ction cum Neary Settling Tae Drying Bed mediate Holdure Sand Filteated Carbon Fstone Filter ed waste wat

Corporation prop

a, Bhuj Bhachau

on.Then neu

heavier part

rom bottom

es to interm

on d filter a

ated waste

TP sludge is

LE 2.17 SIZIN

GURE 2.8 ET

utralization Tank ing tank er Filter

ter collection

osed to install in

Road, Ta- Anjar,

utralized eff

ticles in the

m of primary

mediate tank

nd lime sto

water collec

hazardous

NG OF THE E

TP FLOW DIA

Tank

tank

ntegrated steel an

r, Dist; Kutch, Guj

fluent is goe

e effluent.

y settling ta

k. Effluent fr

ne filter res

ction tank.T

waste, whic

ETP UNITS

AGRAMS

No.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

nd power Plant a

ujarat..

es to the pri

Supernatan

ank is collec

rom interme

spectively. F

Treated wate

ch is handle

Size 10.5 X13.5 X13.5 X13.5 X400 m400 m‐‐‐ 9.6 X

at

imary settlin

nt is goes t

ted in sludg

ediate tank

inally treate

er is used fo

ed as per th

X 7.8 X 10.5 X 4.5 X 3.6 X 9 X 7 X 9 X 7 mm dia mm dia

10.5 X 6

ng

to

ge

is

ed

or

he





2.16 ATMOSPHERIC EMISSIONS

Ü FLUE GAS CHARACTERISTICS

The details of the stack and characteristics of the various flue gases generated at the site are

given in Table 2.18 and 2.19.

TABLE 2.18FLUE GAS STACK DETAILS (Existing)

Sr. No

Stack attached to Height & Dia. of the stack In meter

APC System

Expected Pollutant

GPCB Limit

1 Induction Furnace 30 Pulse jet bag Filter

PM SO2 NOx

As per GPCB Norms 2 D. G. Set: 380 KVA 10 Not Applicable

TABLE 2.19 FLUE GAS STACK DETAILS (Proposed)

Sr. No.

Stack attached to

Height & Dia. of the stack In meter

APC System Expected Pollutant

GPCB Limit

1 Boiler‐1 (30Ton) 45 ESP PM SO2 NOx

As per GPCB Norms 2 Boiler‐2 (30Ton) 45 ESP

3 D.G.Set:1000 KVA 12 Not Applicable

Ü PROCESS GAS CHARACTERISTICS

The details of the stack and characteristics of the various process gases generated at the site

are given in Table 2.20

TABLE 2.20 PROCESS GAS STACK DETAILS (Proposed)

Sr. No

Stack attached to Height & Dia. of the stack In meter

APC System

Expected Pollutant

GPCB Limit

1 Rolling Mills 25 Bag Filter PM As per GPCB Norms

2 Induction Furnace 15 Bag Filter

3 Arc Furnace 25 Bag Filter

4 Power Plant 45 ESP

5 Coal crusher 15 Bag Filter

2.17 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT


Quantity of Hazardous and Solid wastes generation & disposal by various methods has been

shown in Table. 2.21 The Solid / hazardous waste will be stored at separated Hazardous

Waste Storage Area for disposal.





TABLE 2.21 HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION

Sr. No Description Category Quantity Mode of Disposal 1 ETP Waste 34.3 Existing: NIL

Proposed: 1.5 MT/Year Collection, storage and Disposal at TSDF Site


5.1 Existing: NIL Proposed: 5.4 MT/Year



33.1 Existing: NIL Proposed: 720 nos./Year


2.18 PREVAILING ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY STANDARDS

2.18.1 Effluent disposal standards

The prevailing standards for disposal existing in the region are presented at Table

2.22(A).The industry has to adopt the “zero effluent discharge” policy for the existing and

proposed project. However, the GPCB has provided norms of effluent disposal in case of

accidental discharge as shown in table below: The industry shall have to obtain the ‘Consent

to Establish’ before erection of the project and ‘Consent to Operate’ before operation of the

project, under the Water Act – 1974, as amended from time to time, from the Gujarat

Pollution Control Board for disposal of wastewater.

TABLE 2.22(A) TREATED EFFLUENT QUALITY (TO BE RECYCLED)

SR. NO. PARAMETER PERMISSIBLE STANDARDS 1 pH 6.5 to 8.5 2 Temperature(

0C) 40 deg. C

3 Colour (Pt‐Co scale) 100 units 4 Total Suspended Solids 100 mg/l 5 Total Dissolved Solids 2100 mg/l 6 Phenolic Compounds 1 mg/l

7 Ammonical Nitrogen 50 mg/l 8 BOD(5 days at 200C) 30 mg/l 9 COD 100 mg/l 10 Oil Grease 20mg/l

11 %Na 60 12 Sodium Absorption Ratio 26 13 Bio‐assay test 90% survival after 96 hrs in 10% effluent





2.18.2 Air emission standards

The unit has proposing one DG set. Additional power requirement (40 MW) is proposed for

the steel plant project. The applicable permissible limits for flue gas emissions are provided

in Table 2.22 (B). And since, the project site has been designated as industrial area; the

applicable permissible limits for ambient air quality will be as provided in Table 2.22(C).

The industry shall have to obtain the ‘Consent to Establish’ before erection of the project

and ‘Consent to Operate’ before operation of the project, under the Air Act‐ 1981, as

amended from time to time, from the Gujarat Pollution Control Board for operation of

Furnace& process involving emissions.

TABLE 2.22(B) FLUE GAS EMISSION STANDARDS FOR EXISTING PLANT

STACK ATTACHED TO DETAILS

FUEL/PRODUCT POLLUTANT PARAMETER

PERMISSIBLE NORMS OF MPCB

Induction Furnace Electricity Pulse jet bag Filter 150 mg/Nm

3 100 ppm 50 ppm

DG Set (380 KVA) Diesel PM

SO2 NOx

TABLE 2.22(C) AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS

POLLUTANT PARAMETER TIME‐WEIGHTED AVERAGE EMISSION STANDARDSPM10(<10 micron) Annual Average* 40 µg/m3

24 Hours** 60 µg/m3 PM 2.5(<2.5 micron) Annual Average* 60 µg/m3

24 Hours** 100 µg/m3 SO2 Annual Average* 50 µg/m3

24 Hours** 80 µg/m3 NOx Annual Average* 40 µg/m3

24 Hours** 80 µg/m3 Note: * Annual Arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval ; **24 hourly/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year, however 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on two consecutive days.

2.18.3 Ambient noise standards

The ambient noise level standards for industrial area are as depicted in Table 2.22(D).

TABLE 2.22(D) AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS IN RESPECT OF NOISE

Area code Category of Area/zone Limits in db(A) Leq Day Time Night Time

A Industrial area 75 70





Note: 1. Day time shall mean from 6.00 a.m to 10.00 p.m. 2. Night time shall mean from 10.00 p.m to 6.00 a.m. 3. db (A) Leq denotes the time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels on scale a which

is relatable to human hearing. 4. A “decibel” is a unit in which noise is measured. 5. “A”, in db(A) Leq, denotes the frequency weighting in the measurement of noise and

corresponds to frequency response characteristics of human ear. 6. Leq: it is energy mean of the noise level over a specified period.

2.19 NORMS FOR HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL

The industry shall have to obtain the ‘Authorization’ for the relevant categories of waste to

be generated before operation of the project, under the HW (M&H) Rules‐ 1989, as

amended from time to time, from the Gujarat Pollution Control Board for disposal of

hazardous waste and it shall have to obtain the membership of a common TSDF site and

comply with all the provisions applicable under the said Rules.



CHAPTER 3 :DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT


3.0 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

3.1 GENERAL

Baseline Environmental Studies are prepared or evaluated for its usefulness (and updated if

necessary) for any area to be used by any organization or individual for preparation of EIA &

EMP for development project. The baseline environment studies are conducted based on

existing environmental information related to storage, release, treatment, or disposal of

hazardious substances, or any other contaminant in the environment of the project area to

determine or discover the obviousness of the presence or likely presence of a release or

threatened release of any hazardious substance or pollutant. In certain cases, additional

data, including sampling, if appropriate under the circumstances, may be needed in the

baseline study. A baseline study also may help to satisfy other environmental requirements

(for example, to sarisfy the requirements of some regulatory provision for payment of

compensation or to facilitate the preparation of environmental condition reports). In

addition, the baseline study provides a useful reference document and assists in compliance

with hazard abatement actions related to hazardous substance management and disaster/

emergency management etc. The baseline study consists of discrete steps, which principally

addresses environment quality related sample, information& data gathering and analysis.

The present chapter describes various component of such studies related with the

prevailing/baseline environmental status. All necessary details including the collection &

generation of primary & secondary data as well as described or illustration of environmental

status has been incorporated under respective heading. All necessary details of baseline

environmental status/study as required to comply with the awarded ToR from Expert

Apprisal Committee, New Delhi have been covered in this chapter.

3.1.1 Purpose & objective of baseline study

The main purpose of the baseline study is to delineate the prevailing environmental

condition for conducting an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) in order to determine

certain elements of the environmental condition of project area. This effort is conducted to





Fulfill certain requirements of the Comprehensive Environmental Studies, as required to

comply with the standards timely issued by the concerned authority. As such, this practice is

intended to help a user to gather and analyse data and information in order to classify the

environmental status into several environmental conditions of area types.

Objective guiding the baseline environmental studies are,

• To delineate the prevailing environmental condition of project/study are as per

awarded ToR issued by EAC, New Delhi for EIA study

• To generateand/or collect the information of physical, chemical properties of the

environment of the project area, which includes data indicating quality& prevailing

status of air, water resources, soil fertility, noise, flora & fauna, ecological habitats etc

• To study & generate/prepare the LULC map, Topographic map, Cartographic Map of

10km radial area from the site

• To generate and/or collect details regarding climatic condition of project area

• To generate and/or collect details regarding socio economic & cultural layout

• To prepare comprehensive statements for citation of existing/ prevailing issue of

contamination of environmental attributes

• To facilitate the use of the standard classification of environmental condition of area

type (viz. unpolluted zone, polluted zone, critically polluted zone and sensitive zone

etc.) with respect to the statutory guidelines of the time of study

• To facilitate the organization of EIA study & proponent for preparing and updating EIA

& EMP reports

3.2. APPROACH & METHODOLOGY OF BASELINE STUDY

The baseline environmental study for the EIA of upcoming project of M/s. JayBharat Steel

Corporation has been done by following the guidelines of MoEF. Initally, the draft ToRs

proposed with form‐1 were considered for conducting study for 10 kms area and finally the

study was finalized with the ToRs approved by the Expert Apprisal Committee (EAC), New

Delhi. The details of approved ToRs are presented in the earlier chapter‐1 as well as





Annexure‐1. The details of the study period, frequency of sampling & method of

environmental sampling & analysis are shown below in succeeding paragraphs under

respective titles.

3.2.1 Study area & sampling locations

3.2.1.1 Study area

The project area is situated in the Western part of Gujarat, which is very well known for its

natural beauty and non‐polluting industrial development. The region is exhibiting good area

and a wellknown Tapar Dam. The area was considerably undeveloped in early 90s; but, in

last decade by sharing vital input through industrial development and implementation of

government actions/plan of development, the area has shown significant development. For

the purpose of the EIA study, area falls within 10 km radius from the project site

(uncultivated land, Dhamadka village) was selected as study area. The base map of study

area & sampling locations is illustrated below in Fig. 3.1, whereas, the sailent features of the

project area are tabulated in subsequent Table 3.1.

TABLE 3.1 SAILENT FEATURES OF PROJECT AREA (10 KM RADIUS)

Sr.No. Nearest Infrastructure Feature Approx. Aerial Distance from project site 1 Geographical Position Lat.: 23°18'54.6909"N,

Long.: 70°11'29.2821"E 2 Elevation above sea level 56 Meters 3 Nearest Village Bhudarmora‐2.2km North 4 Nearest Town Bhachau ‐15km South East

5 Nearest National Highway NH‐12.5km South East 6 Nearest State Highway SH‐42 North (Bhuj‐Bhachu Highway) 7 Nearest Railway Station Bhachau ‐15km South East 8 Nearest Airport Kandla‐26km South West 9 Nearest Surface water

Resource/Reservoir Tapar Dam‐7.8km SW

10 Forest Land No forest land in the study area 11 National Park/Sanctuary/ or

Ecologically Sensitive Area Within 10km Not falling any ecological sensitive areas.

12 Tourist Places Within 10km Not falling any tourist place.





3.2.1.2 Sampling Locations

Locations for sampling & monitoring have been selected within 10km radial area from the

site. The locations are selected based on propable effects in project area. Two locations of

AAQM are selected in Upwind Direction. Four locations were selected from downwind

direction and two locations were selected in Crosswind direction within 10km radius from as

per Terms of Reference. The details of selected sampling & monitoring locations are

presented in Table3.2

TABLE 3.2 SAMPLING & MONITORING LOCATIONS (STUDY AREA‐10KM)

Sr. No.

Name of Location Approx. Aerial Distance & Direction from Site

Details of sampling & Monitoring

1 Project Site (Lat. 23.3137 N, Long. 70.1919 E)

0.0 km Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Soil and Noise

2 Morgar (Lat. 23.3401 N, Long. 70.2065 E)


3 Krishna Nagar (Lat. 23.3419 N, Long. 70.2455 E)


4 Lunva (Lat. 23.2737 N, Long. 70.2467 E)

6.35km SE Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Soil and Noise

5 Pashuda (Lat. 23.2282 N, Long. 70.1999 E)

9.43km SSW Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Surface water, Soil and Noise

6 Tapar Dam (Lat. 23.25 N, Long. 70.1343 E)

9.30km SW Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Surface water, Soil and Noise

7 Dudhai (Lat. 23.3178 N, Long. 70.1259 E)

6.85km WNW Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Soil and Noise

8 Amrapar (Lat. 23.3651 N, Long. 70.1508 E)

7.50km NW Sampling: Ambient Air Quality, Ground Water, Surface water, Soil and Noise

9 Pakadsar (Lat. 23.3317 N, Long. 70.2418 E)

5.5km NNE Sampling: Surface water

10 Chopadva (Lat. 23.2797 N, Long. 70.2796 E)

9.55km ESE Sampling: Surface water

11 Kotda Lake (Lat. 23.2905 N, Long. 70.0991 E)

9.50km W Sampling: Surface water

12 Aamardi (Lat. 23.3301 N, Long. 70.2214 E)

3.43 km NEE Sampling: Surface water





FIGURE 3.1 BASE MAP OF STUDY AREA SHOWING SAMPLING &

MONITORING LOCATIONS (10KM)





3.2.2 Study period & frequency of sampling

The baseline environmental study was done by following the guidelines of MoEF. Initially,

the draft ToRs proposed with Form‐1 were considered for conducting study for 10 km area

and finally the study was finalized with the ToRs approved by the Expert Apprisal Committee

of MoEF, New Delhi. As the awarded ToRs indicated the map of 10km area, All other

primary study completed for monitoring & ampling of Air, Water, Soil and Noise samples

were found complying with the Approved ToRs awarded by EAC, MoEF, New Delhi. The

draft& approved ToRs are inscribed earlier in Chapter‐1. The details of the study period,

frequency of sampling & method of environmental sampling & analysis are shown below in

succeeding paragraphs under respective titles.

3.2.2.1 Study Period & Frequency of Sampling

As, described above, the period of baeline study was Decemner 2012 to Febuary 2013 to

collect one season data. As the approved ToRs indicated necessity of one season data only,

the study completed in this period has been found to be complying with the awarded ToR.

The frequency of various environmental sampling &analysis was determined following the

guidelines provided by MoEF manual. The details of frequency of environmental sampling

considered for the study are illustered in Table‐3.3.

3.2.2.2 Method of Sampling & Analysis

Selection of method for sampling, preservation and analysis play very important role in

baseline environmental study. Considering the necessity of quality in environmental

sampling & analysis, CPCB has issued guidelines for sampling & analysis. Even the EIA

manual published by MoEF has also provided necessary guidelines for baseline study.

Considering these guidelines, methods of sampling & analysis of environmental samples

have been selected/adopted. The method adopted for environmental sampling & analysis

are illustrated in following Table.3.4.





TABLE 3.3 FREQUENCY OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

Attributes Sampling Locations Frequency

A. Air Environment Meteorological Data Project site Hourly continuous during study

period Ambient Air Quality 8 Locations in the study area 24 hourly twice a week during

study period B.Noise 8 Locations from study area Once in study period C.Water Ground Water Grab samples from 8 locations from

study area Once in study period

Surface Water Grab samples from 7 locations from study area

Once in study period

D.Soil Quality Surface soil samples from 8 locations within study area

Once in study period

E.Land use‐Land cover & Topography

Study area (10km radius) Once in study period

F.Ecological Data Study area (10km radius) Once in study period G. Socioeconomic Data Study area (10km radius) Once in study period H. Other Maps Study area (10km radius) Once in study period

TABLE 3.4 METHOD OF ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLING & ANALYSIS

Attributes Method Sampling/ Preservation Analysis

A. Air Environment I. Meterorological

data II. Ambient Air Quality

Automatic weather station (AWS) As per CPCB Guidline (Respirable dust sampler and PM2.5 Sampler)

Computer aided data analysis. As per IS5182 [Part‐,(2) &(33)] 2006

B. Noise Instrument: Noise level meter Mathematical calculations C. Water & Waste water

i. Ground Water Standard methods for examination of water and wastewater analysis published by APHA

Standard method for expantion of water and wastewater analysis published by APHA.

D. Soil Quality Laboratory guide for conducting soil test & plant analysis.

Laboratory Guide for conducting soil test & plant analysis.

E. Land use‐Landcover & Topography & Other Maps

Satellite imageries, IRS P6, LISS III 2013 data, Sacale 1:50000, collected from NRSC, Hyderabad.

Primary thematic mapping, Image processing, Topographical studies using ArcGIS, Erdas imagine and Surfur tools.

F. Ecological Data Secondary data collection from district forest department &Wildlife Forest Dept & Primary study of basic survey of non‐forest area as well as field verification details

Necessary study with reference to scheduled species as per regulatory provisions and LUCN guideline & information.

G. Socio‐Economic Data Census of India 2001 Manual interpretation and analysis





3.3 DESCRIPTION OF BASELINE ENVIRONMENT

As mentioned above, the baseline study for the present EIA was conducted during months

of December 2012 to Febuary 2013 in accordance with the draft ToRs proposed in Form I

submitted for EAC for scoping. The study was conducted with reference to draft ToRs in

initial stage and up on receipt of approved ToRs, condition given the approved ToRs were

referred for verification of scope of baseline study. The study was conducted to comply with

all conditions of approved ToRs issued by EAC, New Delhi. As described above, all

monitoring & sampling done in the period of Dec 2012 to Feb 2013 covered the requirement

of awarded ToR. Therefore, the study of maps preparation has been revised to comply with

awarded ToRs.

The study was conducted to determine the prevailing status of ambient air, water quality,

soil quality, landuse, topography, meteorology, ecology and socioeconomic layout. The

samples & analysis were done as per the method cited above at the selected location

tabulated in earlier sections. The details regarding the outcomes of the baseline study are

described in subsequent sections under prespective heading.

3.3.1 The study area

For studying the present Environmental Setting, area falling within 10 km radius from the

source is considered as the study area. The study area covers rural area with 19 villages of

Kutch district. Referring to the Terms of Reference, waterquality assessment was

undertaken in area falling within 10 km radius; whereas, the air and soil quality was studued

in 10 km area. The list of villages in the aerial distance of 10 km is given in Table 3.2.





FIGURE 3.2 THE STUDY AREA

3.4 TOPOGRAPHY & DRAINAGE

3.4.1 Topography

Project site is located in the NW direction of Gujarat. It is situated near Gulf of Kutch. Kutch

is the largest district in India having total area of 45612 sq. km. It lies between

23°19'4.9736"N to 23°19'13.3542"N Latitude and 70°5'38.8486"E to 70°17'22.0667"E East

Longitude. It has an average elevation of 55 metres (180 feet).Topography of the district is

uneven and about 50% of area is covered by flat, marshy, saline Rann, while remaining area

is occupied by two major hill ranges Jhara and Laki hill ranges.Bhachau is a city and a

municipality in Kutch district in the state of Gujarat, India. Bhachau was one of many

devastated towns in the Kutch region of the Indian state of Gujarat, during the year 2001

Gujarat Earthquake.

Topography of the study area is plain as there are no hills, hillocks or undulating land within

the study area. The approximate centre of the proposed site is geographically positioned at





23°18'49.2991"N, 70°11'31.0066"E. The topographic contour map has been generated from

SRTM Version 4 (2008) data. As it has been observed during the site visit that some area are

very low and maximum of the study area is relatively flat. Along with the regular contour

generation elevation extremes of the area are also spotted as spot elevation point. The

Topographic map generated for the 10 km area is illustrated below as figure.3.3.

FIGURE 3.3 TOPOGRAPHY MAP



Chapter 3 :Description of Environment

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. C3‐11

NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

3.4.2 Drainage pattern

The site is falling within Taluka of Anjar, Kutch District in Gujarat. The study area is relatively

flat with maximum elevation of 72m above mean sea level. Major areas within the 10 km

from the site are relatively flat having elevation less than 40‐43 m. Hence, considering the

lower extreme of elevation & flat terrain, it has been decided to utilize SRTM data for

generation of better drainage system of the region.

The drainage pattern of 10 km study area has been captured up to fourth order from the

satellite images as well as SRTM 2008 data and updated with the help of various secondary

data sources available. The drainage pattern was studied using 5m depression fill for stream

threshold cell count of 500 on SRTM data, considering the relatively flat terrain as well as

elevation extremes of the region. The SRTM with 30 arc second resolution has been

obtained from NASA WMS server and used for creation of drainage pattern of the area.The

drainage pattern generated has been superimposed on the administrative map and has

been presented as stream & river in figure 3.4 & 3.5.

FIGURE 3.4 PLANT LAYOUT SUPERIMPOSED 3D VIEW ON GOOGLE IMAGE





FIGURE 3.5 DRAINAGE MAP

3.4.3 Water resources & their quality





Water is one of the essential requirements of living as well as non‐living elements. Also it is

an essential requirement for many of the industrial activities. The change in quality of water

may bring about an adverse impact on the entire environment. And due to their physical,

chemical and biological interrelations, change in water quality parameter may trigger

changes in other variables. Physico‐chemical parameters have been analyzed to ascertain

the baseline status of fresh water inthe existing surface water and ground water bodies.

3.4.4 Water resources

The long term average annual rainfall (from 1961‐1990) in the region is about 378 mm as

per IMD data. The baseline water quality status in the region has been established by

analyzing surface water and ground water. Ground water resources are predominantly

exploited in most of nearby villages only for domestic and agricultural purposes.

In drought prone Gujarat, where ground water sources are limited and unevenly distributed,

development of ground water holds special significance. To make local water sources

sustainable, the Water Supply Department, Gujarat through the Gujarat Water Supply and

Sewerage Board (GWSSB), Gujarat Water Infrastructure Limited (GWIL) and Water and

Sanitation Management & Organization (WASMO) has carried out very good work in the

region by creating awareness about rainwater harvesting, by which local supply sources are

recharged.The Gujarat Water Supply and Sewerage Board (GWSSB) and Gujarat

WaterInfrastructure Limited (GWIL) are involved in the bulk transfer of water from the Mahi

and Sardar Sarovar canals. The GWSSB also establishes water treatment and filtration plants

all over the state to treat and chlorinate water before it reaches the village sumps. WASMO

gives utmost priority to water resources management and rainwater harvesting through

groundwater recharge and surface storage structures. WASMO's Water Resources

Management (WRM) cell oversees and assists in the construction of cost effective village

level water harvesting structures that arrest monsoon flows and enhance percolation.The

long‐term objective is to see ‐ if, where, and how ‐ demands for drinking water supply can

be optimally met by developing local sources duly supplemented by import of water. It also

helps in recharging and rejuvenating open wells and tubewells which supplement the

household sources such as underground sumps, elevated storage reservoirs, stand‐posts,

etcFig.3.6.





FIGURE .3.6 DRINKING WATER SUPPLY SCHEME CHART OF WASMO

3.4.5 Ground water

The details of groundwater availability scenario have been obtained from published district

status data of GWSSB. Ground water resources are predominantly exploited in most of

nearby villages only for domestic and agricultural purposes.

3.4.6 Occurrence of groundwater

Kutch district is traversed by 97 minor and major rivers, all of which are nonperennial, and

most of these flow from central high land area to south direction. Average rainfall of last 10

years in the district is 312 mm. geologically, district comprises of old lower Jurassic

formation to recent alluvial formation. The extreme Northern part comprises of great saline

rann. In South, along seacoast, it is represented by recent alluvial formation and in West

Tertiary formation is seen in Lakhpat & Abdasa talukas. Saline formation is seen in the Rapar

taluka. Central & Southern part of the district is covered by basalt. Groundwater in most of

Kutch is brackish to saline. Central part and East – west portion of district, yield potable

water, and the southern area yields potable to brackish water from confined aquifers. The

Central & Southern parts of district are occupied by Basaltic formation yield limited quantity

of potable water from unconfined aquifer. The average depth of source ranges between 75

– 125m in east & west part and in central part it ranges between 135 – 180m.





The Kutch district has limited area of potable water and water supply to the villages of the

Kutch district is mainly through 124 Regional Water supply schemes having their sources in

the proven tube well zone.

As per the groundwater potential data of Kutch district for year 1997 & 2002, it has been

noticed that the region of Bhachau falls under over exploited zone with level of

groundwater development of 112.18% & 129.68% respectively for year 1997 & 2002. The

annual increase of the groundwater draft is noticed considerably lower as compared to

increase in potential of groundwater recharge. Further, the high rainfall in 2010 as well as

efforts made by Govt. of Gujarat for groundwater recharging in the region has also proven

beneficial in improvement of the status of groundwater in the region. Thus, it has been

concluded that the groundwater status has been improved in recent past considering all the

above facts. However, the area still needs to be focused for significant action towards the

improvement of GW status.

3.4.7 Depth of water level

During the monsoon 2006, Kutch district has received 571 mm of rainfall, which is about

183% of the above‐mentioned average rainfall of 312 mm. State Govt. has taken up

Recharge activity at a large scale, due to which there is tremendous improvement in water

levels and water quality. Keeping this fact in mind, a grid of sites for monitoring was created

in such a way that it reflected the overall scenario of groundwater regime in the district. A

survey was conducted by GWSSB in the sources around recharge structures to know the

impact of recharge on ground water. As per this evaluation carried out by GWSSB in

October‐2006, water levels have risen from approximately 3 to 16 m. The groundwater

conditions varies a lot from villages like Adhoi and Lakadiya where groundwater availability

is only up to 86 m to places like Chopadva where the bore well depth of upto 160 m is

found. There are villages like Manfara and Kadol where there have been accounts of water

being non potable. The water table also varies from 45 m at villages like Adhoi to 85 m near

Manfara village where the water quality is also poor. A map depicting the characteristics of

hydrology of the area is given as Figure 3.7.

Draft EIA Re

Survey No 4

CHAPTER 3

3.4.8 Im

No eco‐s

study ar

archaeol

Table 3.5

TAB

Sr. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

eport for M/s. Ja

405/3,406,407 Vi

3 :DESCRIPTIO

FIG

mportant fe

ystem / bios

rea marked

ogical impo

5.

BLE3.5Impo

Features National PTiger ReseCore ZoneHabitat foReserve FoDams (TapRivers /poEstuary/Se

Mangrove

Mountain

y Bharat Steel C

illage Dhamadka

N OF ENVIRON

GURE 3.7 GEO

atures with

sphere reser

d also doe

rtance. Stat

rtantFeatur

Park/ Wildlife

erve/Elephant

e of Biospherer migratory borest ppar Dam 7.8ond ea es s/Hills

Corporation prop

a, Bhuj Bhachau

MENT

O HYDEROL

in the perip

rves are pre

es not con

tus of the im

es and Ecolo

Sanctuary t Reserve/ Tue Reserve birds

84 km SW)

osed to install in

Road, Ta- Anjar,

OGICAL MA

hery of the

sent within

tain any s

mportant fe

ogical Sensit

urtle Nesting G

ntegrated steel an

r, Dist; Kutch, Guj

AP(DISTRICT

study area

the periphe

such featur

atures of th

tive Location

Ground

nd power Plant a

ujarat.

KUTCH)

ry of the Pro

es having

he Study Are

ns inthe Stu

Within

at

oject site. Th

historical o

ea is given

dy Area

n study areaNo No No No No Yes Yes No No No

he

or

in





3.4.9 Methodology

The methodology for conducting the baseline environmental survey has been obtained from

the guidelines provided in the “Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Steel Industries” dated

August 2010 issued by the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF). Baseline

information with respect to micro‐meteorology, air, noise, water and land quality in the

study area for the purposes of this report is for the period Dec 2012 to Febuary 2013.

3.4.10 Seismo – tectonic appraisal of the area

Project site is located in Zone III of the Bureau of institute of seismological Research (ISR)

2011, seismic zone map for India. Zone III is defined as having a maximum intensity

expected of around MSK III. This zone is third in severity to zone V (the highest). Zone III is

also referred to as the low to medium damage risk zone. The tectonic elements of the area

are considered capable of generating an earthquake of magnitude 4 on Richter scale. The

map showing seismic zone is presented in Figure 3.8.

Source: ISR Indian

Seismological

Research center‐

Ahmadabad

FIGURE 3.8 SEISMO – TECTONIC MAP

PROJECTE SITE





3.4.11 Meteorology

Meteorology is the interdisciplinary scientific study of the atmosphere and is important tool

in studying environmental phenomena like pollutant dispersion. When the EIA study is

planned for any project, meteorological data are very important and shall be collected well

with the inception of baseline study to end of the baseline study. Typically for EIA of any

project, micrometeorological data is required to collect as these data are essential to

formulate the pollutant dispersion models. Besides, it also helps in understanding the

current trend in climatologically variable as well as prevailing ambient air quality issues and

forecasts. With such necessity micrometeorological data means the study of atmospheric

phenomena of about 1km or less. Individual thunderstorms, rain, clouds, and local

turbulence caused by buildings and other obstacles, such as individual hills falls within this

category called micrometeorology.The site specific micrometeorological data were collected

by installing Automatic weather station at project site. The data were collected on hourly

basis throughout the study period; i.e.December 2012 to Febuary 2013. The details of the

micrometeorology of the site are presented in subsequent paragraphs.

The climate of Gujarat is varied, as it is moist in the southern districts and dry in the

northern region. The Arabian Sea and the Gulf of Cambay in the west and the forest‐covered

hills in the east soften the rigours of climatic extremes, consequently reducing the

temperature and render the climate more pleasant and healthy.The climate is characterized

by oppressive summer dryness in the atmosphere nearly throughout the year, average

south–west monsoon rainfall and a mild winter. The year can be divided into four seasons.

The cold season from December to February is followed by the summer season from March

to May. The south‐west monsoon season is from June to September. The post‐monsoon

season constitutes the months of October and November.

3.4.12 Methodology

Secondary data from already published literature of National Data Centre of Indian

Meteorological Department (1961‐1990) have been utilized to establish the historical

meteorological trend. In order to assess the background environmental conditions, on site

micrometeorological data was collected for parameters such as wind speed, wind direction,





relative humidity and rainfall. Weather monitoring station was installed approx12 mtr above

the ground level to gather the meteorological data during the period of Dec 2012‐Feb 2013.

3.4.13 Climate of the region

The climate of the region is classified as tropical wet and dry climate as per Köppen Climate

classification, with following four main seasons:

Winter season December to February Summer / Pre‐monsoon season March to May Monsoon season June to September Post monsoon season October to November

3.4.14 Regional meteorology

The long term meteorology of the region based on data recorded at the nearest observatory

station of Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) at Kandla is presented inTable 3.6.

TABLE 3.6 Climatology of Kandla(1961 TO 1990)

Month Temperature Relative Humidity Rainfall (mm)

MIN MAX 0830 1730

January 12.1 27.5 22 48 2.1 February 14.4 30.4 22 53 0.7 March 18.8 35.3 23 56 4.8 April 22.4 38.8 23 57 0.6 May 25.2 40.1 33 66 0.7 June 27.2 37.0 53 73 49.6 July 26.5 34.2 62 80 153.4 August 25.4 33.0 62 80 66.9 September 24.2 34.4 51 76 28.7 October 22.1 36.5 28 57 4.6 November 17.6 33.0 24 47 6.4 December 13.3 28.5 24 46 1.3 Range 12.1‐40.1 22‐80 319.8

Source: Climatologically data 1961‐1990, India Meteorological Department





3.4.15 Summary of regional meteorology

• Temperature

Historical trend shows May as the hottest month and January as the coldest month in the

annual calendar. During the period of 1961 to May 1990, maximum temperature is recorded

to be 40.1°C (May) and the minimum temperature is recorded to be 12.1°C (January). The

average daily temperature of the study period is recorded to be 20.5°C.

• Relative Humidity

Historical data shows the average relative humidity of 22% in mornings and 80% in evenings.

During the period from 1961 to May 1990 daily relative humidity ranged from 4%‐99%. The

average humidity of the study period was recorded as 51.3%.

• Rainfall

The annual rainfall in the district is received during the south‐west monsoon season from

June to September. August is usually the month of highest rainfall. The average annual

rainfall of the region based on historical data of Bhuj, is noticed to be around 319.8mm.

There was no rain in the study period.

3.4.16 Site specific climatic conditions of the study area

Site specific climatic condition refers to average weather comprising of temperature,

relative humidity, wind speed, rainfall, cloud cover etc. This determines the baseline

conditions and probable impacts on environmental parameters with respect to the Project.

The site specific climatic conditions are given below in the Table 3.7.

TABLE 3.7SITE SPECIFIC CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

Month Temp (°C) Relative Humidity (%) Rainfall (mm)

Dec‐12 Min 11 5 0.0 Max 31 99 0.0 Average 21 52 0.0

Jan‐13 Min 10 4 0.3 Max 30 96 4.0 Average 21.5 50 4.3

Feb‐13 Min 13 8 0.0 Max 32 96 0.0 Average 22.5 52 0.0





The maximum temperature is in the month of February 2013 (32°C) and minimum

temperature is in the month of Jan (10°C), Relative humidity of the study area observed to

be in the range of 4 – 99 %.and Total rainfall in the study area recorded is 4.3 mm where

maximium rain is occurred in the month of Jan.

3.4.17 Wind pattern

The historical data shows wind blowing pattern from North‐ East in the winter and from

West and South‐West during summer and monsoon. Site specific micrometeorological data

were collected during the month of Dec 2012 to Feb 2013. It was observed that wind

direction is predominantly from NW direction for the study period. The dominant wind

vector was observed to be 185 Degree with 66.13% frequencies.

FIGURE 3.9 WINDROSE ‐ WINTER SEASON (DECEMNER 2012)





FIGURE 3.10 WINDROSE ‐ WINTER SEASON (JANUARY 2013)

FIGURE 3.11 WINDROSE –WINTER SEASON (FEBUARY 2013)





Wind Pattern:

The data of wind pattern collected during the study period indicates that the wind was

blowing dominantly from 11.25‐33.75(NE) & 326.25‐348.75(NNW) respectively 785 Hrs. &

679 Hrs. out of 2208 total hours. The average wind speed was noticed to be around

2.02m/sec. During study period, for 23 hours wind was found to be calm. The wind speed

was mostly noticed between 0.5‐2.1 for about 1636 Hrs.(45.05)out of 2208 Hours. The

details of wind pattern in form of wind frequency distribution are presented below in

tabular form as well as in graphical illustration. The wind rose diagram is also presented in

subsequent figure.

TABLE 3.8 WIND FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION DATA

Directions / Wind Classes (m/s) 0.5 ‐ 2.1

2.1 ‐ 3.6 3.6 ‐ 5.7

5.7 ‐ 8.8

8.8 ‐ 11.1

>= 11.1 Total

1 348.75 ‐ 11.25 0.03297 0.02747 0.00549 0 0 0 0.06593

2 11.25 ‐ 33.75 0.0989 0.13736 0.03297 0 0 0 0.26923

3 33.75 ‐ 56.25 0.04945 0.01648 0 0 0 0 0.06593

4 56.25 ‐ 78.75 0.03846 0.00549 0 0 0 0 0.04396

5 78.75 ‐ 101.25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6 101.25 ‐ 123.75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 123.75 ‐ 146.25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8 146.25 ‐ 168.75 0.01099 0 0 0 0 0 0.01099

9 168.75 ‐ 191.25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

10 191.25 ‐ 213.75 0.02198 0.00549 0 0 0 0 0.02747

11 213.75 ‐ 236.25 0.03297 0.03846 0.02198 0.00549 0 0 0.0989

12 236.25 ‐ 258.75 0 0 0.00549 0 0 0 0.00549

13 258.75 ‐ 281.25 0.01099 0.01099 0 0 0 0 0.02198

14 281.25 ‐ 303.75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

15 303.75 ‐ 326.25 0.00549 0.01099 0 0 0 0 0.01648

16 326.25 ‐ 348.75 0.14835 0.06593 0.03297 0 0 0 0.24725

Sub‐Total 0.45055 0.31868 0.0989 0.00549 0 0 0.87363

Calms 0.12637

Missing/Incomplete 0

Total 1





FIGURE 3.12 WIND FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION CHART

FIGURE 3.13 OVERALL WINDROSE WINTER SEASON (DE 2012 TO JAN 2013)





TABLE 3.9 SUMMARY OF SITE SPECIFIC WINDROSE DURING STUDY AREA

(DEC‐2012 TO FEB‐2013)

Season 1st Predominant

2ndpredominant Calm (%)

December 2012 NW (53%) NNE (16.5%) 8.51 January 2013 NW (34%) NNE (24%) 8.51 February 2013 NW (44.8%) NNE (19.4%) 8.51 Winter (overall) NW (52.8 %) NNE (17%) 8.51

3.5 LANDUSE PATTERN OF THE STUDY AREA

The land‐use & land cover map of the 10 km radial study area from the project site has been

prepared using IRS R2 LISS III (17th May 2013 Path 91 Row 56 and 05th June 2013 path 90 and

Row 55)satellite image with reference to NRSC Image. Land use pattern of the study area as

well as the catchment area was carried out by standard methods of analysis of remotely

sensed data and followed by ground truth collection and interpretation of satellite data. The

outcome of land use study has been presented below in subsequent table and figures. The

Land use map of the 10Km study area is presented in Figure 3.13a.

3.5.1 Land use/land covers classification result

A total of sixmain classes and eleven sub‐class of land use/land cover classes have been

demarcated in the study area following Level III classification (Table 3.10). A thematic map

suitable for 1:50,000 scale map generation incorporating these classified categories has

been prepared and considering that the area of the project is considerably small a large

scale map is prepared (Fig. 3.14). The area as a whole represents a plain drained by a

number of south east flowing river which debouche into the TaparRiver that flows from

west to northern margin middle of the project site. Large crop land covered for 59.83% of

the total area and water body area 2.36%, mudflat 1.6% and salt pan 0.2%of the total area

and 22.85% land with & without scrub has developed mainly in the area adjacent to the

study area. The exposed part of side bars and river and dried up river beds constitute this

category of land cover (Fig. 14, Table 3.10).

The agricultural land constitutes the dominant category of land use covering as much as

59.59 % and Current fallow land 5.59% of the total area (Table 3.10). Active creek of the all





the canals it covers about 2.36 % of the total study area. The consistently shifting nature of

the North West part to south west part bank migration has resulted in large uncultivated &

rural settlement along the active plain area towards the site location. The project site is

located within the current fallow land area significant distribution. The land use for

settlement is mostly confined to the ‘rural &urban settlement’ (built up‐rural) 1.85%,

Industrial area 1.07% of the total area and scattered along the road networks.

TABLE 3.10Land Use Land cover

S. No. LULC Class Area (Km2) Percentage%

1 Built up land (Urban/Rural) Settlement 5.82 1.85

Industry 3.36 1.07

2 Agriculture Land Crop land/Plantations / orchards 188.63 59.83

Current Fallow land 17.63 5.59

3 Water bodies River/ Water body/Dam 7.43 2.36

4 Scrub Land Land with scrub 65.90 20.90

Land Without Scrub 6.14 1.95

5 Forest Land Forest (Mixed Jungle) 14.06 4.46

6 Others Mining 0.66 0.21

Mud flat 5.05 1.60

Salt Pan 0.62 0.20

Total 315.3 100

FIGURE 3.14 LAND USE DISTRIBUTION





FIGURE 3.14A SATELLITE IMAGE VIEW

FIGURE 3.15 LAND USE/LAND COVER MAP





3.6 AIR ENVIRONMENT

3.6.1 Ambient air quality

The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at 08 locations within the study area.

The guidelines of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) and National Ambient Air Quality

Standards (NAAQS) were followed for deciding locations and frequency of monitoring.

The study area represents rural environment, with number of industrial estaes, salt pan and

Dam. Major source of pollution is the vehicular transportation; in addition to scattered

industrial units in surrounding area. The other sources of air pollution are domestic fuel

consumption and the dust arising from village roads. Ambient air quality was monitored for

24‐hourly average basis as per guidelines of CPCB & NAAQM. The conventional and project

specific parameters such as Fine Particulate Matter (PM2.5), Respirable Particulate Matter

(PM10), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) were monitored on sampling

locations. Indian Standard methods were followed for the monitoring & analysis of above‐

mentioned parameters.

The values for monitored concentrations of various pollutants at all the monitoring locations

are processed for different statistical parameters like Arithmetic Mean, Maximum,

Minimum concentration and 98% percentile value. Concentration of pollutant parameter is

compared with CPCB standards and mentioned in subsequent Tables in the chapter. The

National Ambient Air Quality standards are represented in Table 3.15.In order to assess the

baseline air quality in the study area, following factors have been considered while selecting

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring locations:

• Major settlements

• Influence from the industrial activities

• Local vehicular movement

• Influence of meteorological parameters on the dispersion of pollutants and impact

on nearby settlements.

Ambient air quality of the study area has been assessed through a network of 08 ambient air

quality stations designed keeping in view the meteorological conditions of the study region.

Details of sampling stations are given in Table – 3.11.Ambient Air Quality data measured in

the study area are given in Table – 3.12 to Table 3.14.





FIGURE 3.16 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS

TABLE 3.11 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS

Sr. No

Station Code Distance from The main site (km)

Direction wrt site

Latitude Longitude

1 Plant Area A1 ‐‐ ‐‐ 230 18’ 51.00” N 70

0 11’ 32.31” E

2 Morgar A2 3.20 NNE 230 20’ 24.88” N 70

0 12’ 24.00” E

3 Krishna Nagar A3 6.23 NNE 230 20’ 31.86” N 70

0 14’ 43.79” E

4 Lunva A4 6.35 ES 230 16’ 31.72” N 70

0 14’ 13.01” E

5 Pashuda A5 9.43 SSW 230 13’ 45.83” N 70

0 11’ 08.91” E

6 Tapar dam A6 9.30 SW 230 15’ 01.99” N 70

0 08’ 03.84” E

7 Dudhai A7 6.85 WWN 230 19’ 20.77” N 70

0 07’ 29.55” E

8 Amrapar A8 7.50 WN 230 21’ 08.96” N 70

0 07’ 50.38” E





3.6.2 Fine Particulate Matter (PM2.5) & Repairable Suspended Particulate Matter (PM10)

As discussed in the previous sections, the network of stations have been located to identify

the impacts due to local activities and also to know impact of the vehicular traffic on road

connecting to local villages.

PM2.5 & RSPM(PM10) concentration at the villages located close to the site were found

within permissible limits. 98th percentile value of PM2.5 concentrations were found to be in

the order 27.75 – 34.06 μg/m3 and Maximum value of PM2.5 34.06 µg/m3 was observed at

plant area and minimum value of PM2.5of 27.75 µg/m3was observed at Near Tapar dam. 98th

percentile value of RSPM(PM10) concentration were found to be in order 53.56 – 61.37

μg/m3 and Maximum value of RSPM61.37 µg/m3 was observed at plant area and minimum

value of RSPM of 53.56 µg/m3 was observed at Near Tapar dam.

TABLE 3.12 SUMMARY OF PM2.5 & RSPM (PM10) CONCENTRATION (µG/M3)

Station Code

Location Name PM2.5μg/m3

RSPM (PM10) μg/m3

Max Min Avg 98th

percentile

Max Min Avg 98th

percentile 1 Plant Area 34.80 19.80 26.77 34.06 62.20 29.70 48.66 61.37 2 Morgar 34.00 16.40 25.15 33.72 60.80 27.60 46.58 60.29 3 Krishna Nagar 34.20 18.60 25.63 33.10 57.80 26.90 48.45 56.42

4 Lunva 31.00 17.60 25.01 30.82 59.70 28.50 46.54 57.68 5 Pashuda 30.40 16.20 24.93 30.26 56.80 29.70 43.82 55.83 6 Tapar dam 28.30 15.00 23.18 27.75 53.70 25.10 44.77 53.56

7 Dudhai 31.50 17.10 23.80 30.67 58.70 27.50 41.68 55.85 8 Amrapar 30.20 14.80 22.60 30.02 54.80 29.10 46.55 54.52 RANGE 27.75 – 34.06 53.56 – 61.37

3.6.3 Sulphur dioxide – SO2

98th percentile value of Sulphur dioxide in the study area from the monitored data were in

the range of 14.79‐18.63 µg/m3. Maximum 98th percentile value of sulphur dioxide of18.63

µg/m3 was observed at Amrapar.The minimum 98th percentile value of sulpur dioxide

of14.79 µg/m3 was observed at Tapar dam. Table 3.13gives summary of SO2 concentrations

monitored at various locations.





TABLE 3.13 SUMMARY OF SO2 CONCENTRATION (μg/m3)

Station Code Location Name SO2 Concentration, μg/m3 Max Min Avg 98

th percentile A1 Plant Area 17.50 8.10 12.65 17.18 A2 Morgar 17.20 8.30 12.77 17.02 A3 Krishna Nagar 16.80 7.50 11.23 16.25 A4 Lunva 18.50 6.90 12.08 17.99 A5 Pashuda 17.10 7.10 12.35 16.96 A6 Tapar dam 15.20 7.20 11.14 14.79 A7 Dudhai 18.50 7.60 12.94 17.53 A8 Amrapar 19.60 6.90 10.66 18.63

RANGE 14.79 – 18.63

3.6.4 Oxides of Nitrogen – NOX

98th Percentile values of NOX concentration in the study area was found to be in the range

of 20.29 ‐ 26.74 μg/m3. Maximum value of Nitrogen of 26.74 µg/m3 was observed at plant

area and minimum value of sulpur dioxide of 20.29 µg/m3 was observed at Dudhai. Table

3.14 gives summary of Nox concentrations monitored at various locations.

TABLE 3.14 SUMMARYOF NOX CONCENTRATION (µg/m3)

Station Code

Location Name NOXConcentration, μg/m3 Max Min Avg 98

th percentile

A1 Plant Area 28.40 11.80 18.35 26.74 A2 Morgar 23.50 9.40 17.06 23.09 A3 Krishna Nagar 22.50 10.30 17.18 21.90 A4 Lunva 21.70 9.60 16.19 21.19 A5 Pashuda 22.80 11.60 17.41 21.88 A6 Tapar dam 24.60 11.50 17.05 22.85 A7 Dudhai 20.80 8.50 16.70 20.29 A8 Amrapar 23.50 12.00 16.98 22.07

RANGE 20.29 – 26.74

3.6.5 Poly Aromatic Hydrocarbon – PAH

Poly Aromatic Hydrocarbon is not present in the ambient air quality monitoring station

location.

3.6.6 National Ambient Air Quality Standards

The observed values of PM2.5, RSPM (PM10), SO2 and NOx are compared with the National

Ambient Air Quality Standards which are presented in the Table 3.15 given below:





TABLE 3.15 NATIONALAMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS (NAAQS)

Sr No Pollutant Time weighted average

Concentration in ambient air Industrial, Residential, Rural and Other area

Ecologically Sensitive area (notified by central Govt)

Method of Measurement

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 1. Sulphur Dioxide

(SO2) µg/m3

Annual * 24 Hours**

50 80

20 80

Improved West and Gaeke Ultraviolet Fluorescence

2. Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) µg/m

3

Annual * 24 Hours**

40 80

30 80

Modified Jacob &Hochheiser (Na‐Arsenite) Chemiluminescence

3. Particulate Matter (size less than 10 µm) PM10 µg/m

3

Annual * 24 Hours**

60

100 60

100 Gravimetric TOEMBeta attenuation

4. Particulate Matter (size less than 2.5 µm) PM2.5 µg/m

3

Annual * 24 Hours**

40 60

40 60

Gravimetric TOEM Beta attenuation.

* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year at a particulate site taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform intervals. ** 24 hourly or 08 hourly or 01 hourly monitored valves, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of the time in a year. 2% of the time, they may exceed the limits but not on two consecutive days of monitoring. NOTE: ‐ Whenever and wherever monitoring results on two consecutive days of monitoring exceed the limits specified above for the respective category, it shall be considered adequate reason to institute regular or continuous monitoring and further investigation.

3.7 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Noise can be defined as unwanted sound or sound in the wrong place at the wrong time.

Noise can also be defined as any sound that is undesirable because it interferes with speech

and hearing, is intense enough to damage hearing or is otherwise annoying.

A variety of sources produce noise, potentially hazardous to hearing depending upon the

intensity and duration of exposure. These include transportation systems, construction

equipment, industrial activities and many common appliances.

The main source of noise pollution in the study area is vehicular traffic on highway due to

vicinity of large scale industries. The Ambient Noise levels in the study area are compared

with standards of residential zone. The site study was undertaken for assessing the noise





levels in the plant area and study area are shown in Table 3.16 and Table 3.17 respectively.

The Survey involved in determination of noise levels in db (A) at 8 locations in study area.

TABLE 3.16 NOISE LEVEL IN EXISTING PLANT AREA

Sr. No. Location Day Equivalent; dB(A) Night equivalent; dB (A) 1 Near Process Area 64.3 55.5 2 Near Office 51.2 44.8 3 Near Main Gate 66.4 53.3 4 Near Raw Material 56.7 43.2 5 Near Finished Product 53.3 40.2 6 Near Utility Area 51.5 41.5

TABLE 3.17 NOISE LEVEL IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Location Day Equivalent; dB(A) Night equivalent; dB (A) 1 Morgar 57.3 49.6 2 Krishna Nagar 52.6 46.5 3 Lunva 55.1 42.8 4 Pashuda 53.4 41.6 5 Tapar dam 51.7 43.5 6 Tapar 50.3 42.0 7 Dudhai 58.2 40.5 8 Amrapar 55.6 41.8

TABLE 3.18 NATIONAL AMBIENT NOISE QUALITY STANDARDS

Category of Area Day time (Limit in dB (A) Night time(Limit in dB (A)

Industrial Area 75 70 Commercial Area 65 55

Residential Area 55 45 Silence Zone 50 40

Day time is reckoned between 6 am to 10 pm. Night time is reckoned between 10 pm to 6

am.Silence zone is defined as areas up to 100 m around such premises as hospitals,

educational institutions and courts. The silence zones are to be declared by the competent

authority. The Noise levels of the study area are compared with the noise level standards.





FIGURE 3.17 NOISE MONITORING STATION

3.8 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Assessment of baseline data on Water environment includes;

3.8.1 Water resources in the study area

The major source of water for domestic activities in the study area is groud water. There

some lakes exsiting in all the villages. The surface water from Narmada Canal is available for

industrial as well as domestic activites.

3.8.2 Water Quality Monitoring Stations:

Water samples have been collected at 08 stations in the study area to know the baseline

status of the water quality. The summary of water quality Monitoring Stations in the study

area is given in Table: 3.19.





FIGURE 3.18 GROUND WATER MONITORING STATION

TABLE 3.19 GROUND WATER QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS

Location Station Code Distance FromSite (km) Direction w.r.t.Main site

Plant Area GW1 ‐‐ ‐‐ Morgar GW2 3.20 NNE Krishna Nagar GW3 6.23 NNE Lunva GW4 6.35 ES Pashuda GW5 9.43 SSW Tapar GW6 10.5 SW Dudhai GW7 6.85 WWN Amrapar GW8 7.50 WN

3.8.3 Ground Water Quality

Ground water quality is well within the permissible limit as per IS: 10500 in different seasons

of the study period PH In the Found in the Range 6.71 ‐ 7.70 Were Minimum Value is found

in Krishna Nager and Maximum Value Found in Dudhai Village,EC Value Fond In the Range

652.2‐ 5060 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Morgar Village and Maximum Value





Found in krishna nager Village,TDS value found in the Range 378‐3441 mg/l Were Minimum

Value is found in morgar Village and Maximum Value Found in Krishna nager Village. Iron

Value Fond in the Range 0.16 ‐ 0.38 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Morgar Village

and Maximum Value Found in Lunva Village, Nitrate Value Fond in the Range 3.1‐4.4 μs/cm

Were Minimum Value is found in Krishna Villageand Amraparand Maximum Value Found in

Morgar Village.Fluride Value Fond in the Range <0.1 – 0.23 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is

found in Tapper & Dhudhai Village and Maximum Value Found in Krishna Village. Sulphate

Value Found in the Range 17.3‐116.4 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Dhudhai

village and Maximum Value Found in Krishna Village. Alkalinity Value Found in the Range

103.1 ‐ 763.4 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Tapper village and Maximum Value

Found in KrishnaNagar Village. Calcium Value Found in the Range 78.8 ‐ 740 μs/cm Were

Minimum Value is found in Tapper village and Maximum Value Found in KrishnaNagar

Village. Magnesium Value Found in the Range 24.4‐66 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found

in Amarpar village and Maximum Value Found in Krishna nager.

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau

Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat.


ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. C3‐37

NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

TABLE 3.20 GROUND WATER QUALITY ANALYSIS DATA

S.No Test Parameters Unit Acceptable

Limit Permissible Limit

GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW 6 GW 7 GW8

1 pH Value ‐ 6.5 to 8.5 NR 6.96 7.13 6.71 7.22 6.81 7.34 7.70 7.45

2 Electrical Conductivity at 25⁰C µs/cm ‐ ‐ 2292.0 652.2 5060 1126 1012 892 971 706 3 Turbidity NTU NTU 1 5 3 5 7 7 5 3 1 2

4 Apparent Colour Hazen units

5 15 2 3 5 5 3 1 <1 1

5 Odour ‐ Agreeable Agreeable Agreeab

le Agreea

ble Agreeab

le Agreea

ble Agreea

ble Agre

eable Agreeab

le Agre

eable 6 Taste ‐ Agreeable Agreeable ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐7 Iron (as Fe) mg / l 0.3 1.0 0.23 0.16 0.32 0.38 0.27 0.21 0.25 0.18 8 Free Residual Chlorine mg / l 0.2 1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 9 Total Dissolved Solids mg / l 500 2000 1329 378 3441 653 678 577 572 402 10 Fluoride(as F) mg / l 1.0 1.5 0.16 0.11 0.23 0.14 0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.11

11 Cyanide as (CN) mg / l 0.05 NR <0.005 <0.00

5 <0.005

<0.00

5 <0.00

5 <0.00

5 <0.005 <0.00

5 12 Chlorides (as Cl) mg / l 250 1000 1349 215.4 2049 305.2 401 298 326 245

13 Total Alkalinity (CaCO3)

mg / l 200 600 234 211 763.4 206.7 192.3 103.1 188.2 196

14 Total Hardness (CaCO3)

mg / l 200 600 505 391 2121 874 704.3 326 405.1 382.2

15 Calcium(as Ca) mg / l 75 200 158 116 740 242 190 78.8 108 112.8 16 Magnesium (as Mg) mg / l 30 100 26.8 24.6 66 65.5 55.8 31.4 50.6 24.4

17 Sulphate (as SO4) mg / l 200 400 102.2 91.1 116.4 85 64 41.5 17.3 21.7 18 Nitrates (as NO3) mg / l 45 NR 3.4 4.4 3.1 4.2 3.8 4.1 3.6 3.1

19 Copper as(Cu) mg / l 0.05 < 0.03 <0.003 <0.00

3 <0.003

<0.00

3 <0.00

3 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

20 Manganese as (Mn) mg / l 0.1 < 0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau

Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat.



S.No Test Parameters Unit Acceptable

Limit Permissible Limit

GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW 6 GW 7 GW8

21 Mercury as (Hg) mg / l 0.001 <0.0005 <0.000

5 <0.00

05 <0.000

5 <0.00

05 <0.00

05 <0.00

05 <0.0005 <0.00

05

22 Cadmium as (Cd) mg / l 0.003 NR <0.001 <0.00

1 <0.001

<0.00

1 <0.00

1 <0.00

1 <0.001 <0.00

1

23 Selenium as (Se) mg / l 0.01 NR <0.001 <0.00

1 <0.001

<0.00

1 <0.00

1 <0.00

1 <0.001 <0.00

1 24 Arsenic as (As) mg / l 0.01 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

25 Aluminum as (Al) mg / l 0.03 0.2 0.12 0.24 0.18 .0.22 0.14 <0.00

5 0.03 0.08

26 Lead as (Pb) mg / l 0.01 NR <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 27 Zinc as (Zn) mg / l 5 15 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

28 Chromium as (Cr +6) mg / l 0.05 NR <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 29 Boron as (B) mg / l 0.5 1.0 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

30 Mineral oil mg / l Absent < 0.001 <0.001 <0.00

1 <0.001

<0.00

1 <0.00

1 <0.00

1 <0.001 <0.00

1

31 Phenolic Compounds ppm Absent < 0.001 <0.001 <0.00

1 <0.001

<0.00

1 <0.00

1 < 0.001

< 0.001 < 0.001

32 Pesticides µg/l ‐ ‐ <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

33 Anionic Detergents ppm 0.2 1.0 <0.001 <0.00

1 <0.001

<0.00

1 <0.00

1 <0.00

1 <0.001 <0.00

1

34 Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbon (PAH)

µg/l ‐ ‐ <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

35 Total Coliform MPN/10

0 ml Absent Absent Absent

Absen

t Absent

Absen

t Absen

t Abse

nt Absent Abse

nt

36 Escherichia Coli per 100 ml

Absent Absent Absent Absen

t Absent

Absen

t Absen

t Abse

nt Absent Abse

nt

Note: NR – No relaxiation.Note: All parameters are expressed in mg/lit except pH and conductivity unless specified BDL means below detectable limit. NR – No Relaxation.





3.8.4 Surface Water Quality

There are seven surface water collected near by study area.The samples from these surface

water were collected to analyze quality of surface Water in this region.

TABLE 3.21 SURFACE WATER QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS

Location Station Code

Distance From Site (km)

Direction w.r.t. Main site

Latitude Longitude

Surface Water Pakadsar Lake SW1 5.50 NNE 23

0 19’ 54.29” N 70

0 14’ 30.49” E

Chopadva Lake SW2 10.9 ESE 230 16’ 30.94” N 70

0 17’ 23.12” E

Pashuda Lake SW3 8.80 SSW 230 14’ 04.75” N 70

0 11’ 22.24” E

Tapar Dam SW4 9.30 SW 230 15’ 01.99” N 70

0 08’ 03.84” E

Kotda Lake SW5 10.9 W 230 17’ 19.77” N 70

0 05’ 23.71” E

Amrapar Lake SW6 7.7 WNW 230 21’ 11.19” N 70

0 07’ 45.40” E

Aamardi Lake SW7 3.43 NE 230 19’ 48.20” N 70

0 13’ 16.96” E

FIGURE 3.19 SURFACE WATER MONITORING STATION





3.8.5 Observation

In the Lake Water Quality pH range Found in the Range of 6.92 – 7.98 Were Minimum Value

6.92 is found in Amarapar Lake and Maximum 7.98 Value Found in Pashuda Lake, EC Found

in the Range of 979.2 – 9410 μs/cm Were Minimum Value 979.2 μs/cm is found in Pakadsar

Lake and Maximum Value 9410 μs/cm Found in Pashuda Lake. TDS found in the Range 607‐

6116 mg/l Were Minimum Value 607 mg/l is found in Pakadsar Lake and Maximum Value

6116 mg/l found inPashuda Lake.Iron Value Fond in the Range 0.12 ‐ 0.25 μs/cm Were

Minimum Value is found in Pakadsarlake and Maximum Value Found in Kotda Lake,Nitrate

Value Fond in the Range 7.8‐22.0 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Amarparlake and

Maximum Value Found in Kotda Lake, Flouride Value Fond in the Range <0.1 – 0.18 μs/cm

Were Minimum Value is found in Kotda lake, Amarpar&AamaardiLake and Maximum Value

Found in Pashuda Lake. Sulphate Value Fond in the Range 36.2‐96.3 μs/cm Were Minimum

Value is found in Pakadsar Lake and Maximum Value Found in Aamardi village. Alkalinity

Value Fond in the Range 241.2‐676 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Pakadsar Lake

and Maximum Value Found in Pashuda Lake. Calcium Value Found in the Range 279.2‐348

μs/cm Were Minimum Value is found in Kotda Lake and Maximum Value Found in Amarpar

Lake. Magnessium Value Found in the Range 2.8‐156.5 μs/cm Were Minimum Value is

found in Aamardi Lake and Maximum Value Found in Chopadva Lake.The water can be used

for propagation of wild life and fisheries and also for irrigation and industrial cooling. The

water can be said for drinking only after conventional treatment.

TABLE 3.22SURFACE WATER QUALITY ANALYSIS DATA

S.N

o Test Parameters Unit SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7

1 pH Value ‐ 7.21 6.96 7.98 7.42 7.11 6.92 7.70

2 Electrical

Conductivity at 25⁰C

µs/cm 979.2 1135 9410 2711 1034 1725 3510

3 Turbidity NTU NTU 3 5 4 4.1 2 5 3

4 Apparent Colour Hazen units

2 3 3 5 3 5 5

5 Odour ‐ UO UO UO UO UO UO UO

6 Taste ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

7 Iron (as Fe) mg / l 0.12 0.16 0.13 0.21 0.25 0.22 0.18

8 Free Residual

Chlorine mg / l <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1





S.N

o Test Parameters Unit SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7

9 Total Dissolved

Solids mg / l 607 772 6116 1545 682 1052 2492

10 Fluoride(as F) mg / l 0.1 0.12 0.18 0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

11 Cyanide as (CN) mg / l <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.00

5 12 Chlorides (as Cl) mg / l 287 361.1 349.8 624.5 311.8 471 1249

13 Total Alkalinity

(CaCO3) mg / l 241.2 301.1 676 327 296 385 491

14 TotalHardness

(CaCO3) mg / l 871.1 963 909 1034 811.4 926 82.82

15 Calcium(as Ca) mg / l 288 320 308.8 357.2 279.2 348 284

16 Magnesium (as

Mg) mg / l 36.8 156.5 33.3 34.3 27.6 13.6 2.8

17 Sulphate (as SO4) mg / l 36.2 48.1 41.3 76.1 58.3 66.2 96.3 18 Nitrates (as NO3) mg / l 14.6 12.3 19.2 21.5 22.0 7.8 9.3 19 Copper as(Cu) mg / l <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

20 Manganese as

(Mn) mg / l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05

21 Mercury as (Hg) mg / l <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.00

5 22 Cadmium as (Cd) mg / l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

23 Selenium as (Se) mg / l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 24 Arsenic as (As) mg / l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 25 Aluminum as (Al) mg / l 0.01 0.02 <0.005 0.02 <0.005 0.01 0.01

26 Lead as (Pb) mg / l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.00

1 27 Zinc as (Zn) mg / l <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

28 Chromium as (Cr

+6) mg / l <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

29 Boron as (B) mg / l <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

30 Mineral oil mg / l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.00

1

31 Phenolic

Compounds Ppm

<0.00

1 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

<0.00

1

32 Pesticides µg/l <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

33 Anionic

Detergents Ppm <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

<0.00

1

34

Polynuclear Aromatic

Hydrocarbon (PAH)

µg/l <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03 <0.03

35 Total Coliform MPN/ 100 ml

6 6 9 16 9 3 6

36 Escherichia Coli Per

100ml Absent

Absen

t Absen

t Absen

t Absen

t Absen

t Absen

t Note: All parameters are expressed in mg/lit except Ph and conductivity unless specified BDL means below detectable limit.





3.9 SOIL ENVIRONMENT

Observation on Soil Quality:

Soil is slightly basic in nature as pH in the Range 7.8‐ 7.93 Soil texture is sandy EC found

in the Range of 197.12 ‐ 213.24 μs/cm. Were Minimum Value 197.12 μs/cm is found in

pashuda and Maximum Value 213.24 μs/cm found in Krishna nagar, Water Holding

Capacity (WHC) found in the Range 27.2 – 32.23 g/100g Were Minimum Value 27.2

g/100g is found in amarapar village and Maximum Value 32.23 g/100g Found in Krishna

nagar Village. The soil quality monitoring stations have been summarized in Table

3.23given below. The analysis report for all the locations are given in Table 3.24.

FIGURE 3.20 SOIL MONITORING STATION





TABLE 3.23 SOIL QUALITY MONITORING STATIONS

Station Code Location Distance from Site (km) Direction S1 Plant Area ‐‐ ‐‐ S2 Morgar 3.20 NNE S3 Krishna Nagar 6.23 NNE S4 Lunva 6.35 ES S5 Pashuda 9.43 SSW S6 Tapar dam 9.30 SW S7 Dudhai 6.85 WWN S8 Amrapar 7.50 WN

TABLE 3.24 SOIL QUALITY ANALYSIS DATA

Sr. No.

Parameter Unit Monitoring Locations S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8

1 pH pH Unit 7.82 7.84 7.90 7.80 7.85 7.92 7.93 7.82

2 EC μs/cm at 25° C

200.1 199.2 213.24 215.32 197.12 212.3 198.1 210.2

3 Texture ‐‐ Sandy Sandy Sandy Sandy Sandy Sandy Sandy Sandy

4 Sand g/100g 92 90 85 88 90 84 86 82

5 Slit g/100g 6 8 12 4 7 10 11 9

6 Clay g/100g 2 2 3 8 3 6 3 9

7 Porosity g/100g 45.4 47.2 49.5 48.6 47.5 48.3 44.8 50.2

8 Water Holding Capacity g/100g 28.1 29.3 32.23 30.3 31.2 29.8 29.5 27.2

9 Bulk Density g/cc 1.4 1.41 1.39 1.42 1.41 1.38 1.39 1.38

10 Exc.Calcium mg/kg 61.5 60.2 59.5 61.8 58.9 61.9 60.2 58.9

11 Exc.Magnesium mg/kg 22.5 20.9 21.5 22.8 21.8 23.5 21.5 19.8

12 Exc.Sodium mg/kg 115.1 118.5 120.6 121.8 120.5 119.2 109.1 112.3

13 Exc. Mangnese mg/kg <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

14 Exc. Zinc mg/kg <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

15 Available Boron mg/kg <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1

16 Water soluble Chlorides mg/kg 130.3 128.6 127.3 131.2 126.5 128.16 129.16 130.92

17 Water Soluble Sulphate mg/kg 115 118.2 119.3 120.39 115.8 121.92 129.16 130.92

18 Potassium as K+ mg/kg 4.18 4.21 3.96 3.85 4.2 3.95 4.12 4.8

19 Avilable Phosphorous mg/kg 19.2 21.2 22.3 20.42 21.4 19.3 17.98 18.1

20 Available Nitrogen mg/kg 43.1 44.1 45.1 42.3 41.18 45.1 41.28 43.1

21 Iron mg/kg 29.3 30.1 28.1 29.42 30.18 31.98 31.13 30.1

22 Organic Matter mg/kg 0.55 0.72 0.65 0.77 0.86 0.58 0.68 0.53

23 Organic Carbon g/100g 0.32 0.2 0.38 0.45 0.5 0.34 0.4 0.31

24 Sodium Absorption Ratio ‐ 18.6 18.96 18.98 18.74 18.97 18.25 17.07 17.91

25 CEC Meq/100g <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1

3.9.1 Biological Environment

Natural flora and fauna are important features of environment. They are organized into

communities with mutual dependencies among their members and show various responses and

sensitivities to outside influences. Therefore, nature of development and baseline characteristics

of terrestrial flora and fauna around the site of existing/proposed activities is required to be

assessed.





3.9.1.1 Study Area

A biological assessment survey was conducted in 10 km radius of village Dhamadka of

Taluka Anjar of District Kutch; the largest district in the state of Gujarat as well as in India.

Kutch falls under the Biogeographic Zone No. 3, ‘Desert Zone’ and is covered under the

Biotic Province 3B – ‘The Kutch Desert Province’.

The Anjar taluka of district is located along the Gulf of Kutch and has one of the major ports

of the state. As the taluka also has the coastline hence it also falls under the Biogeographic

Zone No. 8 ‘Coastal Zone’ and covers the Biotic Province 8A – ‘West Coast’. However, in the

current study the coastline did not encompass the study area except marginal part of north

portion (1.80%) of current study area.

The major part of the land was agricultural land and the remaining part was observed to be

a scrubland interspersed with grassland. Few wetlands in the form of village ponds and lakes

were also observed during the survey.

Geologically the terrain was found to be a flat plain with no undulations and a gradual slope

towards the sea. As the geological history of Kutch goes that the entire land mass emerged

out of sea due to the plate tectonics and that the highlands are towards the north with a

gradual slope towards the south i.e. Arabian Sea and has further resulted into ‘Gulf’ that

forms the southern boundary of the district. The colour of the soil being red‐yellow in major

part of the area suggested presence of minerals such as iron and aluminium and rest of the

land, especially agricultural land had light brown to dark brown soil indicating fair amount of

clay content in the soil. The climate all round the year is dry with some amount of humidity

during the monsoon. Since the present survey was conducted in the month of March, the

season of peak autumn and approaching spring, hence the climate was found to be dry,

warm and humid. The major seasons apparent were summer, monsoon and winter. The

monsoon is the summer monsoon and as received in the month of June to August with few

occasional showers in September. From the secondary information collected from the locals

and looking into the agriculture it was evident that Bhachau receives good annual downpour

with an average of 400‐500 mm and that suffices the need of the agriculture. The current

Biological Assessment survey was conducted for proposed ‘Jay Bharat Steel Corporation.’

situated in the Dhamadka village of Taluka Anjar.





As mentioned above that Kutch falls under the ‘Desert’ Biogeographic zone the vegetation

as observed was dry scrubland along with crop fields and few of the trees of evergreen type.

The present ecology and biodiversity studies was conducted during summer – 2013, the

vegetation appeared to be dry.

Moreover, crops in majority of the fields were ready for the harvest. The source of irrigation

in this belt of the state is by and large the rain water, only one irrigation dam, namely ‘Tapar

Dam’ in village Tapar was falling within the limits of the study area. Village Tapar was

located outside the 10 km radius of the study area but the major part of the dam was within

the study area. Dams was almost 60 % filled with water which not only supplied water to

the adjoining crop fields but also supported a good number of waterfowl. The location of

proposed project was relatively away from the coastline and therefore the marine

component was not to be taken into consideration. The present survey was conducted with

an objective to document the local flora and fauna in the 10 km radius of the village

Dhamadka.

National Parks/Sanctuaries and Biosphere Reserves, etc.

There is no National Park, Sanctuary, Biosphere Reserves, Wildlife Corridors, Tiger/Elephant

reserves within the study area which has been confirmed by ground truth survey.

However, Working Plan of Kachchh East Forest Divisions, Bhuj showed 152.88 ha. of RF

comprises in Morgar (~4.08 Km away from Project site in ENE direction) is a part of Kachchh

Desert Wildlife Sanctuary but during the ground truth survey we have not observed any

significant forest area at Morgar village. List of forest area involved near villages within

study area are shown in Table.3.25.

Table 3.25 FOREST OBSERVED IN STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Forest area involves near villages within study area Distance Direction 1. Dudhai, Dapar 4km SW 2. Devisar 6.7 West 3. Lunva 6.2 SE 4. Pashuda 5.8km South





Sampling locations

Selection of sampling locations has been made with reference to topography, land use and

vegetation pattern. Different locations were selected to study on biological aspects. The

biological observations were made in study area are (project site, agricultural field, wetland,

village wasteland, roadside area, etc. All observations were taken in Summer‐2013. The

secondary data related to this region were also obtained from Kutch – East Forest Division,

Bhuj‐Kutch.

3.9.2 Method Employed for Floral Documentation:

A road survey in all the accessible areas and an on foot survey in all the inaccessible areas

were conducted to document the flora. The local flora was identified by visual observation,

such as its size and shape, morphology of the leaf and stem, phenology, flowering and

fruiting status and with all these characters the flora was classified broadly into four

categories ‘Trees’, ‘Shrubs’,‘Herbs’ and ‘Climbers’. The plants that were not identified were

collected, brought to the laboratory and identified using standard herbarium references.

Photo documentation of some of the key species present the study area was also done.

3.9.3 Methods employed for faunal documentation

The major fauna consists of higher invertebrates and vertebrates. These groups were

identified and mainly documented through ‘Visual Encounter Method’ and

‘Communication with Local People’. Minor combing operations were done at some of the

sites for documenting the fauna which otherwise remains concealed with the environment

and could be missed out. The combing process included upturning of stones, small rocks,

fallen logs, boulders and disturbing small shrubs and sweeping of leaf litter. Indirect

evidences were used as cues for documenting mammalian fauna. Secondary data was

collected of animals to the villagers and their presence in the area was confirmed. Wherever

possible, photo documentation was done using Digital Camera of sufficiently high

resolution.

OBJECTIVE:

The major objectives of the study were:

1. To document the diversity of the local flora.





2. To enlist the major agricultural crops, plantations and cultivated species.

3. To document the major fauna both invertebrate and vertebrate occurring in the selected

study area.

3.10 SURVEY RESULTS

The survey was conducted in the 10 km radius of village Dhamadka i.e. proposed project

location and covered Tapar dam, and the surrounding villages, many of them had a village

ponds harbouring good diversity of water birds. The villages covered during the present

survey were Morgar, Amardi, Pasuda, Tapar, Sukhpar, Devisar, Dhamadka, Pakadsar,

Dudhai, Budharmora, Krishna nagar, Kotdaand Lunva. The type of soil varied from yellow

brown to dark brown indicating fair conditions for agriculture. No major or minor river/s

was observed in the current study area indicating the lentic water bodies are essentially rain

fed. Apart from agriculture locals of the all the villages were involved in livestock keeping

and each of the individual had a substantial number of cattle. This also directly suggests the

flourishing of dairy as a cottage industry in this belt. Apart from agriculture and animal

husbandry, locals are also employed in the nearby industries of their respective

locality.Interspersed with crop fields were patches of scrubland. This land was especially the

village wasteland and the vegetation was thorny and scrub type with the predominant

species herein was Prosopis juliflora or Gando Baval. A list of naturally occurring flora as well

as cultivated and introduced species is given as below in Table 3.26 to 3.27.

However, Forest involved in the study area is (4.46%) and Marginal north part comprised of

Mudflat & Salpan (1.95%) of 10 km study area area.

3.10.1 Assessment of flora in the study area

The natural terrestrial vegetation of the study area falls under “VI – B Northern Tropical

Forest” Sub type C‐I Desert Thorn Forest (Kuchchh, Gujarat). The majority area around the

proposed location was under cultivation. The natural vegetation along the steel plant was

predominately scrubland with scattered trees and some of the cultivated species. Prosopis





juliflora (Gando Baval) was observed to be the most dominant species amongst the shrub

vegetation.

Acacia senegal (Gorad), Acacia leucophloea (Harmo Baval), Acacia nilotica (Baval),

Azardirachta indica (Neem), Salvadora persica (Pilu, Khari Jar), Salvadora oleoides (Mithi

Jar), Ailanthus excelsa (Allu), Prosopis spicigera (Khijado) and the Prosopis juliflora (Gando

Baval) were observed to be predominantly occurring trees in this area.

From the ground survey and the secondary data collected from the locals the area harbours

around the major ones to be mentioned areCotton, Bajra, Wheat, Castor, Guar and other

crops. It was also evident from the survey that the area has 39 species of trees, 24 species of

shrubs, 28 species of herbs, 13 species of climbers, and remaining 11 species of grasses

observed/reported in the study area.

Terrestrial Flora in the Study Area:

Details pertaining to flora observed in the study area have been collected Forest Working

Plan for Kachchh East Forest Divisions, Bhuj and Field Observation carried out Anacon Team

is presented in a tabular format as in Table 3.26 and 3.27.

TABLE 3.26 DETAILS OF FLORA OBSERVED IN STUDY AREA

Sr.No. Scientific Name Local Name

TREE 1. Acacia auriculiformis Austrelian baval 2. Acacia tortilis Isaraili baval 3. Acacia leucophloea Harmo baval 4. Acacia nilotica Baval 5. Acacia sp. Gorad 6. Ailanthus aculeata Arduso 7. Azadirachta indica Limdo 8. Balanties aegyptica Hingoriyu 9. Bauhinia racemosa Asitro

10. Bombax ceiba L. Shemul 11. Cassia fistula L. Garmalo 12. Casuarina equisetifolia Saru

13. Cordia monoeica L. Gundi

14. Delonix regia (Boj.) Raf. Gulmahor 15. Derris indica (Lam.) Bennet. Karanj 16. Emblica officinalis Gaertn. Amla

17. Eucalyptus sp. Nilgiri 18. Feronia limonia Kothi






19. Ficus benghalensis Vad 20. Ficus elastica Rabar vad 21. Ficus hispida Dhedhumdo 22. Ficus religiosa Pipplo 23. Gmelina arborea Sevan

24. Holoptelea integrifolia Papdi, Kanjo 25. Melia azaderach Bakam limdo 26. Moringa oleifera. Sargavo 27. Parkinsonia aculeata Parkinsonia 28. Peltophorum pterocarpum Tamrfali 29. Phoenix dactylifera Khajuri 30. Phoenix sylvestris Khajuri 31. Pithecelobium dulce Gorasambli 32. Prosopis chilensis Gando baval 33. Prosopis spicigera Khijado 34. Salvadora oleoides Mithi jar 35. Salvadora persica Khari jar 36. Thevetia peruviana Pili karen 37. Acacia Planifrons Chatri Bawal 38. Azadirachta india Limbdo 39. Delbergia sissoo Shisam

SHRUBS 1. Acacia jacquenmontii Tal baval 2. Calotropis gigantea Ankado 3. Calotropis procera Ankado 4. Capparis decidua Kerdo 5. Capparis sepiaria Kanthar 6. Carica papaya Papaya 7. Cassia auriculata Aval 8. Clerodendron multiflorum Arni 9. Commiphora wightii Gugal 10. Euphorbia neriifolia Thor 11. Euphorbia nivulia Thor 12. Euphorbia tirucalli Kharsani 13. Grewia villosa Willd. Luo or Lue 14. Hibiscus rosa‐sinensis Jasood 15. Lantana camara Lantana 16. Lawsonia inermis Mehdi 17. Leptadenia pyrotechnica Khip 18. Nerium indicum Karen 19. Suaeda fruticosa Unt marod 20. Tamarix dioica Lai 21. Tamarix ericoides Lai 22. Tamarix troupii Lai

23. Zizyphus mauritiana Bor 24. Zizyphus nummularia Chani bor

HERBS/SMALL TREES






1. Abelmoschus moschatus Kasturi bhinda 2. Abutilon fruticosum Dabliyar 3. Abutilon indicum Kaski 4. Acalypha indica . Dadari 5. Achyranthes aspera Aghedi 6. Aeluropus lagopoides Ghas

7. Aerva javanica Borandu 8. Aerva lanata Gorakh ganjo 9. Agave americana Labdu 10. Aloe barbadensis Kuvarpathu 11. Alysicarpus longifolious Samervo 12. Amaranthus spinosus Kantalo Tandaljo 13. Amaranthus virdis Tandaljo 14. Apluda mutica Ghas 15. Argemone mexicana Darudi 16. Aristida adscensionis Ghas 17. Aristida hystricula Ghas

18. Cassia angustifolia 19. Cassia occindentalis Kasundri 20. Cassia tora Kuvadiyo 21. Catharanthus roseus Barmasi 22. Celosia argentea 23. Cleome viscosa Pili talvan 24. Ocimum canum Ran tulsi 25. Opuntia elatior Fafada thor 26. Parthenium hysterophorus Congress grass 27. Phragmites karka Ghas 28. Sida acuta Bala

CLIMBERS 1. Abrus precatorious Chanothi 2. Asparagus racemosus Shatavari 3. Atylosia platycarpa 4. Cayratia trifolia Khatumbo 5. Cissampelos pareira Pthar vel 6. Citrullus colocynthis Indramano 7. Clitoria ternatea ‐8. Coccinia grandis Gilodi 9. Ipomoea pes‐tigridis ‐ 10. Lablab purpurens ‐11. Leptadenia reticulata Dodi 12. Luffa echinata ‐ 13. Mucuna pruriens Kuvet

GRASS SPECIES 1. Iscchaemum indicum Ghas 2. Aeluropus lagopoides Ghas 3. Leptochloa chinensis Ghas 4. Cenchrus biflorus Roxb. Ghas






5. Cenchrus ciliaris L. Ghas 6. Cymbopogon martinii Roisha ghas 7. Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers. Dand 8. Desmostachya bipinnata Denach 9. Eleusine indica Ghas

10. Eragrostis ciliaris Ghas

11. Phragmites sp. ‐ 12. Apluda mutica Ghas 13. Bothriochloa pertusa Ghas

Source: Working Plan (Volume –I) for Kutch – East Forest Division, Bhuj‐Kutch and Discussion with local people & primary survey conducted by Anacon Team

TABLE 3.27 DETAILS OF AGRICULTURE CROPS OBSERVED IN STUDY AREA

Sr.No. Scientific Name Local Name 1. Abelmoschus esculentus Bhinda

3. Cajanus cajan Tuver 4. Cuminum cyminum Jiru 5. Cyamopsis tetragonoloba Guar 6. Gossypium herbaceum Kapas

7. Luffa acutangula Turiya 9. Momordica charantia Karela 10. Pennisetum typhoides Bajri 11. Ricinus communis Aerdo, Aerando12. Sesamum indicum Tal 13. Sorghum bicolor Juar 14. Tagetes patula Galgot 15. Citrus aurantia Bijoru

16. Vigna radiata Adad

Source: Discussion with local people & primary survey conducted by Anacon Team

3.10.2 Tree Density in the Study Area:

Acacia senegal was observed to have a density of 20 % of the total tree occurrence, while

Prosopis chilensis had a density of 40 % in surveyed study area.





SITE SPECIFIC PHOTO DOCUMENTATION – BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Approach road towards, proposed Jaybharat site

Proposed Jaybharat site Existing Azadirachta indica (Neem) plantations at proposed site

Communication with local people pertaining enquires of local Flora & Fauna

Surface water sampling at Tapar dam to study aquatic ecology

Grasses observed in study area

Major part of the study area covered by bushy vegetation of Prosopis juliflora (Gando baval).

Avenue plantation (part of social forestry) done by Forest Extension Division, Bhuj Range, Bachau.

Agriculture Crops within study area Tapar Dam within the study Area





3.10.3 Assessment of flora in the study area

As the entire of the study area had majority of it land under cultivation, followed by villages

and industries in remaining part, the scrubland in the form of a waste patch was much less

and therefore possibility occurrence of any wild mammal in good density was minimum.

Apart from the domestic animals, the human commensals were a very few mammalian

species that were reported by the locals. Like the Flap‐shell Turtle, the Grey Mongoose –

Herpestes edwardsi was observed in many areas moving singly or in pairs which indicated a

healthy population of this small carnivore mammal in this region. Villages also complained

about the crop raiding done by Nilgai or Bluebull in some the areas, whereas presence of

Jackal and Deer was confirmed through the indirect evidence in the form of the scat of the

animal.

On inquiring, locals did confirm the presence of Bluebulls, Deer, Jackals and Jungle Cat on

the outskirts of the villages; however, they completely denied the presence of Hyena in this

belt of the state. Locals also denied the occurrence of wild pigs except some region in study

area.

Birds are the most diverse group amongst the terrestrial higher vertebrates. In the present

study birds were found at all the locations i.e. in the villages, in agricultural fields, at

roadside, near the plant, in wetlands and along the river side. Birds can broadly be grouped

in to two categories, the waterfowls – birds seen at wetlands and the terrestrial birds. In

present survey a very good diversity of waterfowl was seen at various wetlands, which

included both resident as well as migratory water birds.

Time being winter, the season when the migratory birds flock in good numbers in these

warmer regions and return back to their home grounds before the dry season sets in. As the

time was of approaching spring, return journeys of these migratory birds had perhaps

started but still they were presents at various wetlands in good numbers. Apart from the

waterfowl the terrestrial bird diversity was also found to be rich and all the possible species

that could be encountered in the agricultural fields or around human settlements did exist

herein.





A detailed list of the local avifauna is given as below in the Table 3.29. and 3.30. To

document the total avifauna of present region are ‐

Among the reptiles, a remarkable feature of the current study was presence of ‘Flap‐shell

Turtle – Lissemys punctata’ in good numbers in almost all the village ponds that were

surveyed. Though this turtle is one of the common turtles across India, but its presence in

the water bodies is indeed as sign of a healthy ecosystem. Scrubland offered a possibility of

occurrence of land tortoises but on inquiring to the locals this possibility was totally

negated.

Lizards and snakes are the most adaptive groups of reptiles as they can be seen living in the

very close vicinity of human populations. Lizards are common every where, in house, in

fields, in wastelands and in wilderness.

In terrestrial invertebrate fauna is mainly represented by the organisms of three groups,

namely annelids, molluscs, and arthropods. Since the current survey was conducted in the

month of March, the annelids and mollucans were found to be largely absent from the

environment owing to the extreme temperatures. Presence of earthworms was confirmed

through secondary, while a few molluscans could be recorded in lieu of the water being

present in many of the village ponds. Further, among thea annelids, Molluscs & butterflies

are observed and common is study area are given in Table 3.31 and 3.32.

The faunal diversity observed/reported in the study area is Mammals (11), Amphibians (4),

Reptiles (17), Avifauna (Waterfowl avifauna ‐ 46 and Terrestrial Birds 36), and Invertibrates

(including Annelids & Molluscs) (3), Butterflies (6) .

TABLE 3.28 DETAILS OF FAUNA OBSERVED/REPORTED IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Scientific Name English Name

MAMMALS 1. Rattus rattus House Rat 2. Mus musculus House Mouse 3. Funambulus pennanti Five striped palm squirrel 4. Pteropus giganticus Indian Flying Fox 5. Lepas nigricollis Indian Hare 6. Herpestes edwardsi Mongoose





7. Felis chaus Jungle Cat 8. Canis aureus Jackal 9. Boselaphus tragocamelus Nilgai/Bluebull 10. Presbytis entellus Hanuman Langur11. Wild Boar Sus crofa cristatus

AMPHIBIANS 1. Duttaphrynus melanostcitus Common Indian Toad 2. Bufo stomaticus Marbled Toad 3. Euphlictis cyanophlictis Skittering Frog 4. Haplobatrachus tigerinus Indian Bull Frog

REPTILES 1. Lissemys punctata Flap‐Shell Turtle 2. Hemidactylus flaviviridis Northern House Gecko 3. Hemidactylus brookii Brook’s Gecko 4. Calotes versicolor Common Garden Lizard 5. Sitana ponticeriana Fan‐throated lizard 6. Chameleon zeylanicus Indian Chameleon 7. Mabuya carinata Common Skink 8. Mabuya macularia Grass Skink9. Varanus sp. Common Indian Monitor 10. Eryx johnii Russell’s Earth Boa 11. Eryx conicus Common Sand Boa 12. Ptyas mucosus Common Ratsnake13. Xenochropis piscator Checkered Keelback 14. Oligodon arnensis Common Kukri Snake 15. Lycodon aulicus Common Wolf Snake 16. Naja naja Indian Cobra 17. Daboia russeli Russel’s Viper


TABLE 3.29 DETAILS OF AVIFAUNA (WATERFOWL) OBSERVED/REPORTED AT

VARIOUS VILLAGE PONDS IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr.No. Scientific Name Common Name 1. Podiceps cristatus Great crested grebe 2. Tachybaptus ruficolis Little grebe3. Pelecanus onocrotalus Rosy pelican4. Pelecanus philippensis Spot‐billed pelican 5. Anhinga Melanogaster Darter 6. Phalacrocorax niger Little Cormorant

7. Phalacrocorax fuscicollis Indian Cormorant 8. Phalacrocorax carbo Great Cormorant 9. Anas poecilorhyncha Spot‐Billed Duck 10. Anas crecca Common Teal






TABLE 3.30 DETAILS OF AVIFAUNA OBSERVED/REPORTED AT THE SUREYED SITE

TERRESTRIAL BIRDS

Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name 1. Pavo cristatus Indian Peafowl 2. Francolinus Pondicerianus Grey Francolin 3. Coracias benghalensis Indian Roller4. Halcyon smyrnensis White Breasted Kingfisher 5. Ceryle rudis Pied Kingfisher 6. Merops orientalis Green Bee‐Eater 7. Upupa epops Hoopoe

8. Eudynamys scolopaceae Asian Koel 9. Centropus bengalensis Lesser Coucal 10. Psittacula karmeri Rose Ringed Parakeet 11. Athene brama Spotted Owlet12. Columba livia Blue Rock Pigeon 13. Streptopelia chinensis Spotted Dove

11. Anas Strepera Gadwall 12. Anas Penelope Euasian wigeon 13. Anas acuta Northern Pintail 14. Anas clypeata Northern shovellar15. Aythya ferina Common Pochard 16. Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret 17. Egretta garzetta Little Egret18. Ardeola grayii Indian Pond Heron19. Ardea cinererea Grey Heron 20. Ardea purpurea Purple Heron 21. Egretta gularis Western Reef Egret22. Pseudibis papillosa Black Ibis 23. Plegadis falcenellus Glossy Ibis 24. Platelea leucoroidea Spoonbill 25. Mycteria leucocephala Painted Stork26. Phoenicopterus ruber Greater Flamingo 27. Gallinago gallinago Common Snipe 28. Vanellus indicus Red‐Wattled Lapwing 29. Tringa totanus Common Redshank30. Tringa nebularia Common Greenshank 31. Tringa stagnatilis Marsh Sandpiper 32. Actitis hypoleucos Common Sandpiper 33. Philomachus pugnax Ruff

34. Charadrius alexandrinus Kentish Plover 35. Himantopus himantopus Black‐Winged Stilt 36. Grus virgo Demoiselle Crane37. Gallinula chloropus Common Moorhen 38. Fulica atra Common Coot





14. Milvus migrans Black Kite 15. Accipiter baidus Shikra 16. Corvus splendens House crow 17. Corvus macrorhynchos Jungle Crow18. Dicrurus macrocercus Black Drongo 19. Saxicoloides fulicata Indian Robin 20. Copsychus saularis Magpie Robin21. Orthotomus sutorius Common Tailorbird22. Prinia socialis Ashy Prinia 23. Acridotheres tristis Indian Myna 24. Acridotheres ginginianus Bank Myna

25. Acridotheres tristis Common Myna 26. Pycnonotus cafer Red Vented Bulbul 27. Pycnonotus leucotis White‐eared Bulbul 28. Turdoides caudatus Common Babbler29. Turdoides striatus Jungle Babbler 30. Turdoides malcolmi Large Grey Babbler 31. Eremopterix grisea Ashy Crowned Sparrow Lark 32. Ammomanes phoenicurus Rufous‐Tailed Lark33. Passer domesticus House Sparrow 34. Ploceus philippinus Baya Weaver 35. Lonchura malabarica Indian Silverbill 36. Nectarinia asiatica Purple Sunbird

Source: Working Plan (Volume –I) for Kutch – East Forest Division, Bhuj‐Kutch and Discussion with local people & primary survey conducted by Anacon

TABLE 3.31 DETAILS OF INVERTIBRATES OBSERVED IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr no. Scientific Name Common Name ANNELIDS

1 Pheritima posthum Earthworm MOLLUSCS

2 Lymnea sp. Pond snail 3 Helix pomatia Garden snail

Source: Discussion with local people primary survey conducted by Anacon Team

TABLE 3.32 DETAILS OF BUTTERERFLIES OF THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name

ANNELIDS

1. Pheritima posthum Earthworm MOLLUSCS

1. Lymnea sp. Pond snail 2. Helix pomatia Garden snail

BUTTERFLIES 1. Eurema hecabe 1. Common Grass yellow





2. Catopsilia crocale 2. Common Emigrant

3. Delia eucharis 3. Common Jezebel

4. Danaus chrysippus 4. Plain Tiger

5. Junonia orithya 5. Blue Pancy

6. Pachliopta hector 6. Crimson Rose

Source: Discussion with local people & primary survey conducted by Anacon Team

3.10.4 Rare, Endangered, Threatened Plant Species

The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation

status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of

thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and allregions

of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most

authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. Out of 17000 species of higher plants

known to occur in India, nearly 614 higher plant species were evaluated by IUCN. Among

them 247 species are under threatened category. (IUCN, 2007).

As per the survey conducted in the study area there no any threatened, vulnerable or

endangered species are reported within the study area

3.10.5 Rare and endangered fauna of the study area

The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation

status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of

thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions

of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most

authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. IUCN, (2007) has evaluated 1976

animal species from India, among them 313 have in recognized as threatened species.

Among them one species is considered as extinct, while 44 species are in critically

endangered( CR) catogery,88 is in endangered category(EN), while 181 is considered as

vulnerable (VU).

As per IUCN Red list of threatened species, there is all species of animals are Least concern

or many of them not evaluated except among the birds only Pelecanus philippensis (Spot‐

billed pelican), Anhinga Melanogaster (Darter), Mycteria leucocephala (Painted

Stork)observed in study area are Near Threatened (NT) Category as per IUCN.





Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, amended on 17thJanuary 2003, is an Act to provide for the

protection of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith orancillary

or incidental thereto with a view to ensuring the ecological and environmental security of

the country. Some of the sighted fauna was given protection by the Indian Wild Life

(Protection) Act,1972 by including them in different schedules. Among the birds in the study

area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus), is included in schedule I of Wild life protection Act (1972),

while many other birds are included in schedule IV.

Among the reptiles, Lissemys punctata (Indian Flap‐shell Turtle) is provided in Schedule – I

(Part II) Indian Cobra (Naja naja), Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus) and Varanus Sp.

(Common Monitor Lizard) were provided protection as per Schedule‐II of Wild life

protection act, (1972).

Among the butterflies all are kept in Schedule – IV as per WPA – 1972.

Among mammals; Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), Jungle cat (Felis chaus), Jackel (Canis

aureus), and Hanuman langur (Presbytis entellus) are schedule –II animals. Wild boar (Sus

crofa cristatus) and Boselaphus tragocamelus (Blue bull) is protected as Schedule‐III animal

and Hares& Five striped squirrel are included in schedule IV of Wild Life Protection act 1972.

Indian Flying Fox (Pteropus giganticus) & Rats protected in Schedule V of Wild Life

Protection act 1972.

3.10.6 Fishes & Agricluture

Fishes

Fishes are the lower most vertebrates and the group leads an aquatic life. Fish is a

commercial product obtained from aquatic resources, forming staple diet of almost 40% of

the world’s population.In the current study no site of commercial inland fishery was

observed, neither any local fishing activity was observed as this belt of the state has much of

influence of Jain culture and therefore, major population herein is found to be vegetarian in

their dietary habit. However as per the Department of Fisheries, Bhuj marine fish production

data in Anjar and Bhachau Taluka (Last three years) are presented in Table 3.33.





TABLE 3.33MARINE FISH PRODUCTION (YEAR 2009‐12)

Sr No Name of Fish Taluka‐Anjar (Sangad) Taluka‐ Bhuchau (suraj buri) 2009‐10(MT)

2011‐12 (MT)

2010‐11 (MT)

2009‐10(MT)

2011‐12 (MT)

2010‐2012 (MT)

1 White Pompret 1 8 15 ‐ ‐2 Black Pompret ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 Bombay duck 10 167 0 ‐ ‐ 4 Thread Fish 0 ‐ 87 ‐ ‐ 5 Other Clupeid 7 40 22 ‐ 15 ‐6 Coilia 7 73 54 ‐ ‐ 7 Shauk 1 10 1 ‐ ‐ 8 Mullet 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 9 Cat Fish 4 12 16 ‐ 7 ‐10 Seeu Fish 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 11 Ribban Fish ‐ 25 29 ‐ ‐ 12 Silver Bau ‐ 6 10 ‐ ‐ 13 Peluches ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 14 Small Scieniedes 21 34 46 125 47 156 15 Shrimps 3 52 53 1091 57 2278

16 Prawns (medium) ‐ 13 6 68 176

17 Crabs ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 18 Miscellaneous 41 43 44 68 18 76

Total Production 100 489 370 1353 144 2686

Source: Department of Fisheries, Bhuj

Agriculture Crop Production:

The study area comprises of two talukas which are Bhachau & Anjar. The comprehensive

data pertaining Agriculture crop production was procured from Agriculture Department,

Bhuj. Details of crop production in Kharif, Rabi and Summer Season in Bhachau & Anjar are

presented in Table 3.34 to Table 3.35.

TABLE 3.34 AGRICLUTURE CROP PRODUCTION (KHARIF SEASON)

Sr.No. CROP 2010‐ 11 2011‐12 2012‐13

ANJAR BHACHAU ANJAR BHACHAU ANJAR BHACHAU Cultivated Crop in Kharif Season (Area in Ha)

1 Groundnut 3500 13000 5000 6500 2840 3750

2 Sesamum 3465 12900 3250 3500 20 215 3 Castor 9250 8680 10200 17000 6325 18720 4 Bajra 13710 11900 200 11900 275 1250

5 Cotton 3570 9315 5500 6565 3650 5325 6 Greengram 4650 12100 7800 13700 1175 2280 7 Blackgram 750 1550 550 12100 ‐ ‐





8 Guar 5765 8430 3000 12500 1230 960 9 Urd 25 35 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 10 Senna 3652 6892 600 650 ‐ ‐ 11 Jowar 60 65 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐13 Sunflower 40 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 14 Onion 315 20 ‐ ‐ 100 ‐ 15 Vegetables 5850 4872 4800 430 150 ‐ 16 Sugarcane ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2275 700 17 Fodder 5890 11200 5000 11700 5740 12670

TOTAL 60492 100959 45900 96545 23800 45890

TABLE 3.35AGRICLUTURE CROP PRODUCTIONS (RABI SEASON)

Sr.No. CROP 2010‐ 11 2011‐12 2012‐13

ANJAR BHACHAU ANJAR BHACHAU ANJAR BHACHAU Cultivated Crop in Rabi Season (Area in Ha)

1 Wheat 1700 1930 1100 1850 850 1100 2 Gram 10 10 ‐ ‐ 25 25

3 Mustard 2284 2380 750 1650 830 1900

4 Cumin 1510 3500 1100 2400 250 1500

5 Garlic 395 100 380 125 55 45

6 Coriander ‐ ‐ 400 250 ‐ ‐

7 Fenugreek ‐ ‐ 620 175 ‐ ‐

8 Isbgul 125 500 190 375 20 15

9 Sunflower ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

10 Onion 1500 250 1330 270 35 35 11 Potato ‐ ‐ 180 ‐ 70 ‐ 12 Vegetables 4500 2000 4200 1750 4280 1560

13 Sugarcane ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 15 10

14 Fodder 2990 3000 2700 2850 2620 2930

15 Fennel 80 150 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

TOTAL 15094 13820 12950 11695 9050 9120

TABLE 3.36 AGRICLUTURE CROP PRODUCTIONS (SUMMER SEASON)

Sr.No. CROP 2010‐ 11 2011‐12 2012‐13

ANJAR BHACHAU ANJAR BHACHAU ANJAR BHACHAU Cultivated Crop in Summer Season (Area in Ha)

1 Summer groundnut 2000 1000 2250 1395 350 575

2 Summer bajra 134 75 75 65 15 30

3 Summer greengram ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 10 15 4 Onion 550 ‐ 360 ‐ ‐ ‐ 5 Urd ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

6 Muskmelon ‐ ‐ 690 200 45 75 7 Guar ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 135 140

8 Watermelon ‐ ‐ 70 35 35 15





9 Sunflower ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 10 Vegetables 2000 200 1850 535 210 160

11 Fodder 3500 1000 3800 2050 540 570

12 Summer sesamum 150 160 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

TOTAL 8334 2435 9095 4280 1340 1580

3.11 METHODS EMPLOYED FOR PALNKTON DOUCMENTATION

Samples were collected from freshwater for the analysis of their plankton diversity. The

sites that were selected for the collection of water samples included the ‘Tapar Dam’ in

village Tapar falling within the 10 km radius. The location was decided looking into the utility

of the water body and other mega‐diversity that was observed at these sites. Since Tapar

Dam was the only major source of irrigation in this region, although had no great of human

dependence and supported a healthy population of waterfowl these site was selected for

studying the plankton diversity. One sample from the sites were collected, processed and

thoroughly examined for the plankton diversity.

3.11.1 Collection of Plankton

Sampling of planktons was done by filtering 10 liters of water through a bag net of pore size

70µm for phytoplankton and 200 µm for zooplankton. A coarse sieve was used on top of the

bag net during filtration to separate out debris and excess silt. The residue left in both the

nets after filtration was then carefully washed with distilled water and collectively

conditioned in plastic containers with inert cap liners and the volume was made up to 1 L.

The samples were fixed in 1% Formaldehyde and Lugol’s Solution (0.3%) for 5 days. 10ml of

this fixed sample was then centrifuged at 1500 rpm for 10 minutes. Supernatant was

discarded and the concentrated sample was taken for further microscopic observations.

0.5ml of the sample was taken on Sedwick‐Rafter Counting Cells and plankton number was

counted. Since the concentration of the filtrate is 1000 times the volume of sample filtered

hence each 0.5 ml of the sample corresponds to 500 ml. The identification was done using a

light microscope under 45X or 100X magnification. The planktons were then compared with

the descriptive and/or photographic identification keys given by Desikachary, 1959;





Prescott, 1959; Sournia, 1974; Boltovskoy, 1981; Round et al., 1990; Santhanam, 1993 etc.

Species were identified to a greater possible taxonomic level.

SIGNIFICANCE OF PLANKTON:

Planktons can be broadly grouped into two categories those with plant origin are called

‘Phytoplankton’ and those with animal origin are called ‘Zooplankton’.

Significance of Phytoplankton:

Phytoplanktons are the major primary producers of organic matter in the aquatic ecosystem

and especially oceans whose 90% productivity is from the planktons. Collectively, they

directly or indirectly support the entire animal population. When the water column

becomes shallow in spring, phytoplanktonare exposed to higher light intensity in the upper

sunlight. Light is one of the major abiotic factors that favour the growth of phytoplankton.

The massive build up of phytoplankton in spring directly contributes new organic carbon to

support the zooplankton, which, in turn, benefits larger aquatic animals including fish,

crustaceans, molluscs, birds and in this case Flamingos.

Significance of Zooplankton:

The significance of zooplanktons is found in their role in transferring biological production

from phytoplankton to larger organisms in the food web. A large number of phytoplankton

species are grazed upon by the microscopic protozoans, tunicates, copepods and other

crustaceans. These in turn become food for other animals further linking the food web.

Therefore, variability in the production of planktons would affect the survival of young fish

that depend on them.

3.11.2 Results of Plankton Analysis

The Plankton density, diversity and species richness are expressed herein separate tables,

each table corresponding to the site of collection. The density is expressed as number of

planktons per litre of the sample. The species richness indicates the number of species of

plankton both phytoplankton and zooplankton recorded from each of the sites. Rationale

behind selecting these sites has already been discussed above, however due to

malfunctioning of equipment the photographs of these organism could not be obtained.





Analysis of these parameters is essential when the study area encompasses any major or

minor water bodies. In the current study small village ponds were observed in few other

villages too, but the Bhimasar pond was selected looking into the diversity of the higher

organisms that were recorded at the site.

TABLE 3.37 PLANKTON DENSITY AT EACH OF THE LOCATIONS; EXPRESSED AS NOS. / L

Sampling Locations Phytoplankton/L Zooplankton/L Tapar Dam 13 11

TABLE 3.38 PLANKTON DIVERSITY AT THAPAR DAM

Phytoplankton Zooplankton Biddulphia sp. Calanus sp Coscinodiscus Eucalanus spNavicula sp. Centropages sp Pleurosigma sp. Lamitods Skeletonema sp. Unidentified Rotifer Synedra

TABLE 3.39 SPECIES RICHNESS OF PLANKTON AT THE SELECTED SAMPLING SITES

Sampling Site Plankton

Total Phytoplankton Zooplankton

Tapar Dam 06 05 11

Inference for the Plankton Analysis:

Density, diversity and species richness are some of the basic parameters used in ecological

studies to judge the status of any ecosystem under consideration. In case of aquatic

ecosystem (both freshwater and marine) apart from the higher plants and animals, plankton

community forms a major component of the ecosystem.

Observation:

• In the present study the density of phytoplankton was found to be 13/L, whereas the

density of zooplankton was also found to be 11/L in Tapar Dam.

• The species richness was observed to be higher in Phytoplankton than in

zooplankton.

Conclusion:

The plankton diversity and density observed at Tapar Dam location was good. Since, the proposed project is not involved with any kind of toxic effluents to be dischargedin the natural water bodies, plankton herein would be unaffected and hence the higher trophic levels shall remain safe.





3.12 SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

Any developmental project plays an important role in the economic development of the

country. Steel is one of the major sources for the industrial development and economic

growth apart from fulfilling the gaps between demand and supply as well as for the welfare

of the people. It needs the basic/modern needs of the society which ultimately result in

overall improvement of the quality of life through employment and establishment of the

social, economy status in the project region/state as well as the country.

3.12.1 Environmental, Ecological and Human health risk

Projects are expected towards the contribution of environmental degradation by

generating/discharging different types of pollutants in the surrounding environment not only

affect natural resources, ecological but also have major impacts on the local population

surrounding the project area. The biggest health risks are from the emissions from the stacks

which may cause health effects unless the development is planned properly and

implementation in an environmentally sustainable manner through implementation of the

pollution, prevention, mitigation and control measures. In this manner, the developmental

projects have direct as well as indirect relationship with the socio‐economic aspects, which

also include public acceptability for any developmental projects.

In order to ensure that there is no further degradation of the environment as a consequence of

related activities of the project in the region, it becomes necessary to assess the socio‐

economic environment in the region. The study of socio‐economic component incorporating

various facets related to prevailing social and cultural condition and economic status of the

project region is an important part of EIA study. The socio economic study in the present case

includes demographic structures, population dynamics, infrastructural resources, status of

human health and economic attributes like employment, per capital income, agriculture, trade,

industrial development etc. in the proposed project region.

The aesthetic component of environmental studies refers to the scenic value if any, in the

study area, tourist attraction, details about forests, wild life, historic and cultural monuments.

The study of these parameters helps in identification, prediction and evaluation of likely

impacts on socio‐economic and parameters of human interest due to proposed project.





3.12.1.1 Methodology Adopted for the study

Desk research is the major methodology adopted for the study which involves researching,

compiling and analysing the data collected 10 km radial distance of the plant site. For socio ‐

economic survey within 10 km radial distance was divided into two zones (0 – 5 km, 6 – 10

km). Finally the sociological aspects including human settlements, demography, and caste

composition, moreover the literacy levels, infrastructure facilities, the economic aspects

include occupational structure of workers have been collected, compiled and analysed with

the help of Census data 2001(Annexure IX).

3.12.2 Baseline status (Existing social condition)

To assess the impact on the socio economic environment, it is essential to collect the

following data:

• Population surrounding the project site those likely to be target receptor of impact

• Standard of living at the site i.e. the infrastructure available to the local population

such as water supply and sanitation, electricity, roads, education and medical treatment.

The latest available data has been compiled and research tasks (i.e. field

investigation/survey) were completed in order to delineate a baseline of the existing socio‐

economic profile survey in the study area.

The data base thus generated in this study includes:

• Demographic structures

• Infrastructure base in project area

• Economic attributes

• Health status

• Cultural attributes

• Socio‐economic status with reference to quality of life

• Awareness and opinion of the people about the project

3.12.2.1 Demography:

The demographic aspect of the study area comprises of the various features of the

population including their size, composition and distribution across the location. The





population composition is described in term of basic demographic features like, house hold

status, age, social composition, education and occupation etc. The distribution of population

has been reflected here based on the geographic boundaries.

I. Dwelling units of the study area:

S No. Distance No. of villages Taluka District 1 0 – 5 KM 03 Anjar

Kutch 01 Bhachau 2 6 – 10 KM 07 Anjar

07 Bhachau 01 Bhuj

Dwelling unit explains the geographical composition of the area. The table depicts the

number of villages within the 10 km radius of the plant. It demonstrates that the proposed

site for the plat is fall within the boundary of Dhamadka Village of Anjar taluka in Bhuj

district. However the 10 km radius extends to three taluka (Anjar and Bhachau & Bhuj)

covering 19 villages. The first zone (0 ‐5 Km) constitute four villages where as the second

phase (6 – 10 km) constitute 15 villages from three taluka.

The taluka wise segregation of the villages indicates that in first zone (0 – 5 KM) out of total

four villages three from Anjar taluka whereas only one village is from Bhachau taluka. The

second zone constitutes 15 villages out of which seven each from Anjar and Bhachau taluka

where as one village from Bhuj taluka.

II. Demographic highlights of the study area:

SUB‐DISTT TOWN_VILL NAME OF VILLAGES

No_HH TOT_P P_SC P_ST P_06

0 ‐5 Km Bhachau 00024700 Bhujpar 127 582 168 98 117

Anjar 00027300 Budharmora 362 1545 61 42 297

Anjar 00027400 Dhamadka 553 2569 197 100 471

Anjar 00027500 Dudhai 745 3416 340 204 553

Sub total 1787 8112 766 444 1438

6‐10 km Bhachau 00022100 Kharoi 366 1642 138 308 286

Bhachau 00022400 Morgar 263 1179 133 259 207

Bhachau 00022500 Amardi 285 1150 133 80 153

Bhachau 00022600 Kabrau 294 1323 28 161 193

Bhachau 00022700 Kumbhardi 217 882 107 0 102





Bhachau 00024500 Lunva 349 1371 43 440 256

Bhachau 00024600 Sukhpar 271 1159 113 55 199

Anjar 00026900 Khirsara 301 1309 46 0 254

Anjar 00027000 Devisar 18 77 0 15 17

Anjar 00027200 Amrapar 120 553 91 23 102

Anjar 00027600 Khengarpar 20 99 0 0 16

Anjar 00028000 Kotda 398 1682 166 78 286

Anjar 00028100 Pashuda 146 597 38 67 102

Anjar 00028200 Tapar 669 2692 125 388 399

Bhuj 00036500 Raiyada 120 496 0 0 72

Sub total 3837 16211 1161 1874 2644

Grand total 5624 24323 1927 2318 4082

Notes: H.H: House Hold, Total_P: Total Population, P_SC: Population Scheduled Caste, P_ST: Population Scheduled tribe, P_06: Total population under age six.

According to census 2001, 5624 households are dwelling within the 10 km radius of the

project site. The total population in the study area is 24323 out of it 1927 (7.92%) are

belonging to scheduled caste (SC) and 2318 (9.53%) belong to scheduled Tribe. This

indicates that the disadvantages section of the society encompasses 4245 (17.45%)

individuals. Among the disadvantaged group, the numbers of scheduled caste are more than

the scheduled tribes. Moreover the data of children below six years of age group indicates

4082 children in the area.

III. Population and social structures

S. N.

Village name

Total population SC Population ST population Child (< 06)

T M F T M F T M F T M F

1. Bhujpar 582 288 294 168 82 86 98 49 49 117 67 50 2. Budharmoa 1545 816 729 61 29 32 42 21 21 297 162 135 3. Dhamadka 2569 1353 1216 197 109 88 100 52 48 471 251 220 4. Dudhai 3416 1658 1758 340 166 174 204 105 99 553 265 288 Sub‐Total 8112 4115 3997 766 386 380 444 227 217 1438 745 693 5. Kharoi 1642 857 785 138 68 70 308 169 139 286 165 121 6. Morgar 1179 618 561 133 71 62 259 142 117 207 118 89 7. Amardi 1150 530 620 133 66 67 80 37 43 153 72 81 8. Kabrau 1323 655 668 28 14 14 161 81 80 193 90 103 9. Kumbhardi 882 449 433 107 53 54 0 0 0 102 53 49 10. Lunva 1371 713 658 43 24 19 440 229 211 256 138 118 11. Sukhpar 1159 613 546 113 65 48 55 29 26 199 115 84 12. Khirsara 1309 700 609 46 27 19 0 0 0 254 141 113





13. Devisar 77 45 32 0 0 0 15 10 5 17 10 7 14. Amrapar 553 291 262 91 43 48 23 11 12 102 50 52 15. Khengarpar 99 54 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 12 4 16. Kotda 1682 872 810 166 95 71 78 31 47 286 155 131 17. Pashuda 597 303 294 38 19 19 67 33 34 102 52 50 18. Tapar 2692 1376 1316 125 62 63 388 207 181 399 206 193 19. Raiyada 496 258 238 0 0 0 0 0 0 72 38 34 Sub total 16211 8334 7877 1161 607 554 1874 979 895 2644 1415 1229 Grand total 24323 12449 11874 1927 993 934 2318 1206 1112 4082 2160 1922

The population and social structure of the study area as represented in the above table

depicts the sex wise segregation of the population in total and specifically amongst the

Scheduled caste, Scheduled Tribe and children below six years of age. Out of the total

population, 12449(51.18%) are male and 11874(48.82%) are female whereas out of the total

1927Scheduled caste, 993 (51.53%) are male and 934(48.47%) are female. The total

scheduled tribe population is 2318, out of which 1206 (52.03%) are male whereas 1112

(47.97%) are female. Further, the under six years of age group total population is 4082, out

of which, 2160 (52.92%) are male and 1922 (47.08%) are female.

IV. Detail of sex Ratio of the study area

Sr. No. Taluka Village Sex Ratio 1 Bhachau Bhujpar 1021 2 Anjar Budhar Mora 893

3 Anjar Dhamadka 899

4 Anjar Dudhai 1060 5 Bhachau Kharoi 916 6 Bhachau Morgar 908

7 Bhachau Amardi 1170 8 Bhachau Kabrau 1020 9 Bhachau Kumbharadi 964 10 Bhachau Lunva 923

11 Bhachau Sukhpar 891 12 Anjar Khirsara 870

13 Anjar Devisar 711

14 Anjar Amarapar 900

15 Anjar Khengarpar 833 16 Anjar Kotda 929 17 Anjar Pashuda 970 18 Anjar Tapar 956 19 Bhuj Raiyada 922

Over all Village Sex Ratio 1048

Notes: sex ratio is the Ratio of males to females in the population (normalized to 100).





The sex ratio among the various groups indicate that the overall sex ratio of the study area

in accordance to the population is little high i.e. for 1048 male there are 1000 female

whereas the sex ratio among the scheduled caste population is 1063 male for 1000 female

and the scheduled tribe, the sex ratio is 1084 male for 1000 female. The sex ratio amongst

the under 06 population group is 1123 male per 1000 female.

V. Detail of literacy rate:

NAME P_LIT M_LIT F_LIT P_ILL M_ILL F_ILL Literacy ratio

Bhujpar 220 146 74 362 142 220 47.3%

Budharmora 607 409 198 938 407 531 48.6%

Dhamadka 1184 766 418 1385 587 798 56.4%

Dudhai 1598 901 697 1818 757 1061 55.8%

Sub total 3609 2222 1387 4503 1893 2610 44.48%

6 – 10 Km Kharoi 717 444 273 925 413 512 52.9%

Morgar 479 300 179 700 318 382 49.3%

Amardi 585 322 263 565 208 357 58.7%

Kabrau 625 362 263 698 293 405 55.3%

Kumbhardi 464 276 188 418 173 245 38.3%

Lunva 424 290 134 947 423 524 38%

Sukhpar 577 328 249 582 285 297 60.1%

Khirsara 223 185 38 1086 515 571 21.1%

Devisar 21 18 3 56 27 29 35%

Amrapar 152 113 39 401 178 223 33.7%

Khengarpar 66 39 27 33 15 18 79.5%

Kotda 708 456 252 974 416 558 50.7%

Pashuda 239 150 89 358 153 205 48.3%

Tapar 1058 694 364 1634 682 952 46.1%

Raiyada 57 51 6 439 207 232 13.4%

Sub total 6395 4028 2367 9816 4306 5510 39.44%

Grand total 10004 6250 3754 14319 6199 8120 41.12%

Notes: P_LIT: Total population literate, M_LIT: Male literate, F_LIT: Female literate, P_ILL: Total population Illiterate, M_ ILL: Male

literate, F_ILL: Female Illiterate.

In the study area, out of 24323 population only 10004 (41.13%) are literate whereas

14319(58.87%) are illiterate. The overall literacy rate in the area is 41.12% which is 24% less

than Gujrat’s literacy rate (79.35%). and 24% lower than the national literacy rate (64.84%)

as per 2001 census. However the sex wise distribution of literacy rates revealed that, out of





the total literate individuals, 6250 (62.48%) are male whereas 3754(37.52%) are female

which indicate that there is almost 25 % difference between male and female literacy ratio.

3.12.2.2 Detail of occupational structures of the study area:

Relevance of economic activity and livelihood pattern is important in the context of study

since one of the indirect benefits of proposed project is job opportunity & high economic

activity during construction as well as operation phase. Depending on the existing situation,

one can predict impact of the project activity on economy of the village & the region. Table

below gives the employment pattern in the villages.

Sr. No

Village

Total Workers Main Workers Marginal Workers

Non Workers

T M F T M F T M F T M F

0 – 5 Km

1 Bhujpar 231 136 95 157 132 25 74 4 70 351 152 199

2 Budharmora 665 477 188 655 475 180 10 2 8 880 339 541

3 Dhamadka 1000 733 267 778 729 49 222 4 218 1569 620 949

4 Dudhai 1234 873 361 1108 856 252 126 17 109 2182 785 1397

Sub total 3130 2219 911 2698 2192 506 432 27 405 4982 1896 3086

6 – 10 KM

5 Kharoi 701 471 230 602 469 133 99 2 97 941 386 555

6 Morgar 442 330 112 415 313 102 27 17 10 737 288 449

7 Amardi 520 308 212 266 250 16 254 58 196 630 222 408

8 Kabrau 471 380 91 346 329 17 125 51 74 852 275 577

9 Kumbhardi 378 269 109 343 258 85 35 11 24 504 180 324

10 Lunva 686 399 287 681 399 282 5 0 5 685 314 371

11 Sukhpar 336 304 32 304 286 18 32 18 14 823 309 514

12 Khirsara 564 406 158 521 406 115 43 0 43 745 294 451

13 Devisar 37 26 11 37 26 11 0 0 0 40 19 21

14 Amrapar 254 142 112 145 141 4 109 1 108 299 149 150

15 Khengarpar 50 24 26 50 24 26 0 0 0 49 30 19

16 Kotda 703 466 237 630 459 171 73 7 66 979 406 573

17 Pashuda 335 179 156 259 178 81 76 1 75 262 124 138

18 Tapar 945 750 195 555 511 44 390 239 151 1747 626 1121

19 Raiyada 180 164 16 112 103 9 68 61 7 316 94 222

Sub total 6602 4618 1984 5266 4152 1114 1336 466 870 9609 3716 5893

Grand total 9732 6837 2895 7964 6344 1620 1768 493 1275 14591 5612 8979

The occupational pattern in the study area indicates that, out of total population,

9732(40.01%) are workers whereas 14591 (59.99%) are non‐workers. The sex wise





distribution of the workers and non‐workers reveals that, out of the total workers, 6837

(70.25%) are male and 2895 (29.75%) are female .Whereas among the non‐ workers, 5612

(38.46%) are male and 8979 (61.54%) are female. This indicates that in working group the

percentages of male population is higher than the female whereas in non‐working groups,

the number of the female is higher than the male section of the society.

The distribution of main working group reveals that out of the total workers, 7964 (81.83%)

are main workers and 1768 (18.17%) are marginal workers. Amongst the main workers,

6344 (79.66%) are male and 1620(20.34%) are female whereas among the marginal workers

493 (27.88%) are male and 1275 (72.12%) are female.

3.12.2.3 Infrastructures facilities

The socio‐economic wellbeing of the area and its people is represented by the infrastructure

and the social assets available in the area. The various infrastructural facilities related to

education, health care, communication, transportation, drinking waters etc. in the study

area are described below:‐

a. Educational facilities

Sr.No. Institution 0 – 5 Km 6 – 10 Km 0 – 10 Km 1 Primary schools 04 15 19 2 Middle schools 00 00 00 3 Secondary schools 00 00 00 4 Senior Secondary schools 00 00 00 5 College 00 00 00 5 Adult Education Centres 10 25 35 6 Other Education Centres 00 00 00

The primary educational facilities evenly distributed in the study area. There are only 19

primary schools located in the 19 villages. There are 35 adult education centres available

within the study area. (Annexure IX).

b. Health and medical infrastructure

Sr. No

Type of Institution 0‐5 km 6 – 10 KM 0 – 10 Km

1 No. Hospital 00 00 00 2 Total Dispensaries 00 00 00 9 No. of Primary Health Centre 01 00 01 10 No. of Primary Health Sub Centre 00 03 03





The above table indicates that health care facilities are poorly exist in the study area to fulfil

the health need of the people. The health care facilities include both infrastructure and man

power. No hospital facilities are available within 10 km area. 1 primary health centres, 3

primary health sub centres, 2 family welfare centreare available in the study area. In term of

man power, there are 4 Registered Medical Practitioner (RMPs) and 9 community health

workers found in the study area. (Annexure IX).

c. Post and Telegraphs

There are total 10 post offices in the study area. Out of these 2 are in first zone, 8 in second

zone. There are 3 telephone facilities found in the study area. No banking services are

existing in any location in the study area. (Annexure IX).

d. Power supply

Most of the villages are having electricity facilities and the villagers are using power for

agricultural purposes. (Annexure IX).

e. Drinking water facility

Drinking water facilities are available in all the villages in the form of surface water ( tank) and

ground water (dug wells, and tube wells), however in the study area 15 villages are using

ground water for drinking purposes through hand pumps and dug wells. Apart from this, 19

villages are using tap water and tank for drinking purposes. (Annexure IX).

f. Communications facilities:

Road and rails are the means of communication founds in the area. In the study area 12

villages have paved road whereas 11 villages have mud roads. Out of total villages, 18

11 No. of Family Welfare Centre 01 01 02 12 No. of Child Welfare Centre 00 00 00 13 No. of Registered Private Medical Practitioners 01 03 04 14 No of Community health Workers. 02 07 09

Sr. No Type of Institution 0‐5 Km 6 – 10 Km 0 – 10 Km

1 Post office 02 08 10

2 Telephone office 00 03 03





villages are availing transport facilities through bus services from nearby location whereas

one village have the railway facility nearby. (Annexure IX).

3.12.3 Land use pattern:

The study of land use of the project area is an integral part of the EIA study. Baseline data on

land use was generated using information available with Census data, which is presented in

details in Table 3.40

3.12.3.1 Land use/ Land cover (Census‐ 2001)

The Land use pattern of the study area is presented in Table below. The following prominent

land use classes have been observed in the study area.

TABLE 3.40 LAND USE PATTERN IN THE 10 KM STUDY AREA‐CENSUS‐2001

Sr. No.

Village Total Area inHa

Forest inHa

Irrigated inHa

Un‐irrigated inHa

Cultivable Waste in Ha

Area Not Available for cultivation in Ha

1 Bhujpar 568.56 ‐‐ 26.8 424.93 4.11 112.72

2 Budhar Mora

1559.13 ‐‐ 50.74 953.02 87.33 468.04

3 Dhamadka 3101.65 270 44.5 2010.86 101.94 674.35

4 Dudhai 3272.6 ‐‐ 3.52 2257.7 520.37 491.01

Sub total 8501.94 270 125.56 5646.51 713.75 1746.12

5 Kharoi 2352.98 ‐ 105.16 1850.13 141.67 256.02 6 Morgar 2683.1 152.87 57.14 1981.8 94.38 396.91

7 Amardi 1036.25 ‐‐ 115.66 737.51 59.74 123.34 8 Kabrau 2072.96 ‐‐ 195.62 1335.63 441.26 100.45 9 Kumbharad

i 1655.83 ‐‐ 92.24 1193.62 298.49 64.48

10 Lunva 2484.25 ‐‐ 131.3 1338.02 82.91 932.02 11 Sukhpar 2439.15 ‐‐ 30.15 1154.72 15.26 1239.02 12 Khirsara 2824.97 1139.22 ‐ 1329.41 106.17 250.17 13 Devisar 2202.76 ‐‐ 0.32 755.6 78.81 1368.03 14 Amarapar 910.45 ‐‐ ‐‐ 554.26 5754 298.65 15 Khengarpar 338.58 ‐ 7.11 217.24 51.06 63.17 16 Kotda 1778.37 ‐ ‐ 1082.46 51.96 643.55 17 Pashuda 1911.6 ‐ ‐ 1262.22 121.05 528.33 18 Tapar 5440.78 ‐ ‐ 1576.03 141.81 3722.94 19 Raiyada ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ Sub total 30132.03 1292.09 734.7 16368.65 7438.57 9987.08 Grand total 38633.97 1562.09 860.26 22015.16 8152.32 11733.2 4.04% 2.22% 56.97% 21.10% 30.37%





a. Forests

Forest area is occupied in 1562.09‐ha, (4.04%) of the total study area.

b. Land under cultivation

Altogether 22875.42‐ha land (irrigated and un‐irrigated) is used for cultivation, which works

out to be about 59.21% of the land in the study area.

c. Cultivable waste

This category of land mainly consists of the land suitable for cultivation, which however has

not been brought under cultivation at any time. The area under this category works out to

be 8152.32‐ ha, i.e. 21.10% of study area. This category indicates the moderate use of

available land for cultivation purpose.

d. Land not available for cultivation

The areas not covered under any of the above categories of land use and land cover under

urban population forms this type. Total 11733.2‐ ha(30.37 %) area in the study region is

classified under this category.



Chapter 4 : PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT OF IMPACTS

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT.LTD. NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

C4‐1

4.0 PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT OF IMPACTS

Industrialization & environmental issues are the two sides of the Coin of development of

any developing country. All developmental activities give rise to environmental issues,Right

from inception, due to use of natural resources and during the operational stage due to use

of raw materials, minerals, fossil fuels as well as due to generation of the wastes (gaseous,

liquid or solids) such use of materials for development or for operation of any projects

results in depletion of resources whereas the wastes disposed into different environmental

media causes serious threat to environmental health by turning in unfavourable for living

being. The signs of stress on the scarce natural resources are evident from the deteriorating

air quality, soil degradation, polluted rivers, streams, reservoirs & ponds and in the general

status of environment in various regions. It is now well recognized that, for sustainable

development and optimal use of natural resources, environmental considerations are

required to be integrated well within the planning & designing stage and with

implementation of development project. The envisaged benefits from development projects

cannot be fully realized unless they are environmentally and socially sound and sustainable.

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is one of the proven management tools for

incorporating environmental concerns in development process and also improved decision

making.

The project will be installed in Kutch district of Gujarat with average use of water and

minimal generation of waste. However, it is noticed that the raw materials & products as

well as manufacturing activities can have considerable impacts if proper planning &

implementation of pollution prevention and safety measures are not implemented. This is

mainly because the proposed unit is to be setup for manufacturing of proposed integrated

steel and Captive Power unit which requires many Arc furnaces, Slag and Coal Ash/fines.

Thus, such development requires a cautious assessment over an overall environmental

impact viz, land, water, air, noise, biological & socio‐economic environments. However, the

proposed site is on waste land with no human or village settlement in close vicinity, the

impacts is likely to be minor but need to be addressed properly through the EIA report

&EMP documentations. The proposed site, being in a well‐developed surrounding area, is

having adequate availability of land, water, fuel, physical infrastructure & transport





C4‐2

network, which will prove to be ideal for the establishment of the proposed project. These

all facilities lead for major concern when there is cause of establishment of a wasteland as

mentioned. The environmental status of the area has been studied and monitored carefully

prior to inception of the task of impact prediction &evaluation based on the identification of

probable impacts. On the basis of the primary & secondary data generated/ collected,

surveys conducted by experts in and around the proposed site and result of the impact

identification, prediction & evaluation exercise as well as observations made thereon for

mitigation measures etc., the present environment impact assessment report has been

prepared. It covers studies related with the area in and around the proposed site within the

radius of 10kms. The basic environmental components which are likely to be affected are,

1. Land Environment

2. Air Environment

3. Water Environment

4. Noise Environment

5. Biological Environment

6. Socio‐Economic Environment

The earlier mentioned elements of the project construction & operation will have impacts

occurring on the above listed attributes in two phases viz. construction phase and

operational phase with having short term as well as long term impacts (Mainly due to the

land use changes) and later having short term impacts. The proposed project is seen to have

little short‐term impacts during construction phase on the above mentioned attributes.

These short term impacts will be localized with proper and adequate mitigation measures.

Operational phase will be focused with more on accidents and mishaps while operating

rather than some adverse effects for which proper proactive and reactive measures will be

taken. However, no long term impacts are foreseen as major concern of the environment of

the proposed project area. The minor effects will be eliminated/reduced with proper,

effective mitigation measures and EMP as well as naturally due to geographical position of

vicinity of coastal region.





C4‐3

As mentioned, it is very essential to cautiously study the effects, causes and impacts which

shall be caused as result of the upbringing of the project. Hence, at the very inception of the

implementation of the project, EIA was conducted with aim of identifying impacts through

cause‐effect relation. After the task of identification, it is very important to predict &

evaluate the significance of impacts through proper models by following certain specific

scientific techniques. Simultaneously, proper mitigation measures were suggested to nullify

the adverse effects if noticed any during these tasks.

Management of M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation is aware of its corporate & social

obligations towards the protection of environment around the working premises and the

area around the factory site. The Air pollution, Water pollution & solid waste facilities are

proposed with latest technology, which will be installed before commissioning of proposed

unit to take care of the environmental quality by preventing any kind of major pollution.

Impacts on various elements during both construction and operational phase accompanied

by suggestive and effective mitigation measures are described below.

4.1 STAGES OF IMPACTS IDENTIFICATION & PREDICTION

Initially the study was conducted for screening of scoping by EIA Team for further scheduling

of the EIA study. The screening & scoping was done by study of records, documents &

details provided by the proponent At the stage of the screening & scoping, Form‐1 of EIA

notification SO 1533 was filled along with the pre‐feasibility report. The Draft ToR proposed

in Form‐1 was considered for further actions of EIA study. The questionnaire for the

proposed project was dully filled for better outcome & determination of further line of

action for EIA study. Baseline study was initially started with reference to the Draft ToR.

Simultaneously the reporting of the study & review of work accomplished time to time. The

details & method of study for establishment of baseline environmental status is described in

earlier chapter.

Primary EIA by identification & prediction of impacts was conducted by following

assessment of baseline environmental quality with special reference to the project

activities/components and their potential stress on the environment. Further, ground reality

survey by site inspections, meetings with associated technical & administrative persons,





C4‐4

technical data/document study as well as cross referencing with various subject references

was done for the purpose throughout the study period. All possible impacts/stresses are

identified for further study and citation of primary mitigation measures for each identified

impacts stresses. The Environmental Impact Assessment was conducted by following

checklist method using the Questionnaire, Analysis & interpretation of document/record &

Data by expert of EIA Team and Technical Experts of Proponent, Scientific& Technical

referencing for identification, prediction & interpretation of probable impacts.

Secondary EIA was conducted by the thorough study for preparation of description of

potential environmental impacts & mitigation measures as well as by following Matrix

Analysis for identified impacts. The matrix analysis was conducted only for operation phase

as no major considerable impacts were identified for construction phase. Further matrix was

formulated for two scenarios: with mitigation measures & without mitigation measures.

With the necessary details of components of EIA study & necessary document review, the

Draft EIA report was prepared and reviewed for necessary update for adequate and efficient

presentation of the proposed project activities, environmental impacts, mitigation

measures, safety & management plan etc. finally on receipt of Approved ToR from Expert

Appraisal Committee, New Delhi; completed studies for EIA was reviewed and verified

against the approved Terms of reference for EIA. All recommendations & requirement sited

by EAC, New Delhi carefully studied to finalize the EIA Report for submission to EAC along

with EC Application. A detailed report for the compliance of Approved ToR was prepared

and covered in the EIA report as Annexure‐1.

4.2 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS

4.2.1 Environmental attributes & parameters

The main parameters of the study are as below;

I. Air Environment:

• Emission Sources & Quantity

• Emission Control Measures/Technology

• Environment, Health & Safety Management Strategies





C4‐5

• Emission & Ambient Air Quality

II. Water Environment:

• Water consumption & wastewater generation

• Water & Wastewater management system & Technology


• Water & Wastewater Quality

III. Land Environment:

• Potential of land use & land cover change

• Potential of land contamination & control measures

• Soil Quality

IV. Ecology/Biological Environment:

• Biotic components (Flora & Fauna) of the area

• Change in habitat and vegetation

• Control measures & Ecological management strategies


V. Socio Economic Environment:

• Demographic Characteristics

• Amenities & Infrastructure

• Management Strategies & Planning for Social/ community Welfare

• Occupational/Community Health & Safety Management

VI. Noise Environment

• Ambient Noise Condition

• Major Sources of Noise from project

• Control Measures and Environment, Health & Safety Management Strategies





C4‐6

4.2.2 Impacting activities & mitigations

It is very essential to study the project activities & component cautiously to identify the

sources, potential, extent & significance of impact as well as mitigation measures for the

impacts. Hence, in very inception of the EIA study, data of the project activities &

component as well as operation was done very precisely. This has revealed that, there

would not be any major impacts on environment due to the proposed project. However, the

minor impacts would arise with the operation of the proposed project. Major details of

handling, storage, Transportation of raw materials & finished products, production

processes, operation & use of utilities, use of water & overall management practices of

proposed project were collected and studied from the records made available by the

proponent.

With task of identification, considerations of generic techno‐scientific & operational

mitigation measures are also taken in to account of the impacts prediction & evaluation.

Right with the inception of tasks of identification & prediction of impacts, necessary &

feasible mitigation measures are also determined which may be helpful for planning &

designing of EMP as the later task.

The main activities of the project and associated environmental impacts as well as necessary

generic mitigation measures are depicted below as illustration in figure 4.1 & 4.2 whereas

the description regarding the anticipated impacts along with necessary details of

identification, prediction & significance as well as mitigation measures are presented in

subsequent sections under respective headings.





C4‐7

ACTIVITIES CAUSING IMPACTS:

FIGURE 4.1 ACTIVIST CAUSE IMPACT

Activities of operation as source of impacts

Probable Environmental Impacts

Material Transportation,

Handling Storage

Air Pollution, Soil Contamination, Occupational Health issues related with

chemical Hazards

Production Processes

Water, Air & Soil Pollution, Noise Generation, Impacts on Ecology, Occupational Health Issues related with Chemical/

Hazards

Boiler & Utility Operation

Air Pollution, Noise Generation, Impacts on Ecology,

Occupational Health issues related with

Heat/Electrical/Mechanical Chemical Hazards.

Allied Activities (Maintenance, Domestic

Activities etc.)

Water & soil pollution due to sewage & waste generation,

occupational health

Construction activity

Air, Water & Soil pollution, impacts on Ecology, Occupational

Health issues





C4‐8

MITIGATION OF PROBABLE IMPACTS

FIGURE 4.2 MITIGATION OF PROBABLE IMPACTS

Activities of operation as source of impacts

MITIGATION FOR PROBABLE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

Material Transportation, Handling, Storage

Properly designed Adequate Closed storage area, separate designated storage area for raw materials & products, implementation of occupational health

surveillance program, implementation of safe work procedures & safety Rules, Greenbelt Development around storage area.

Production processes

Water, Air & Soil Pollution prevention measures like ETP, Waste incinerator, solid/ Hazardous waste management system with storage area, Disposal of non‐toxic treated effluent, Resource conservation & Waste Minimization, implementation of occupational health surveillance program, Regular

Monitoring/Analysis of Environmental samples including waste & wastewater, implementation of suggestion for design of production technologies/facilities,

implementation of safe work procedure & safety rules, Greenbelt Development in & around plant premises.

Air Pollution control devices (Wherever required), acoustic enclosures for utility stack of Adequate Height & Diameter, Regular Monitoring of emissions as per Monitoring Plan/EMP, Implementation of Safe work procedures &

safety rules, Greenbelt Development in & around plant premises. Confirmation to design & operation criteria specified by CPCB for incinerator,

Pro Active & reactive maintenance of APCs

Incinerator & Utility operation

Allied Activities (Maintenance,

Domestic Activities etc)

Sewage Treatment & Disposal through in septic tank & soak pit system, proper Disposal of Garbage, Scarp & other waste as per CPCB Guidelines

implementation of safe work procedures & safety Rules, Occupational Health Surveillance program, Greenbelt Development in & around plant premises.

Adequate operation of waste management system/technology/equipment

etc.Regular Monitoring ofetc Efficiency including quality of effluent at various stages.Storage, management & Disposal of solid/hazardous waste as per CPCB Guidelines.Annual audit for Environmental Management Systems. Regular preparation & Maintenance of Records/Documents of waste management practices, Continuous improvement in Environmental Management System & Pollution control Technologies, Greenbelt

Development in & around plant premises, proactive & Reactive maintenance of pollution control/waste treatment facilities/technologies/equipment’s for efficient waste management. Emergency Provision for failure of pollution

Waste Management





C4‐9

4.3 DESCRIPTION ANTICIPATED IMPACTS

Construction Phase:

Generally, during construction activity, excess soil and waste construction materials are

generated from various activities like site preparation & construction works. These two

sources together with the probability of contamination of land due to the construction

materials falling & mixing on surface soil of construction site will have considerable impacts.

However, in the present case of M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation, these sources of impacts

would be minimal as the site is already prepared and moderate level of construction works

is required.Besides, the use of ready mix concrete and use of waste in internal road

development, PCC and other filling requirement will eliminate the potentials of land

environment. Moreover, minor dust deposition is expected during loading unloading activity

of raw material such as cement, which will be negligible & restricted within site situated

within a project area for short duration of construction activity. The site, being a plot in

uncultivated land and hence, land use change is also not envisaged. Thus, no major

considerable impacts on land are anticipated during construction phase. However, it is

recommended to implement the generic mitigations like use of construction waste with

proper planning, provision of proper storage area for construction materials, use of ready

mix concrete and use of excavated soils for construction works & landscaping.

Operation Phase:

It has been observed from the Techno‐scientific details of the proposed project that the

manufacturing process will generate some quantity of solid & liquid wastes. These wastes,

upon accidental mixing with soil or unmanaged disposal, may contaminate the land;

Moreover, leak & spill of the raw materials/products may also contaminate the land. This

issue of contamination may have considerable impacts on land due to toxicity of raw

materials & products if the area of spill/leak is not properly lined. These impacts can be

mitigated effectively by proper adequate design & provisions of storage, transportation and

handling facilities etc. considering this, it has been suggested that the floor area of the

storage, transportation and production unit shall be lined with impervious lining to prevent

seepage & percolation of the toxic materials in the soil. The drain from the areas shall not

be discharging on land but shall be diverted to ETP. Thus the impacts caused due to soil





C4‐10

contamination would be prevented. However, it is suggested that the lining of the aforesaid

area shall be checked & maintained regularly to prevent soil contamination. Further, it is

also suggested to manage the solid & liquid wastes generated from the proposed project as

upon mixing with soil these wastes can create serious issue of land pollution and toxic

effects on local environmental factors. It has been noticed that the production activities will

have generation of highly contaminated wastewater rich in solids. Therefore, it is required

to provide adequate & efficient waste management facilities equipped with efficient

technology with residue collection facilities to avoid any kind of disposal & contamination of

land. Besides, Hazardous & solid wastes are also likely to be generated from various

activities and described in chapter 2. These wastes upon dumping on land can have

significant impacts on soil quality and hence it is suggested that hazardous & solid wastes

shall be managed by provision of proper storage & disposal facilities as per statutory

guidelines. The proponent has already planned for proper & efficient provisions for

handling, storage, treatment and/or transportation for final disposal for the solid &

hazardous waste generated from the proposed unit as per guidelines of MoEF/CPCB/GPCB.

A designated solid/hazardous wastes storage site shall be provided to comply with the

requirements cited by MoEF/CPCB.

Further, to make the project cleaner in term of solid/ hazardous waste generation, it is

suggested that the production processes shall be monitored for minimum generation of

solid & hazardous wastes and all solid & hazardous waste generated shall be assessed for

quantity & quality, whenever & wherever required, to plan for waste reduction action plan.

These all mitigations suggested above together will prevent land contamination due to

spill/leakage, solid/hazardous wastes as well as effluent disposals.

4.3.1 Air environment

Air environment shall get slightly affected due to various construction activities that shall

take place while the course of construction phase. The major source of adverse impacts to

the air is, generally, the activity of site preparation & construction/ civil works which will be

done using various mechanical equipment. In case of the proposed project, the activities of

site preparation are not required but some minor works of pilling & foundation work may

require little excavation. This minor excavation along with the construction works & allied

activities like material transportation, storage & handling may lead to generation of various





C4‐11

dust particles which may become airborne due to wind and affect the ambient air quality.

However, effective measures like regular and periodic sprinkling of water in the dust

generation area shall take place in order to reduce the dust generation. Further, care shall

be taken to cover the construction material by providing an enclosed storage area in order

to avoid exposure of these materials with air which may lead to further deterioration of air

quality. The proponent shall ensure construction of proper concrete/asphalted roads within

the premise in order to avoid any unnecessary generation of duct during the course of

movement of vehicles. During civil work it is expected that fugitive emission will be

generated mainly due to use of cement. Apart from these another source of damage of the

impacts of exhaust, any construction equipment/machinery & vehicle shall be turned off

when not in use to avoid the emission of air pollutants in exhaust gas of

equipment’s/machineries & vehicles.

All the above impacts will be limited to the construction phase for very short period and will

be restricted with the site. Moreover the site is situated in the uncultivated land. Therefore,

no necessity is felt for the implementation of any specific mitigation measures in this aspect.

However, it is suggested that proponent shall implement all generic mitigation as cited

above as well as cited by concern person during the construction works. Proponent shall

also ensure proper mitigations of the impacts through implementation of safe work

procedures with necessary safety gears. Thus, it is clearly cited that construction phase shall

not cause any significant damage to the air quality as all the impacts are temporary limited

to the proposed site and shall be mitigated automatically without any major techno‐

scientific mitigation measures.

Operation Phase:

During operation phase major impacts are likely to occur due to emissions from utility,

process emission and fugitive emissions from storage, handling and transportation

materials. Besides, impacts on air environment are also likely to occur due to the hazards

occurred during any stage of project operation. As seen in the chemical inventory of

proposed project many chemicals are volatile in nature and some are flammable. Further, it

is suggested to provide suitable and adequate storage facilities for the materials to prevent

any sort of impacts due to fugitive emissions from storage. Transfer of material to process

area from storage shall be done with efficient handling and transfer facilities and





C4‐12

equipment. Manual handling in open handling containers or equipment shall be restricted

during normal operation and for conveying the material modernization closed equipment

with suitable pipes and automation shall be provided.

The impact of emission from utility will not be major except the emission of particulates as

coal and lignite are proposed as fuel for main Boiler. Hence, emissions of toxic or harmful

gaseous pollutants like VOC, CO etc. are not envisaged to be considerable. However, the

emission of particulate may result in considerable impacts on air environment and to

control the emission effective control equipment like bag filter or Electro Static Precipitator

shall be installed well before commissioning of the utility. Further, with consideration of the

emission for DG set, it has been studied that emission from DG set during the failure of

power supply by GPCB, would be considerable. However, the issue of the impacts of

emission from DG set will be rare considering the rare failure of power supply in the

company. Again, the issue of emission of SOx is not envisaged to be major as HSD or HSD

will be used as fuel for DG set. Moreover these, and DG will also be installed for DG of

effluent from process, which will be operated using HSD as fuel. However, the emission of

these pollutants will be negligible as the emission from DG will be controlled with the

caustic scrubber. These three sources of emissions are further studied for determination of

incremental GLC level with the estimated Quantity & Quality of emissions considering the

control measures using mathematical simulation software –ISCST3 Tools. The details of the

modelling & outcomes are described below under respective heading.

4.3.1.1 Impact on air quality

Impact on ambient air due to M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation during plant operations will

be due to operation of Boiler and DG Sets. The unit will utilize coal/ Lignite as fuel for the

Boiler, HSD for D. G. Sets. DG Sets would be kept stand‐by and will be used in case of power

failure only. The flue gas emission will be released through adequately designed stack of

45.0 m Height as per the statutory norms. In boiler, ESP will be installed as Air Pollution

Control Mechanism. The emissions will cause negligible impact on air quality.

Further, it is emphasized that the mitigation measures discussed in table 4.2 of this chapter

and elaborated in the Environmental Management Plan given in Chapter 5; should be

followed to maintain ambient air quality within norms. The detailed air modelling for





C4‐13

calculation of Ground Level Concentration of various pollutants has been carried out using

ISCST3 Model.

4.3.1.2 Ambient air Modelling

Air quality impact assessment is an important study; Mathematical modelling is established

to find the impact on environment due Pile stacking of material has been assessed with the

help of modelling following the Central Pollution Control Board’s Guidelines. The

mathematical model used for conducting the study is the latest version of Industrial Source

Complex. Model (ISCST‐3, 1996), which is entirely in line with the requirements of Central

Pollution Control Board, New Delhi.

4.3.1.3 Project Location

The project site is located atSurvey No. 405/3, 406, 407, Vill: Dhamadka, Bhuj – Bhachau

Road, Ta: Anjar, Dist: Kutch, Gujarat.

Project site GPS Coordinate Elevation above MSL Longitude :

: 70⁰ 11' 29.34" E 56 m (above MSL)

Latitude 23⁰ 18‘’53.54" N

4.3.1.4 Details of Air Dispersion Model

The air quality impact of a source or group of sources is evaluated by the use of

mathematical models. The widely accepted interpretation models simulate the relationships

between air pollutant emissions and its impact on air quality. For the present study, this

model is used for the prediction of maximum ground level concentration (GLC).

Assessment of air pollution is carried out for stack attached to Boiler, DG Set vent. The

ISCST‐3 (industrial Source complex –Short term ‐3) from lakes and Environment is an hour‐

by‐hour steady state Gaussian Plume Model. This model is widely recognized as predictive

tool in impact assessment for air environment. The ISCST‐3 model has been applied with

elevated + flat terrain, gradual plume rise and buoyancy induced dispersion options in the

present study.

The inputs to the model include data relating to emissions, which are determined by

formulating impact scenarios. The meteorology and atmospheric details like ambient

temperature, wind speed, wind direction and stability class were obtained from IMD





C4‐14

department at New Kandla Station for the Period of December 2012 to February 2013.

Mmixing height considers on “Spatial Distribution of Hourly Mixing Depth over Indian

Region”, PROBES/88/2002‐03 CPCB publication.

4.3.1.5 Input Parameters

The site specific and monitored details considered for input data for the software “ISCST3”

by Lakes Environmental for prediction of impact on air environment are given in the below

table.

TABLE 4.1 FLUE GAS STACK

Sr

No

Stack attached to

Height (m)

Dia

(m)

Temp

(oC)

Velocity

(m/s)

APC

System

% Efficiency

Without APCD With APCD

SPM

mg/nm3

SO2 ppm

NOx ppm

SPM

mg/nm3

SO2

ppm

NOx

ppm

1 Induction Furnace

30 0.2 70 6.0 Pulse jet bag Filter

90 50.0 0.5 1.0 5.0 0.5 1.0

2 D. G. Set: 380 KVA

10 0.15 180 5.0 Not

Applicable‐‐ 100.0 12.0 8.0 100.0 12.0 8.0

3 Boiler‐1 (30Ton)

45 0.3 110 10.0 ESP 98 1000.0 300.0 15.0 20.0 300.0 15.0

4 Boiler‐2 (30Ton)

45 0.3 110 10.0 ESP 98 1000.0 300.0 15.0 20.0 300.0 15.0

5 D.G.Set:1000

KVA 12 0.15 180 5.0

Not Applicable

‐‐ 100.0 12.0 8.0 100.0 12.0 8.0

6 Rolling Mills 25 0.3 60 10.0 Bag Filter 90 50.0 ‐‐ ‐‐ 5.0 ‐‐ ‐‐

7 Induction Furnace

15 0.3 60 10.0 Bag Filter 90 50.0 ‐‐ ‐‐ 5.0 ‐‐ ‐‐

8 Arc Furnace 25 0.3 60 10.0 Bag Filter 90 50.0 ‐‐ ‐‐ 5.0 ‐‐ ‐‐

9 Power Plant 45 1.5 110 15.0 ESP 98 1500.0 ‐‐ ‐‐ 30.0 ‐‐ ‐‐

10 Coal crusher 15 0.2 60 10.0 Bag Filter 90 200.0 ‐‐ ‐‐ 20.0 ‐‐ ‐‐

4.3.1.6 Meteorological data used in assessment

The meteorological parameters namely: ambient temperature, wind speed, wind direction

and stability class were obtained from IMD Kandla for the Period of December 2012, January

2013 & February 2013. As specific mixing heights were not available, mixing height based on

CPCB publication “Spatial Distribution of Hourly Mixing Depth over Indian Region”,

PROBES/88/2002‐03 has been used. The windrows diagram for the Month of December

2012‐ FEB 2013 is below mention.





C4‐15

FIGURE 4.3 HOURLY WINDROSE DIAGRAM FOR DEC 2012‐FEB 2013

4.3.1.7 Presentation of Results

The simulations were made to evaluate Particulate Matter, SOx and NOx incremental short‐

term concentrations due to proposed project. These results are based on considering the

emission due to proposed installation of DG set & boiler. In the short‐term simulations, the

incremental concentrations were estimated to obtain an optimum description of variations

in concentrations within study area of 10 km radius.

Maximum ground level concentration will be observed at different distance for Particulate

matter, SO2 and NOx. The maximum ground level concentration for different parameters is

given in below Table 4.2 for proposed project. Equal concentration contour plots for the PM,

SO2 and NOx are given in below Figure for proposed project.

TABLE‐ 4.2 SHORT TERM MODELLING RESULTS

Pollutant Incremental concentration (IC) (μg/m3)

Distance (km) Direction

SPM APC 1.1 1 S,SW SPM WAPC 38 1 S,SW

SO2 6 1 S NOx 0.24 1 S,SW





C4‐16

TABLE 4.3 RESULTANT CONCENTRATIONS DUE TO INCREMENTAL GLC'S OF CUMULATIVE

PROJECT

Pollutant Maximum Baseline Concentration (μg/m3

)

Incremental Concentrations due to Proposed Projects (μg/m3

)

Resultant Concentration (μg/m3

)

Limits (Industrial/ Residential, Rural) Concentration (μg/m3

) SPM APC 61.37 1.1 62.47 100 SPM WAPC 34.06 38 72.06 100 SO2 18.63 6 24.63 80 NOx 26.74 0.24 26.98 80

FIGURE 4.4 ISOPLETH FOR SPM WITH APC





C4‐17

FIGURE 4.5 ISOPLETH FOR SPM WITHOUT APC

FIGURE 4.6 ISOPLETH FOR NOX





C4‐18

FIGURE 4.7 ISOPLETH FOR SOX

4.3.2 Water environment

Construction Phase

Proper arrangement for water intake shall be done for construction works & domestic

usage. During construction work maximum water requirement (Existing‐35 & Proposed‐200)

is estimated to be about 235KLD which will be met through water supply by the Narmada

water supply line already available in the Existing unit. Hence the issue of impacts on water

resources due to the water consumption for construction is not envisaged. However, it is

suggested that water conservation action shall be planned for construction work and care

shall be taken to avoid wastage of water during the construction phase. Drinking water

requirement for the construction camp & construction activity shall be met with potable

water supplied through surface water supply line. The wastewater generation is not

expected from the construction work but the sewage generation from domestic activities of





C4‐19

construction workers would be the only issue of management. Wastewatergeneration is

expected about 26.5KLD (Domestic‐ 11.5 KLD & Industries‐ 15KLD). Further, proper

sanitation facilities shall be provided to manage the sewage generated by domestic

activities during the construction phase. A proper sewage disposal through the soak‐pit &

septic tanks is also suggested.

During the construction activity, there will not be any runoff which shall get disposed in the

nearby natural storm water drainage. However, some minor runoff may occur from

construction site within premises but such runoff would not be considerable. To prevent

such runoff going outside of the premises, the excess excavated earthen material would be

used to create bunds around the construction area.

The washing & cleaning of construction equipment may also cause impacts on water body

receiving the washed water. Hence it is suggested that, due care shall be taken to see that

the construction equipment’s are washed and maintained properly and the equipment’s are

not washed within the vicinity of any water body. Construction activity may also cause

formation of stagnant pools of water. Proper and due care shall be taken to avoid such

condition as it may lead to unhygienic conditions.

Hence, as detailed above, it has been noticed that the construction activities for the

proposed development would not have any considerable impact on water resources of the

area. All the impacts caused on water during construction will be negligible and temporary

being limited to the construction phase. However, proper and effective Environment

Management Planning shall be done to further minimize the temporary minor effect.

Operation Phase

The total water requirement of the proposed project has been estimated to be 235KLD

including requirement of 20KLD freshwater for domestic as well as 215KLD for production of

proposed products & allied industrial operations like boiler, cooling & DM Plant etc. the

water requirement, as mentioned in case of construction phase, will be meet through the

supply from Narmada water supply system. Hence, issue of drawl of surface water or

abstraction of ground water is not envisaged. However, the use of water from Narmada

water supply may also have some impacts and so proponent shall try to avoid drawl of





C4‐20

unusual high quantity of water as well as shall try to minimize the use of water for

conservation of ultimate water resource.

Further, it is also noticed that total maximum effluent generation from proposed project

would be restricted below 26.5KLD, which includes 11.5KLD sewage from domestic

activities, Nil for cooling tower below down and 13.0 KLD process for D.M Plant. The sewage

will be disposed‐off through septic tanks & soak pit. The cooling tower below‐down will be

treated in ETP. The effluent from the process at rate of 13KLD will have high TDS with some

other contaminant. Such effluent, if not treated unit before disposal, can create serious

threat to the ultimate receiving bodies as effluent will be disposed by reuse or usage for

plantation within the premises. Hence, it has already been planned by the proponent to

install effluent treatment facilities well before inception of commissioning of the proposed

plant. The proponent had planned to dispose the ETP sludge by a TSDF site in the nearby

area. However, considering the probabilities of shooting of critical issue related with the

transportation & disposal, it has been suggested to provide in‐house incineration facilities

for disposal of such effluent. The cooling below‐down effluent will be treated in the well‐

designed adequate ETP with suitable treatment units and the disposal meeting the norms

shall be done through reuse for plantation within the premises.

Further, the proponent has planned to minimize the generation of effluent by optimizing

the production process conditions. The company has already committed to install an

adequate effluent treatment plant for treatment of trade effluent before discharge through

reuse or plantation within the premises.

Thus, the treated effluent will not have any issue of contamination of ultimate receiving

body as well as soil. Hence, any toxic or harmful effects of pollutants on surface as well as

ground are not envisaged. However, it is recommended to control & monitor the treatment

process, adequacy & efficiency of ETP and quality of treated effluent on regular basis and

document/records of such control/monitoring shall be kept efficiently for further

proceedings/review to avoid any issue of pollution or contamination of environmental

system. Further, it has been recommended that proponent shall assess the possibilities of

reuse/recycling of the effluent in process and similar other sustainable application of

treated effluent for water conservation and wastewater recycling/reuse. Proponent has

made efforts to recycle some quantity of water in case of manufacturing of 5 products





C4‐21

(Proposed + existing), 2 by products and 5 Raw materials, which will be positive impacts on

water resource due to the water conservation action planned within the process itself. It has

also been suggested to assess possibilities of use of wastewater from cooling after

treatment during on‐going operation of proposed project. In line with the above suggestion,

proponent has also shown interest to further explore possibilities of water recycling &

conservation.

With afore mentioned details of water consumption, waste water management for water

conservation & pollution prevention, it is envisaged that the adverse impacts of the

proposed project operation would occur only in case of failure of the ETP. With planning of

water conservation, the impacts on water environment would almost be negligible after

adequate implementation of mitigation measures for wastewater treatment &

reuse/recycling. However, it is suggested that the proponent shall take the matter of waste

water management as most important issue to prevent any kind of environmental pollution

due to effluent treatment & disposal as well as implementation of adequate

actions/technologies for probable reuse or recycling or treated wastewater to reduce the

water consumption rate.

4.3.3 Noise environment

Construction Phase

Noise will be generated during construction phase. Various activities such as mixing, loading,

unloading, and various equipment may create noise in the area. Further the noise would

also be generated from many construction activities like mechanical works.

Apart from these another major source of creation of noise will be the movement of heavy

vehicles like trucks for transporting the material. This will have almost no impact as the area

is free from habitat and also as no major requirement for transportation or raw material is

envisaged except for few requirements of construction materials. As far as the convenience

of villagers of surrounding area is considered, provisions shall be made for major travelling

of heavy vehicle during daytime. Also proper maintenance and servicing of construction

machinery shall be done to prevent unnecessary noise emission. Any part of plant or

equipment found to emit exclusive noise due to a faulty silencer; broken or Ill‐Fitting engine

covers or other reasons shall immediately be taken out of service and be adequately





C4‐22

serviced, repaired or replaced. Also supplementary mitigation measures such as controlled

time of construction, job rotation etc. will be implemented. However the impacts shall be

confined to the construction area and there are no habitats within 1km from the site. Hence

it is not expected to cause any significant problem.

Operation Phase

During the operation phase, slight noise generation is expected from operation of Boiler,

reaction vessel due to pumps & motors and operation of DG set. The noise generated from

these sources would not be too high and will not have any considerable impacts on

surrounding area. The noise level increase due these sources is envisaged in the area of the

source only. Hence, issue of noise level change will be significant only for managing the

occupation health issues. However, it has been suggested to provide adequate barrier in

form of greenbelt for prevention of noise propagation. Also, installation of silencer and

other noise & vibration prevention measures are also suggested for implementation right

from the time of installation of the noise generation equipment/machineries. Low noise

generation technology shall be selected and the utility like DG set be installed with acoustic

enclosure &/or silencer. The reduction of window area on noise‐impacted facades, the use

of double or staggered‐stud walls, acoustical glazing (with low air‐infiltration window

frames), resilient channels, etc., shall also be considered while planning of buildings for

installation of noise generating equipment or machineries as these can be most effective

measures in reducing interior noise levels. Further, the site is situated in an uncultivated

land (Waste land) which is considerably away from the nearest locality. Hence, there would

not be any considerable impacts of noise on the residential area. No evidence of sensitive

ecological habitat of fauna is observed in vicinity of the uncultivated land and hence impacts

of fauna of the area are not envisaged to be major as minimal noise will be propagated out

unit area.

Thus looking to the overall possibilities of noise generation, probable level of noise in &

around premises, it has been noticed that the impacts of the noise would almost be

negligible as it would be restricted within the area of source. Such impacts will have issue of

occupational noise. Hence, the impacts of noise on occupational health should be mitigated

by PPEs like ear muff/plug for employee engaged with the activities in the noise generation

area.





C4‐23

With the implementation of the mitigation measures proposed, the noise levels at plant

boundaries will be well below the limits specified for industrial areas. The major sources

contributing to Noise pollution during the plant operation will be DG sets (will be stand‐by).

The same shall be enclosed in Acoustic enclosure. It follows that noise levels will not be

adversely impacted on steel plant operations.

The main noise generating sources will be from furnace and captive power plant. The noise

levels at the source for these units will be in the range of steel plant will be 90‐110 dB (A). &

power plant will be in the range of 90‐115 dB (A). The noise dispersion from the plant units

has been computed based on the mathematical model as described below.

Mathematical Model for Sound Wave Propagation during Operation

For an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambient air from the source

point, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation is used. The sound

pressure levels generated by noise sources decrease with increasing distance from the

source due to wave divergence. An additional decrease in sound pressure level with

distance from the source is expected due to atmospheric effect or its interaction with

objects in the transmission path.

For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous loss free medium, one can

estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different sources using model based on

first principles, as per the following equation:

⎟⎟⎠⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛−=1

212 log20

r

rLL pp (1)

Where, Lp2 and Lp1 are Sound Pressure Levels (SPLs) at points located at distances r2 and r1

from the source. The combined effect of all the sources then can be determined at various

locations by the following equation.

( ).........101010log10 )10/()10/()10/()(

321 ppp LLL

totalpL ++= (2)

Where, Lp1, Lp2, Lp3 are noise pressure levels at a point due to different sources.

Based on the above equations, a user‐friendly model has been developed. The details of the

model are as follows:





C4‐24

• Maximum number of sources is limited to 200;

• Noise levels can be predicted at any distance specified from the source;

• Model is designed to take care of topography or flat terrain;

• Co‐ordinates of the sources in meters;

• Maximum and Minimum levels are calculated by the model;

• Output of the model in the form of isopleths; and

• Environmental attenuation factors and machine corrections have not been

incorporated in the model but corrections are made for the measured Leq levels.

The major noise generating sources from the proposed plant are listed in Table4.4. These

are considered as input to the noise model.

TABLE 4.4NOISE LEVELS FROM THE PROPOSED PLANT

Sr. No.

Source Expected Noise Levels dB(A)

1 Steel Plant 90‐100

2 Power Plant 90‐115

4.3.3.1 Presentation of Results

The incremental noise levels are computed at proposed project site at 100 m x 100 m grid

intervals over an area of 1 kmX1 km study area. The predicted incremental noise levels

around proposed sources are shown in Figure‐4.8. As per the predicted results, noise levels

at the plant boundaries are given below in Table 4.5.

TABLE 4.5 PREDICTED NOISE LEVELS AT THE ISP PLANT BOUNDARIES

SR. NO. DIRECTION INCREMENTAL NOISE LEVEL IN DB(A) 1 N 42 2 NE 38 3 E 40 4 SE 38 5 S 40 6 SW 36 7 W 40 8 NW 38





C4‐25

The predicted noise levels at the boundary due to various plant activities will be ranging in

between 38 to 42 dB(A). The increment noise levels will be less than 50 dB (A) at all of the

surrounding habitations. The model results are represented through contours in Figure‐4.8.

4.3.3.2 Prediction of Impacts

The predicted incremental noise levels at the boundary of the plant will be in the rage of 38‐

42 dB (A) which is well within the prescribed norms for industrial zone.

4.3.3.3 Impact on Work zone

The equipment’s with continuous noise levels will be significant at steel plant and power

plant blowers. However, impacts on the working personnel are not expected to be

significant on account of the high level of automation of these plant equipment’s, which

mean that workers will be exposed for short duration only that too intermittently. In

addition to that, ear plug wearing will be made as compulsory. Personnel protective

equipment for all employees and visitors entering the plant premises will also be made

compulsory.

4.3.3.4 Noise Pollution Control Measures

The criterion for environmental noise control is that the noise levels from the proposed

units will not exceed, in any continuous mode of operation, the level stipulated by MoEF

and/or Pollution Control Board at any point on the site boundary.

The measured noise level produced by any rotating equipment will not exceed 90 dB (A) at a

distance of 1.0‐m from its boundary in any direction under any load condition. The noise

produced in valves and piping associated with handling compressible and incompressible

fluids will be attenuated to 85 dB(A) at a distance of 1.0 m from the source by the use of low

noise trims, baffle plate silencers/line silencers, acoustic lagging (insulation), thick‐walled

pipe work as and where necessary.

All rotary equipment like fans, blowers, pumps and compressors would be of low noise

design. The grouting of this equipment will be made free from vibrations. The work zone

noise exposure of the operating personnel would be avoided by remote operation from the

control rooms.





C4‐26

All pipes and valves downstream of pressure control valve (including pressure control valve)

will be one schedule higher than needed by pressure considerations to attenuate the noise.

For safety relief valves the allowable noise level will not exceed 115 dB (A) for one‐quarter

hour or less per day. Safety valves will be provided on the stem drum and its number and

capacity will conform to the code requirements.

Adequate greenbelt development will be done in the plant boundary of the Steel & Power

Plant.

Recommendations for Reduction in Noise Levels

• Noise level can be reduced by stopping leakages from various steam lines,

compressed air lines and other high pressure equipment;

• By providing padding at various locations to avoid rattling due to vibrations;

• By adopting new technologies for control of noise in various units

• Encasement of noise generating equipment where otherwise noise cannot be

controlled;

• Providing noise proof cabins to operators where remote control for operating noise

generating equipment is feasible;

• The air compressor, process air blower, pneumatic valves should be provided with

acoustic enclosures;

• All the design/installation precautions as specified by the manufacturers with respect

to noise control shall be strictly adhered to;

• High noise generating sources shall be insulated adequately by providing suitable

enclosures;

• Design and layout of buildings to minimize transmission of noise, segregation of

particular items of plant and to avoid reverberant areas;

• Use of lagging with attenuation properties on plant components / installation of

sound attenuation panels around the equipment;

• The noise control system will be designed to form an integral part of the plant;





C4‐27

• Other than the regular maintenance of the various equipments, ear plugs/muffs are

recommended for the personnel working close to the noise generating units;

• All the openings like covers, partitions shall be designed properly; and

• Inlet and outlet mufflers shall be provided which are easy to design and construct.

4.3.3.5 Noise Control at the Community Level

It should be noted that, the incremental noise levels at the plant boundary will be between

38‐42 dB (A). The proposed greenbelt in the project will help to attenuate the noise emitted

by the various sources in the plant and the community noise levels will not be increased.

All value in dB (A).

FIGURE4.8NOISE DISPERSION CONTOURS

Air Emissions due to Traffic

4.3.3.6 Impact on Air Quality due to Traffic

After implementation of proposed plant, there will be an increase in traffic flow on nearest

Highway due to movement of trucks carrying finished products of proposed plant. The

extent of these impacts, at any given time, will depend upon (i) the rate of vehicular

emission within a given stretch of the road and (ii) the prevailing meteorological conditions.





C4‐28

The impacts will have strong temporal dependence as both of these factors vary with time.

The temporal dependence can have diurnal, seasonal as well as long term components.

The air quality predictions have been carried out by using the air quality model CALINE‐4

developed by California Department of Transportation. The model is based on Gaussian

diffusion equation and uses a mixing zone concept to characterize pollutant dispersion over

the roadway. The model has been extensively tested for its predictive capability for traffic

related air quality impacts. Given the source strength, meteorology, site geometry and site

characteristics, the model can reliably predict pollutant concentrations for receptors located

within 150‐m of the roadway, the most important region for estimating the impacts due to

the low elevation emissions.

The long term variations in air quality scenarios during the project life are expected due to

the change in traffic on the highway with time. The existing and the predicted traffic

volumes have been considered to project future air quality scenarios to provide an

indication of variations in air quality.

To account for the effect of the diurnal variations in model inputs (vehicular emissions and

meteorological conditions), the averaging time for model predictions has been restricted to

60 minutes. The averaging time is so selected because the primary meteorological factors

that influence the air quality predictions i.e. wind speeds and directions do not remain

steady for longer time periods. Also, during the peak traffic hours, the traffic volumes

typically show significant variations over periods longer than one hour.

Due to averaging time of 60 minutes, the project impacts on air quality are essentially

assessed based on one hourly standard for CO, NOx levels however have been developed

for peak traffic conditions and compared with WHO standard of 400 μg/m3 for hourly

average.

HC was not modeled since its limits are not specified for ambient levels in the Environment

Protection Act. In the absence of standards for HC, the predictions could not have been

interpreted meaningfully.

With respect to SPM, vehicular particulate emission levels have not been specified by the

Indian Institute of Petroleum. Further the SPM contributions are dominated by background





C4‐29

concentrations as well as traffic induced re‐suspension, both of which are difficult to

quantify. Hence, SPM was not considered for modeling.

4.3.3.7 Existing and Proposed Traffic Density

The proposed additional traffic mainly includes two wheelers, cars and trucks. The finished

products will be transported through Truck & railway hence; heavy traffic will be high.

The proposed truck traffic due to steel plant is considered in assessing the impact on

nearest road. The additional traffic due to proposed steel plant will be about 8 trucks per

hour. Details of the additional traffic are given in Table‐4.6.

TABLE 4.6 ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DUE TO PLANT ACTIVITY

Particular Quantity TPA Truck Capacity (Ton) No. of TruckRaw Material MS Scrap 605000 20 30250 Sand 500 10 50 Lime stone 1000 10 100

Coal/lignite 73000 10 7300 Finished Product MS Steel Ingots / Billets 2,00,000 30 6700

MS Joists 2,00,000 30 6700 TMT Bars/ Angles/Channels 2,00,000 30 6700 Silico Manganese 18000 20 900 Solid Waste ETP Waste 1.5 MT/Year 10 1 Used Oil/Spent oil 5.4 MT/Year 10 1 Discarded drum/container 720 nos./Year 10 2 Total 58700

4.3.3.8 Emission Factors

The emission standards for Indian vehicles as proposed by the Indian Institute of Petroleum

(IIP) have been used to provide the emission factors for the different vehicle types. Emission

factors after accounting for the vehicle speeds are as specified in Table‐4.7

TABLE 4.7 EMISSION FACTORS

All values are in gm/km/vehicle*

Trucks/Buses Cars LCV’s Two & Three Wheelers CO NOx CO NOx CO NOx CO NOx 10.67 18.97 2.72 0.970 2.72 0.970 4.0 1.5

Note: To be multiplied by 1.6 for converting into gm/mile for use in CALINE4.





C4‐30

4.3.3.9 Meteorological Data

Air quality scenarios were developed for worst case stability classes using the wind speeds.

The meteorological data considered for the modeling studies is given below in Table‐4.8.

TABLE 4.8 METEOROLOGICAL DATA CONSIDERED FOR MODELING

Stability Class

Wind Speed (m/sec)

Condition

A 1.0 Very un stable‐ sunny, light windB 2.0 Unstable‐ as with A only less sunny or more windy C 3.0 Moderately unstable‐ very windy/ sunny or overcast/ light wind D 5.0 Neutral‐ little sun and high wind or overcast/windy night E 2.0 Moderately stable‐ less overcast and less windy night than day F 2.0 Stable‐ night with moderate cloud and light/ moderate wind

4.3.3.10Details of National Highway

For model computations Right of Way (ROW) of 20 m has been considered for perusal of

violations of standards and accordingly receptor locations have been chosen to account for

its location with respect to edge of ROW.

4.3.3.11 Results and Discussions for Traffic Impact

The estimated concentrations of CO and NOx for the proposed additional traffic are

presented in Table‐4.9.

TABLE 4.9 PEAK HOURLY PREDICTION RESULTS

Distance from the edge of the Road (m)

Incremental Concentrations for CO (µg/m

3)

Incremental Concentrations for NOx (µg/m

3)

20 0.031 0.055





C4‐31

FIGURE 4.9 CONNECTING ROAD BETWEEN PROJECT SITE AND NH‐8A

4.3.3.12 Incremental Level result

Adequacy of existing road network in study area

National Highway 8 (NH 8) is a National Highway in India that connects the Indian capital

city of New Delhi with the Indian financial capital city of Mumbai. As per estimated it is

supposed to be the busiest highway in the subcontinent, as it connects the national capital

to financial capital along with economic giants like Ahmadabad, Vadodara and Surat in

between. The highway passes through the State capitals of Ahmedabad and Jaipur, as well

as important cities like Gurgaon, Ajmer, Udaipur, Ahmadabad, Surat and Vadodara. The

total Length is 1,375 km (854 mi). NH8 stretch on Delhi‐Gurgaon border is India's deadliest

road.

This highway is part of the Golden Quadrilateral project undertaken by National Highways

Authority of India and was the first part to be completed. The Delhi‐Gurgaon

Expressway and NE 1 are the part of NH 8. Before entering downtown Mumbai, NH 8 passes

through nearly all suburbs on the Western line of Mumbai Suburban Railway, where it is

popularly known as Western Express Highway





C4‐32

FIGURE 4.10 ROUTE MAP OF NH‐8A

With present level of traffic and the predicted increase in existing traffic due to the project,

adequacy of road/highway during operational phase of the plant has been estimated by

comparison with the recommendations stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC). The IRC

recommendations on traffic capacity are presented in Table‐4.10.

TABLE 4.10 RECOMMENDATIONS ON TRAFFIC CAPACITY ‐ IRC

Sr. No.

Category of Road Maximum Carrying Capacity (PCU/day)

1 Two lane roads (7‐m) with earthen shoulders (width of 7.5m) 15,000 2 4‐lane highway with earthen shoulders (width of 14.5m) 35,000

As per the above given IRC standards, the 4 lane NH‐8A road network can have a maximum

capacity of 35,000 PCU per day.

The estimated peak traffic in terms of PCUs is compared with the stipulated standards by IRC

for traffic capacity of the National Highway passing near the site and it can be observed that

the road will be well adequate for the increased traffic. ,





C4‐33

4.3.3.13Impact due to Generation of Solid Waste


• Quantity of Hazardous and Solid wastes generation & disposal by various methods has

been shown in Table. 4.11

• The Solid / hazardous waste will be stored at separated Hazardous Waste Storage Area

for disposal.

TABLE 4.11HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION

Sr. No

Description Category Quantity Mode of Disposal

1 ETP Waste 34.3 Existing: NILL Proposed: 1.5 MT/Year

Collection, storage and Disposal at TSDF Site


5.1 Existing: NILL Proposed: 5.4 MT/Year



33.1 Existing: NILL Proposed: 720 nos./Year


4.4 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

4.4.1 Construction Phase

From baseline data, it seems that district area exhibits only common species and no major

wildlife species is present in the study area. In rare case, occurrence of rabbit, fox & Nilgai in

the agricultural fields has been reported.

• Project is proposed in wasteland area, thus, project does not cover any forest or

agriculture land.

• The existing unit (adjacent to the proposed site) have already received the

environmental clearance from MoEF and there is not issue of land diversion or use of

wetland for the proposed project site.

• Even there is not issue of clearance of vegetation for site preparation as the site is

already prepared & ready for construction work.





C4‐34

• During construction work, as mentioned in earlier section, impacts on air, water & noise

will be minimal and will be insignificant to cause any considerable harm to the other

domestic fauna as well as agricultural ecology of the area.

• Even the issue of secondary impacts of on air, water & noise on the other fauna & flora

of the region is also not envisaged to be considerable.

• The greenbelt to be developed in addition to the greenbelt provided as part of

wasteland will have considerable positive impacts on ecology.

• Thus considering all above description it has been noticed that, no issue of impacts on

ecological habitat as well as flora & fauna of the area envisaged due to siting &

construction of the proposed project in wasteland area.

4.4.2 Operation Phase

During operation, major impacts on ecology are envisaged only due to the process emission

and catastrophic disaster in plant area.

• Further, there would not be any other source of pollution of toxic harmful/effects as

potentials of pollution due to disposal of effluent, emission from utilities & DG, fugitive

emission during the material handling & transportation as well as disposal of

solid/hazardous waste are found to be minor to cause any major damage to the

ecological layout of the area.

• As stated in beginning, the main issue of impacts on ecology would be the process

emission and risk of products and by products.

• Further, as described in section of construction phase, there is no sensitive habitat in

vicinity of site and the site is situated in the waste land category. Further, occurrence of

wildlife in the region is very rare and even the reported species are very common to the

agricultural fields considerably away from the site & hazard zone determined for the

proposed unit.

• Hence, the issue of major impacts on ecology is not envisaged to be major.

• The proponent has already conducted the risk assessment & HAZOP study for the

proposed project considering the probabilities of risk of products and by products likely





C4‐35

to be associated with the operation of the proposed project and proponent has already

decided to provide the hazard & risk control & prevention measures for the proposed

unit.

• However, considering the residual impacts, it is suggested to implement all necessary

control & prevention measures for the proposed unit.

• However, considering the residual impacts, it is suggested to implement all necessary

control & prevention measures in Risk assessment report as well as in HAZOP report

with some additional management actions to avoid any considerable impacts on ecology

including the agricultural ecology of the vicinity.

• Further, the Rolling mills, induction furnace, Arc furnace, power plant, coal crusher

would be arising from the process as process emission and these details may have many

adverse impacts based on the concentration of emission at the time & pattern of

dispersion.

• These products pollutants can easily be removed or trapped using the scrubbing system

provided such technology is designed efficiently considering the probable highest

emission rate of the pollutants.

• Hence, it is suggested to provide control measures for process emission like wet

scrubber with adequate design for optimum efficiency.

• Regular monitoring for atmospheric concentration of these pollutants shall be

conducted in within the premises as well as at the point in the vicinity in downwind

direction.

• It is suggested that proponent shall provide well designed material storage area &

facilities as well as handling facilities to prevent fugitive emission from storage, handling

& transportation activity.

• Preferably automated system for handling & transfer of coal handling shall be provided

and all storage area facilities shall be properly designed to avoid any kind of fugitive

emission resulting in harmful dispersion of flammable cloud formation. Proponent shall

also practice regular monitoring of ambient air to assess the level of pollutants within





C4‐36

premises as well as in vicinity area in downwind direction. Further, the proponent shall

also provide well designed Hazardous waste storage area as per MoEF/CPCB guidelines.

Thus, it is foreseen that no major impact on the ecology would occur during the normal

operation of the project mainly because of minimal sources of pollution and absence of

major ecological habitat in vicinity of site. As mention earlier, the proposed greenbelt will

have slight benefit to the ecological layout of the project area. This greenbelt will also take

care of almost all minor impacts of air pollution and noise from the proposed project.

However, it is suggested further to take intensive care during operation phase to prevent

any chances of the impacts on ecology due to product and by products. Regular monitoring

of environmental samples shall be done by proponent to ensure that there is no change in

environmental quality especially in terms of Particulate Matter, SO2& NOx.

4.4.3 Green belt development

Green belt is a set of rows of trees planted such a way that they form an effective barrier

between the plant and the surroundings.

The main purpose of green belt development is to contribute to the following factors:

” To attenuate noise levels generated from the plant

” To improve the aesthetics of the plant area

” To trap the vehicular emissions and fugitive dust emissions

” To maintain ecological homeostasis;

” To prevent soil erosion and to protect the natural vegetation

” To utilize the treated effluents.

4.4.4 Design of Greenbelt

JayBharat Steel Corporationproposes to have a green belt programme for the proposed

Steel plant & CPP. The greenbelt will be developed by considering total plot area 5.88 Ha,

which is about 33 % of the total (17.84 ha.) area. As far as possible the following guidelines

will be considered in green belt development.

” Shrubs and trees will be planted in encircling rows around the project site

” The short trees will be planted in the first row of the green belt. The tall trees will be

planted in the outer row





C4‐37

” Planting of trees in each row will be in staggered orientation.

” Since the trunks of the tall trees are generally devoid of foliage, it will be useful to

have shrubs in front of the trees so as to give coverage to this portion.

Preparation of pits and preparing them for transfer of seedlings

” Standard pit size will be 1 m x 1 m x 1 m;

” The distance between pits will vary depending on their location;

” The pits will be filled using good soil from nearby agricultural fields (3

” parts) and Farm yard manure (1 part);

” Rhizobium commercial preparation (1 kg/1000 kg);

” BHC powder, if the soil inhabits white ants (Amount variable); and

” The pits will be watered prior to plantation of seedlings.

Tree Plantation at the Proposed Plant Site

Adequate attention will be paid to the plantation of trees, their maintenance and

protection. The total area is 17.84 Ha. The total area of proposed plant is 5.88 ha.

JayBharatSteel Corporationhas already planted 500 Nos. of sapling of Azadirachta indica

(Neem) in the periphery of proposed project area. Further, year wise stipulated plantation

schedule.

The year wise proposed plantation break‐up is given in the following:

4.12PLANTATION SCHEDULE

YEAR Area (Ha.) Total saplings I 1.2 1200 II 1.2 1200 III 1.2 1200 IV 1.2 1200

Recommended Species for Plantation

Based on climate and soil characteristics of the study area, some species are recommended

for plantation. The climate of the region is extreme where there is extreme heat and soil

temperature is very high in summer. Hence in order to have a ground cover, some fast





C4‐38

growing species which do not require watering have been recommended for plantation. The

recommended plant species are as presented:

4.13LIST OF RECOMMENDED SPECIES FOR PLANTATION

Plants for outer peripherySr. N

o. Scientific name

Common name

Habit Height (m)

Growth rate Evergreen/ Deciduous

Crown Shape

1. Azadirachtaindica Neem Tree 20 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading

2.

Caesalpinia Pulcherima Sankasura Tree 12 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading

3. Acacia auriculoformis

VilaitiBava

l Tree 16 Moderate growing Evergreen Oblong

4. Bauhinia variegate

kovindara Tree 5 Moderate growing

Deciduous Oblong

5. Cassia fistula Garmala Tree 12 Quick growing Deciduous Round

6. Cassia renigera Pink Cassia

Tree 10 Quick growing Deciduous Spreading

7. Cassia siamea Kaisid Tree 12 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong

8.

Dalbergia sisoo Sisam Tree 10

Moderate during 1st yr. and rapid afterwards

Evergreen Round

9. Delonix ragia Gulmohar Tree 15 Quick growing Deciduous

Spreading

/Flat topped

10. Pongamia pinnata Karanj Tree 5 Quick growing Evergreen Round

11. Peltophorum pterocarpum

copper pod tree

Tall tree

‐ Quick growing Evergreen Oblong/ Round

12. Lantana camara Ghaneri shrub 3 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading

13. Nerium indicum Kanher Shrub 6 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong/R

ound Plants for ground cover

1 Cynodondactylon Durva Cree

per ‐ Slow growing in initial stages Evergreen Spreading

4.14LOCAL PLANTS SPECIES RECOMMENDED FOR GREENBELT

Sr. No.

Scientific Name Common Name

Habit Height (M)

Growth Rate

Evergreen/ Deciduous

Crown Shape

1. Acacia nilotica Baval T 8 Quick Growing

Evergreen Spreading

2. Acacia lueucophala Baval 6‐9 Moderate growing

Deciduous Oblong





C4‐39

3. Acacia Senegal ‐‐ Tree 5 Quick Growing

Deciduous Spreading

4. Azadirachta indica Neem tree Tree 20

Quick growing

Evergreen Spreading

5. Prosopis cineraria Sami Tree 12 Quick growing

Evergreen Spreading

6. Salvadorapersica Pilu Tree 6 Moderate growing

Evergreen Spreading

7. Albizzia lebbeck

Pilosarasio Tree 20 Quick Growing

Deciduous Round/Spreadi

ng 8. Parkinsoniaaculeata Parkinsonia Tree 8 Slow

Growing Deciduous Spreading

9. Capparisdeciduas Kair Bushy Shrub/Smal

l Tree

4 Slow growing

Xerophyte ‐‐‐

10. Emblica officinalis Amali Tree 5 Quick Growing

Deciduous Oblong

4.5 SOCIO‐ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

4.5.1 Construction Phase

The proposed unit will be developed in the uncultivated land (Wasteland) locate near

Dhamadka village. Thus the social issues related with the land acquisition are not envisaged,

further, as the proposed project is a small scale unit with considerably lesser construction

works, no major potential of employment is envisaged. However, some minor potential of

temporary employment is envisaged. However, some minor potential of temporary

employment of construction force will have some beneficial impacts which would be almost

negligible compare to other potentials of employment in the area. As, the project is

proposed in Uncultivated land (Waste Land) area considerably away from locality and

potential agriculture field, no major issues of damage to the agriculture activities as well as

issue of uncomforted of resident of the area has been envisaged. Even the physical

infrastructure required for industrial establishment is already available within the existing

plant and water supply for/in the existing unit are also applied in form of Narmada water

supply system. Hence, issues of conflict with the local people for use of water resource &

infrastructures during construction phase are not envisaged. The traffic management during

the construction work is also not envisaged as the site is well connected with the state

highway connecting with national highway. Even the internal roads are also available

nearest existing plant and whole route of transportation does not disturb the living





C4‐40

conditions and activities of the local people. Hence no issues related with impacts on social

& economic structure is envisaged during the construction phase.

4.5.2 Operation Phase

Dissimilar to the construction phase, there will some considerable direct employment as the

proposed project is new project establishment requiring human resources. Proponent has

planned to employ about 266 persons during the operation phase through stage wise

employment program. Maximum employment will be done by employing local people

except recruitment of some specialized skilled employee required for proposed project.

Further, some indirect employment by the way of contract for transportation of raw

materials & products is also envisaged. Thus, with such direct & indirect employment

potentials, the proposed project should be beneficial to the local socio‐economic layout.

As mentioned earlier, the proposed site is situated in uncultivated land (Waste land) area

well connected with state highway and national highway. Further, internal road structure of

the project site is also adequately designed and directly connected to the state highway

bearing considerably less traffic, hence there would not be any major traffic change &

related social issues after proposed project. All major physical infrastructures required for

an industry is already available in the existing plant area, hence issue of use public

infrastructure, conflict for sharing the infrastructure as well as development of additional

physical infrastructure is not envisaged.

The ETP waste, Used oil/spent oil, discarded drum/container hazards impacts on socio

economic environment due to toxic, fire & explosion due to some raw materials, storage &

handling. To prevent such changes, the proponent has prepared HAZOP& Risk Assessment

report and has planned to implement all precautionary, preventive & control measures for

management of such mishaps. Further, it is also revealed in HAZOP/RA study that the

accidental impacts would be restricted within the vicinity of project premises and issues of

toxic effects & fire as well as explosion on human habitat is not envisaged as there is no

human settlement in vicinity of the site. The company has also prepared onsite emergency

plan with the inception Emergency & Disaster Management Cell be formed operate

necessary actions to take care of such accident/disaster to prevent chances of any casualty.





C4‐41

Proponent has conveyed that similar approach & level of safety in plant as well as

surrounding will be managed for the proposed project and looking to the track records of

the existing unit, it is assume that the proposed project would also indicate similar high

standards in safety of employee and people of surrounding. However, it is suggested that

the proponent shall regularly check & improve its emergency/disaster management cell

with improvement & addition of necessary safety gears & facilities for prevention of any

catastrophic accident associated with the various operation of proposed project including

transportation. Further, it is also suggested that the measures suggested in risk assessment

& disaster management plan shall be implemented strictly to prevent any accident.

Further, it has been noticed that the proponent group‐JayBharat and companies of the

group are regularly conducting many social activities as part of their CSR program. Similarly,

after the proposed project, such activities will be planned & organized by the proponent to

enhance the social condition mainly for education & health improvement in the project

area, which will have some beneficial impacts on local socioeconomic layout. Beside the

above, there would not be any impact of proposed activities on social structures as well as

infrastructure. Thus after reviewing all above details it is envisaged that the proposed

project would not have any considerable adverse impacts on the socioeconomic layout.

4.6 MITIGATION MEASURES

As described in the earlier sections of the chapter, no significant or considerable adverse

impacts are envisaged from the proposed project. It is also envisaged that there would be

any considerable impacts during the construction phase which requires special/major

mitigation measures. However, during the operation phase some activities shall be

conducted with specific as well as generic mitigation measures to reduce the probable

impacts envisaged due to contamination of environment by products and by‐products. The

mitigation measures are to be planned mainly for emission management, water

management, waste management, occupational health and hazardous waste to avoid any

accidental impacts on environment. The emission & wastewater management are the only

activities require major techno‐scientific mitigation measures to prevent the probable

impacts on environment which are envisaged to be major. Besides, the specific mitigation

measures are also required for safety & emergency management which shall be planned &





C4‐42

implemented well with the inception of the proposed project. The proponent shall follow &

implement the mitigation measures as mentioned below with provision of all necessary

facilities cited therein with the mitigation measures or EMP in later chapter of the present

report as well as RA &HAZOP report.

4.6.1 Air Environment

• Stack of adequate height and diameter with necessary APCD like bag filter, Pulse jet

bag filter, ESP for control of emission from process as well as flue gas emission.

• Monitoring of emissions from process & stacks

• Regular control keeping of the monitoring

• Regular supervision, inspection & maintenance of material storage & handling

facilities/area

• Adequate equipment or facility material handling & transport

• Ambient air quality monitoring to track the air quality change due to the operations

of plant

• Greenbelt development within premises

• Workplace monitoring of production & storage area

• Provision of necessary PPEs & safety gears

4.6.2 Water Environment

• No ground water abstraction & drawl from local surface water resources

• Water requirement to meet through Narmada water supply system

• Optimized water consumption with recycling & reuse activities to reduced drawl of

water from supply line

• Proper treatment of wastewater from Boiler and D.M.Plant.

• No effluent discharge on land or local water bodies outside the premises

• Disposal after proper treatment through reuse or use for plantation within premises.

• Tracking‐monitoring of performance of Effluent treatment process & plant





C4‐43

• Exploration of recycling & reuse potentials of reclaimed/treated wastewater

• Preparation & maintenance of records & documents of water consumption, O &M of

ETP, quantity & quality of treated effluent for recycling, reuse & disposal along with

mode of disposal.

4.6.3 Land Environment

• No disposal of effluent outside the company premises.

• Properly designed and lined storage area, production area and other areas likely to

use chemicals materials


• Hazardous/solid wastes management with designated & isolated storage area

designated as per the guidelines of MoEF/CPCB

• Disposal of hazardous/solid wastes as permitted by MoEF/CPCB/GPCB

• Implementation of control & prevention measures as suggested in RA &HAZOP

report

• Preparation & maintenance of necessary documents/records of hazardous/solid

management, greenbelt development & maintenance as well as manure quality shall

be kept on regular basis

4.6.4 Biological Environment


• Regular maintenance of greenbelt by irrigation & fertilization as well as replantation

if required

• Implementation of mitigation measures suggested for Air, Water & Land

Environment

• Implementation of control & prevention measures suggested in RA & HAZOP report

• Monitoring of Ambient air within premises & in vicinity of project site in downwind

direction.





C4‐44

4.6.5 Socio‐Economic Environment

• Priority to local people in direct or indirect employment

• Social welfare activities through implementation of CSR program

• Implementation of mitigation measures suggested for Air, Water & Land

Environment

• Implementation of control & prevention measures suggested in RA &HAZOP report

• Proper arrangement for emergency & disaster management with provision of all

necessary emergency facilities and safety gears

• Monitoring of Ambient air within premises & in vicinity of wasteland in downwind

direction

• Management shall ensure that there is no harm/damage to local socioeconomic

layout & factor due to the operational activity of the plant

4.6.6 Noise Environment

• Proper foundation for machineries & equipment with use of suitable rubber padding

• Installation of equipment & machinery and utility in properly designed building

• Provision of acoustic enclosure &/or silencer for noise generation equipment &

machinery

• Proper maintenance & lubrication of the plant machineries & equipment

• Provision of necessary PPEs in workplace

• Regular noise monitoring in area of high noise

4.7 AIR POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES

The air pollution control system proposed in the proposed Steel & Power Plant is given

below:

4.7.1 Reducing Air Pollution in Steel Plant





C4‐45

Major pollutants envisaged from the proposed plant are particulate matter and NOx. The

Baseline ambient air quality levels in the project area are within the permissible limits as

specified by regulating agency. The following methods of abatement will be employed for

the air pollution control:

• Particulate matter will be controlled below 50 mg/Nm3.

• Stack of 45 m height will be provided for adequate dispersion of pollutants.

• Fume Extraction System with Cyclone will be provided.

• Adequate dust suppression system like fog type and water spray system will be

installed in the material handling system and at transfer points.

4.7.2 Reducing Air Pollution in Electric Arc Furnace

• Particulate matter will be controlled below 50 mg/Nm3.

• Further, Stack of 25m height will be provided for adequate dispersion of pollutants.

• Bag filter will be provided.

• Adequate dust suppression system like fog type and water spray system will be

installed in the material handling system and at transfer points.

4.7.3 Reducing Air Pollution in Power Plant

• Major pollutants envisaged from the proposed power plant are Particulate Matter,

Sulphur dioxide, Oxides of Nitrogen and Fugitive dust. The following methods of

abatement will be employed for the air pollution control:

• Particulate matter shall be controlled below 50 mg/Nm3 by providing efficient

Electrostatic Precipitators (ESPs);

• Further, a stack of 45m height shall be provided for adequate dispersion of sulphur

dioxide;

• Emissions of NOx will be controlled by designing low NOx burners;

• Adequate dust suppression systems like fog type and water spray system shall be

installed in the material handling system and at transfer points;





C4‐46

• All the internal roads shall be concreted / asphalted to reduce the fugitive dust due

to vehicular movement; and

4.7.4 Additional Recommendations

• Good housekeeping shall be maintained in the plant premises; Road Sweeping

machine shall be used to clean road;

• The trucks and other vehicles shall be maintained and serviced regularly to reduce

air emissions; and

• Usage of respiratory protective equipment by all employees to be ensured.

In deciding upon the type of respiratory protection will be provided, due regard should be

given to the levels of dust in air, the type of work and its duration, the ease of its use to

encourage it to be worn and maintenance considerations which would clearly have a

bearing on costs (i.e. disposable or non‐disposable face masks, air stream helmets or face

masks).

The arrangement for the storage, issue, collection and maintenance of respiratory

protective equipment should be located in an uncontaminated place and easily accessible

by employees.

4.7.5 Fugitive Emissions & Control Measures

• Raw material handling sections are major source for fugitive emissions. Most of

the time sources of fugitive emissions will be transfer and junction points, product

hopper area and loading points. Bag filters will be provided with appropriate

suction devices to control the fugitive emissions. In area where provision of bag

filter and other control device is not feasible, water – spraying arrangements will

be made, particularly wagon tippler and truck tippler

• Bag filters will be installed in various locations like cooler discharge product

hopper, raw material handling in steel melting shop for dust control; and

• Adopting good housekeeping practices will also help in control of fugitive emission.

Maintaining shop floor and roads in good condition minimizes the chances of

fugitive emission.

Draft EIA Re

Survey No 4

Chapter 4 :

ANACON LNAGPUR, M

The bag

FIGURE

4.7.6 C

The rec

1

2

eport for M/s. Ja

405/3,406,407 Vi

PREDICTION A

LABORATOR

MAHARASHT

g filter and E

E 4.12 FLOW

lean Develo

ommendatio

. The propoutilization

. Energy ef

y Bharat Steel C

illage Dhamadka

AND ASSESSME

RIES PVT.LTDTRA

ESP mechan

W SCHEME A

opment Mec

ons forreduc

osed projectn. fficient build

Corporation propo

a, Bhuj Bhachau

ENT OF IMPACT

.

ism is shown

FIGURE 4.1

AND HW GEN

STEEL P

chanism (CD

cing green h

t is optimize

ding materia

osed to install in

Road, Ta- Anjar,

TS

n in figure.

1 BAG FILTE

NERATION P

RODUCTION

DM)

house gasem

d in terms o

ls are consid

ntegrated steel an

r, Dist; Kutch, Guj

ER SYSTEM

POINTS OF IN

N

mission aregiv

of energy con

dered for co

nd power Plant a

ujarat.

NTEGRATED

ven below:

nsumption a

nstruction o

at

C4‐4

D IRON AND

and

of structures

47

s.





C4‐48

For external walls and boundary wall fly ash bricks and blocks should be

considered.

3. Fly ash, which is a waste of power plant should be mixed with cement to make

concrete. Rat trap cavity brickwork using flyash bricks / blocks should be

considered. Thermally insulated building roof through traditional methods of

brickbat coba technique/other recommended technique should be considered.

4. In electric arc furnace the forced draft cooler was ineffective in gas colling which

can be improved by reducing the flow rate of extraction of gas.

5. Reduction in frequent opening of bag house which will reduce the release of

dust into work zone.

4.7.7 Occupational Health & Safety

• Risk Assessment, safety manual & emergency management plan shall be prepared &

implemented and necessary action shall be made

• Regular health check‐up program as well as occupational health surveillance

programs

• Provision of all necessary PPEs & safety gears, equipment & materials

• Provision of all emergency facilities including fire fighting, first aid, medical facilities

& emergency vehicle, evacuation requisite etc.

• Regular safety training & mock rehearsal for emergency management

• Regular inspection & monitoring of implementation of safety manual as well as risk

control & prevention measures

• Regular maintenance of safety & emergency facilities & requisites

4.7.8 Administrative

• Proficient financial provision for each year in budget for Environment Management

Activities

• Regular tracking of EMS and update with necessary actions as timely required

• Regular revising of budget & EMP





C4‐49

• Formation of environment management cell with assignment of necessary roles & to

each member

• Annual auditing & Regular Environment Monitoring Program

• Planning, revision, implementation & monitoring of adequate EMP & monitoring

schedule as required timely.

4.8 EVALUATION OF IMPACTS

Matrix methods are basically generalized checklists where one dimension of a matrix is a list

of environmental, social & economic factors likely to be affected by a proposal. The other

dimension is a list of actions associated with development. These relate to both

construction and operation phases. Making cells representing a likely impact resulting from

the interaction of a facet of the development with an environmental feature identifies

impacts. With some matrices qualitative representation of impact importance and

magnitude are inserted in individual cell.

Matrices provide cause‐effect relationships between the various project activities and their

impacts on the numerous environmentally important sectors or components. Matrices

provide a graphic tool for display of their audience in a manner that can be easily

comprehended.

The impact of different project activities on various environmental components like ecology,

environmental pollution, aesthetics and socio‐economic have been summarized in a form of

a matrix and are presented in Table 4.15 for operation phase. As mentioned earlier, there

would not be any major impacts on environment during the construction. Hence matrix was

not plotted for construction work.

To show the potentials of impact, a two‐ dimensional Matrix system has been employed

with impact magnitudes of an each cause. All the impacts are confined to the study region

of 10km radius from the plant. The summary shows the influence of the Environment

Management Plan (EMP) also i.e. impact predicted for both, with and without EMP. The

Matrix system assumes the following:

The environmental indices identified can be classified into the following:





C4‐50

Physical Parameters : Surface water quality

Ground water quality

Air quality & climate

Soil quality

Land use pattern & Topography

Ecological Parameters : Forest/Park/Sanctuary

Flora & Fauna

Aquatic ecosystem

Social Parameters : Aesthetics

Local Housing structure

Services

Health & Safety

Economic Parameters : Agriculture, Industries, Employment, Fisheries

The assessment of the impact of the general impacting activities on the above parameters

of environmental indices can be done by establishing a co‐relation by “cause and effect

relationships” with the help of impact matrices.

The matrices for both the construction and operation phase are presented. The

environmental impact matrices can be prepared for two conditions:

1. Without mitigation/control measures

2. With proposed mitigation measures for adverse/beneficial effect.

The criteria for evaluation of qualitative matrix are presented herewith;

1. No impact (0): this indicates that the project activities are unlikely to have any

impact on an environmental attribute.

2. Negligible adverse impact (‐1)/ Negligible Beneficial impact (+1): It signifies that the

actions have minor effect, adverse or beneficial, on the environmental parameters

concerned.





C4‐51

3. Significant Adverse impact (‐2)/ Significant Beneficial impact (+2): The activities and

their environmental impacts are judged to be significant if they create, or have the

potential to create concern in the public or professional community.

4. High Adverse impact (‐3)/ High Beneficial Impact (+3): The action that can create or

have a potential to create controversy in the public or professional community due

to its long‐term effect. They may be at times irreversible.

The criteria for overall evaluation of qualitative matrix are presented below:

A. Highly Negative overall impacts: Total score = above – 353

B. Moderately Negative Overall impacts: Total score = ‐176 to ‐352

C. Slightly Negative overall impacts: Total score = ‐1 to ‐176

D. Neutral overall impacts; Total score =0

E. Slightly Positive overall impacts Total score = 1 to 176

F. Moderately positive overall impacts: Total score = 176 to 352

G. Highly Positive overall impacts: Total score = above 353

The environmental impact matrix with mitigation/control measures during the operation

phase given as Table 4.15

Table 4.15 Matrix Evaluation for proposed project with mitigation measures

IMPACT

SOURCES

PARAMETERS P

lant O

peration

& Process

Water Requirement,

wastewater g

eneration

&

Disposal

Sewage

discharge

Air

emissions

Fugitive

emissions

Noise

Waste

generation

&

Disposal

Material Storage

&

Handling

Spills

& Leaks

Breakdown

of C

ontrol

Equipments

Transportation

activities

TOTAL

PHYSICO‐CHEMICAL PARAMETERS: Surface Water Quality

0 +1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 +1


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Air Quality & Climate

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Soil Quality 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Landuse pattern 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0





C4‐52

ECOLOGICAL PARAMETERS: Forest/ Park/ Sanctuary

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Flora & Fauna 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Aquatic Ecosystem

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SOCIAL PARAMETERS:

Aesthetics 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Local housing structure

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Services 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Health & Safety ‐1 0 0 ‐1 ‐1 0 0 ‐1 ‐1 ‐1 ‐1 ‐7ECONOMIC PARAMETERS:

Agriculture 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Fisheries 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Industries +1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 + 1Employment +1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 +1 +2

TOTAL +1 +1 0 ‐1 ‐1 0 0 ‐1 ‐1 ‐1 0 ‐3

4.9 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT REVIEWS

The senior management will periodically review the Environmental Management System

(EMS) to ensure its suitability and effectiveness. The need for possible changes in the

environmental policy and objectives for continuous improvement will be ascertained and

revisions made accordingly.

EMS based on the above objectives will be formulated and implemented. Refer Chapter 9

on Environmental Management Plan.



Chapter 5 : ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES


5.0 ALANYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

5.1 GENERAL

Selection of suitable site for a proposed project is as important as selecting a technology and

suppliers. Factors, which are taken into account for selection of site are, proximity to raw

material sources or market, availability of manpower, water, infrastructure and ease of

transportation. However, a new dimension has also raised concerns in selection of site and that

is environment.

Factors taken into consideration while selecting the site;

• Availability of land

• Flat terrain and soil strength

• Connectivity

• Overall impact on environment

• Availability of water and power

• Other infrastructure.

As the selected plant site has all the above facilities and is in a wasteland category, which

houses similar and other types of industries, no other site was considered. The plots of site and

adjoining areas are being considered by the private land for including in the waste land area,

which will make the site most appropriate for this project.

5.2 EXISTING INFRASTRUCTURE

• Availability of infrastructure facilities like railways and road access to the site for ease of

logistics and transportation of project site equipment and fuel etc.

• Optimum investment requirement for development of the infrastructure.

• Availability of facilities like medical, education, market and railway station within a

reasonable distance.





5.3 CONSIDERING FOR SELECTION SITE

A company requires a number of basic inputs such as land, fuel, water etc. for setting up of

manufacturing TMT bars, angles, channels, MS Steel Ingots, Billets, Silicon manganese and

power plant and is primarily governed by the following basic considerations:

• No agricultural land involved; this land is uncultivable and fallow land.

• Land is privately owned and hence there are no Rehabilitation and resettlement issues.

• Good connectivity as the site is located adjacent to the State Highway as well as

Rail/Road accessibility

• Availability of water and proximity of source

• Power requirement

• Availability of manpower

• No notified ecologically sensitive areas in vicinity of around 10km radius.

• No major archaeological site, Historical or religious sites are located around 10‐km

radius.

• Environmental consideration

Thus, after alternative site analysis, it is clear that existing and proposed site is suitable in all

respects for the project

5.4 LAND, SITE DETAILS & AVAILABILITY OF FACILITIES

The area where the plant is proposed to be setup is wasteland area, Dhamadka village, Bhuj

Bhachau road, Anjar. Project site is located in Kutch and is a fast developing growth center in

spite of the recession in the metallurgical industries sectors. Anjar & Kutch area is very good

infrastructure facilities like water, availability of skilled, Non skilled workers, well connected

roadways and transport infrastructure. Since Anjar & Kutch is well developed market, there is

easy availability of spares and consumables. The nearest railway head is Bhachau 16km (south

east direction) from the project site.





Ü Accessibility:

The site is adjacent to the road connecting State Highway. As such there is not any problem in

accessibility and transportation of heavy materials to site by road and rail.

Ü Selection of equipment’s:

The main criterions for equipment and process selection are;

• Latest technology suitable for Indian conditions

• Minimum manufacturing cost

• Reliable equipment at economic cost

• Minimum down time for re‐setting, repair and maintenance

Ü Technical Competence:

The promoters are having techno‐Commercial Experience in the field of establishing

metallurgical industrial units. The proponents having own experienced managers, sufficient

technical experience and also considering the financial capability, the company is very much

confident to setup the above mentioned project.

Ü Raw material handling system:

The various raw materials viz. MS Steel ingots/Billets, MS Joists, TMT Bars/ Angles/Channels,

Silico Manganese and power plant. Raw materials will be received through load transport.

These will be unloaded in raw material storage shed in the respective storage bin. An elaborate

raw material handling system is provided to feed the correct and pre‐weighted mixture of raw

material.

Ü Water:

Total raw water demand in the operational phase of the project is around 235 KL/day

(Proposed + Existing) will be meeting through Narmada water supply.





Ü Power:

The current permitted power demand from the 40 MW (will be supplied by PGVCL), which will

suffice for the metallurgical industries plant. There is no special requirement for Power, the

power requirement can fulfilled by the existing facilities provided by existing unit of M/s.

JayBharat Steel Corporation.

Ü Disposal of Solid Waste:

Quantity of Hazardous and solid waste generation & disposal by various methods has been

described in chapter 2 and 4, the solid/ hazardous waste will be stored at separated Hazardous

waste storage disposal.

CONCLUSION

In view of the above, the project proponent intends to go for manufacturing TMT bars, angles,

channels, MS Steel Ingots, Billets, Silicon manganese and power plant using advanced

technology.



Chapter 6 : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME


6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME 6.1 GENERAL

The environmental monitoring program serves as the key tool to keep track on performance

of mitigation measures implemented & pollution control technologies installed to prevent

impacts associated with various operations of the project. The Environmental Monitoring

Program means “Environmental effects monitoring is the repetitive and systematic

measurement of the characteristics of environmental components to test specific

hypotheses of the effects of human activity on the environment. Environmental effects of

human activities, and secondarily to increase understanding of cause – effect relationships

between human activity and environmental change”

As it is defined above, it is very necessary prepare project specific monitoring programs with

special focus on probable residual impacts of the projects as well as implemented mitigation

measures and installed environmental technology to evaluate the efficiency on regular basis

and to plan for further actions based on the findings of the monitoring programs. Feedback

from environmental monitoring programs may be used to;

1. Determine whether more or less stringent mitigation measures are needed; and

2. To improve the predictive capability of EIAs

Thus, environmental monitoring program is a vital process of any management plan of the

development project. This helps in signaling the potential problems resulting from the

proposed project and will allow for prompt implementation of effective and corrective

measures. As described earlier, the proposed project of M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation

will have major impacts on air environment due to the emissions from utilities (Boiler,

Rolling mills, Induction furnace, Arc Furnace, Power Plant and Coal Crusher) as well as

process and DG sets. Further, it is also noticed that the very specific pollutants are likely to

be emitted from the existing and proposed project. Also the wastewater from the cooling

will be treated in ETP and will be disposed of through using in dust suppression and

plantation within the premises. The solid effluents will be ETP waste, used oil/spent oil,

Discarded drum/container and DG within premises. It is also very necessary to consider the

probabilities of NOx and some of VOCs in atmosphere & work place as resulted due to the





release of materials from storage, handling transportation & process of project. With all

these consideration Environmental Monitoring program has been planned as described in

subsequent sections under respective headings.

6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

With the due consideration of the above cited facts, Environmental Monitoring program has

been designed for the upcoming project of M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation. The

monitoring plan as designed in presented below in tabular form.

TABLE: 6.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLANS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Components Parameter No. of sampling Frequency Period Meteorology Wind speed &wind

direction, Temperature, Rainfall, Relative humidity and Cloud cover

Study area of 10 km radius

Data collected from IMD, and/or by installing meteorological station for site specific data.

1 hourly observations

from continuous records

Ambient Air Quality

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx& CO etc.

8 locations (Study area of 10km radius)

24 hourly samples twice in a week..

Quarterly

Surface Water Quality

Physical, Chemical and Bacteriological parameters

7 Locations (Study area of 10 km radius)

One sample at each location

Quarterly

Groundwater Quality and Drinking water

Physical & chemical parameters

8 Locations (Study area of 10km radius)


Quarterly

Ecology Existing flora and fauna

Study area of 10km radius

Through field visit during the study period and substantiated through secondary sources

Annually

Noise Levels Noise levels in dB(A) Leq

8 Locations(Study area of 10km radius)

Day time and Night time

Quarterly

Soil Characteristics

Physical, chemical and biological parameters to assess agricultural and a forestation potential

8 Locations (Study area of 10km radius)


Quarterly

Health Major fires, major accident, Injuries, etc.


Regular checkups Half yearly

Hazardous waste All relevant parameters (Permeability & porosity, Moisture, pH

Plant site and adjoining area

Process wise or activity wise for respective raw materials

Half yearly





EC, Loss on ignition, phosphorus, Total Nitrogen, Caution Exchange Capacity, Particle size distribution, Heavy metal, Ansonia, Fluoride)

Socio‐Economy Demographic, infrastructure, economic growth etc.


Half yearly

TABLE 6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN DURING OPERATION PHASE

Attributes Parameters No. of locations Frequency Period Ambient air quality

PM10, PM2.5,SO2, NOX 3 Locationsin and around site

24 hourly samples

Monthly

DG set, Boiler, Rolling Mills, Induction furnace, Arc Furnace, Power plant, Coal crusher stack

PM, NOx, Sox Each stack As per CPCB norms

Monthly

Groundwater quality


2 Locations Once Yearly

Waste water (treated and untreated)


Inlet and outlet Once Monthly

Noise Levels Noise levels in dB(A) Leq 6 Locations(within premises)

Once in day and once in night

Monthly

Soil Characteristics

Physical, chemical and biological parameters to assess agricultural and a forestation potential

2 Locations Once Yearly

Health Major fires, major accident, injuries, etc.

Work zone of factory

Regular checkups

Half yearly

Hazardous waste All relevant parameters(Permeability & porosity, Moisture pH , EC, Loss on ignition, Phosphorus, Total Nitrogen, Caution Exchange capacity, Particle size distribution, Heavy metal, Ansonia, Fluoride)

Each type of waste

Once Half yearly





6.3 MONITORING METHODOLOGIES

Monitoring of environmental sampling shall be done as per the guidelines provided by

MOEF/CPCB/GPCB. The methods adopted for environmental monitoring shall be any of the

methods recommended by any recognized body or authority like MoEF, CPCB, GPCB and

BIS.

6.4 REPORTING & DOCUMENTATION

Necessary reports and documents like half yearly compliance status & annual environment

audit/statement etc. shall be prepared to comply with the statutory rules & regulations as

timely amended. In any case during the operation, proponent shall adhere to the rules and

regulation enacted & amended timely by the government. Regular and periodic record shall

be kept in order to ensure easier, comparable review for assessment of past & present

performance and for projection of the future performance. Also, the management shall

ensure to prepare separate records for environmental management task for water &

wastewater, solid waste, air & emissions, workplace & soil. Management shall also ensure

that the records are prepared on regular basis and periodically in order to enable better and

smooth vigilance.

For statutory reports & documents, management shall forward such reports or documents

to the concerned authority well within stipulated timeframe with due care of thorough

review of the prepared document/report.

These reports/documents shall be regularly and periodically reviewed and any

changes/discrepancies found in mitigation measures, operation, management & technology

shall be brought into notice of concern authority & management instantaneously and all

possible corrective actions shall be taken immediately to match the discrepancies been

witnessed.

6.5 BUDGET & PROCUREMENT SCHEDULE

The Environmental Management Cell shall play a vital role in inspection of the necessity for

the requirement of raw material, technologies, equipment, maintenance works and other

miscellaneous expenses. The budget for all these shall be prepared and shall be submittedto





the concerned authority to be looked upon. These budgets shall be prepared regularly and

any changes in the requirement been witnessed shall immediately be brought into the

notice of the concerned authority to be revised and allocated accordingly. Along with other

budgets, the concerned authority shall ensure that this budget shall also be sanctioned and

revised accordingly with due consideration.

The budget shall include provisions for:

• Environmental Monitoring program

• Operation & Maintenance of environmental Technologies/Equipment

• Laboratory works for Environmental Management activities

• Emergency purchase of necessary material, equipment’s, tools services

• Greenbelt development

• Social & Environmental welfare & Awareness programs/training

• Annual Environmental Audit

• The budgetary planning for environmental protection, pollution prevention &

Environmental Management activities is shown in following table

TABLE 6.3 BUDGETRY FOR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING

Sr. No

Particulars Capital Cost, (Rs. Lakhs) Recurring Cost per Annum (Rs. Lakhs )

1 Pollution Control 360 50.0

2 Pollution Monitoring 40 5.0

3 Occupational Health 25 7.5

4 Rainwater harvesting 50 5.0

5 Green Belt Development 50 7.5

Total 525 75



CHAPTER 7 :ADDITIONAL STUDIES – RISK ASSESSMENT


7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES ‐ RISK ASSESSMENT

Industrial process & activities inherently pose hazards. There may be possible hazards to

human beings, flora‐fauna, all forms of property and the environment as a whole. Extreme

care is essential in handling all of them in various stages of manufacturing viz. processing,

treatment etc. The management aims at full preparedness to meet effectively the

eventualities resulting from any unfortunate occurrence of fuel hazards/accidents. Hazard

analysis involves the identification and quantification of the various hazards (unsafe

conditions) that exist in the project site. On the other hand, risk analysis deals with the

identification and quantification of risks; the plant equipment and personnel are exposed to,

due to accident resulting from the hazards present in the plant.

The main objective of the risk assessment study is to determine damage due to major

hazards having damage potential to life and property and provide a scientific basis to assess

safety level of the facility. The secondary objective is to identify major risk in manufacturing

process, operation, occupation and provide control through assessment. To prepare on‐site,

off site, for control of hazards.

7.1 OBJECTIVE OF THE STUDY

Risk assessment is a process of estimating the likelihood of an occurrence of specific

consequences (Undesirable events) of a given severity of damage potential to life and

property. The main objective of Risk assessment study is to determine the potential risks

and their likelihood for the proposed activities of the Project Proponent and accordingly

suggesting the mitigation measures.

This is achieved by the following:

• To conduct systematic identification of probable hazards (Toxic/flammable)

prevailing in the facility i.e. identification of probable failure scenarios.

• Identification of specific plant sections which could trigger events in both process

operations and storage areas.

• Identification of Maximum credible loss scenario (MCLS) & worst case scenarios

taking into account the safety features to be incorporated in the plant design and

other parameters such as response time, trips provided etc.





• To asses, the potential risks associated with identify hazards to which the plant,

people and outside community may be subjected to.

• Consequence analysis of various hazards to determine the vulnerable zones for each

probable accident scenario.

7.1.1 Methodology

To carry out the quantitative Risk assessment, following methodology was adopted.

Identification vulnerable zone for toxic dispersion, pool fire, area on fire (Thermal

Radiation), Flash fire, and Explosion over pressure (Vapour cloud Explosion) by using

software, named ALOHA

Start

Gather required information and documents

List out hazardous inventories and storage tank/pipelines/vessels details

Define the failure scenarios and identify probable hazards associated with them

Define parameters for each of the chemicals and each of hazards

Define release type (continuous/ instantaneous) and determine release rates

Simulate selected cases for consequence of failure scenarios

Summarize the consequences

Superimpose vulnerable zones on the plot plan

Appraise the extent of damage to plan and personnel

Discuss and recommended mitigative / remedial measures

End





7.1.2 Hazard identification

This is the process of examining each location including the work area & other free space as

norms, production process, storage of intermediates and raw material & final product for

the purpose of identifying all hazards which are “inherent to the job”. Work areas include

but are not limited to machine workshops, laboratories, office areas, agricultural and

horticultural environments, stores and transport, maintenance. Tasks can include (but may

not be limited to) industrial equipment, Hazardous substances and/or dangerous goods,

driving a vehicle, dealing with emergency situations, construction.

7.2 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Is defined as the process of assessing the risks associated with each of the hazards identified

so that appropriate control measures can be implemented based on the probability, i.e.

likelihood that harm, injury or ill health may occur and how severe the consequences of

exposure might be.

7.2.1 General hazards

• Slips, trips and fall

• Unguarded machinery

• Working in confined space

• Moving machinery, on‐site transport, forklifts and cranes

• Exposure to controlled and uncontrolled energy source

• Inhalable agents (gases, vapors, dusts and fumes)

• Contact with hot metal

• Fire and explosion

• Extreme temperatures

• Radiation

• Noise and Vibration

• Electrical burns and shock

• Manual handling and repetitive work

• Failure due to automation

• Ergonomics





7.1 OCCUPATIONAL AND SAFETY HAZARDS AND PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Sr. No

Type of hazard

Sources Risk Mitigation measures

1 Noise Blower, ID Fan, Compressors, D.G Set, EAF melting process, fuel burners, scrap and product handling, rotating equipment, furnace charging, rolling mill.

Hearing impairment interference in communication fatigue.

Audiometric examination Noise monitoring PPE must be provided like ear plug, muff isolation, substitution and engineering control installation of acoustical booth rotation of workers and minimize the time enclose fans, insulate ventilation pipes, cover and enclose scarp and storage and handling area adopting slag practice in EAF.

2 Vibration Manufacturing process

Whole body vibration hand transmitted vibration

High risk tools/ Machinery must be eliminated or provided with anti‐vibration handle or vibration isolation.

3 Heat Stress

Process of rolling, furnace (Molten metal and hot surfaces), EAF

High temperature Humidity

Clothing against the hazardous substance rotation of job or worker cold drinking water, salt to worker safety distance of 4 mtr from the delivery spout are suggest to work near molten metal.

4 Radiation Scarp, testing of equipment

Fatal disease Scarp must be free from contamination. Face mask/shield should be provided.

5 Inhalation agent (Gas, vapour, dust, fumes)

Metallic duct, EAF, raw material storage, melting process.

Damage pulmonary

Good ventilation system must be provided. Isolation of process, substitution of raw material workplace monitoring should be carried out provide separated eating facilities and washing before eating provide sealed cabin with filtered air conditioning use of filter respirators when exposed to heavy dust co analyses and detective equipment should be instated to alert control rooms and local personnel.

6 Confined space

Fuel tank bunker Fatalities PPE should be provided follow the work permit system.

7 Electrical EAF, equipment Burn Proper earthling must be carried out. 8 Explosion Molten metal, Coal

handling, yard Burn, injury, Death

Complete dryness of material prior to contact with liquid iron and steel separation of flammable gas and combustible material coal storage time should be minimized, coal piles should not be located above the heat source, storage structure made of non‐combustible material provide equipment grounding for minimization of static electricity hazard. All the motor must be spark proof.





7.2 PROCESS HAZARDS AND PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Sr. No Process Source Risk Mitigation 1 Induction furnace • Heat treatment • Burns,

scalding • Dust, Fumes

• Using inert gas to prevent oxidation

2 Rolling Mills • Trapping between the rolls

• Injuries • Cuts

• Nip of rolls must be guarded and Machine part must be guarded

• Lock out/tag out must be planned

• PPE must be provided 3 Power plant • Power

generation • Fire • Explosion • Electric

shocks • Steam

leakage • Dust

• Safety inter locking system should be provided

• Gas leakage detector system provided

• Earthing should be flame proof

7.3 STORAGE HAZARDS AND PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Sr. No Area Hazard and Risk Mitigation measures 1 Storage and handling

of high speed Diesel (HSD)

• Leaks and spill • Falls • Toxicity • Fire or explosion

• Catchment basins for spills • PPE should be provided • Fire protection system should be

provided. 2 Storage of coal • Dust explosion

• Fire • Spontaneous heating avoided • Co monitoring should be carried out • PPE must be provided • Fire protection system should be

provided • Water suppression system should be

installed. 3 Electrical power

supply and distribution

• Fire • Earthling should be flame proof • Training to the worker

7.2.2 Preventive measures for hazardous energy

• Preparation for shutdown

• Equipment isolation

• Lock‐out and tag out application

7.2.3 Damage control need

The entire damage control scenarios are as follow:





Credible Scenario – A: Pool fire in High Speed Diesel Tank.

As there is other nearby establishments, the fire from HSD tank can easily spread causing

extensive damage to the materials. However the damage due to fire will be confined to a

particular area only. On putting the basis of above consideration the pool fire due to fire

hazard in the HSD storage tank is not considered as most but first degree credible scenario.

It can be controlled by the available installation and facilities.

Credible Scenario – B: Fire in Coal Storage

As there is other nearby establishment, the fire from coal storage can easily spread causing

extensive damage to the materials. However the damage due to fire will be confined to a

particular area only. It can be controlled by the available installation and facilities.

7.3 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

Occupational health needs attention both during construction and erection and operation

and maintenance phases. However, the problem varies both magnitude and variety in the

above phases.

Operation and Maintenance

The problem of occupational health, in the operation and maintenance phase is due to noise

hearing losses. Suitable personnel protective equipment will be given to employees. The

working personnel will be given the following appropriate personnel protective equipment:

• Industrial safety helmet: crash helmet

• Face shield with replacement acrylic vision

• Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue color glasses

• Welders equipment for eye and face protection

• Cylindrical type earplug, Ear muffs, Canister Gas mask

• Self‐contained breathing apparatus

• Leather apron

• Aluminized fiber glass fix proximity suit with hood and gloves

• Boiler suit

• Safety belt





• Leather/rubberized hand gloves

• Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves

• Industrial safety shoos with steel toe, and

• Electrical safety shoes without steel toe and gumboots.

7.4 SAFETY PLAN

7.4.1 General

All work place, aisles and work surrounding areas will be kept clean and free from all

obstructions.

• On completion of job, all tools, equipment’s, left over materials will removed to

proper places for storage.

• Waste, oily rags and other inflammable materials will be kept in proper replaces.

• Slippery substance such as grease or oil if spilled on floor will be cleaned

immediately or at least covered with sand, saw‐dust or anti‐slippery materials units

it is cleaned.

• Nails, planks with protruding nails and such sharp objectives will not be left on the

floor.

7.4.2 Wearing apparel

No person working on or near moving machinery will wear loose clothing such as shirts with

dangling sleeves, gloves and jewelry like rings, ear‐ring, wrist‐rings and chain lockets etc. all

persons engaged in oiling or cleaning of machinery will put on tight fitting cloths shoes and

boots must be properly laced.

7.4.3 Protective equipment

Protective equipment and safety appliance like goggles, face shields, aprons, gloves,

ammunition boots/safety boots, helmets, respirators, gas masks etc, are issued for personal

protection for jobs, where special hazards exit and these will be used by workers where

provided, while engaged on such work.





7.4.4 Stacking of materials

All materials will be stacked tidily and up to safe height to prevent them from falling or

causing some other pile to fall. No material will be stacked in passages, aisles or walkways.

7.4.5 Loading of material

While loading in truck or wagon, all materials will be so loaded that no portion thereof

projects from the sides or falls off in transit.

• The loaded material will be properly distributed and securely tied as far as possible

and practicable.

• All materials projecting beyond the front or rear of a truck will be indicated by red

flag during day and red light during night.

7.4.6 Eye Protection

• Goggles or face shield will be used by all workers engaged in operation involving

hazards to eyes.

• No person will attempt to remove any foreign body or material from his own eye or

those of other employees. All such cases will be reported to the foreman who will

immediately direct the person concerned to report to the First Aid Station.

7.4.7 Safety belts

• All employees working on evaluated places not adequately protected by railing or

suitable enclosure will wear safety belts with lifeline tied securely to a firm structure

or other support independent of the equipment on which they were working.

• All workers will wear safety belts with Gas Masks/ Oxygen Breathing Apparatus while

working at confined places, where they are exposed to such conditions or elements

which might affect their consciousness. Lifeline of such belts will be held by one or

two person stationed in location not affected by gas so as to render aid or call for

help.

• The foreman or supervisor‐in –charge of the work involving the use of safety belts

will during the course of its execution provide stand –by personnel consisting of one

or more men wherever necessary.





7.4.8 Transport

Speed of the vehicles within the plant area will be restricted to below 20kms/hr.

7.4.9 Short Cuts • Roads and regular passages should normally be used for moving from one place to

another.

• Crossing of mill tables, metal runners excerpt by stairs provided is strictly prohibited

• No employees will cross any operating unit unless his duty requires him to do so.

• Avoid shortcuts; use of shortcuts may short the life.

7.4.10 Defective tools • All defective tools, e.g. chisels with mushroom heads, spanners with worn jaws,

broken file handles, hammers with broken shafts etc. will be brought to the notice of

the foreman immediately.

• No tools will be put to use for which they are not meant.

7.4.11 Power rails or transmission line

No person, except those specially authorized by competent authority to so, will have access

to power rails or other electric supply lines and apparatus.

7.4.12 Guards

Machine guards and other safety device will not be removed except for making repairs,

lubricating or cleaning and that too only by authorized persons. Those must be replaced

before starting machinery.

7.4.13 Refueling

The engines of all vehicles will be stopped before filling petrol or other fuel.

7.4.14 Permit to work

Permit to work and danger board on electrical equipment’s or machineries run by power

• Issue of Permits on printer from along with associated safe‐guards is mandatory on

planned shutdown work, all major breakdowns and any other work, which is likely

to last for more than one hour.





• When a switch is isolated for carrying out any maintenance work, hang, a personal

Danger Board, on the switch, which serves as a warning to others, not to touch that

switch so long as the danger board is hanging on it.

7.4.15 Starting and repairing machinery

• No person will attempt to operate or set in motion any machine or equipment to

which he is not authorized.

• Oiling, cleaning or repairing of machinery normally will not be carried out without

first stopping the machinery completely. Where it becomes necessary to examine

any part of machinery, while it is in motion or to carry out lubrication or other

adjustment operation, such work will be some by only specially trained adult male

workers wearing tight fitting clothing.

• No worker will switch on electricity, turn on gas, steam, air, acid or water or set in

motion any machinery without first making sure that no one is in a position to be

injured thereby. Supervisor –in –charge of the work will see that effective measures

are taken to ensure the safety of personnel and equipment’s before the equipment’s

are operated.

• All exposed moving parts of machine such as pulleys, belts, coupling, chains, fly‐

wheels; rotating collars with projecting set screw will be properly guarded.

• The machine guards and safety device will be confirmed to the statutory provisions

and will be in position, when the machine is in motion.

7.4.16 Lifting or carrying weights

• No person will be allowed to lift or carry excessive weights. While lifting or carrying a

load manually, correct method should be followed so as to avoid sprain on lumber

region. If the weight is too heavy or bulky help of other workers will be sought.

• When the load is carried by two workers neither of them will let the load come

down, without cautioning the other.

7.4.17 Overhead crane

• No person will stand in unsafe position while a wagon is being loaded or unloaded by

crane.

• No one will ride on load being carrying by crane





• No one will ride stand or walk under loads suspended from cranes

• The access to overhead crane runway for any purpose whatsoever is straightly

prohibited except with the permission of the shift office / supervisor and after

notifying the crane driver concerned.

• When any defect is observed in a crane, it will be reported to the officer/supervisor

concerned for rectification.

• While any person, is employed in work on or near the wheel track of travelling crane

in any place where he would be liable to be struck down, effective measures will be

taken to ensure that crane does not approach within 20 feet of that place.

• If the crane driver feels that someone is in a position to be injured by moving or

lifting a load, he will inform the foreman/man‐in‐charge to caution against danger.

• A crane driver will not make a lift without standard signals from the person with the

job and he will take signal only from one person at a time.

• All persons in places over which a crane is operating, will listen for crane bells and

other signaling devices.

• The hooters bells, etc., on the crane will always be maintaining in good condition and

be audible from the required distance

• Stand clear of loaded magnets. If the power is cut off, the load will fall.

7.4.18 Electricity

• No work will be done on or in close proximity to electricity supply lines and

apparatus without the approval of the competent authority.

• The use of defective plugs, sockets and flexible cables will be avoided. All broken or

missing covers of switches, etc., will be replaced immediately.

• No one, except a person duly authorized by the electrical department, will operate

any switch gear or other electrical equipment except for routine starting and

stopping of low and medium voltage motors and “Switching on” of “Switching off”

lights and fans etc.

• The repairs to electrical apparatus and electric supply lines will not be carried out by

unskilled men and without effectively cutting of supply thereto, and taking

necessary precaution to prevent accidental or inadvertent charging thereof.





• The use of water or foam chemical fire extinguishers for extinguishing electrical

fires will be strictly avoided and only CO or CTC type of fire extinguishers used for

dealing with electrical fires.

• In case of electric shocks, the victim will be detached from the electrical circuit. If he

is still in contact with the same, the victim will not be touched by the rescuer, unless

the power is cut off or insulated material like wooden log, wooden stick etc., will be

used to prevent rescuer from getting the electric shock himself. Medical help should

immediately requisitioned and artificial respiration given unit the arrival of the

medical officer.

7.4.19 Ladders and scaffolds

• Ladders with broken or missing rungs or split side rails or otherwise defective will not

be used ladders with safety shoes will be used as far are possible and practicable.

• Ladders will raise sufficiently above the place of landing, and will be tied at the top

with rope or held at the foot by workers. This rule does not apply to mould cleaning

ladle repairs etc.

• No metallic ladders will be used for electrical work or any work to be executed in

close proximity to the electric supply lines or apparatus.

• The use of defective scaffolds will be strictly avoided. All scaffolds will inspected by

the person in charge of the work, before commencement of the work. Suspended

scaffolds should be of sound construction and good material and of sufficient

strength and lifting appliances of these should be tested by subjecting to 50% more

load than the rated capacity.

7.4.20 Working overhead

No tools or material will be left in places from where they may accidentally drop on persons

below.

7.4.21 Chains and slings

• All bad slinging practices will be strictly avoided

• No defective chain and sling will be used

• No bolt or nail will be inserted or knot tied to shorten a lifting chain





• All wrought iron lifting chains are to be annealed, examined and tested periodically

as per factory regulations.

7.4.22 Fire in coal Yard

This is the most common accident known to occur in any plant storing and handling coal.

Since such incident takes sufficient time to get widespread, enough response time is

available for plant personnel to get away to safer distance. An elaborate fire hydrant

network and firefighting system comprising of trained crew and facilities will mitigate the

risk of such incidents. In case of bunkers, alarm system and smoke detectors will be

installed.

7.4.23 Open manholes

All manholes will be closed with suitable covers. When opened these should be suitably

guarded or a red flag during day and red light during night should be installed by the side of

the manhole, for warning the passerby.

7.4.24 Excavations

• No excavations of any description will be undertaken in the plant area without

obtaining prior permission in writing from the Electrical and Civil Engineering

Department in order to avoid possible damage to electric and telecommunication

cables or water sewerage or gas lines.

• The under cutting of banks will be strictly avoided.

• All excavations or ditches exceeding five feet in depth will be sloped to safe angle or

properly shored before permitting any worker to work in them

• All timbering and planks used therein will be inspected by a competent person of the

Civil Engineering Department.

• No loose material or load will be placed or stacked near the edge of any excavation

thereby endangering the life of person working below.

• All excavations inside the plant will be properly fenced and marked with suitable

warning sign board at all times and red lights at nights, this will apply to all

uncovered trenches or drains or opening on platforms.





7.4.25 Vehicles • All vehicles will comply with all the traffic signs and regulations within the plant and

they will not exceed the safe speed limits.

• Riding on the running board of any vehicle or any part of the vehicle except on a

proper seat is strictly prohibited.

• Riding on hand trolley is strictly prohibited

• Double riding on cycles is strictly prohibited

• Sitting on the side flaps or standing in a truck while in motion is strictly prohibited

7.4.26 First aid boxes

First aid boxes will be provided in suitable places in every department

7.4.27 Repairs and gears

• Department will be equipped with the required types of firefighting equipment’s,

namely fire hydrant, fire hoses, sand buckets, water buckets, fire extinguishers, etc.,

wherever necessary.

• Extinguishers using water must not be used on electrical lines or equipment

• Repair work will be taken after the incident is over. During this process, employees

are provided with necessary safety appliances and work permits. The declares/

controller of emergency and two officials along with the work incident controller

shall immediately prepare the list of safety tools, safety gears and other implements

required to control the emergency situation in respect of;

X Fire

X Electrical short circuiting

The safety equipment gadgets available for combating emergencies at the site are given

below:

X Water tanker

X Firefighting pumps

X Hydrant system

X Fire extinguisher

X Breathing apparatus

X First Aid box





The places of availability of this equipment have clearly made known to the concerned

persons to use according to the requirement. The required training in using the implement

has been provided to the workmen in addition to the mock rehearsals.

7.4.28 Unfamiliar Equipment

No person will use or operate any machine or tools which he has not been authorized or

taught to operate.

7.4.29 Horseplay

Horseplay of any kind is prohibited inside the plant. Do not distract attention of others on

work.

7.4.30 Work Permits

Procedure of work permits is essential when working at height or working enclosed space,

Electrical Repairs, any critical maintenance jobs, civil Excavations or Hot working near

hazardous areas.

7.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS

Administrative controls largely involve the development of safe working practices

procedures. These controls may include

• Rescheduling hot work to cooler parts of the day and maintenance to cooler

seasons;

• Encouraging workers to take short breaks

• Allowing new workers or workers returning from holidays to acclimatize to the heat;

• Decreasing heat exposure duration e.g. by rotation of workers;

• Consider job sharing/rotation or using extra workers

• Screen workers for heat intolerance (e.g. those with heart and blood pressure

problems or previous heat illness)

• Training of workers in the hazards associated with working in heat and recognizing

heat related illnesses, safe work practices, control measures and the use and

maintenance of personal protective equipment;





7.6 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)

Where exposure to heat cannot be prevented or reduced by any other form of control, all

exposed persons must be provided with PPE. PPE may be used in addition to other control

measures.

PPE designed to protect persons in hot environments will include;

• Eye wear, such as ultra‐violet glasses

• Non‐flammable and heat reflective clothing and equipment protective gloves and

footwear.

7.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FURNACE

In general, for long of a furnace, it is necessary to take necessary steps from time to time. Its

maintenance is easy and cheap, certain steps will be taken on a regular basis which will

include the following;

• Before performing any maintenance, make sure to switch off the electrical power

and the fuel supply.

• The combustion chamber generates the fire therefore there is s building of carbon

soot which can corrode the chamber wall hence the chambers should be cleaned the

regular basis.

• Leakage or possibility of leakage in the pipe should be repaired from time to time as

it may cause the seeping of the carbon monoxide.

• The oil filter must be cleaned from time to time. Any defect in the oil filter may lead

to the clogging of the oil‐burner nozzle, which could result in a misfire that shuts

down the system. It is therefore necessary that defective filter should be replaced.

• In case of electric furnace the heating element should be checked and defective

piece should be replaced.

• The water not is allowed to come in close proximity of furnace as contact because

the molten alloys used in the furnace to explode.

• The venting system should be proper and the soft, rusted, or broken vent piping can

release combustion products into the environment.





7.8 RISK MANAGEMENT & INSURANCE PLANNING

• Identification of all major internal and external pure risks including the natural risks

and analysis of the impact of above risks.

• Scrutiny of all existing major insurance policies in respect of;

X Rationalization of basic rate of premium and widening of covers

X Applicability/eligibility of discounts in premium.

X Application of suitable clauses, warranties and conditions

• Identification of possible areas for refund of premium and suggestions regarding

procedure for the same.

• Selection of insurance coverage on the basis of risk analysis

• Providing guidelines on documentation requirements, procedures for claims under

various policies, evaluation of insures.

• Risk assessment including prediction of the worst case scenario and maximum

credible accident scenario should be carried out. The worst case scenario has been

taken into account the maximum inventory of storage at site at any point in time.



CHAPTER 8 : DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN


8.0 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

A disaster is a catastrophic situation; in which, suddenly people are plunged into

helplessness and suffering; and as a result, need protection, clothing, shelter, medical &

social care and other necessities of life. The Disaster Management Plan (DMP) is aimed to

ensure safety of life, protection of environment, protection of installation, restoration of

production and salvage operations in this same order of priorities. For effective

implementation of DMP, it should be widely circulated and a personnel training is to be

provided through rehearsals/drills. To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside

the plant or immediate vicinity of the plant, a DMP is to be formulated and this planned

emergency document is called DMP.

An emergency in the premises has the potential to cause serious injury or loss of lives or

extensive damage to the property and/or environment and serious disruption both inside

and outside the plant. In such cases, sometimes outside agencies are required to call for

help in handling the situation. The causative factors like plant/equipment failure, human

error, earth quake, sabotage etc. will normally manifest in various forms viz. Fire, Explosion,

structure collapse etc. This DMP lays down the code of conduct of all personnel in the plant

and the procedures to be adopted by them in the event of any “Emergency”. These

procedures have been prepared taking into account the minimum strength of manpower

available at all times in the premises. The individuals under the direction of the respective

Team Leaders shall carry out the responsibilities assigned.

The emergency procedures outlined are suitable for round the clock coverage including

holidays. These emergency procedures shall be followed as outlined in the DMP during all

shifts.

8.1 OBJECTIVES

The overall objectives of DMP are,

• To control the situation and if possible eliminate as quickly as possible

• To avoid confusion/panic and to attend the emergency with clear‐cut line of action

• To minimize the loss of property to the plant as well as to our neighborhood

• To safe guard the non‐affected areas

• To alert the neighborhood





• To arrange head‐count and rescue operations

• Treatment of the injured

• To safeguard others by timely evacuation

• To prevent any causes of emergencies

8.1.1 Definition of disaster

Disaster is a catastrophic situation in which the day‐to‐day patterns of life are, in many

instances, suddenly disrupted and people are plunged into helplessness and suffering and as

a result need protection, clothing, shelter, medical, social care and other necessities of life,

such as;

Disasters resulting from natural phenomenon like earthquake, volcanic eruptions, storm,

surges, cyclones, tropical storms, floods, landslides, forest fires and massive insect infection.

Also in this group, violent draught which will cause a creeping disaster leading to famine,

disease and death must be included. Second group includes disastrous events occasioned by

man, or by man’s impact upon the environment, such as armed conflict, industrial accidents,

factory fires, explosion and escape of toxic gases or chemical substances, river pollution,

mining and other structural collapses; air, sea, rail and road transport accidents, aircraft

crashes, collision of vehicles carrying inflammable liquids, oil, spills at sea, and dam failures.

8.1.2 Accidents

An accident is an unplanned event, which has a probability of causing personal injury or

property damage or both. It may result in physical harm (injury or disease) to persons,

damage to property, loss to the company, a near miss or any combination of the effect. A

major accident is a sudden, unexpected, unplanned event, resulting from uncontrolled

developments during and industrial activity, which causes or has a potential to cause.

Serious adverse effects immediate or delayed (death, injuries, positioning or hospitalization)

to a number of people inside the installations and/or to persons outside the establishment.

Significant damage may be caused to crops, plants or animals or significant contamination of

land, water or air.

8.1.3 Emergency

An emergency is the situation, which has potential to cause a large‐scale damage or

destruction to life or property or Environment or combination of these within or outside the





factory. Therefore it is essential to have a laid down procedure to meet emergency

systematically. In any industry, emergency can arise at any moment and this depends on the

type of;

• Structure

• Raw materials

• Machines

• Nearby industries

• Location of the industry etc.

8.1.4 Nature of emergency:

The “Emergency” specified in this plan will refer to occurrence of one or more of the

following natural/manmade events

• Fire

• Explosion

• Spillage of material and product

• Deliberate sabotage, Terrorism, Air Raid etc.

• Natural calamities; ‐ Lightening, storm, Earthquake, Flood etc.

• Collapsing of structure

8.1.5 Medical helps

First Aid Boxes have been provided at various strategic locations. Requisite number

employees are trained about First Aid, Liaison nearest hospitals in Gandhidham.

8.1.6 Communication system:

• Alarm Raising for Emergency by following the sirens installed

• The siren will be used for raising the emergency alarm and also for all clear signals

• Emergency siren: the wailing alarm will be sounded intermittently at fixed interval of

30 seconds for a period of two minutes in case of emergency, such alarm will signify

the employees that an emergency has occurred and that the emergency services

should be put into operation.

• Incident controller after assessing the situation will declare that emergency is over.

Till the incident controller issues the declaration, all the leaders will adhere to the

task and be present at the prescribed location.





• All clear signal will be sounded through continuous for 1 minute. Even after the

emergency is over a selection staff of the rescue/Evacuation Team will be available

at the site of emergency for at least 30 minutes to ensure that the situation is

absolutely free from danger.

• After the emergency is over, all the team leaders should meet at the Emergency

Control Center and each team leader should submit a report to the incident

controller about team performance and other details observed.

• In addition to the above systems, internal telephones, P.A system, Mobile

telephones, computer system etc. will be used for communication.

• If situation is beyond the control, the external agencies will be informed accordingly

and asked for the help. Direct telephone, cell phone or messengers/runners may

achieve this.

8.1.7 Assembly point:

In case of emergency some locations are considered as assembly points. Depending on the

wind direction and location of emergency, Assembly point will be declared. The employees

should run across the wind direction and not against the wind direction. Depending upon

the location of the emergency the incident controller will fix the Assembly point and officer

will announce the location of the Assembly point. Employee’s attendance, visitors and

contractors workmen register will be made available at the assembly point for head count.

8.1.8 Emergency control center

Factory Manager Office will be declared as an Emergency control center. Emergency control

center is facilities with:

• Address and Telephone numbers of the factory inspectorate, Gujarat Pollution

Control Board, Police, Fire Brigade, Hospitals and DMP Team members.

• Plant layout‐ indicating storage of hazardous materials, layout of fire

Hydrants/extinguishers, entrances/exits; roads etc.

• Portable P.A. system, manual siren, Flood lights, Torches, Pickaxe, Saw Nylon Ropes.

• Fire Blankets/Fire Proximity suit, Breathing Apparatus, First Aid Box etc.

• List of employees with address, telephone number, blood group etc.

• Material safety data sheets of all chemicals handled.





8.1.9 Wind socks

Wind direction will be determined with the help of installed windsocks.

8.1.10 Mock drill:

Mock drills are carried out regularly to familiarize the staff with their roles, fire protection

equipment/system installed in the plant and use of personnel protective equipment. Senior

officials monitor this and shortcoming is thoroughly studies and necessary corrective

measures are taken.

8.1.11 Procedures for mock drills

• Inform all the employees about mock drills and the signal to be given.

• Fix the date and location of the emergency for mock drills

• Mock drills will be monitored by observers

• Raise the siren for emergency

• After hearing the siren the incident Controller, Site Controller, Officers and Team

Members should actuate the “Disaster Management Plan”.

8.1.12 Procedure on noticing an emergency:

• If anybody notice any situation, which may lead to a disaster, should be immediately

inform the shift in‐charge/ site controller/ incident controller/ fire & safety

supervisor/ security.

• Take charge of the situation as incident controller

• Rush to the site of emergency to get the correct picture and then to emergency

control center for speedy control over the situation by making an arrangement for

raising the alarm.

• On arrival of team members, he shall assign duties as required and activate the on‐

site emergency plan.

• Ensure safety of the plant and the personnel in the plant. He will make an

assessment of the emergency and decide on external assistance.

• Communicate and coordinate among the incidents controller/ site controller/ factory

manager/ fire safety supervisor etc. and will be final authority on all matters related

with management of emergency such as;

X Fire fighting





X Welfare and rescue operations

X Arrange for Civil/Mechanical/Electrical work during emergency.

X Transport

8.1.13 Incident controller/site controller

Rush immediately to the scene of the fire/emergency, select and set out appropriate

fire/emergency equipment. He will take the below mentioned actions at the earliest

opportunity, if the fire/emergency is not controlled. He will call the security personnel from

their residences for additional manpower if required. Regulate entry and exit of personal

required for controlling the fire/ emergency restrict exit of personal required for controlling

the fire/emergency. Arrange for personnel protective equipment required for the

emergency. Call, the local fire brigade, police in case of necessity in consultation with the

incident controller. Arrange transport facilities for removal of causalities to dispensary/

hospital. Take responsibility of law and order. Keep detailed records of the incident and

progress of operations to fight the emergency.

8.1.14 Factory manager:

He will rush to the emergency control center and collect the information from the incident

controller, further he will,

• Announce the location of the assembly point after getting information from incident

controller/ site controller.

• Take the list of persons to be communicated internally and externally.

• Maintain liaison with the press, government agencies i.e. police, fire brigade etc. and

the neighborhood regarding the emergency under instructions from incident

controller.

• Courteously receive officers from the state government or neighbors to the

Administration block only and inform to incident controller that they can be taken

care off.

• Take all the steps required for the welfare such as providing tea, snacks, emergency

temporary medical center in consultation with the incident controller/site controller.

• Disclose all the necessary information in the plant and media so as to avoid rumors

and confusion.





• Also be responsible for the head counts at the assembly points.

8.1.15 Fire & safety supervisor/ shift in‐charge & security

• Proceed to the scene; establish contact with firemen and incident controller to

supplement efforts in fire fighting.

• Assist in searching casualties and help to remove them to the medical center

• Organize outside assistance in fire fighting and rescue operations if required.

• Mobilize personal protective equipment and safety appliances and assist personnel

handling emergency in using them.

• Keep and check on any new development of unsafe situation and report the same to

site main controller.

• Collect and preserve evidence to facilitate future inquires.

• Effectively cordon off the emergency area and will prevent unauthorized people

entering the scene.

• Permit the fire tenders or ambulance requisitioned by incident controller to the plant

• Ensure that vehicles and Lorries are sent out of the plant premises.

• Ensure that all the employees are conducted out of plant and assembled at

Assembly point.

• Control Traffic Movement

• Remove tankers, tanker drivers outside.

• Entry of unauthorized public to be prevented

• Arrange for vehicles for shifting casualties and essential workers to safe assembly

points.

8.1.16 Engineering/operation & maintenance

• Ensure the safety of the remaining part of the plant

• Take necessary steps for plant shutdown in consultation with the site controller.

• Ensure that an operator is immediately available at the water pump house for

firefighting.

• Mobilize with necessary tools and tackles to handle any repair work on an

emergency basis.





8.1.17 Earthquake management plan: history of earthquake

The 1819 Rann of Kutch earthquake occurred at about 18:45 to 18:50 local time (23:30 UTC)

on 16 June. The towns of Kothari, Mothora, Naliva and Vinjan suffered particularly heavy

damage. Anjar, Bhuj, Lakhpat, Mandvi and Tera were also severely affected. At least 1,543

people were killed in the larger towns; the number of casualties in smaller towns and

villages is unknown.

The 2001 Gujarat earthquake occurred on January 26, 2001, India’s 51st Republic Day, at

08:46AM local time (3:16 UTC) and lasted for over two minutes. The epicenter was about

9km south‐southwest of the village of Chobari in Bhachau Taluka of Kutch district of Gujarat,

India. The earthquake reached a magnitude of between 7.6 and 7.7 on the Moment

magnitude scale.

This was an interpolate earthquake, one that occurred at a distance from an archive plate

boundary, so the area was not well prepared. The shock waves spread 700km. 21 districts

were affected and 600,000 people left homeless.

The recent devastation in Gujarat has been eye‐opener as regards the magnitude of loss to

human life and property. Hence, the District Administration has geared up the various

Departments to effectively meet the challenge of an earthquake. Since, earthquake strike

without forewarning and generally any measurement on the Richter scale is usually a

postoperative measure, prevention in respect of earthquakes is imperative.

The main hurdles as regards planning are as follows:

• Structural planning of individual buildings

• Communication lines

• Electricity and water supply

• Health hazards

• Loss of life, property and employment, preventive steps are required in the

following areas:

• Public structures

• Dams

• Roads

• Maintenance of health and prevention of epidemic diseases.





Since, earthquakes are natural calamities dissemination of proper information, awareness,

stocking of proper machinery and equipment is the prerequisites to tackle such a situation:

8.1.18 General steps to be taken for maintaining calm in case of earthquake

• Public to be educated to remain calm and not to panic

• Not to enter or exit from buildings when tremors are felt.

• If indoors, take protection/ shelter under a heavy object, which can sustain weight of

heavy objects.

• If outdoors to stay away from buildings, walls trees, etc. as they are likely to collapse

or get uprooted.

• If driving, it is safe to stay inside the vehicle, as it is likely to provide protection from

falling objects.

8.1.19 Action plan during the earthquakes • Inform the core committee members to swing into action

• Call for the fire brigade

• Inform Road Transport Authorities to stop movement of vehicle

• Mobilize volunteers, youth, sportsman, social service workers, Ex‐serviceman,

Medical personal.

• Make shift arrangements for temporary shelters to displaced persons

• Providing water and food to the affected.

8.1.20 REHABITTATION OF EARTHQUAKE VICTIMS

The first and foremost requirement consequent upon the earthquake would be an

alternate shelter that is capable of withstanding the next termer. District Administration

has taken steps along with the public works department to ensure that any new

constructions that are taken up are capable of withstanding quakes according to

requirement. Wherever possible old and dilapidated buildings are subjected to

inspection by the public works Department and necessary reinforcements provided Road

and Rail network to be kept watch to ensure that people do not panic and desert their

dwellings. Control rooms with wireless transportation and adequate food supplies to be

set pat places affected by tremors to keep in constant touch with the District

Administration. First‐Aid and Medical facilities to be provided.





8.1.21 Task force for disaster management during accident, building and fire disasters

Assistant commissioner (To communicate with core committee, supervisor and co‐ordinate

between Departments)

RTO Dy. SP/CPI Tahasildar Taluka medical officer Fire officerTo provide necessary detail about the vehicle and transport

To maintain law and order and inform the kit and kin of victim

To supervise medical facilities

To co‐ordinate with Public Health Centre and provide First Aid and medical relief.

To provide fire engines and personnel

8.1.22 Landslide hazard and mitigation measure

Hazard:

• Landslide can affect the states and districts. It can occur due to triggering of rock falls,

breaking of ground and earthquakes.

Impacts:

• Loss of industrial, agricultural and forest productivity, transportation system.

• Reduce the real estate value, tax revenues.

• Adverse effects on water quality in stream, irrigation facilities.

• Loss of human, animal

Mitigation: • Prepare the state and district level Disaster Management Plan

• Training should be provided to engineer, geologist.

• Public awareness campaigns should be carried out.

• Risk and vulnerability analysis should be carried out.

• Mock drill should be carried out for the vulnerable area.

• Enforcing and monitoring the compliance of land use and town planning bye‐laws.





8.1.23 Action plant and budget for occupational, health and safety

TABLE 8.1 ACTION PLAN FOR OCCUPATIONAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY

Sr. No.

Attribute Parameters Period

1. Ambient air quality

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, & CO Quarterly

2. Stack Emissions from DG

PM, NOx,SO2,, CO Quarterly

3. Noise levels Noise levels in dB(A) Leq Quarterly

4. Occupational Health

Routine checkup, chest x‐ray, audiometry, spirometry, vision testing, ECG etc

Half yearly

5. Hazardous waste

All relevant parameters (Permeability & Porosity, Moisture pH, EC, Loss on ignition, Phosphorus, Total Nitrogen, Caution Exchange Capacity, Particle Size distribution, Heavy metal, Ansonia, Fluoride

Half yearly

6. Safety Ventilation, illumination, vibration, emergency access, heat stress, mock drill , safety audit, etc

As per GFR

8.2 EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PLAN:

An onsite emergency in the industry involving hazardous processes or in hazardous

installations is one situation that has potential to cause serious injury or loss of life. It may

cause extensive damage to property and serious disruption in the work area and usually, the

effects are confined to factory or in several departments of factory, premise. An emergency

being when operator at the plant or in charge of storage cannot cope up with a potential

hazardous incident, when may run into an emergency.

8.2.1 On Site Emergency Plan

8.2.1.1 Objectives of Onsite Emergency Plan

A quick and effective response at during an emergency can have tremendous significance on

whether the situation is controlled with little loss or it runs into a major emergency purpose

an emergency plan is to provide basic guidance to the personnel inside the premises for

effectively combating such situations to minimize loss of life, damage to property and loss of

property. An objective of emergency planning is to maximize the resource utilization and

combined efforts towards emergency operations are as follows;





Ü During an Emergency

• To increase thinking accuracy and to reduce thinking time

• To localize the emergency and is possible eliminates it

• To minimize the effects of accident on people and property.

• To take correct remedial measures in the quickest time possible to contain the

incident and the control it with minimum damage.

• To prevent the internal resources and utilize them in the most effective way.

• To arrange rescue and treatment of causalities.

Ü During Normal Time

• To keep the required emergency equipment in stock at right places and ensure the

working condition.

• To keep the concerned personnel fully trained in the use of emergency equipment

• To give immediate warning to the surrounding localities in case of an emergency

situation arising.

• To mobilize transport and medical treatment of the injured.

• To get the help from local community and Government officials to supplement

manpower and resources.

• To provide information to media & Government agencies, preserving records of

situation for subsequent emergency etc.

8.2.2 Off‐site Emergency Plan

• Effective response & Co‐ordination is equally important with the members of the

community residing near by the premises and the people that are not part of the

organization but may get affected in a disaster/accident viz. Contractors, outside small

shops, suppliers, truck drivers, etc. all these must have the basic information about the

process in industry and the safety precautions to be taken. Offsite emergency plan is

made for this purpose.

Ü Working of Fire Protection & Hydrant System

These systems are proposed to protect the plant by means of different fire protection

facilities and consist of hydrant for exterior as well as internal protection of various

Buildings/areas of the plant. Portable extinguishers and hand appliances for extinguishing





small fires in different areas of the plant. Water cum foam monitor to be provided in bulk

fuel storage area and fire water pumps.

• Emergency escapes

The objective of the emergency escape is to escape from the hazardous locations, to the

nearest assembly point or the other safe zone, for rescue and evacuation.

• Assembly Point

Assembly point is location, where persons unconnected with emergency operations

would proceed and await for rescue operation.

• Wind Sock

Wind sock for knowing wind direction indicating would be provided at a suitable location

to visible from many locations. It is proposed to install windsocks over the terrace of

admin office so as to be visible from different locations in the plant.

• Emergency Transport

Emergency ambulance would be stained at the Administrative Office and around the

clock‐driver would be made available for emergency transportation of injured etc.

However, the other vehicles of the company also would be available for emergency

services.

• Emergency communication

There are two kinds of communications system provided.

a. Regular P&T phones with intercom facility

b. Mobile phone

• Warning / Alarm/Communication of Emergency

The emergency would be communicated by operating electrical siren for continuously

for five minutes with high and low pitch mode.

• Emergency Responsibilities

Every member in a safety committee is given specific responsibility in this plan. That

needs to be highlighted & communicated from time to time.

• Mutual aid

While necessary facilities are available and are updated from time to time, sometimes, it

may be necessary to seek external assistance; it may be from the neighboring factories

or from the State Government at the case may be.





• Mock Drill

In spite of detailed training, it may be necessary to try out whether, the plan works out

and will there be any difficulties in execution of such plan. Periodic mock drills must be

arranged. Before undertaking the drill, it would be very much necessary to give

adequate training to all staff members and also information about possible mock drill.

After few pre‐informed mock drills, few un‐informed mock drills would be taken. All this

is to familiarize the employees with the concept and procedures and to see their

response. These schedule and unscheduled mock drills would be conducted during shift

change. Incident controller coordinates this activity.



CHAPTER 9 : ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN


9.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Environmental management is an integrated effort to conserve the environmental functions

through arrangement, usage, development, maintenance, recovery, supervision and control

policies on the environment. M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation has proposed to setup well‐

equipped integrated steel and power plant in village Dhamadka, Anjar in Kutch district,

Gujarat. The unit will be based on modern technology to reduce the pollution potential of

process as well as to power/fuel consumption. The unit will also be utilizing solid waste for

producing valuable consideration material‐Bricks & Cement as well as be recycling whole

process water without taking out of the production system.

9.1 OBJECTIVES OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

In a broad view point of environmental management, regulatory requirement, the objective

of EMP will be;

• To demonstrate proponents commitment to environmental sustainability through the

implementation of the environmental management program.

• To fulfill proponent’s environmental obligations as required by the government.

• To provide environmental documentation & records to enable other related permits to

be obtained as required by government in accordance with regulation.

• To provide guidelines to conduct environmental management activities to ensure that

operations of proposed project will be carried out without disturbing the ecological

balance in the project area.

• To protect project proponent from possible losses in the operation area due to mishaps

& improper operation resulting in loss of resources.

• To provide information and guidelines for the government and local communities to

enable their activity involvement in supporting, over‐seeing and reviewing the

implementation, monitoring and reporting of environmental monitoring programs.

9.1.1 Organizational approach

The organizational approach plays essential role for an effective environmental

management system to help ensure integrated control/minimization/prevention of

identified & predicted impacts. The project proponent plans to use the following

organizational approaches:





• Regulatory updating information to improve the intention and understanding of

regulations and laws so that project activities confirm to laws and regulations as

amended timely.

• Development & updating of Environmental, Health and Safety management system

adequately to ensure efficient implementation of updated pollution control & safety

measures planned & implemented timely.

• Regular budgetary planning & revision thereof for environmental, health and safety

management system operations.

• Transparency in reporting environmental performance & activities.

9.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Identification of the significant impacts has been included in the earlier chapter‐4 for the

various components & activities of the proposed project. With respect to the significant

impacts and the environmental component, details of management plan to mitigate the

adverse impacts of the proposed project are provided in the present Environmental

Management Plan for various stage of proposed as follows.

9.2.1 Responsibility of environment management:

Compliance checking of statutory obligation likes factories Act, Water Act, Air act and solid

waste management and handling rules. Installation of continuous stack monitoring system

and its calibration in major stacks and setting up of the online air quality monitoring stations

will be employed in consultation with Gujarat Pollution control board (GPCB).

The industry will initiate the steps to adopt the following clean technology/ measures to

improve the performance of industry towards production, energy and environment.

Suppression of fugitive emission using water spraying arrangement, processing of the water

containing used oil/ spent oil. Implementation rainwater harvesting, Reduction of

greenhouse gases by reduction in power consumption, promotion of energy optimization

technology including energy audit, to set targets for resources conservation such as raw

material, energy and water consumption to international standards, Up‐gradation in the

monitoring and analysis facilities for air and water pollutants, also to impact and elaborate

the manpower so that realistic data is obtained in the environmental monitoring

laboratories, Improvement of overall houses keeping. An occupational health unit has to be





organized under proposed unit. The proposed measures are to be adopted are; Periodical

medical checkup program, compulsory medical checkup program for risk group vision

testing for crane operators and drivers. Training of workers regarding occupational hazards,

Lung function test of workers exposed to dusts.

The concentration of air pollutants as estimated by air pollution controlling devices of Jay

Bharat Steel Corporation, showed that the air pollutants have been present in much lower

amount the present result, so far as mitigation strategy is concerned, bag filter has been

identified as the most appropriate choice in comparison to impingement separator and

electrostatic precipitators, wet scrubbers can be used for this purpose. ESP, dust collectors

Bag filter collect dust by passing flue gases through a fabric act as a filter. The most

commonly used as the bag filter (99.9% removal) for both high and low concentration of

particles but suitable only for dry and free flowing particles. Their efficiency in removing

toxic metals such as arsenic, cadmium, chromium, nickel and lead is greater than 99%.

9.3 CONTROL OF AIR ENVIRONMENT (AIR POLLUTION)

9.3.1 Air pollution control devices as a part of mitigation strategy

CONTROL OF POINT SOURCE OF EMISSION

• Appropriate Air pollution control assemblies would be installed for each point source of

air pollution.

o Electrostatic Static Precipitator for Boiler and Power Plant

o Pulse Jet Bag filter for induction furnace

o Individual Bag filter for rolling mill, coal crusher, Arc Furnace

• With installation of above mentioned devices, the pollutant concentration at stack

gas outlet would be well within the limit.

• As described in chapter 4 based on scientific modeling, the Ground level

concentration would be maximum 1.1 µg/m3 at 1 km from source

CONTROL OF FUGITIVE EMISSION

• The EMP recommended for fugitive dust minimization during raw materials handling

is described below:





• Raw material stock yard for steel scrap, Ferro alloys, limestone, manganese ore, sand

and coal should have non‐permeable base surfaces and should be stored under

covered sheds.

• Orientating long stock piles in the direction of the prevailing wind will minimize dust

carryover.

• Manage stockpile levels so that the drop from the feed chute to the stock‐pile is

minimized and fugitive releases are evident then water sprays should be used to

suppress fugitive dust.

• Installing wind barrier around stock‐piles will minimize fugitive dust generation. In

order to prevent the spread of dust, wind breaks should be created by natural

terrain, banks of earth or planting of long grass and ever green trees in open areas.

This not only has aesthetic benefits, but such vegetation is able to capture and

absorb dust.

• Covering stockpiles using plastic sheet will minimize dust generation.

• Adequate containment on conveyors and hoppers will minimize dust generation

• Unloading hoppers for dusty materials should either be totally enclosed in a building

equipped with filtered air extraction or the hoppers should be fitted with dust baffle

sand the un loading grids should be coupled to a dust extraction and cleaning

system.

• Use of dust suppression water sprays, with additives such as latex and dry fog type

dust suppression system effectively bring down the dust level.

• High standard of housekeeping is essential for an integrated steel plant. Use of

mobile and stationary vacuum cleaning equipment effectively reduces re‐suspended

dust generation. Central or local vacuum cleaning systems are preferable to washing

down for removal of spillage, since the effects are restricted to one medium and

recycling of spilt material is simplified.

• Cleaning and damping of roads using wiper

• Storage bins and silos should be fitted with filter units to control dust nuisance.

• Reclamation from bins should be via totally enclosed devices.

• Transfer points, vibrating screens, crushers, hoppers, etc should be totally enclosed





and extracted to a bag filter plant.

• The generalized EMP for air pollution minimization (both from point sources and

fugitive sources) during manufacturing process is described below:

• Careful attention should be paid to airflows in ESP, maintenance, corrosion, rapping

and electrical performance. Use three or four field ESP with high‐pulsed voltages and

on‐line cleaning techniques for small volume of flue gas and on‐line cleaning

techniques for large volume like power plant.

• Complete carbonization is important to minimize fume, which may escape collection.

• The recovered dust is not usually suitable for recycling.

• The essential requirement of electric arc furnace is for primary fume control.

Furnaces should employ direct extraction of primary fume through a “fourth hole” in

the furnace roof. The primary fume off‐take should allow the entry of induced air to

ensure complete combustion of any CO released from the furnace. Partial enclosures

or canopies located at likely areas of fume escape can be mounted on, and move

with the furnace roof. Such areas are typically around the electrode ports, the roof

ring seal, over the slagging door and above the tapping spout.

• Post combustion by oxygen injection in electric arc furnace should be used to reduce

the concentration of combustible gases leaving the furnace and facilitate recovery of

some energy value to assist in melting the scrap charge.

• Oxygen and carbon injected into the electric arc furnace for metallurgical reasons

and to provide additional chemical energy Input will give rise to a marked increase in

fume generation. The pollution control device should be designed to handle such

large emissions.

• The primary fume is extracted from the electric arc furnace through a water‐cooled

elbow and duct by the exhaust fan(s) of the abatement plant. The fume may be

cooled by a forced draught cooler, unless dilution air from a roof canopy is used to

reduce the temperature to a satisfactory level for the abatement plant, which is

generally a fabric filter. (Dilution air adds to the power requirements of the fume

extraction system and may increase the mass emission off fume from the filtration

plant). Combustion air enters at the “slip gap” between the furnace elbow and the





water cooling ducting, which combusts CO and allows the furnace to tilt.

• Dust and fume should be minimized by discharging slag from the electric arc furnace

into slag pots, rather than on to the ground.

• Similarly, fumes emitted during process should be captured with a specially designed

hood or lid placed over the ladle, with extraction to a dedicated bag filter system.

Appropriate means should be provided to prevent release of dust to air during the

transfer and storage of reagent powders.

9.4 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

The industrial wastewater (effluent) shall be treated in the ETP and the treated effluent

shall be utilized in dust suppression and gardening. The detailed specifications and the

description of Effluent Treatment plant are delineated in chapter 2.

The other measures for water pollution minimization during raw material handling, is

described below:

1. Run‐off of rain water from all open areas, in particular from coal and other raw

material stocking areas, will contain suspended solids. It should be collected and the

suspended solids removed by settlement at periodic intervals.

2. Arrangementshoulder madeformonitoringthequalityofthestormwaterdischarged from

the storage

3. spilled water / accumulated should be collected and treated.

4. It is important that good house keeping practices are adopted to prevent spillage of

materials, which would ultimately be washed into the drainage system.

9.5 MANAGEMENT OF SOLID HAZARDOUS WASTES

The ETP sludge shall be collected from ETP and stored at designated place having

impervious flooring with leachate collection system and covered shed. It shall be finally

disposed off at approved TSDF site.

Discarded containers of the hazardous raw material shall be disposed off to registered

recyclers

The EMP recommended for solid waste disposal including minimization during

manufacturing process is described, Desulphurization slag is difficult to use or recycled.

Emission can be significant site issue. Operator should minimize slag production, with





improvement program. In the concerned unit, slag from EAF steel production will be

crushed to recover the metallic contents and the residual slag will be used on site to build

roads or noise burners or sold as a road aggregate. Slag granulation processes are generally

preferable to traditional slag cooling method from the environmental view point, because

the processed can be enclosed, less water is consumed and more of the sulfur remains in

the slag rather than being emitted. Fume capture and total condensation should be used

care is required to avoid producing mineral fibers.

Typical EAF slag can be tapped and excavated without significant emission. However, some

secondary slag contain high proportion of lime which give rise to a “falling slag” and may

result in white dust complaints in the vicinity of the steel work. Any secondary steel making

slag which has a propensity to produce significant air borne dust should be tipped in an

enclosure (this could be the furnace building), equipped with dust extraction and abatement

that is necessary to prevent significant release. This is particularly important if tipping take

place close to a sensitive area. Depending on chemical analysis, EAF slag can be recycled as a

civil engineering aggregate or road stone, after an appropriate period of weathering, or it

may be used as an additive by the steel industry.

Fly ash should be collected in dry form from the ESP and stored in bin fitted with bag filters

and fans for cleaning the vent air. Ash from the bins should be evacuated by closed trucks

and given to prospective entrepreneurs for manufacturing brick, cement and other building

materials. Unutilized portion of ash should be converted to slurry and stored in ash pond,

preferably in the form of high concentration slurry. The ash pond should be suitably lined

using compacted clay to make it impervious to leaching as per the norms of central pollution

control board. Bottom ash from the boiler and hopper, the collection bottom ash should be

grounded in clinker crushers and used for bask filling abandoned coal. Surplus ash should be

transferred to the slurry tank and transported by ash slurry pump to ash pond.

Muck/dirt/dust will be generated during the transportation of material; wiping/sweeping

will be carried out regularly. Dust will not be loaded to level higher than the side and tail

boards and carried in vehicles fitted with cover lids or clean tarpaulin cover. The used oil

shall be generated from machineries; which will be managed by disposing off to the

registered recyclers.





9.6 NOISE CONTROL& MANAGEMENT

The EMP recommended for noise pollution minimization during manufacturing process

activity is described below:

1. Use best practicable means “to prevent or minimize noise nuisance. It is

recommended that consideration be given to the use of sonic booths or sound

proofing to control the generation of noise where such activities are being carried

out.In the case of noise “offence to any humans senses” can normally be judged by

the likelihood of complaints, but in some cases it may be possible to reduce noise

emission still further at reasonable costs.

2. The operators should employ basic good practice measures for the control of

noise,including adequate maintenance of any parts of plants or equipment whose

deterioration may give rise to increases in noise (for Examples,bearing, air handling

plant, the building fabric and specific noise attenuation kit associated with plant or

machinery).

3. The operator should employ such other noise control techniques necessary to

ensure that the noise from the installation does not give rise to reasonable caused

for annoyance. The measures recommended below will reduce noise level to

significant extent.

4. Selecting low noise generation equipment

5. Dampening the Vibrations

6. Isolating the noise prone unit from the working personals’ continuous exposure

7. Administrative control (providing earplugs/muffs and ensuring that no plant

personnel are over exposed to noise).

8. Silencers and mufflers in the compressor room, air conditioning unit, DG sets.

9. Regular preventive maintenance of pumps and rotating equipment.

10. Providing appropriate sound absorbing material in a room where both the source

and receiver are present so that the reflecting sound will be absorbed.

11. Steam explosion can be a major cause of noise and vibration complaints. Avoid

steam explosion by careful use of cooling water sprays and preventing uncontrolled

water ingress into slag pits.





12. Dense greenbelt attenuates noise level by 10 dB (A). So, dense green belt should be

developed all along the plant boundary.

9.7 FLY ASH UTILIZATION

As a partial solution to the ash disposal problem, fly ash and bottom ash can be utilized as a

raw material /bending material along with other raw materials in the manufacturing of

various construction products. Apart from this, fly ash also finds its use as aggregate in

many construction activities.

Following are some of the possible areas of utilization of fly ash.

• For manufacturing fly ash based bricks and blocks

• As partial replacement of cement in concrete & mortar

• For manufacturing of cellular light weight concrete building blocks and slabs

• For preparation of base and sub‐base course for road, highways and runways for airport

etc.

• As a fill material in mine stowing

• For manufacturing of light weight aggregates, ceramic product, etc.

• As a filler for refectory bricks

• For recovery of ecospheres and rare metals

• As soil improvement and conditioning agent for agriculture purposes

• As replacement of cement in roller compacted concrete in large & small dams,

Cement in roller the ash utilization of plan will be implemented as per statutory

guidelines of Ministry of Environment & Forests. The Ministry of Environment& forest

has issued an Environmental Notification on 14th September 2006 for effective and time

frame utilization of fly ash and bottom ash generated from coal based thermal power

plant with the following objective:

1. To protect the environment conserve top soil and prevent ash dumping

2. To restrict the excavation of top soil for manufacturing of bricks promote the utilization

of fly ash in the manufacture of building material and construction activities within 100

km radius (approx.) of the power plant.

The Notification stipulates that no person within a radius of 100 km (approx.) from

captive power plant shall manufacture clay brick or tiles or blocks for use in construction





activities, without mixing at least 25% of ash (fly ash) with soil on w/w basis.

Keeping in view the above emerging scenario the following plan has been purposed for

utilization of fly ash and bottom ash, concrete plan for ash utilization will be prepared at

the time of plant commissioning based on the prevailing market demand scenario at the

time.

• Fly ash will be made available for the purpose of manufacturing of ash based product

viz. cement (PPC), concrete blocks, bricks, pavement tiles, panels or any other

construction material or for construction form road, embankment, dams, dykes or for

any other construction activity. This will ensure 10% utilization day 1 and 20% by the end

of the year.

9.7.1 Rain Water Harvesting Structure

Different types of rain water harvesting structures also act as erosion control device to

reserve soil and water. Preservation of vegetation and landscape during preconstruction

and construction period can also act as a measure for protection and preservation of

landscape. In order to ensure the preservation of soil erosion, sediment control and

management of storm water different environment strategies can be adopted. Plan for rain

water harvesting in the zone should be done as shown in Fig.9.1.

The detailed Rainwater harvesting plan has been developed in chapter‐9

Timing of construction: Construction work and erosion control application shall be

scheduled and sequenced during dry water periods when the potential for erosion is the

lowest.

Slope protection techniques: To control erosion are being used when construction during

wet season is unavoidable.

Sedimentation Collection Systems: In charge should minor the site conditions and progress

of work and schedule appropriate timing and sequencing of construction.





FIGURE NO 9.1 PLAN FOR SURFACE RUNOFF RAIN WATER HARVESTING

9.8 OPERATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN

Medical Check‐up of all the employees will be done during the pre‐employment time and

thereafter at periodic intervals. Health records will be maintained for each employee.

Regular health checkup will be carried out. Over a period of time, the health records will

indicate if there is any adverse occupational impact on the employees. The precautionary

measures will be taken to avoid any occupational diseases.

The health status of worker will be regularly monitored under an occupational surveillance

programme. Under this programme, all the employees are subject to detailed medical

examination at the time of employment.The medical examination covers the following tests.

• General Physical Examination and Blood Pressure

• X‐Ray Chest and ECG

• Sputum Examination

• Routine Blood and Urine Examination

• Lung Function Test





9.9 DESIGN OF GREENBELT

Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposes to have a green belt development for the proposed

Steel plant &10 MW CPP. The greenbelt will be developed by considering land of 5.88 Ha,

which is about 33 % of the total (17.84 ha.) area. As far as possible the following guidelines

will be considered in green belt development.

• Shrubs and trees will be planted in encircling rows around the project site

• The short trees will be planted in the first row of the green belt. The tall trees will be

planted in the outer row

• Planting of trees in each row will be in staggered orientation.

• Since the trunks of the tall trees are generally devoid of foliage, it will be useful to have

shrubs in front of the trees so as to give coverage to this portion.

9.9.1 Preparation of pits and preparing them for transfer of seedlings

” Standard pit size will be 1 m x 1 m x 1 m;

” The distance between pits will vary depending on their location;

” The pits will be filled using good soil from nearby agricultural fields (3

” parts) and Farm yard manure (1 part);

” Rhizobium commercial preparation (1 kg/1000 kg);

” BHC powder, if the soil inhabits white ants (Amount variable); and

” The pits will be watered prior to plantation of seedlings.

9.9.2 Tree Plantation at the Proposed Plant Site

Adequate attention will be paid to the plantation of trees, their maintenance and

protection. Jay Bharat has already planted 500 Nos. of sapling of Azadirachtaindica (Neem)

in the periphery of proposed project area. Further, year wise stipulated plantation schedule.

The year wise proposed plantation break‐up is given in the following:





TABLE 9.1 PLANTATION SCHEDULE

YEAR Area (Ha.) Total saplings I 1.2 1200 II 1.2 1200 III 1.2 1200

IV 1.2 1200

9.9.3 Recommended Species for Plantation

Based on climate and soil characteristics of the study area, some species are recommended

for plantation. The climate of the region is extreme where there is extreme heat and soil

temperature is very high in summer. Hence, in order to have a ground cover, some fast

growing species which do not require watering have been recommended for plantation. The

recommended plant species are as presented in Table 9.2

TABLE 9.2LISTS OF RECOMMENDED SPECIES FOR PLANTATION

Plants for outer peripherySr. No.

Scientific name

Common name

Habit Height (m)

Growth rate Evergreen/ Deciduous

Crown Shape

1. Azadirachtai

ndica Neem Tree 20 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading

2. Caesalpinia Pulcherima Sankasura Tree 12 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading

3. Acacia Auriculoformi

VilaitiBava

l Tree 16 Moderate growing Evergreen Oblong

4. Bauhinia variegate

kovindara Tree 5 Moderate growing Deciduous Oblong

5. Cassia fistula Garmala Tree 12 Quick growing Deciduous Round

6. Cassia renigera

Pink Cassia

Tree 10 Quick growing Deciduous Spreading

7. Cassia siamea Kaisid Tree 12 Quick growing Evergreen Oblong

8.

Dalbergiasiso

o Sisam Tree 10

Moderate during 1st yr. and rapid afterwards

Evergreen Round

9. Delonixragia Gulmohar Tree 15 Quick growing Deciduous

Spreading/Fl

at topped

10. Pongamiapin

nata Karanj Tree 5 Quick growing Evergreen Round

11. Peltophorum

pterocarpum copper pod tree

Tall tree

‐ Quick growing Evergreen Oblong/ Round

12.Lantana camara

Ghaneri shrub 3 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading

13.Neriumindicu

m Kanher Shrub 6 Quick growing Evergreen

Oblong/Rou

nd





Plants for ground coverSr. No.

Scientific name

Common name

Habit Height (m)

Growth rate Evergreen/

Deciduous Crown Shape

1 Cynodondact

ylon Durva Creep

er ‐ Slow growing in initial stages Evergreen Spreading

TABLE 9.3 LOCAL PLANTS SPECIES RECOMMENDED FOR GREENBELT

Sr. No

Scientific Name

Common Name

Habit Height (M)

Growth Rate Evergreen/ Deciduous

Crown Shape

1. Acacia nilotica

Baval T 8 Quick Growing Evergreen Spreading

2. Acacia lueucophala

Baval 6‐9 Moderate growing Deciduous Oblong

3. Acacia Senegal

‐‐ Tree 5 Quick Growing Deciduous spreading

4. Azadirachtai

ndica Neem tree

Tree 20 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading

5. Prosopis cineraria

Sami Tree 12 Quick growing Evergreen Spreading

6. Salvadorape

rsica Pilu Tree 6 Moderate growing Evergreen Spreading

7. Albizzia lebbeck

Pilosarasi

o Tree 20 Quick Growing Deciduous Round/Spre

ading 8. Parkinsonia

aculeata Parkinsoni

a Tree 8 Slow Growing Deciduous Spreading

9. Capparis deciduas

Kair Bushy Shrub

/Small Tree

4 Slow growing Xerophyte ‐‐‐

10. Emblicaoffic

inalis Amali Tree 5 Quick Growing Deciduous Oblong

9.10 IMPLEMENTATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

9.10.1 Implementation schedule & responsibility

Environmental management during the construction and operation stages shall be carried‐

out by the authorized personal/or responsible authority & personal as per the management

period mentioned in above sections.

9.10.2 Supervision

Environmental management will/shall be supervised by:

• MD/Directors

• General/Production manager





• Environment & Safety officer/engineer

9.10.3 Reporting

The proponent shall prepare & submit quarterly/half yearly report on implementation of the

environmental management program as described in conditions in various license/

certificate of clearance like EC, NOC, and CC&A etc. as well as in line with the described in

EMP will be submitted to:

• Board of director through MD & General/ Production manager

• Gujarat Pollution Control Board& other authority as required by regulatory provisions

• Other organizations/firms as directed timely by board of directors or

General/Production Manager or Govt. Authority like MoEF, CPCB,GPCB,etc.

9.10.4 Working Procedures and organization

Implementation and supervision of the environmental monitoring programs within the

company will be carried out by the Environmental & safety manager and plant in charge by

reporting to the general/production manager. The organization chart of EHS cell presenting

various level of implementation & operation of EMP of proposed project is show in below.

Figure 9.3

FIGURE NO‐9.2 ORGANIZATION CHART

OPERATORS

EHS Director& MD

FACTORY MANAGER

SAFETY OFFICER

MEDICAL OFFICER

ENVIRONMENT MANAGER

SHIFT SR.CHEMIST

FORMEN JR.CHEMIST

HELPERS

HELPERS





TABLE 9.4 DETAILS OF DUTIES AT EACH STAGE OF THE EHS CELL

Sr. No. Designation Duties Assigned 1 Managing Director Environmental policy & decision making. 2 General Manager Maintaining optimum performance of the production plant,

inspection & regulation of the safety measures. 3 EHS

Manager/executive To have a strong understanding of EMS and ISO standards pertaining to safety and environment Manage, maintain and submit all regulatory compliance documents. Assist plant manager and department heads. To ensure compliance in Occupational Safety and Environmental regulations. To carryout safety trainings.

4 Sr. Technician Maintaining good & uninterrupted functioning of pollution control system, pumps and safety systems & record keeping

5 Operators Regular operations of pollution control systems & record keeping

6 Fire & Safety supervisor

To ensure proper functioning and operation of safety equipment’s, control system as well as implementation of safety within the plant and maintain records of the same

7 Firemen To act as emergency team member during fire Source: JayBharatSteel Corporation.

General prevention and maintenance of pollution control system will be done by the

maintenance department to achieve optimum efficiency of the control equipment and to

maintain the quality of the environment.

9.11 BUDGETARY PROVISIONS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

TABLE 9.5 BUDGETARY PROVISIONS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

Sr. No.

Purpose Existing cost in Rs. Crore

Proposedaddition in Rs. Crore

Proposed total in Rs. Crore

Environmental Protection (Including ETP, APCD etc.)

1 ETP 0.00 0.25 0.25

2 Air pollution control 0.10 2.65 2.75

3 Rain Water harvesting 0.20 0.30 0.50

4 Environment monitoring and management

0.09 0.31 0.40

5 Solid and hazardous waste management

0.24 0.36 0.60

6 Occupation health 0.00 0.25 0.25

7 Green belt & Landscaping 0.15 0.35 0.50

Total 0.78 4.47 5.25





9.12 CSR ACTIVITIES

9.12.1 Project at a glance project highlights

Project Promoter M/s Jay Bharat Steel Corporation Project

To install proposed expansion of MS Steel Ingots/Billets and 10 MW Captive power

Project Cost Estimated cost of the steel project Assessed by the bankers is approximately 90 Cr.

CSR budget 5% of the total project estimated cost Plant Proposed expansion of Steel ingots/billets at village Dhamadka, Dist Kutch, Gujarat.

9.12.2 Socio‐Demographic Highlights of the Project Site:

• According to census 2001, 5624 households are dwelling within the 10 km radius of the

project site.

• The population density of the study area is 0.62.

• The total population in the study area is 24323 out of it 1927 (7.92%) are belonging to

scheduled caste (SC) and 2318 (9.53%) belong to scheduled Tribe. This indicates that the

disadvantages section of the society encompasses 4245 (17.45%) individuals.

• Out of the total population, 12449 (51.18%) are male and 11874(48.82%) are female.

• The overall sex ratio of the study area is 1048 male for 1000 female whereas the sex

ratio among the scheduled caste population is 1063 and scheduled tribe is 1084.

• In the study area, out of 24323 population only 10004 (41.13%) are literate whereas

14319 (58.87%) are illiterate.

• The overall literacy rate in the area is 41.12% which is 24% less than Gujarat literacy rate

(79.35%). and 24% lower than the national literacy rate (64.84%) as per 2001 census.

• Out of total population, 9732 (40.01%) are workers whereas 14591 (59.99%) are non‐

workers.

• Out of the total workers, 7964 (81.83%) are main workers and 1768 (18.17%) are

marginal workers.

• Educational infrastructure poorly exists in the area. Primary schools are available in all

the villages but no other educational institutes are found in the area. Moreover 35 adult

education centers fulfilling the educational need of young adults.

• Health care facilities poorly exist in the study area.





9.12.3 Social commitment

As a corporate citizen of project proponent committed to discharge its responsibilities to

contribute towards the welfare of the community in and around the project affected

villages. At project proponent, corporate social responsibility is prime commitment to

discover innovative solution to the emerging social problems. This commitment helps

project proponent to discover better ways to deliver great values to the society. The

company will work extensively with the communities on broad range of issues, including

health, education, strengthening of community based infrastructures to enhance the quality

of life.

9.12.3.1 Social Investment Focus Areas

• Ensuring primary health care through camp and medical checkups.

• Enhancing school infrastructures to provide quality education to the villagers of the

locality.

• Contributing to culture and sports.

• Electrification of the villages.

• Improvement of Communication facilities in the affected area.

• Supply of Permanent Drinking Water in or around to the villagers of plant.

• Social forestry programme in affected areas.

9.12.4 Construction phase

During construction phase, the proposed project will benefit the region in following manner

Employment Generation

The proposed project will generate employment opportunities to the local populace during

construction phase. An employment for about 266 (includingboth direct & indirect) persons

will be generated by the proposed project during the construction phase, which will last for

48 months from the date of receipt of all the approvals from statutory authorities.

Community Service

JayBharatSteel Corporation will provide necessary facilities like water supply, sewerage, and

medical facility etc. for catering to the needs of the project personnel and their families

during the construction phase.





Transportation

Construction phase of grinding unit, colony and other facilities will involve movement of

material. The material to be transported includes earthwork, concrete, steel and other

materials. Transport of construction materials to the project site will improve transportation

facilities, roads etc.,

So, based on the above, it can be said that the proposed project will result in improving the

infrastructure facilities of the area.

9.12.5 Operational phase

Employment

All attempts will be made to employee locally available skilled personnel from the study

area. In case of non‐availability of skilled persons, people will be hired from outside the

study area. Requirement of un‐skilled / semi‐skilled people will be mostly met from the local

population. The proposed project will empower to the population in the study area and

increase in employment opportunities.

Education

Unskilled people and limited skilled people (depending on availability) will be hired from

local population. So, especially skilled persons expected to come to the study area from

outside are expected to be educated. In addition, some secondary developments like

opening of new schools may take place in view of the increased number of residents due to

the proposed employment generation. These factors will be beneficial to locals residing in

the study area in terms of educational facilities.

Other Benefits

As part of the Corporate Social Responsibility, Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposes to take

steps in developing Education, Health, and Infrastructure development. These will be taken

up as part of social development of the neighboring villages.

9.12.6 Allotment of CSR Budget

Item wise details along with time bound details and socio economic development activities

are presented in Tables 9.6.





TABLE 9.6 BUDGETARY PROVISIONS FOR SOCIAL UPLIFTMENT/YEAR

Sr. No.

Activity Yearly Estimated budgetary

provision(Rs) 1 Arranging free Medical checkup for the people of surrounding area 100000

2 Provision of required instruments in schools 150000 3 Sponsoring sports/religious activities in the study area. 250000 4 Provision of street light 100000 5 Donations to locally arranged programs 125000

6 Tree plantation and management in the surrounding villages 175000 7 Construction/Maintenance of pucca road in the village 100000

Total 1000000

The table above indicates that total Rs. 10 Lac has been allotted annually for community

Upliftment activities. The head wise segregation of the budget shows that the financial

allocation made under seven head including provision of free medical camp, provision of

instrument in schools, sponsoring sports activities, electrification of villages, contributing in

local initiatives, tree plantation, enhancing the existing communication facilities.

A. Institutional Arrangement:

Institutional arrangements have an important bearing on the successful implementation of

projects. There will be multidimensional approach to corporate social responsibilities (CSR)

initiatives ensuring the partnership with the Local administrator, professionals and NGOs,

community leaders and members.

Jay Bharat Steel Corporation will designed its CSR activities based on the suggestion on the

report and proper budget reallocation should be made for each sectors for proper

implementation of the project. The overall implementation of the program will be monitor

carefully with space for revisiting and redesign of its project activities. Emphasis will be

given in developing and establishing network with the local authority in local administration,

health, education etc. and design its program with the partnership of the local authority in

order to avoid the replication of intervention and proper impact.

NGOs in the area will be identified and entrusted the responsibilities of identification of

members, group formation and training so that livelihood initiatives could be strengthen

and run smoothly. Community leaders and the members of the community will be involve in

the process effectively so that they will develop ownership over the program rather than

considering themselves as beneficiaries of the program.



CHAPTER 10 : PROJECT BENEFITS


10.0 PROJECT BENEFITS

H The project is for meeting the captive requirements of steel, because steel is

traditionally considered the backbone of national economic development. It is a major

input into sector which supports economic growth such as infrastructure, machinery,

power and railways, as well as being important as for fast growing sectors, in the

particular automobile and consumer durables.

H Being a core sector, steel industry tracks the overall economic growth in the long term.

Also, steel demand, being derived from the other sectors like automobiles, consumer

durables and infrastructure, its fortune is dependent on the growth of these user

industries.

H The rapidly growing infrastructural development and a robust domestic demand have

helped the Indian Steel Sector to progress by leaps and bounds in the last few years.

According to the estimates by the planning commission of India, incremental demand

for steel over the next five years will be about 40 million ton in the infrastructure sector

solely. As far the overall domestic demand growth is concerned, world steel association

predicts it to be at about 5.9% in 2013 and scaling up to 7 % per cent by 2014.this opens

large doors of opportunity for the industry.

H The success story of Indian steel industry is backed by all round excellent performance

in term of growth parameter and meeting fast and varying customer requirement in

automobile, construction, and capital good and consumer durable segments. The

industry has been receiving all the essential ingredients required for dynamics growth. If

there are no major deviations, India may well be world’s second largest steel producer

by 2015‐16 as compared to its present 4thrank, according to Earnest &Young report.

H The minor construction work and commissioning will require man‐power and resources.

The unit has proposed to employ local contractual labor force for these phases. Hence,



CHAPTER 10 : PROJECT BENEFITS


with the inception, project may lead to slight growth in the social status & improvement

of the quality of life in the surrounding area.

H Considering the size of the project, the existing manpower requirement during

construction and commissioning will be 250 to 300 contractual persons. It is advised to

give priority to the local people. It may increase the growth and improvement life of

local people in the surrounding area.

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. ANNEXURE I: TOR COPY

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AI‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

TOR COPY

Draft EIA ReSurvey No 4

ANNEXURE II

ANACON

NAGPUR,

eport for M/s. Jay405/3,406,407 Vi

I: SITE SPECIFIC GR



REEN BELT PHOTO

RIES PVT. LTDHTRA

G


OGRAPHS

D.

reen be


lt photo


ographs


t

AII‐1


ANNEXURE

ANACON

NAGPUR,

Near Pro

Lunva Vi


E III: BASE LIN E


oject Site

llage


E SAMPLING PH

RIES PVT. LTDHTRA

A


HOTOGRAPHS

D.

Air Monito


oring Photo


ographs


Dudha

t

AIII‐1

Morgar Vil

i Village

llage


ANNEXURE

ANACON

NAGPUR,

Project S

Dudhai V


E III: BASE LIN E


Site

Village


E SAMPLING PH

RIES PVT. LTDHTRA


HOTOGRAPHS

D.

Soil Samp


ling Photo


ographs


Lunva

Morg

t

AIII‐2

Village

gar Village


ANNEXURE

ANACON

NAGPUR,

Dud


E III: BASE LIN E


Project

hai Village


E SAMPLING PH

RIES PVT. LTDHTRA

Groun

t Site


HOTOGRAPHS

D.

nd Water S


Sampling P


Photograp


phs

Amrap

Lunv

t

AIII‐3

par Village

va Village


ANNEXURE

ANACON

NAGPUR,

Amrapa


E III: BASE LIN E


r Lake


E SAMPLING PH

RIES PVT. LTDHTRA


HOTOGRAPHS

D.

Surface W


Water Sam


mpling


Tappar D

t

AIII‐4

Dam

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. ANNEXURE IV: AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AIV‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

(AAQ-1) Plant Area

Date PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NO2

µg/m 3 µg/m 3 µg/m 3 µg/m 3

3.12.2012 31 26 15.34 14

4.12.2012 29.7 24 8.1 16

10.12.2012 48 23.4 17.5 13.41

11.12.2012 62.2 19.8 9 11.8

17.12.2012 34 20.26 10.23 24.41

18.12.2012 47 24 12.41 26.12

24.12.2012 31 26.4 10.11 16

25.12.2012 39 29.1 16.1 17

1.1.2013 51 28.6 17.31 13.54

2.1.2013 56 23.8 11.21 22.1

8.1.2013 60 22.41 12 24.3

9.1.2013 56 34.8 16 26.7

15.1.2013 44 31.4 14 27.1

16.1.2013 60 30.7 15.5 12.3

22.1.2013 42 32.06 9 13.4

23.1.2013 48 28 8.8 18

4.2.2013 61 21 8.56 19

5.2.2013 53 28 11.5 16

11.2.2013 45 19.9 16.4 28.4

12.2.2013 42 23 14 13.8

18.2.2013 58 26 13 12.6

19.2.2013 57 34 10.6 18.2

25.2.2013 59 31 17.3 19.2

26.2.2013 53 32 12 17

Min 29.7 19.8 8.1 11.8

Max 62.2 34.8 17.5 28.4

Avg 48.6 26.7 12.7 18.3

98th 61.4 34.1 17.2 26.7



AAQ-2-Morgar Village



3.12.2012 38.41 16.4 9.12 9.4

4.12.2012 40.1 18.1 15.41 14.1

10.12.2012 60.8 30.12 17.2 15.2

11.12.2012 40.1 34 12.3 16.21

17.12.2012 42.31 18 15 22

18.12.2012 49 30 12.2 21.3

24.12.2012 52 26 16.7 19.4

25.12.2012 51 31 13.4 13.7

1.1.2013 53 32 8.3 22

2.1.2013 47 30.41 11.7 13.5

8.1.2013 44 25 16.4 15.1

9.1.2013 48 31 17.2 15.4

15.1.2013 45 21 9.12 17.04

16.1.2013 41 22.4 10.1 20

22.1.2013 27.6 16.9 12.7 15.6

23.1.2013 51 32 8.5 16.4

4.2.2013 47 18.2 16.1 15.9

5.2.2013 47 17.9 17 16.8

11.2.2013 53 30 10.9 21.45

12.2.2013 49 17.4 11.4 23.5

18.2.2013 59.8 31 8.7 16.7

19.2.2013 46 29 15.2 17

25.2.2013 48 25 9.1 14

26.2.2013 47 22 12.8 16.5

Min 27.6 16.4 8.3 9.4

Max 60.8 34.0 17.2 23.5

Avg 47.0 25.2 12.8 17.0

98th 60.3 33.7 17.2 23.1



(AAQ-3) -Krishn Nagar



3.12.2012 51 19 8 10.3

4.12.2012 47 18.6 9.1 12.1

10.12.2012 44 31 10.4 14

11.12.2012 57 28 15.12 13

17.12.2012 57.8 29 16.8 15

18.12.2012 54 24 12.9 13.6

24.12.2012 49 26 10.6 16

25.12.2012 52 32 8.1 20

1.1.2013 49 33.41 7.5 19

2.1.2013 40 31 12.4 11

8.1.2013 41 32 13.6 18

9.1.2013 51 30 14 17.6

15.1.2013 50 27 8.2 19.3

16.1.2013 54 25 12 20.2

22.1.2013 50 19 8.2 21.3

23.1.2013 49 18.9 13.8 21

4.2.2013 55 20 11.3 22.5

5.2.2013 56 21.4 10.4 17

11.2.2013 57 25.7 8.2 19

12.2.2013 38 20.4 7.9 15.3

18.2.2013 49 30 8.9 16.2

19.2.2013 46 34.2 14.1 17.9

25.2.2013 39 19.5 13.4 19

26.2.2013 26.9 19.2 15.8 21

Min 26.9 18.6 7.5 10.3

Max 57.8 34.2 16.8 22.5

Avg 48.4 25.6 11.3 17.1

98th 56.4 33.1 16.3 21.9



(AAQ-4)-Lunva village



3.12.2012 58 21 12.1 16.9

4.12.2012 36.7 28.7 6.9 20.3

10.12.2012 47 19 9.1 19.2

11.12.2012 54 30 11.3 19.4

17.12.2012 48 26.4 12.3 21.7

18.12.2012 50 28.9 16 19.8

24.12.2012 55 30.6 8.4 15.3

25.12.2012 59.7 31 14 17.4

1.1.2013 53 23 9.2 13.9

2.1.2013 57 29 14 15.2

8.1.2013 51 25 16 9.6

9.1.2013 48 22.4 18.5 14.4

15.1.2013 49 26 9.3 10.4

16.1.2013 47 25 9.7 12.3

22.1.2013 51 24.7 8.3 18

23.1.2013 28.5 28 8.9 12.3

4.2.2013 48 28 7.9 18

5.2.2013 41 22 9.3 11.7

11.2.2013 44 17.6 11.5 16.7

12.2.2013 38 19.1 16.4 15.2

18.2.2013 34 20.2 15.5 16.3

19.2.2013 39 30 15.6 20

25.2.2013 42 24 17 19

26.2.2013 40 23 14 15.2

Min 28.5 17.6 6.9 9.6

Max 59.7 31.0 18.5 21.7

Avg 46.6 25.1 12.1 16.2

98th 57.7 30.8 18.0 21.1



(AAQ-5)- Pashuda village



5.12.2012 43 21 8.9 12.3

6.12.2012 49 26 7.1 16.4

12.12.2012 56.8 22 10.1 13.4

13.12.2012 54.7 16.2 11.3 11.6

19.12.2012 42 19 12.4 18.6

20.12.2012 43 29.9 14.6 18

26.12.2012 30 24 9.4 19

27.12.2012 29.7 26 11.5 22.3

3.1.2013 43 28 12.4 21

4.1.2013 51 19.1 16.2 22.4

10.1.2013 47 19 17.1 19

11.1.2013 49 24 8.45 16

17.1.2013 50 28 9.6 14

18.1.2013 51 24 10.3 13

24.1.2013 44 23 11.5 18

25.1.2013 34 27 13.4 21

6.2.2013 48 26 14.2 20.4

7.2.2013 43 29 9.6 22.8

13.2.2013 47 30.4 15.4 21

14.2.2013 31 28 16.7 18

20.2.2013 36 24 12.4 13.2

21.2.2013 43 27.6 16.4 14.3

27.2.2013 48 29 12.8 15.1

28.2.2013 38 27 13.6 15.9

Min 29.7 16.2 7.1 11.6

Max 56.8 30.4 17.1 22.8

Avg 43.8 24.9 12.3 17.4

98th 55.8 30.2 16.9 21.8



(AAQ-6)- Tapar Dam



5.12.2012 48 16.1 8.1 13.6

6.12.2012 53.7 18 7.6 11.5

12.12.2012 51 20 7.2 14

13.12.2012 52 22 10.1 15.3

19.12.2012 49 24 11.2 16.8

20.12.2012 43 28.3 12.7 21

26.12.2012 36 25.47 9.6 22.8

27.12.2012 47 19 12.4 17

3.1.2013 38 22 13.7 19

4.1.2013 41 20.1 9.4 16

10.1.2013 52.8 15 8.9 13.5

11.1.2013 25.1 26.44 10.1 16.7

17.1.2013 30 21 7.8 13.2

18.1.2013 35 23 13.4 24.6

24.1.2013 44 16.7 12.5 18

25.1.2013 49 24 7.8 19

6.2.2013 42 27.7 8.1 21.8

7.2.2013 52.7 28.2 12.1 14

13.2.2013 49 25 15.2 19

14.2.2013 47 27 14.8 20

20.2.2013 49 25 15.1 21

21.2.2013 47 28 14 14

27.2.2013 43 26.8 13.1 12.4

28.2.2013 49 24.7 12.8 13.4

Min 25.1 15.0 7.2 11.5

Max 53.7 28.3 15.2 24.6

Avg 44.7 23.1 11.2 17.0

98th 53.6 27.7 14.7 22.8



(AAQ-7)-Dudhai village



5.12.2012 41 19 14.1 18.4

6.12.2012 34 21.4 16.2 19.4

12.12.2012 45 24.1 18.5 16.4

13.12.2012 42 17.1 8.8 20.5

19.12.2012 49 23 7.6 9.1

20.12.2012 51 24.6 10.1 10.9

26.12.2012 41 28.1 11.6 11.8

27.12.2012 58.7 24.1 12.3 10.4

3.1.2013 53 26.3 8.5 20.8

4.1.2013 27.5 30 9.1 19.4

10.1.2013 32 31.5 9.4 8.5

11.1.2013 49 24.7 8.9 18.4

17.1.2013 30 19.1 16.6 17.3

18.1.2013 49 21 17.1 19

24.1.2013 45 25.7 15.7 18.6

25.1.2013 38 19.1 16.9 13.4

6.2.2013 49 29.4 8.7 15.3

7.2.2013 35 21.4 18.2 18.1

13.2.2013 41 28.7 8.9 19.3

14.2.2013 49 24.8 15 15.9

20.2.2013 47 28.7 14.2 18.1

21.2.2013 34 19.2 13.9 20.2

27.2.2013 30 18.6 12.7 19.8

28.2.2013 28 20.4 15.7 20.7

Min 27.5 17.1 7.6 8.5

Max 58.7 31.5 18.5 20.8

Avg. 41.6 23.8 12.9 16.7

98th 55.8 30.7 17.5 20.2



(AAQ-8)-Amarpar village



5.12.2012 44 24.1 7.1 14.3

6.12.2012 49 23.6 8 12.5

12.12.2012 54.8 18 7.9 14.9

13.12.2012 48 14.8 7.6 12

19.12.2012 51 28.1 8.2 15.3

20.12.2012 53.9 24.6 7.8 13.1

26.12.2012 53 30.2 8.1 22.3

27.12.2012 38 19.1 7.9 21.9

3.1.2013 48 14.9 7.4 20.3

4.1.2013 47 15.4 6.9 18.6

10.1.2013 39 16.9 17.4 22.4

11.1.2013 49 24.3 14.2 23.4

17.1.2013 53 17.9 16.9 23.5

18.1.2013 40 18.4 13.7 19.4

24.1.2013 36 26.4 19.6 13.1

25.1.2013 49 28.6 7.1 16.9

6.2.2013 29.1 18.1 12.4 14.6

7.2.2013 53 17.4 13.1 13.1

13.2.2013 48 30.1 7.9 17.2

14.2.2013 54 18.3 8.1 13.1

20.2.2013 52 29.1 7.8 20

21.2.2013 47 30.1 10.7 13.1

27.2.2013 48 27.6 11.3 16.3

28.2.2013 31 26.9 16.1 13.1

Min 29.1 14.8 6.9 12.0

Max 54.8 30.2 19.6 23.5

Avg 46.5 22.6 10.6 16.9

98th 54.5 30.2 18.6 22.1


ANNEXUREQUANTITY

ANACON

NAGPUR,


E V: APPLICATIOF NARMADA



ON FOR LETTEWATER

RIES PVT. LTDHTRA


ER OF GWIL/AL

D.


LOCATION LE T


TTER FOR ADDI


ITIONAL

t

AV‐1


ANNEXUREQUANTITY

ANACON

NAGPUR,


E V: APPLICATIOF NARMADA



ON FOR LETTEWATER

RIES PVT. LTDHTRA


ER OF GWIL/AL

D.


LOCATION LE T


TTER FOR ADDI


ITIONAL

t

AV‐2

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. ANNEXURE VI- NOC COPY FOR EXISTING PRODUCT

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AVI‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. ANNEXURE VII : ENV. STANDARD

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AVII‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

ENV. STANDARD

DB

A

A

N

Draft EIA Report for MBhuj Bhachau Road,

ANNEXURE VIII :EXI

ANACON LABORNAGPUR, MAHA

M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch

ISTING PLANT PHOT

RATORIES PVT. LRASHTRA

Corporation proposeh, Gujarat.

TOGRAPHS,PLANT

TD.

d to install integrated

LAYOUT AND GPS

Existing Pl

steel and power Plan

COORDINATE OF S

lant Photo

nt at Survey No 405/3

SITE SPECIFIC

ographs

3,406,407 Village Dha

amadka,

AVIII‐1

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. ANNEXURE VIII :EXISTING PLANT PHOTOGRAPHS,PLANT LAYOUT AND GPS COORDINATE OF SITE SPECIFIC

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AVIII‐2 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

GPS Coordinate of Site Specific

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. ANNEXURE VIII :EXISTING PLANT PHOTOGRAPHS,PLANT LAYOUT AND GPS COORDINATE OF SITE SPECIFIC

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AVIII‐3 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

Plant Layout

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. ANNEXURE IX : SOCIO-ECONOMIC DETAILS

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AIX‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

TOWN_VILL

NAME No_HH TOT_P TOT_M TOT_F P_SC M_SC F_SC P_ST M_ST F_ST P_LIT M_LIT F_LIT P_ILL M_ILL F_ILL

00024700 Bhujpar 127 582 288 294 168 82 86 98 49 49 220 146 74 362 142 220

00027300 Budharmor 362 1545 816 729 61 29 32 42 21 21 607 409 198 938 407 531

00027400 Dhamadka 553 2569 1353 1216 197 109 88 100 52 48 1184 766 418 1385 587 798

00027500 Dudhai 745 3416 1658 1758 340 166 174 204 105 99 1598 901 697 1818 757 1061

1787 8112 4115 3997 766 386 380 444 227 217 3609 2222 1387 4503 1893 2610

00022100 Kharoi 366 1642 857 785 138 68 70 308 169 139 717 444 273 925 413 512

00022400 Morgar 263 1179 618 561 133 71 62 259 142 117 479 300 179 700 318 382

00022500 Amardi 285 1150 530 620 133 66 67 80 37 43 585 322 263 565 208 357

00022600 Kabrau 294 1323 655 668 28 14 14 161 81 80 625 362 263 698 293 405

00022700 Kumbhardi 217 882 449 433 107 53 54 0 0 0 464 276 188 418 173 245

00024500 Lunva 349 1371 713 658 43 24 19 440 229 211 424 290 134 947 423 524

TOWN_VILL

NAME TOT WORK _

P

TOT_ WORK_

M

TOT_ WORK_F

MAIN WORK_P

MAIN WORK_

M

MAIN WORK_

F

MARGWORK_P

MARG WORK_M

MARGWORK

_F

NON_ WORK_P

NON_

WORK_M

NON_

WORK_F

00024700 Bhujpar 231 136 95 157 132 25 74 4 70 351 152 199

00027300 Budharmor 665 477 188 655 475 180 10 2 8 880 339 541

00027400 Dhamadka 1000 733 267 778 729 49 222 4 218 1569 620 949

00027500 Dudhai 1234 873 361 1108 856 252 126 17 109 2182 785 1397

3130 2219 911 2698 2192 506 432 27 405 4982 1896 3086

Demographical Details of Study Area




TOWN_VILL

NAME TOT WORK _

P

TOT_ WORK_

M

TOT_ WORK_F

MAIN WORK_P

MAIN WORK_

M

MAIN WORK_

F

MARGWORK_P

MARG WORK_M

MARGWORK

_F

NON_ WORK_P

NON_

WORK_M

NON_

WORK_F

00022100 Kharoi 701 471 230 602 469 133 99 2 97 941 386 555

00022400 Morgar 442 330 112 415 313 102 27 17 10 737 288 449

00022500 Amardi 520 308 212 266 250 16 254 58 196 630 222 408

00022600 Kabrau 471 380 91 346 329 17 125 51 74 852 275 577

00022700 Kumbhardi 378 269 109 343 258 85 35 11 24 504 180 324

00024500 Lunva 686 399 287 681 399 282 5 0 5 685 314 371

TOWN_VILL NAME No_HH TOT_P TOT_M TOT_F P_SC M_SC F_SC P_ST M_ST F_ST P_LIT M_LIT F_LIT P_ILL M_ILL F_ILL

00024600 Sukhpar 271 1159 613 546 113 65 48 55 29 26 577 328 249 582 285 297

00026900 Khirsara 301 1309 700 609 46 27 19 0 0 0 223 185 38 1086 515 571

00027000 Devisar 18 77 45 32 0 0 0 15 10 5 21 18 3 56 27 29

00027200 Amrapar 120 553 291 262 91 43 48 23 11 12 152 113 39 401 178 223

00027600 Khengarpar 20 99 54 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 66 39 27 33 15 18

00028000 Kotda 398 1682 872 810 166 95 71 78 31 47 708 456 252 974 416 558

00028100 Pashuda 146 597 303 294 38 19 19 67 33 34 239 150 89 358 153 205

00028200 Tapar 669 2692 1376 1316 125 62 63 388 207 181 1058 694 364 1634 682 952

00036500 Raiyada 120 496 258 238 0 0 0 0 0 0 57 51 6 439 207 232

3837 16211 8334 7877 1161 607 554 1874 979 895 6395 4028 2367 9816 4306 5510

5624 24323 12449 11874 1927 993 934 2318 1206 1112 10004 6250 3754 14319 6199 8120




TOWN_VILL

NAME TOT_ WORK_P

TOT_ WORK_M

TOT_ WORK_F

MAINWORK_P

MAINWORK_M

MAINWORK_F

MARGWORK_P

MARGWORK_M

MARGWORK_F

NON_WORK_P

NON_WORK_M

NON_WORK_F

00024600 Sukhpar 336 304 32 304 286 18 32 18 14 823 309 514

00026900 Khirsara 564 406 158 521 406 115 43 0 43 745 294 451

00027000 Devisar 37 26 11 37 26 11 0 0 0 40 19 21

00027200 Amrapar 254 142 112 145 141 4 109 1 108 299 149 150

00027600 Khengarpar

50 24 26 50 24 26 0 0 0 49 30 19

00028000 Kotda 703 466 237 630 459 171 73 7 66 979 406 573

00028100 Pashuda 335 179 156 259 178 81 76 1 75 262 124 138

00028200 Tapar 945 750 195 555 511 44 390 239 151 1747 626 1121

00036500 Raiyada 180 164 16 112 103 9 68 61 7 316 94 222

6602 4618 1984 5266 4152 1114 1336 466 870 9609 3716 5893

9732 6837 2895 7964 6344 1620 1768 493 1275 14591 5612 8979




Land Use Pattern in the study Area

Name Total Area Hacter Forest land in Ha Irrigated in Ha

Un‐irrigated in Ha Cultivable Waste in Ha Area Not Available for cultivation in Ha

0 – 5 KM Dhamadka 3101.65 270 44.5 2010.86 101.94 674.35

Budhar Mora 1559.13 ‐‐ 50.74 953.02 87.33 468.04

Dudhai 3272.6 ‐‐ 3.52 2257.7 520.37 491.01

Bhujpar 568.56 ‐‐ 26.8 424.93 4.11 112.72

Sub total 8501.94 270 125.56 5646.51 713.75 1746.12

6 – 10 km Pashuda 1911.6 ‐ ‐ 1262.22 121.05 528.33

Tapar 5440.78 ‐ ‐ 1576.03 141.81 3722.94

Kotda 1778.37 ‐ ‐ 1082.46 51.96 643.55

Khengarpar 338.58 ‐ 7.11 217.24 51.06 63.17

Khirsara 2824.97 1139.22 ‐ 1329.41 106.17 250.17

Devisar 2202.76 ‐‐ 0.32 755.6 78.81 1368.03

Amarapar 910.45 ‐‐ ‐‐ 554.26 5754 298.65

Sukhpar 2439.15 ‐‐ 30.15 1154.72 15.26 1239.02

Lunva 2484.25 ‐‐ 131.3 1338.02 82.91 932.02

Kabrau 2072.96 ‐‐ 195.62 1335.63 441.26 100.45

Amardi 1036.25 ‐‐ 115.66 737.51 59.74 123.34

Morgar 2683.1 152.87 57.14 1981.8 94.38 396.91

Kumbharadi 1655.83 ‐‐ 92.24 1193.62 298.49 64.48

Kharoi 2352.98 ‐ 105.16 1850.13 141.67 256.02

Raiyada ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ Sub total 30132.03 1292.09 734.7 16368.65 7438.57 9987.08

Grand total 38633.97 1562.09 860.26 22015.16 8152.32 11733.2

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat.

ANNEXURE X : COMPLIANCE OF CREP

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AX‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

COMPLIANCE OF CREP

Sr. No. Details Compliance 0 Coke Oven Plants

‐To meet the parameters PLD (%leaking colours),PLL(%leaking lids),PLO(%leaking off take), of the notified standard sunder EPA within three years by December 2005). Industry will submit time bound action plan and PER Charta long with the Bank Guarantee for the implementation or the time. ‐Torebuildatleast40%ofthecokeovenbatteriesinnext10years ( by December2012.).

Not Applicable

1 Steel Melting Shop

Fugitive missions Toreduce30%byMarch2004and100%by March2008( including insta l lat ion of secondary de‐dusting facilities).

Considered 100% reduction in design itself

2 Blast Furnace

* Direct injectofreducingagents‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ byJune2013.

Not Applicable

3 Solid Waste/Hazardous Waste Management

Utilization of Steel/Melting shop(SMS)/Blast Furnace(BF) Slag as per the following schedule: * By2004‐ 70%

* By2006–80%and

* By2007–100%.

Hazardous Wastes

‐ Charge of tar sludge/ETPsludgetoCokeOvenbyJune2003. ‐ Inventorization of the Hazardous waste as per

Hazardous Waste(M& H), Rules,

1989as amended in

2000 and implementationoftheRulesbyDec.2003. (tarsludge, acidsludge, waste Lubricating goil and type fuel fall sin the categoryofHazardouswaste).

Complied for Melting shop

Complied for ETP sludge




4 Water Conservation/Water Pollution

‐ To reduce specific water consumption to 5

m3/t for long products

and8m3/tforflatproductsbyDecember2005. ‐ Tope rate theCo‐BP effluent reatment plant

efficiently to achieve the notified fluent discharge standards.–by June 2003.

Complied

5 InstallationofContinuousstackmonitoringsystem&itscalibration

inmajor stacksandsettingupoftheonlineambientairqualitymonit

oringstationsby June2005.

Considered

6 Tooperatetheexistingpollutioncontrolequipmentefficientlyandto

keepproper recordofrunhours,failuretimeandefficiencywithimmediateeffect.

CompliancereportinthisregardbesubmittedtoCPCB/SPCB everythree months

Considered

7 ToimplementtherecommendationsofLifeCycleAssessment(LCA) studysponsoredbyMoEFbyDecember2003.

Considered

8 Theindustrywillinitiatethestepsto adoptthefollowingcleantechnologies measures to improve the performance of industrytowardsproduction,energy landenvironment. ‐ EnergyrecoveryoftopBlastFurnace(BF)gas.

‐ UseofTar‐freerunnerlinings.

‐ De‐

dustingofCasthouseattapholes,runners,skimm

ersladleand chargingpoints. ‐

Suppressionoffugitiveemissionsusingnit

rogengasorotherinertgas ‐ Tostudythepossibilityofslag

andflyashtransportationbacktothe abandonedmines,totheabandonedmines,tofill

upthecavitiesthroughemptyrailwaywagonswhi

letheyreturnback totheminesand its implementation.

‐ Processing of the waste containing flux &ferrous wastesthrough wasterecyclingplant.

‐ Toimplementrainwaterharvesting

Will be complied




‐ ReductionGreenHouseGasesby:

* Reductioninpowerconsumption

* Useofby–

productsgasesforpowergeneration

*

PromotionofEnergyOptimisatio

ntechnologyincludingenergy/ audit ‐

TosetargetsforResourceConservati

onsuchasRawmaterial,energy

‐ Up‐gradationinthemonitoringandanalysisfacilitiesf

orairandwater pollution.Alsotoimpartelaboratetrainingtothe

manpower so that realistic data is‐ ToImproveoverallhousekeeping.

THERMALPOWERPLANTS

1 ImplementationofEnvironmentalStandards(emission&effluent)

innon‐ compliant*PowerPlants(31&27) ‐ Submissionofactionplan :

‐ Placementoforderfor

Pollutionofcontrolequipment :

‐ Installation&commission :

2005.

Will be complied

2 For existing thermal power plants, a feasibility study whall becarried out by Central Electricity Authority (CEA) to examinepossibility to reduce

theparticulate matter emissions

to 100

mg/Nm3.Thestudiesshallalsosuggesttheroadmaptome

et100mg/Nm3.Thestudiesshallalsosuggesttheroadmap

tomeet100mg/Nm3 wherever foundfeasible.CEAshallsubmitthereportbyMarch2004.

Not Applicable




3 New / expansion power projects to be accorded environmentalclearanceonorafter1.4.1.2003shallmeet

thelimitof100mg/Nm3forparticulatematter.

Complied

4 DevelopmentofSO2 &NOx emissionstandardsfor coalbased plantsbyDecember2003. ‐

New/expansionpowerprojectsshallmeett

helimitofSO2 &NOxw.e.f. 1.1.2005. ‐ WxistingpowerplantsshallmeetthelimitofSO2&

NOX w.e.f.1.1.2006.

Will be complied

5 Install/activateopacitymeters/continuousmonitoring systeminalltheunitsby December31,2004withpropercalibrationsystem

Will be noted

6 Developmentofguidelines/standardsformearuryandothertoxich

eavy metals emissionsbyDecember2003.

Will be noted

7 Reviewofstackheightrequirementandguidelinesforpowerplants

based on micrometeorologicaldatabyJune2003.

Will be complied

8 ImplementationofuseofbeneficiatedcoalasperGOI Notification:Powerplantswillsignfuelsupplyagreement(FSA)tomeett

herequirement asperthematrixpreparedbyCEAforcomplianceofthenotification

asshortterm measure. Options/mechanismforsettingupofcoalwasheriesasalo

ngtermmeasure * CoalIndiawillupitsownwashery

* SateElectricityBoardtosetupitsownwashery

* CoalIndiatoaskprivateentrepreneurs

* SEBstoselectaprivate entrepreneurtosetup awasherynearpit‐head installationofcoalbeneficiationplant

Will be complied

9 Power plantswillindicatetheir requirement of abandoned coalminesforashdisposal&CoalIndia/MOCshallprovidethelistofa

bandonedminesby June2003toCEA.

Will be noted

10 Powerplantswillprovidedryashtotheusersoutsidethepremiseso

r uninterruptedaccesstotheuserswithinsixmonths.

Will be noted

11 PowerPlantsshouldprovidedryflyashfreeofcosttotheusers Will be noted 12 State P.W.Ds/ construction &development agencies shall

alsoadhere tothespecifications/Schedulesof CPWD for ash basedproducts utilization MoEF will take up the

Will be noted




matter with StateGovernments.

13 (i)New plants to be accorded environmentalclearance on or

after

1.04.2003shalladoptdryflyashextractionordrydisposals

ystemor Medium (35‐40%)ashconcentrationslurrydisposalsystemorLeanpha

sewithhundred percentashwatere‐circulationsystemdependinguponsitespecific environmentalsituation. (ii)

Existingplantsshalladoptanyofthesystemsmenti

onedin

13(i) byDecember2004.

Will be noted

14 Flyash Mission shall prepare guidelines/manuals

Will be Complied

15 Newplantsshallpromoteadoptionofcleancoalandcleanpowerge

neration technologies * UnitswillsubmitbankguaranteetorespectiveSPCB

Will be Complied


ANNEXURE X : COAL LINKAGE DOCUMENT

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AXI‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No 405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat. ANNEXURE XII : NOC COMPLIANCE

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AXII‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA



CTE.43157 as per letter no : PC/CCA-KUTCH-936/GPCB ID

32727/91906 dated 17.09.2011 valid up to 02/07/2016

Sr. No DESCRIPTION STATUS 1. NOC for settling up of an industrial plant /ativites at Plot No: 107/P,

Bhuj-Bhachau High way, Village : Dhamadka, Taluka : Anjar , Dist kutch-370110 valid up to 02/07/2016

2. The list of the proposal products to be manufacture is as below.No NAME OF PRODUCTS Quantity MT/Month1 STEEL INGOTS &

BILLETS 2298 MT/MONTH

SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS: 1. You shall obtain N.A permission from competent authority before commencing your project activities. 2. You shall strictly comply with the condition mentioned in your undertaking submitted to this office dated 24/05/2011 that you shall not never cross the aforesaid production capacity I,e.2,298 MT/MONTH. 3. You shall not carry out any activities which attracts the applicability of EC notification issue on 14th September 2006 and amended thereof. 4. Unloading of raw material by trucks or wagon shall be carried out with proper care to avoid dropping of the material from the height. 5. No ground water shall be used for the project coming under dark zone without permission of competent authority.

Will be Complied

3. CONDITIONS UNDER THE WATER ACT: 3.1 The quantity of the industrial effluent from the manufacturing process and

other ancillary industrial operation shall be NIL and the generated wastewater quantity shall be utilized belt development de-dusting and sprinkling activity.

Will be Complied

3.2 The quantity of domestic wastewater(sewage) shall not exceed 7.50 KL/day Will be Complied3.3 Sewage shall be disposed of through septic tank/soak pit system. 3.4 The unit shall provide metering facility at the inlet and outlet of ETP as well

as RO plant and maintain the record as per water cess rules-1977Will be Complied

4. CONDITION UNDER THE AIR ACT: 4.1 The following shall be used as fuel in boiler/furnace/ heater respectively.

Sr. No. Fuel Quantity1. diesel 30 liter/hour

Will be Complied

4.2 The flue gas emission through stack attached to boiler/furnace/heater shall conform to the following standards:

STACK NO.

STACK ATTACHED TO

STACK HEIGHT IN METER

AIR POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES

PARAMETER

PERMISIBLE LIMIT

1

Induction Furnace

30 Pulse jet bag filter SPM

S02 NOX

150 mg /NM3 100 ppm 50 ppm 2

D.G set (380 KVA)

10

Will be Complied

4.3 There shall be no process gas emission through various stacks/vent of reactors process vessel or any other ancillary operation.

Will be Complied

4.4 The concentration of the following parameter in the ambient air within the premises of the industry shall not exceed the specified hereunder. NO PARAMETER TIME CONCENTRATION

Will be Complied



WEIGHTED AVERAGE

AMBIENT AIR IN µG/M3

1 SOX Annual 24 hour

50 80

2 NOX Annual 24 hour

40 80

3 Particular matter PM10

Annual 24 hour

60 100

4 Particular matter PM2.5

Annual 24 hour

40 60

4.5 The applicant shall provide portholes, ladder, platform etc at chimney(s) for monitoring the air emissions and the same shall be open for inspection to/and for use of Board’s staff. The chimney(s) vents attached to various sources of emission shall be designed by numbers such as S-l, S-2, etc. and these shall be painted/ displayed to facilitate identification.

Will be Complied

4.6 The industry shall take adequate measures for control of noise levels from its own sources within the premises so as to maintain ambient air quality standards in respect of noise to less than 75dB(a) during day time and70 dB (A) during night time. Daytime is reckoned in between 6a.m. and 10 p.m. and nighttime is reckoned between 10 p.m. and 6 a.m.

Will be Complied

5. CONDITIONS UNDER HAZARDOUS WASTE: 5.1 The applicant shall provide temporary storage facilities for each type

of hazardous waste as per hazardous waste (Management , handling, transboundary movement) Rules,2008 as amended from time to time.

Will be Complied

5.2 The Applicant shall be obtain membership of common TSDF site for disposal hazardous Waste as categorized in hazardous waste (Management , handling, transboundary movement) Rules,2008 as amended from time to time.

Will be Complied

5.3 The Applicant shall provide temporary storage facility for hazardous waste and maintain the record for generation and disposal for each hazardous waste.

Will be Complied

6.

GENERAL CONDITIONS

6.1 Unite shall develop green belt within premises as per the GPCB guidelines. However, if the adequate land is not available within premises , the unit shall tie up with local agencies like gram panchayat ,school, social forestry office etc. for the plantation at suitable open land in nearby location and submit an action plan of plantation for next three year to GPCB.

Will be Complied

6.2 Plantation should be started along with constitution activity. For plantation within the premises a spacing of at least 4m x 4m shall be kept i.e. to say 250 plants per acre shall be plantation. For plantation out side the premises a spacing of 2m x 2m will be kept i.e. to say 1000 plants per acre.

Will be Complied

6.3 Adequate plantation shall be carried out all periphery of the industrial premises in such a way that the density of plantation is at last 1000 trees per acre of land and a green belt of 10 meters width is developed

Will be Complied

6.4 The applicant shall have to submit the returns in prescribe from Will be Complied



regarding water consumption and shall have to make payment of water cess to the board under the water cess Act- 1977

6.5 In case of change of ownership/management the name address of the new owner/partner/proprietor should immediately be intimated to the board.

Will be Complied

6.6 The applicant shall however , not within the prior consent of the board bring into use any new or altered outlet for the discharge of effluent or gaseous emission or sewage waste from the proposed industrial plant.rhe applicant is required to make application to this board for this purpose in the prescribed from under the provisions of the water Act -1974 , the Air Act-1981 and the environment(protaction) Act-1986.

Will be Complied

6.7 The applicant also company with the general conditions as per annexure-1 attached herewith (NO.1 to 38) (whichever applicable)

Will be Complied

6.8 The overall noise level in the around plant area shall be kept well within the standards by providing noise control measures including engineering control like acoustic insulation hoods, silencer, enclosures etc on all source of noise generation. The ambient noise level shall conform to the standards prescribed under the environment (protection) Act, 1986 & Rules.

Compliance assured

6.9 The concentration of noise in ambient air within the premises of industrial unit shall not exceed following levels Between 6 A.M and 10 P.M : 75 dB(A) Between 10 P.M and 6 A.M : 70 dB(A)

Compliance assured

6.10 Applicant is required to comply with the manufacturing, storage and import of hazardous chemicals Rules -1989 framed under the Environment (Protection ) Act- 1986.

Compliance assured

6.11 If it is established by any competent authority that the damage is caused due to their industrial activities to any person or his property. In that case they are obliged to pay the compensation as determined by the competent authority.

Compliance assured

6.12 Applicant shall have to comply with all the guidelines/ directive issued / being issued by MoEF/CPCB/DoEF from time to time.

Complied

6.13 Applicant shall not use/withdraw ground water either during construction and/or operation phase.

--

6.14 Environmental cell shall be setup and shall be responsible for the total Environmental Management.

6.15 Monitoring in respect to Air, water, noise level shall be carried out and results shall be submitted to this board on quarterly basis.



ANNEXURE XIII : HYDROGEOLOGICAL REPORT

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AXIII‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA

SEPTEMBER 2 1 , 2 0 1 3

A Report on

Geo Hydrological & Survey & Investigation for Feasibility Study to Construct Recharge Structure

in & around Plant Site of

M/s JAYBHARAT Steel Corporation (Survey No405/3,406 & 407 )

Village: Dhamadak ,Taluka: Anjar District: Kutchh-370240

forw arded to:

Excel Enviro Tech

( Environm enta l Auditor and Consultant ) TF- 2 , Third Floor, Sun House, Old H igh Cour t Lane,

Nr. I ncom e tax Ashram Road, Ahm edabad - 3 8 0 0 0 9 Tele Fax + 9 1 - 7 9 -2 7 5 4 2 2 1 9 , Contact : 9 7 2 2 0 0 9 5 7 2

w w w .excelenviro.com

From:

Ground Water Consultancy Services

I -202,Nanddham Apartm ents, Nr. Vasna Barrage, Vasna, Ahm edabad - 380007

Phone: 079-26612613, Mobile: 9824132132 Email: kedar_8143@ yahoo.co.in

July1 0 , 2 0 1 3





CONTENTS

1. Introduction to the Study Area

2. Geology & Geo Hydrology

3. Recharge into Ground Water Aquifer

4. Conclusions and Recommendations

LIST OF TABLES

Sr. No. Title Table No. 1 Rainfall Distribution 1

2 Litho Logical Log of near by Bore Holes of Site Area Village Bhimasar, Taluka Anjar District: Kutch

2 (A)

3 Litho Logical Log of near by Bore Holes of Site Area Village:Moti Chirai, Taluka Anjar District: Kutch

2 (B)

4 Total Water Requirement for Existing and Proposed Project 3 5 Waste Water generation 4 6 Land distribution at site 5 7 Estimation on Runoff 6

8 Size of Recharge pond 7 9 Specifications for large diameter well around tube well 8 10 Information of Wells in and around Plant of M/s Jay bharat steel

Corporation at Village Dhamadaka , Taluka Anjar , District Kutchh 9

11 Chemical Analysis of Water Sample collected from wells in and around Plant of M/s Jay bharat steel Corporation at Village Dhamadaka , Taluka Anjar ,District Kutchh 10‐7‐2013

10

LIST OF PLATES

Sr No Title Plate No 1 Map showing Location of Kutchh & Gujarat I 2 Map showing Location of Anjar, Bachau and Gandhidham

Taluka II

3 Google Map Showing drainage around Village Varsana III 4 Map Showing Location of Site Area IV 5 Map Showing Plant Area V 6 Map Showing Sardar Sarovar Project Canal Command VI 7 Geological Map of Gujarat VII 8 Hydrograph of Piezometer at Bhimasar VIII 9 Various Recharge Structures IX 10 Hypothetical Recharge Percolation Well X

ANNEXURE

Sr No Title Annexure 1 Site Photograph I





A Report on Geo Hydrological & Survey & Investigation for Feasibility study to construct

recharge structure in & around Plant Site of M/s Jay bharat Steel Corporation (Survey

No405/3, 406&407 ) at Village : Dhamadaka ,Taluka: Anjar, District: Kutchh‐370240

Chapter I

INTRODUCTION

Preamble

M/s Jay bharat Steel Corporation is having its industry located in (Survey No405/3,406&407

)at Village: Dhamadaka ,Taluka: Anjar. District: Kutchh‐370240 ,Gujarat

It is in process of manufacturing TMT,bars ,angles,Channels MS Steel ingots , billets and

also Silicon Manganese and Power

The Source of Water supply for this industry is from surface water through Narmada Main

canal managed by Gujarat Water Infrastructure Ltd.

The Site is around 16 km from Bachau and around 27 km from Gandhidham and 33 Km

from Kandla Port. It falls in Sardar Sarovar Project Canal Command. It is well connected by

road through state transport buses and other private vehicles. The location of Site has been

given in Plate I, II, III,IV ,V & VI.

The hydro geologic setting plays an important role in determining the degree to which

surface water can enter into aquifer and can alter the ground water quality in local aquifer

system. The type of soils and their ability to absorb the salts in recharge water and the

hydraulic properties of the aquifer contribute to or reduce salt concentrations.

Measures are needed to reduce the probability /or possibility of any pollution into

underneath aquifer through appropriate planning with due emphasis on sustainable

development in tune with ecological balance.

The management of this company is very keen to take the measures that are needed to use

surface water economically and judiciously. And take step to recharge rain water through

appropriate planning, & and put emphasis on sustainable development in tune with

ecological balance.





The alert and foresighted Engineers & Management of M/s Jaybharat Steel Corporation

(Survey No405/3,406&407 ) at Village : ,Taluka: Anjar, District: Kutchh‐370240 has

entrusted the work pertaining to Geo hydrological Survey & Investigation in and around

this plant site to M/s Ground Water Consultancy Services, Ahmedabad.

Objective of Present Study

The objective of present study is to cover the defined scope as given below

1. Information on presence of aquifer(s) within 1 km of the project boundaries

management plan for recharging the aquifer.

2. Incorporate the source of surface/ground water level, site (GPS), cation, anion (Ion

chromatograph), metal trace element (as above) chemical analysis for water. If

surface water is used from river, rainfall, discharge rate, quantity, drainage and

distance from project site.

3. Ground water analysis with bore well data, litho‐logs, drawdown and recovery tests

to quantify the area and volume of aquifer and its management.

4. Ground water modelling showing the pathways of the pollutants should be included.

5. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site should be submitted to

harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground

water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh

water and reduce the water requirement from other sources. Rain water harvesting

and ground water recharge structures may also be constructed outside the plant

premises in consultation with local Gram Panchayat and Village Heads to augment

the ground water level. Incorporation of water harvesting plan for the project is

necessary, if source of water is bore well.

6. A note on the impact of drawl of water on the nearby River during lean season.

7. A scheme for rainwater harvesting has to be put in place. Incorporation of water

harvesting plan for the project is necessary, if source of water is bore well. Efforts

should be made to make use of rain water harvested. If needed, capacity of the

reservoir should be enhanced to meet the maximum water requirement. Only

balance water requirement should be met from other sources.





Objective of Present Study

• Conducting Geo Hydrological Survey & Investigation in and around the study area

of Project site for having information on Geological Features and assessing Geo

Hydrological status of the Study area” • Rain water harvesting plan for premises 6000 m2

• Site visit for proposed project site

• preparation of report

This report presents Hydro Geological and Geo Hydrological condition in and around the

present plant site of ( M/s Jay bharat Steel Corporation in (Survey No405/3,406&407 ) at

Village: Dhamadaka ,Taluka: Anjar District: Kutchh‐370240 for checking Feasibility Study

for Constructing Recharge Structure.

During this study, earlier work done in and around the present site area on various aspects

such as Geological, Geo Hydrological and Hydro Geological was reviewed. And thereafter,

reconnaissance survey was conducted for collecting the relevant information on general

Geo Hydrological conditions.

Relevant information on ground water conditions with special emphasis on surface water &

ground water flow direction and flow pattern in and around the present study area was

studied.

Water samples were collected and analyzed to have an idea about the present water

quality. Collected & interpreted information was used to Conduct feasibility study for

constructing recharge structure in and around this plant site . Sites were selected for

recharge structure construction. Specification for recharge structure construction and its

maintenance were recommended. Technical Report was prepared covering most of these

aspects with Conclusions and Recommendations.

Climate

The climate of this area is dry and pleasant. During the monsoon the humidity of air in

general is high with relative humidity exceeding 80 percent in coastal region over 65 in the





interior. The evaporation and evapotranspiration losses in and around study area is fairly

high. i.e. 3000 mm /year.

The Rain fall

The Rain fall is erratic both with respect space ,depth and time .Rainfall occurs in stormy

pattern resulting in the bulk of the runoff flowing down The study area receives rainfall

mainly from the south west monsoon Average Rainfall data for Anjar, Bachau& and

Gandhidham for the period 2003 to 2012 (10Year) is 479.03mm and rainfall distribution

which is given in Table 1 below:

TABLE 1 RAINFALL DISTRIBUTION

Period Anjar Bachau Total Rainfall in

mm Average Rainfall

in mm 2003to 2012 Rainfall In mm Rainfall In mm

Mean 471.6 487.0 958.06/2 479.03

From the study of such observation of rainfall data that since last 10 year there is

increase in rainfall distribution in and around this area.

Soil

In and around the study area the land is mostly plain where the soil is sandy with clay and

alluvial loam in some parts. The soil at this site is sandy and loamy.

Physiography

The study area comprises of coastal area which is characterized by sand mounds and narrow

plain strip The study area is almost plain with mild slope. The streams flowing in and

around the study area are ephermal and in general flows from North to South.





CHAPTER II GEOLOGY & GROUND WATER CONDITIONS

Geology

Regionally , the oldest Geological rocks exposed in Kutchh are the sedimentary rocks of

middle Jurassic age existing uncomfortably upon these rocks are infratrappean beds

containing soft, coarsely stratified clayey and sandy rocks.Deccan Trap rest conformably

over the Mesozoic or the infratrppean beds. The lava After the Deccan Trap eruption were

concluded, thin gypsies alluminious clayey sediments, on the fringes of the lava flows were

deposited. These have been laterised and are the main source of Bauxite. The tertiary rocks

crops out all along the coast of Kachchh. The older marine rocks are more or less confined to

the west and south‐west while the younger fresh rocks occur in south and east.

To meet this growing water demand for domestic, agriculture and industrial water supply

has imposed stress on ground water development, which has been well reflected in the

water level behavior in this district. The general geology has been given in Plate VII.

Geology in and around the study area is Alluvium. It is underlain by Weathered shale ,

sandstone The litho logical logs of near by piezometer is given in the Table 2 (A) and Table 2

(B).

TABLE 2 (A) LITHO LOGICAL LOG OF NEAR BY BORE HOLES OF SITE AREA VILLAGE BHIMASAR, TALUKA ANJAR ,DISTRICT: KUTCH

Depth To Lithology Colour Texture Shape 4 Top Soil Brown medium Rounded

11 Sand reddish white medium to coarse Rounded

15 Clay Brown fine to medium Rounded

21 Sand pale white fine to medium Rounded

25 Clay light brown fine to medium Rounded

39 Sand reddish brown fine to medium rounded to subrounded

66 Clay with Sandstone Yellow Fine Rounded





TABLE 2 (B) LITHO LOGICAL LOG OF NEAR BY BORE HOLES OF SITE AREA VILLAGE:MOTI CHORAI, TALUKA ANJAR ,DISTRICT: KUTCH

Depth To Lithology Colour Texture 5 Topsoil Red medium to coarse 10 Sand + Clay White Coarse

16 Clay Yellow fine to medium 35 Sand + clay red and white coarse to medium 42 Clay with Sand Yellow fine to medium

Ground Water Conditions

The ground water in and around the study area is mainly confined in unconfined and semi

confined conditions. In general the ground water quality is inferior (saline), except at places

where such wells are located near surface water bodies are yielding relatively good quality

water. The information on wells in and around study area is given in Table 9.

It is pertinent to mentioned that unconfined aquifer in this area are practically dried up.

Available information to gather with reduced water table map of CGWB was studied to

visualize the ground water flow pattern and flow direction on regional scale. From the

observation of this map it is evident that in general, ground water flow follows surface

topography.

It is pertinent to mention that the topography control the both surface as well as Sub

surface Ground water flow path.

The surface water drains are oriented from North‐East to South –West Direction . The

ground water flow direction is also from North‐East to South –West Direction or more

precisely from North to South .

Discharge is Varying from 250 LP M to 550 LP M

Depth of Tube Well is Varying from 120 m to 180 m BGL

Depth of Well is Varying from 35 .00 m to 48 m BGL

Horse Power required for pumping is Varying from 12.5 HP to 20 HP





TDS in Tube Well is Varying from 1350 PPM To 2670 PPM

GWRDC is monitoring observation wells and piezometer through the state to monitor

water level fluctuation , water level behavior & water quality variation. It also monitor such

observation wells and piezometers. From the study of the hydrograph of one such

piezometer at Bhimasar in Anjar Taluka of Kutchh, it is observed that water level

profile of unconfined aquifer shows rising trend but water level profile of confined aquifer

shows falling trend .


To assess the present status on ground water quality, during the investigation water

samples were collected and subjected to chemical analysis. The results of chemical analysis

of water samples are given in Table – 10.

The Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) content in ground water ranges from 640 ppm (Morgar) to

1540 ppm (Dhamadaka).

The Total Bicarbonate (HCO3) content in ground water ranges from 207ppm (Bhujpar) 429

ppm (Dudhai Juni)

The Total Sulphate (SO4) content in ground water ranges from 45 ppm (Morgar) to 127 ppm

(Dhamadaka).

The Total Nitrate (NO3) content in ground water ranges from 4.10 PPM(Dudhai juni) to 8.90

(Sukhpar)

The Total Fluoride (F) content in ground water ranges from 1.60ppm(Bhujpar) to 1.95

ppm(Dudhai)

The High bicarbonate content in ground water may be indicative of hydraulic connection

between upper and lower aquifer or rather semi‐confined conditions.





Ground Water Resources Estimates of Anjar Taluka

From the ground water resources point of view Anjar and Bachau Taluka of Kutch district

falls in over exploited category. The present stage of ground water development is more

than 100 (%).

( As per the Report of Committee on Estimation of Ground Water Resources and Irrigation

Potential of ground water in Gujarat, Narmada Water Resources Water Supply and Kalpasar

Department, Government of Gujarat on March 2002 )

The part of study area falls in Narmada canal command Plate.

Source of Water There are two main water sources of water around the study area viz.

(a) Surface water / Narmada canal water,

(b) Ground water.

Water requirement at project site

Total water consumption in KL/Day, considering the Existing and Proposed is given in Table

3 below

TABLE 3 TOTAL WATER REQUIREMENT FOR EXISTING AND PROPOSED PROJECT

Serial no

Category Existing Water

Consumption KL/Day

Proposed Water Consumption KL/Day

Total Water

Consumption KL/Day

I Domestic 10 10 20 2 Industrial a Cooling 25 160 185 b Boiler NIL 10 10 c Others NIL 7 7 d Dm Plant NIL 13 13 7 Total

Industrial + Domestic 35 200 235

Total daily water requirement at project site will be around 8 kilo liter per day





Assuming 300 working days, total yearly water requirement at project site will be around

2400 kiloliter per year

Waste Water generation at project site

It is given in Table 4 below:

TABLE 4 WASTE WATER GENERATION

Serial no

CATEGORY Existing Waste Water Generation KL/Day

Proposed Waste Water Generation KL/Day

Total Waste Water Generation KL/Day

I DOMESTIC 7.5 4.0 11.5 2 INDUSTRIAL a COOLING NIL NIL NIL b BOILER NIL 2 2.0 c OTHERS NIL NIL NIL d DM PLANT NIL 13 13 7 Total Industrial+Domestic 7.5 19 26.5 Total Industrial NIL 15.0 15.0

Total daily waste water generation at project site will be around 2.5 kiloliter per day

Assuming 300 working days, total yearly waste water generation water requirement at

project site will be around 750 kiloliter per year

Treated waste water will be finally evaporated in evaporation pan and thus the plant

will maintain zero discharge

Waste Water Management

The wastewater will be mainly generated from the boiler and DM Plant.(15KLD) The

wastewater generated will be treated in ETP and treated effluent is used for gardening and

dust suppression.

Sewage (Domestic wastewater)

Domestic wastewater 11.5 KLD will be generated from Domestic activities. Domestic waste

water will be disposed of through septic tank /soak pit





CHAPTER III RECHARGE IN TO GROUND WATER AQUIFER

• As mentioned above From the ground water resources point of view Anjar and

Bachau Taluka of Kutch district falls in over exploited category. The present stage of

ground water development is more than 100 (%).

• Anjar and Bachau Talukas of Katch District are hard core drought prone area where

occurrence of droughts is frequent.

• The rain fall is erratic both with respect space, depth and time.

• Rainfall occurs in stormy pattern that results in the bulk of the runoff flowing down

the sea or the Rann.

• About 94.07% of annual rainfall is received during monsoon season.

• Water requires to be treated as precious commodity. It is the single resources

limiting the economic development of the region.

Therefore water should be used economically and judiciously. There is scope to conserve

water through constructing recharge structures to recharge aquifer and rain water

harvesting structure at feasible site. Experience indicates that it can yields good results.

Rainfall is one of the important Parameters that contribute water for recharging ground

water aquifer and therefore estimation on likely Runoff quantum (Runoff Volume) is of

prime importance.

The Rainfall Data for the period 2003 to 2012 (10Year) as given in Table 1 and Land Use

data as given Table 6 below is used in estimating the likely Runoff quantum . The Average

Rainfall for Last 10 year for the Period 2003 ‐2012 is 479.03

From the study it is inferred that there is availability of underground space for storing

recharged water if given opportunity. Opportunities may be created by planning for

rainwater harvesting. The application of concept of availability and opportunity has been

given thought. Recharged Rain water after mixing with aquifer water may likely to dilute and

improve the aquifer water quality.

Land distribution at site

It is given in Table 5





TABLE 5 LAND DISTRIBUTION AT SITE

Serial no Area

Land Use Land Area in Sq m Existing Survey Number 407

Land Area in Sq Proposed Survey Number 405/406

I Product Storage area 2000 4000 2 plant and machinery area 8000 18000 3 Raw material Storage area 3000 5000 4 Green Belt Area 3000 4000 5 utility 3000 3000 6 Road and Undeveloped Area 1000 1000 7 Undeveloped Area 1690 1664 TOTAL PLANT AREA 21690.98 36664.24

Estimation on Runoff

Using the information on land use, average rainfall and applicable likely runoff from

plant site area and is given in norms are used in Table 6 estimating is

TABLE 6 ESTIMATION ON RUNOFF

Serial No

Land Use Land Area in Sq m Proposed Survey Number 407

Runoff Coefficient

Rainfall in mm

Runoff Volume in m3

1 Product Storage area 4000 0.85 479 1628.600

2 Plant and machinery area

18000 0.85 479 7328.700

3 Raw material Storage area

5000 0.85 479 2035.757

4 Green Belt Area 4000 0.40 479 766.4000 5 utility 3000 0.80 479 1149.600 6 Road and Undeveloped

Area 1000 0.40 479 191.600

7 Undeveloped Area 1664 0.4 479 317.820

TOTAL PLANT AREA 36664.24 13418.48

Planning for Alternative dependable water supply source through ground water

pumping during extreme emergency

Water requirement of this plant is met through surface water supply through Narmada

Main Canal. However, during the maintenance period of this canal, disruption in continuous

water supply is likely which may likely to hamper production. As stand by dependable water

supply source during extreme emergency ground water pumping is given consideration





At this plant site, 235 Kiloliter water per day(KLD) is required which is supplied from

Narmada Canal.

Out of this, per day 15 Kiloliter treated water (KLD)is reused for gardening.

Assuming 300 working days, yearly surface water requirement is around 70500 m3 per year

Yearly treated waste water available for reuse in gardening, considering 300 working days,

will be 4500 m3 per year.

It is assumed 30 days maintenance period of canal/and or disruption phase of surface water

supply during each year.

During the maintenance period of canal/and or disruption phase of surface water supply,

as a stand by dependable water supply source ground water pumping is planned .

The required water supply from ground water source during this period of 30 days will be

=235 m3/day x30 day= 7050 m3

/year

Treated waste water available for reuse in gardening, during these 30 working days, will be

450 m3 per year .

The Net required water supply from ground water source during this period of 30 days will

be = 7050 m3/year‐450 m3

/year=6600 . m3/year

It is pertinent to mention that as this Taluka fall in over exploited category, the required

recharge through rainwater harvesting into ground water aquifer will be 2.0 times the

ground water quantity pumped

( i.e. The required recharge during the phase of Ground Water pumped during the

maintenance period of canal/and or disruption phase of surface water supply will be

=6600x2=13200 m3/year).

The Runoff Volume from entire plant area is 13418.48 m3

The available total Runoff Volume from Plant & Machinery AND

Product Storage area is 7328.7 m3 and

1628.6 m3 respectively totaling 8957.30 m3

The required run off water for recharging ground water aquifer during the maintenance

period of canal/and or disruption phase of surface water supply for compensating Ground

Water pumping will be =6600 m3/year x2=13200 m3

/year)





Although the Runoff Volume from entire plant area is 13418.48 m3,we should not use this

for recharging aquifer to reduce/restrict the probability or possibility of any degree of

pollution

Now the volume available in the form of roof top which can be used for recharging

aquifer is 8957.30 m3

13200 m3‐8957.30 m3=4042.7 m3

For making available additional 4042.7 m3 pollution free run off water , the additional

required area will be around 5 to 6 hector

Looking to the availability of open verging Land around present plant site and land use,

by acquiring additional land of 5 to 6 hector ,having access to this quantity of runoff water

to recharge more quantity of rainwater into underneath ground water aquifer by

constructing suitable recharge structure as described and shown in Plate IX & X

Rain Water Harvesting

It is the deliberate attempt for collecting /concentrating, storing and distributing rain water.

The method is site specific and need based. Catchments includes Roof top, Compounds and

pavements, land surface , Impervious / semi pervious surface etc.

At this plant site This can be done by Recharge Structures like

• Roof Top Harvesting

• Recharge Pond and/or

• Recharge Pit

• Recharge Well,

If plan properly and designed scientifically it may aid in improving the recharge availability

and opportunity. Recharge structure construction work apparently appears to be expensive

but it is not so .

Even this roof top rain water harvesting structure is planned to store rainwater which can

be subsequently used for daily consumption as it is of good quality.

Various recharge structures are shown in Plate IX

Recharge Pond





TABLE 7 SIZE OF RECHARGE POND

Serial No Length

in m Width in m

Depth in m

Volume of water likely to be stored in m3

1 10 10 5 500

2 15 15 5 1125

Looking to the surface soil condition and sub‐surface aquifer characteristics, it is better to

construct Recharge pond to have better recharge rate because rate of recharge is a function

of surface area, time and depth of water column. Evaporation is optimum at 2 m water

column depth.By increasing the pond depth (>2m) thee is there is likely reduction in

evaporation. Therefore, depth of recharge pond should be more than 2 mtr reduce the

evaporation

Percolation Well

Based on the local hydro geological conditions Large Diameter Recharge Percolation Well

appears to be feasible. The figure of Recharge well is given in Plate X and Specifications for

Recharge well construction are given below in Table 8

TABLE 8 SPECIFICATIONS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WELL AROUND TUBE WELL

1 Diameter 3 to 3.5 m 2 Depth 6 to 8 m below ground level 3 Diameter of Horizontal bores in the sides

of large diameter well 4 or 6 inch (100mmto 150mm)

4 Length of Horizontal bores 1 to 3 meter





CHAPTER IV CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

• M/s Jay bharat Steel Corporation is having its industry located in (Survey

No405/3,406&407 )at Village: Dhamadaka ,Taluka: Anjar. District: Kutchh‐370240 ,Gujarat

It is in process of manufacturing TMT,bars ,angles,Channels MS Steel ingots , billets and

also Silicon Manganese and Power

• There are two main water sources of water around the study area viz.(i)Surface

water / Narmada canal water,(ii)Ground water. But the Source of Water supply for this

industry is from surface water through Narmada Main canal managed by Gujarat Water

Infrastructure Ltd.

• The Site is around 16 km from Bachau and around 27 km from Gandhidham and 33

Km from Kandla Port. A part of study area falls in Sardar Sarovar Project Canal Command.

• The hydro geologic setting plays an important role in determining the degree to

which surface water can enter into aquifer and can alter the ground water quality in local

aquifer system. The type of soils and their ability to absorb the salts in recharge water and

the hydraulic properties of the aquifer contribute to or reduce salt concentrations.

• Measures are needed to reduce the probability /or possibility of any pollution into

underneath aquifer through appropriate planning with due emphasis on sustainable

development in tune with ecological balance.

• The climate of this area is dry and pleasant. During the monsoon the humidity of air

in general is high with relative humidity exceeding 80 percent in coastal region over 65 in

the interior. The evaporation and evapotranspiration losses in and around study area is

fairly high. i.e. 3000 mm /year.

• The Rain fall is erratic both with respect space ,depth and time .Rainfall occurs in

stormy pattern resulting in the bulk of the runoff flowing down The Average Rainfall data

for Anjar, and Bachau for the period 2003 to ‐2012 (10Year) is 479.03 mm

• The Soil in and around the study area the land is mostly plain where the soil is sandy

with clay and alluvial loam in some parts. The soil at this site is sandy and loamy.





• Physio graphically the study area comprises of area with undulating ground which is

characterized by mild slopes. The streams flowing in and around the study area are

ephermal and in general flows from North to South.

• The oldest Geological rocks exposed in Kutchh are the sedimentary rocks of middle

Jurassic age existing uncomfortably upon these rocks are infratrappean beds containing soft,

coarsely stratified clayey and sandy rocks. Deccan Trap rest conformably over the Mesozoic

or the infratrppean beds. The lava After the Deccan Trap eruption were concluded, thin

gypsies alluminious clayey sediments, on the fringes of the lava flows were deposited. These

have been laterised and are the main source of Bauxite. The tertiary rocks crops out all

along the coast of Kachchh.

• The older marine rocks are more or less confined to the west and south‐west while

the younger fresh rocks occur in south and east.

• Geology in and around the study area is Alluvium. It is underlain by Weathered shale

, sandstone

• Ground Water Conditions The ground water in and around the study area is mainly

confined in unconfined and semi confined conditions. It is pertinent to mentioned that

unconfined aquifer in this area are practically dried up.

• Available information to gather with reduced water table map of CGWB was studied

to visualize the ground water flow pattern and flow direction on regional scale. From the

observation of this map it is evident that in general, ground water flow follows surface

topography.

• The surface water drains are oriented from North‐East to South –West Direction .

The ground water flow direction is also from North‐East to South –West Direction or

more precisely from North to South . The latest information on ground watre indicates that

Ü Discharge is Varying from 250 LP M to 550 LP M

Ü Depth of Tube Well is Varying from 120 m to 180 m BGL

Ü Depth of Well is Varying from 35 .00 m to 48 m BGL

Ü Horse Power required for pumping is Varying from 12.5 HP to 20 HP

Ü TDS in Tube Well is Varying from 1350 PPM To 2670 PPM





Ü GWRDC is monitoring observation wells and piezometer throught the state to

monitor water level fluctuation , water level behavior & water quality variation. It

also monitor such observation wells and piezometer in Anjar Taluka of Kutchh

District. From the study of the hydrograph it is observed that water level profile

shows falling trend .

Ü From the Chemical Analysis of ground water samples indicates

Ü The Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) content in ground water ranges from 640 ppm

(Morgar) to 1540 ppm (Dhamadaka).

Ü The Total Bicarbonate (HCO3) content in ground water ranges from 207ppm

(Bhagpar) 429 ppm (Dudhai Juni)

Ü The Total Sulphate (SO4) content in ground water ranges from 45 ppm (Morgar) to

127 ppm (Dhamadaka).

Ü The Total Nitrate (NO3) content in ground water ranges from 4.10 PPM(Dudhasi juni)

to 8.90 (Sukhpar)

Ü The Total Fluoride (F) content in ground water ranges from 1.60ppm(Bhojpar) to

1.95 ppm(Dudhai)

Ü The High bicarbonate content in ground water may be indicative of hydraulic

connection between upper and lower aquifer or rather semi‐confined conditions.

• From the ground water resources point of view Anjar and Bachau Taluka of Kutch

district falls in over exploited category. The present stage of ground water development is

more than 100 (%).

• Existing Water Consumption is 35 Kl/Day and Proposed Water Consumption is200

Kl/Day And Total Water Consumption completion of the project would be 235 Kl/Day

• The wastewater will be mainly generated from the boiler and DM Plant.(15KLD) The

wastewater generated will be treatedin ETP and treated effluent is used for gardening and

dust suppression.

• Domestic wastewater 11.5 KLD will be generated from Domestic activities. Domestic

waste water will be disposed of through septic tank /soak pit

• The estimated effective runoff likely to be available for recharging ground water

aquifer using applicable norms of runoff coefficient based on the land use, is given in above

• The Runoff Volume from entire plant area is 13418.48 m3





• The available total Runoff Volume from Plant & Machinery AND • Product Storage area is 7328.7 m3

and 1628.6 m3 r

espectively totaling 8957.30 m3

• The required run off water for recharging ground water aquifer during the

maintenance period of canal/and or disruption phase of surface water supply for

compensating Ground Water pumping will be =6600 m3/year x2=13200 m3

/year)

• Although the Runoff Volume from entire plant area is 13418.48 m3,we should not

use this for recharging aquifer to reduce/restrict the probability or possibility of any

degree of pollution

• It pertinent to mention that this is a industrial area and only roof top rainwater need

to be used for recharging ground water aquifer . RoofTop rainwater collected in a pond

on subjected to infiltration should be used in recharging aquifer through large diameter

infiltration well .

• Ground Surface to be used shoulbe made impervious before dumping the waste

that is generated during the process of commercial production of steel bar so as to

reduce the possibility or probability of entry of pollutant into underground environment.

• Now the pollution free Rainfall Volume available from the roof top which can be

used for recharging aquifer is 8957.30 m3 and additional 4042.7 m3

pollution free run off

water need to be made available . Additional required area for generating this runoff will be

around 5 to 6 hectors. (i.e. 13200 m3‐8957.30 m3=4042.7 m3

)

• A lot of open Land around present plant site is available, By acquiring additional

land of 5 to10 hector, it may be possible to have access to this quantity of runoff water for

recharging more quantity of rainwater into underneath ground water aquifer through

suitable recharge structure constructing

• Assuming average 2 lps recharge rate per well ,and 30 effective days for recharge

,by constructing 3to 4 recharge well it may be possible to recharge the required quantity

of runoff was aquifer . however Recharge through pond is preferable.

Draft EIA Report for M/s. Jay Bharat Steel Corporation proposed to install integrated steel and power Plant at Survey No

405/3,406,407 Village Dhamadka, Bhuj Bhachau Road, Ta- Anjar, Dist; Kutch, Gujarat.



TABLE 9

INFORMATION OF WELLS IN AND AROUNDPLANT OF M/S JAYBHTEEL CORPORATION AT VILLAGE DHAMADAKA , TALUKA ANJAR DISTRICT KUTCHH

Serial No

Village Taluka Owner’s name Location Well/tube well

Approximate Depth to water level in m

Total Depth in m

Pump Details Dischrge in lpm

1 Aamardi Anjar Near Sai Temple Gramtal Tube well 35.00 160.00 Electric Motor20HP

450

2 Aamardi Anjar Amrit Keshba On way to Lunva Tube well 38.00 140.00 Electric Motor15HP

400

3 Morgar Anjar GWSSB Panchayat Tube well

Tube well 40.00 150.00 Electric Motor15HP

500

4 Morgar Anjar Mona steel Company

Onroad to Bachau Tube well 42.00 160.00 Electric Motor20HP

450

5 Anjar GWSSB Gramtal Tube well 45.00 180.00 Electric Motor15HP

500

6 Anjar Valaji Ramaj On road to Dudhai Tube well 48.00 165.00 Electric Motor15HP

450

7 Dudha(Juni) Anjar Grampanchayat Gramtal Tube well 45.00 140.00 Electric Motor15HP

500

8 Dudha(Juni) Anjar iIndrapuram Navi Dudhai Tube well 40.00 150.00 Electric Motor20HP

450

9 Sukhpar Bachau Panchayat Tube Well

Gramtal Tube well 45.00 150.00 Electric Motor20HP

250

10 Sukhpar Bachau Ramji Shana On way to Bachau Tube well 40.00 140.00 Electric Motor15 0HP

250

11 Bhujpar Bachau Grampanchayat Gramtal Tube well 35.50 120.00 Electric Motor12.5 0HP

550





12 Lunva i Bachau Grampanchayat Gramtal Tube well 40.50 150.00 Electric Motor12.5 0HP

550

13 Lunva i Bachau Grampanchayat Gramtal Tube well 42.00 140.00 Electric Motor15 0HP

500

TABLE 10 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF WATER SAMPLE COLLECTED FROM WELLS S IN AND AROUND PLANT OF M/S JAYBHTEEL CORPORATION AT SVILLAGE

DHAMADAK , TALUKA ANJAR DISTRICT KUTCHH 10‐7‐2013

Sr. No Unit Results S.1 S.2 S.3 S.4 S.5 S.6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Ele. Conductivity

Micromhos/cm 680 730 1350 1460 2540 2670 1650 1750 1820 1820 1560 1670 1620

Ph ‐‐ 8.07 7.78 8.06 8.05 8.066 8.0 7.86 7.67 8.01 8.10 8.20 7.61 8.02 T.D.S. PPM 470 490 840 910 1540 1540 1090 1160 1150 1140 970 1070 980

CATIONS 10

Ca ” 55 65 75 90 185 135 90 70 105 105 100 60 75 Mg ” 30 42 51 81 84 57 39 63 39 54 51 78 78 Na ” 35 12 125 75 265 346 199 199 221 192 144 164 135

K ” 1.4 1.5 2.9 3.10 5.4 5.9 3.6 3.7 4.10 4.10 3.5 3.6 3.5 ANIONS CO3 PPM NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL HCO3 ” 244 268 220 305 281 293 366 429 256 256 207 354 195

SO4 ” 11 11 60 45 96 127 77 67 100 89 100 92 111 Cl ” 88 88 307 304 664 648 312 320 416 424 352 312 344 F ” 1.36 1.60 1.90 2.10 1.90 1.95 1.65 1.75 1.80 1.80 1.60 1.65 1.60 NO3 ” 3.50 3.50 4.60 4.60 4.60 31.00 4.10 4.10 8.90 8.90 8.90 8.90 31.00

Total Hardness

PPM 260 335 400 560 685 575 385 435 425 485 460 475 510





Total Alkalinity

” 95 35 220 205 290 300 370 430 260 260 210 355 200

Colours CO‐PT Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Odour ‐‐ Odour Free Odour

Free Odour Free

Odour Free

Odour Free

Odour Free

Odour Free

Odour Free

Odour Free

Odour Free

Odour Free

Odour Free

Odour Free

Turbidity N.T.U. NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL





Plate No. 1 Map showing Locat ion of Kutchh & Gujarat

Plate No. 2Map showing Locat ion of Anjar, Bachau and Gandhidham Taluka





Plate I I I : Google Map Showing drainage around Village Varsana

Plate I V : Map Showing Locat ion of Site Area





PLATE V : MAP SHOWI NG PLANT AREA





PLATE VI : MAP SHOWI NG SARDAR SAROVAR PROJECT CANAL COMMAND





PLATE VI I : GEOLOGICAL MAP OF GUJARAT

PLATE VI I I : HYDROGRAPH OF PI EZOMETER AT BHI MASAR





PLATE I X : VARI OUS RECHARGE STRUCTURES





PLATE X : RECHARGE PERCOLATI ON WELL

Note: Not to the scale


ANNEXURE X : LAND DOCUMENT

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AXIV‐1 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA


ANNEXURE X : LAND DOCUMENT

ANACON LABORATORIES PVT. LTD. AXIV‐2 NAGPUR, MAHARASHTRA